Nokia 3620 User Manual
U s er G u ide 9310245 Nokia Inc. 7725 W oodland Cent er Boulevard, Suit e 150, T ampa FL 33614 . Phone: 1.888.NOKIA.2U (1.888.665.4228) F ax: 1.813.249.9619 . T ext T elephone/T elec ommunication Devic e for the Deaf (TTY/TDD) Users: 1.800.24.NOKIA (1.800.246.6542) Printed in CANADA N0663 Thank you for purchasing your new Nokia phone. WeâÂÂre here for you! www.nokiahowto.com Learn how to use your new Nokia phone. www.nokia.com/us Get answers to your questions. Register your phoneâÂÂs limited warr anty so we can better serve your needs!
Nokia 3620 and Nokia 3660 User Guid e
The wireless phones described in this guide are approved for use in the GSM network. LEGA L INFOR MA TION P art No. 93 10 245 , Issue No. 1 1 1 Copyright é 2003 N okia. All ri ghts reserved. No kia , N ok ia Conn ectin g P eop le , N oki a 3620, No ki a 3660 , an d t he Nok ia O r ig inal Enhan c emen t s logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Nokia Corporation. All other product and compa ny names men tion ed he rein may be tra dem arks o r trad en ames of th eir respe ct ive ow ners . Printed in Canada Oc tober 2003 US P at ent No 58 18437 and other pending patent s. T9 text input software Copyright é 1999-2003. T egic Commu nications, Inc. All ri ghts reserved. Includes RSA BSAFE cryptographic or security protocol software from RSA Security . Java is a t rademark of Sun Microsy stems, In c. Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, I nc. The inform ation in this user guide was written for th e Nokia 3620 and Nokia 3660 phones. Nokia operate s a policy of ongoing development . Nokia reserves the right to make changes and improvements to any of the products described in this document without prior notice. UNDER NO CIR CUMST ANCES SHAL L NOKIA BE RESPONSIB LE FOR ANY LOSS OF D A T A OR INCOME OR ANY SPECIA L, INCIDEN T AL, AND CO NSEQUENTIAL OR INDIREC T DAMAG ES HOW SOEVE R CA USE D . THE CONTENT S OF THIS DO CUMENT A RE PROVIDED âÂÂAS IS.â EXCEPT AS REQ UIRED BY APPLICABL E LAW , N O WARRANTIES OF ANY KI ND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCL UDING, BUT NO T LIMITED T O , THE IMPLIED W ARRA NTIES OF MERC HANT ABI LITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PU RPOSE, ARE M ADE IN R ELATION T O THE A CCURAC Y AND RELIABIL ITY OR CONTENTS O F THIS DOCU MENT . N OKIA RESERV ES THE RIGHT TO REVISE THIS DO CUM ENT OR WITHDRAW IT AT ANY TIM E WITH OUT PRIOR NOT ICE. EXPORT CONTROLS This product contains commodities, technology or software exported from the United States in accordance with the Export Administration regulat ions. Diversion contrary to U.S. law is prohibited. FCC/INDUSTRY CANADA NOTICE Y our phone may caus e TV or radio interference (for example, when using a t elephone in close proximity to receiving equipment). The FCC or In dustry Canada can r equire you to stop using your telephone if such interf erence cannot be eliminated. If you requir e assistance, contact your loca l serv ice f ac ilit y . T his de vice c om plies wit h p ar t 1 5 of th e FCC ru les. Th is device co ntai ns a radi o transceiver a nd digital c ircuitry th at supports its features. Oper ation of the di gital device circuitry is subject to the followin g two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmfu l interference, and (2) this dev ice must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired oper ation. Modifications to this device not authorized by Nokia may void the authority granted for operation of this device and should not be made.
[ iii ] Contents 1 For your safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 2 General inform ation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Register your phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Follow graphic clues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Network services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Contact Nokia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Learn about accessibility solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Nokia 3 620 and Nokia 3 660 phon es at a glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Understand your phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 5 Options lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Navigation bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Actions common to all applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Volume control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Loudspeaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Headset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Shared memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 3 Your phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Make a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Answer a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Log â call log and general log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 SIM folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
[ iv ] 4 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Change general settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Phone settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Call settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Connection settin gs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Access points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Date and time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Call restriction (system service) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 8 Enhancement settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 5 Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Create contact cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Copy between SIM card and phone memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Edit contact cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 View a contact card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Manage contact groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Import data from othe r Nokia phones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 6 Camera an d images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Take pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Store pictures in images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 7 Video recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Record a video clip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 7 Watch a video clip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
[ v ] 8 RealOne Player⢠. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Play media files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Send media files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Change the set tings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 9 Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Messaging â General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Write text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Copy text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Create and send new messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Text messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Multimedia messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 E-mail messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Inbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 My folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Remote mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Outbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 View messages on a SIM card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Cell broadcast (system service) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Service command editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Messaging settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 10 Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Change the profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 06 Customize profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 06 11 Favorites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Add shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Shortcut options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
[ vi ] 12 Calendar and To-do . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Create calendar entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Set calendar alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 13 Send calendar entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 14 To-do . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Import data from othe r Nokia phones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 15 13 Extras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 16 Composer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 20 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Memory card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 21 14 Serv ices (XHTML) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Basic steps for accessing the web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Phone browser service settin gs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Browsing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 View saved pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Download through the browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 End a connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Browser settin gs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 15 J ava ⢠Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Install a Java application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 34 Java application settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 35
[ vii ] 16 Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Install applications and software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 36 Install software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Remove software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 View memory consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 17 Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Bluetooth c onnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Infrared connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Connect your phone t o a computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Use your phone as a modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 18 PC Suite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 PC Suite documentation and help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Software and hardware requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Install PC Suite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 50 Connect your ph one to the PC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Start PC Suite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 52 Online and offline modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 53 Connection status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 PC Suite applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Remove PC Suite from your PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 19 Reference information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Battery st atements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Use proper care and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 59 Understand important safety infor mation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Certification informa tion (SAR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 64 Enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 66
[ viii ] Nokia 3620 technical information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 71 Nokia 3660 technical information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 72 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Appendix A Message from the CTIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Appendix B Message from the FDA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 5 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 1
[ 1 ] For your safety 1 For your safety Read these simple gu idelines. B reaking the r ules may be dangerous or illegal. Further detailed in formation is given in this user guide. Do not switch the phone on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it ma y cause in terferen ce or danger . ROA D SAF ET Y COMES FIRST Don't use a h and-held p hone while driving. INT ERF EREN CE All wireless phones may get in terference, w hich could af fect perf or manc e. SWITCH OFF IN HOSPITA LS Follow any regulatio ns or rules. Switch the phone off near medical equipment. SWITCH OFF I N AIRC RAFT Wireless devices can cause interference in aircraft. SWIT CH OFF WHEN REFUELING Don't use the ph one at a refuelling point. Don't use n ear fuel or chemicals. SWITCH OFF NE AR BL ASTI NG Don't use th e phone where blasti ng is in progress. Ob serve restrictions, and follow any regulations or rules. USE S E NSI B L Y Use only in th e normal position. Don't touch the a ntenna unne ce ssari ly . QUAL IFIED SE RVI CE Only qu alif ie d per s onnel may inst all or re p air p hon e eq uip men t.
[ 2 ] ENHANC EMEN TS AND BA T TERIES Use on ly approved enhancem ents and batteries. Do not connect incompatible products. W A TER-R ESISTA NCE Y our ph one is not water -resistant. K eep it dr y . BACKU P COPIE S Remember to make backup copies of all important data. CONNE CTING T O OTHER DEVIC ES When connecting to any other device, read its user guide for detailed safety instructions. Do not connect incompatible products. CA LLIN G Ensure th e phon e is switche d on and in ser vice. Enter the phon e num ber , incl ud ing the ar ea c ode , t hen pre ss . T o en d a call, press . T o answer a call, press . EMER GENC Y C AL LS Ensure th e phone is sw itche d on and in se rvice. Pre ss as ma ny t imes a s nee ded (e.g . to ex it a ca ll, t o exi t a menu , etc . ) to clear the display . Enter the emergency number , then press . Give your location. Do n ot end th e call until told to do so.
[ 3 ] General information 2 Gen eral inform ation Congratulations on your purchase of a Nokia mobile phone. Y our phone provides many functions which are practical for daily u se, such as a digital camera, a video recorder , messa ging, e-ma il, a clock, an alarm clock, a calculator , and a calendar . A variety of Xpress-on ⢠color covers a re also available. Y our phone can con nect to a PC, la ptop, or other device u sing Blue toot h t echno lo gy or the bu ilt -in IR port . F or mor e in forma tion o n connectivity , refer to the PC Connectivity Guide. The PC C onnectivity guide, Nokia PC Suite, and all related software can be dow nl oa d e d f ro m the U.S. Mo bile Phone pr oduct s sect ion of www .noki a.com . ⢠REGISTER YOUR PHONE Make sure to r egister your phone at www .warr anty .nokiau sa.com or call 1-88 8- NOKIA -2U ( 1-888 -6 65-4 22 8) s o t hat we c an s erv e you r nee ds better if you should need to call the center or have your phone repaired. When you register your ph one, you can sign up f or the Nokia e-newsletter , Nokia Connections. Y ou will receive tips and tricks on using you r phone, enhancement information, and special offers. ⢠FOLLOW GRAPHIC CL UES This guide uses certain icon s to alert you to important information. Note: Explains a featu re or points out an important concept. Import ant: In dic a tes cr it ic al in form at i on on us in g a fe at ure . Wa r n i n g : Helps you avoid personal in jury , damage to the phone, or property da mage.
[ 4 ] ⢠NETWORK S ERVICES The wireless phones described in this guide are approved for u se on the following networks: ⢠Noki a 36 20 : GS M 8 50 and 190 0 ⢠Noki a 36 60 : GS M 9 00, 1800 , and 1900 A number of f eatures included in this guide are calle d Network Service s. Thes e are spe cial s ervices that you ar range thr ough your wirele ss service provider . Before you can ta ke advantage of an y of th ese Network Services, you must subscribe to the m through your service pr ovider and obtai n instructions for their use from your service pr ovider . Note: Some networks may n ot support all language- dependent characters and/or services. Wa r n i n g : All of th e features in th is device, other than th e alarm, require the ph one to be switched on to use th e features. Do not switch the phone on wh en wir eless phone use may cause interference or danger . Check the model n umber of any charger be fore use wi th this device. This device is intended for use when supplied with power from ACP-12U, ACP-8U, LCH-9, and LCH-12. Wa r n i n g : Use only batte ries, ch argers, and en hancemen ts appro ved by the phon e man ufact urer for u se w ith this particu lar phon e mode l. The use of any other types m ay invalidate any appr oval or warranty applying to the phone and may be dangerous. For availa bility of approved e nhancements, please check with you r dealer . When you d isconnect the power cord of any enhancement , gr asp and pull the plug, n ot the cord.
[ 5 ] General information ⢠CON TACT NO KIA T o help Nokia promptly answer your questions, please have the f ollowing information available bef ore contacting th e Nokia Customer Care Center: ⢠Y our ph one model number: Nokia 36 20 Nokia 36 60 ⢠Ty p e n u m b e r ⢠IMEI n umbe r ⢠Y our local z ip code ⢠The phone or en hancem ent in question Note: The model, type, and IMEI numbers are located on the back of your phone under th e battery and memory card. ⢠LEARN AB OUT ACCESSIB ILITY SOLUTIONS Nokia i s comm itted to making mobi le ph ones easy to u se for al l ind ividual s including those with disabilities. For more informa tion, visit www . no kia acces sibi lit y . com . For more inf ormation on accessibi lity enh ancemen ts, see â Mobile Induc tive Loopse t LPS-3 â on p . 168 a n d â Phone Adapter HDA-9 â on p. 16 8. Nokia Customer Care Center , USA Custome r C are, Canada Nokia Mobile Phones 7725 W oodland Center Blvd. Suite #150 T ampa, Florida 336 14 Tel : 1-88 8- NOKIA -2U (1- 888 -665 -4 228) Fax : 1- 813- 249 -9 619 For TT Y/T DD use rs: 1- 800 -2 4-NOK IA (1- 800 -246 -6 542) Nokia Products Ltd. 60 1 W est ney Roa d Sou th Ajax, Ontario L1S 4 N7 Tel : 1-88 8- 22 -NO KI A (1-88 8- 2 26-6 54 2) W ebsite: w ww .n o ki a.c a
[ 6 ] ⢠NOKIA 3620 AND N OKIA 366 0 PHONES AT A GLANCE 1 Po w e r key ( ) (on top of the phone) 2 Earpiece 3 Display screen 4 Left s electio n key 5 Send key ( ) 6 Edit key ( ) Inse rt numb ers , symbols, or punctuation in to text message s. 7 Menu key ( ) Opens the m ain menu s cree n. Acce sses all applications. 8 * key ( ) 9 # ke y ( ) 10 Cl ea r key ( ) 11 End key ( ) 12 R ight se lectio n ke y 13 Scroll key Used to navigate u p, down, left, an d right on the display scre en and adjust volume du ring a call. Pr ess the ce nter to select or open i tems, snap pictures, etc. 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 6 9 10 13 12 11
[ 7 ] General information ⢠UNDER STAND YO UR PHONE Insert the SIM card and load the battery Import ant: Ke ep all min iature SIM cards out of the reach of small child ren. Note: Before rem oving the covers, always sw itch off the power an d disconnect the phone from the charger or any other de vice. Always store and use the ph one with the covers attached. 1 Open th e cover w ith the back of the ph one facing you . Press th e loc king catc h ( 1 ) in the direction of t he arrow and slide th e cover ( 2 ). 2 Remove th e battery and find th e SIM card sl ot ( 3 ). 3 Place the SIM card carefully into the slot. Mak e sure that the be vele d corner on the SIM card faces the bottom of the phone and that the golden contac t area on the card faces downward. 4 Slide the silver ca tch over th e SIM c ard to secure it. ( 4 ). Camera lens 1 2 3 4
[ 8 ] 5 Replace the battery (5 ). Ali gn t he g ol den c onta ct s of the bat tery with th e corresponding connectors on the ph one, and pu sh the opposite end of the bat tery until it snaps into place. Replace the cov er . Charge the battery 1 Connect the l ead to th e charger . Y ou will hear it click into place. 2 Connect the ch arger to an ac wall outlet. 3 Connect the lead from the ch arger to the base of t he phone. The battery indicator bar st arts scrolling. Note, that you can us e the ph one while ch arging. 4 When the battery is fully charged, the bar stops scrolling. Disconnect the char ger from the ph one an d then f rom the ac ou tlet. See also â Battery statements â on p. 158. Note: Remove the battery only w hen the ph one is switche d off. Switch the phone on o r off Press and hold the powe r key located on top of the phone. Wa r n i n g : Do not switch on the phone when wireless phone u se is prohibited or when it may cause in terfer ence or da nger . 5
[ 9 ] General information Antenna Y our phone has a built-in a ntenna (gray area in picture). As with any other radio transmitting device, do n ot touch the antenna unnecessa rily when the phone is s wi tched on. Contact with the a ntenna affects ca ll quality and may cause th e phone to operate at a h igher power le vel than oth erwise needed. Not touchi ng the antenna area du ring a ph one call optimizes the antenna performance and the talk time of your phone. PIN code The PI N code i s usu all y suppli ed with t he SI M card. If you are requ ested t o enter a PIN code, Ke y in the code (di splayed as ****) and press OK . Security c ode If you are requested to enter a security code, key in the security code (displayed a s *****) a nd press OK . The factory setting for the security code is 1234 5 . For more information on th e a ccess codes, se e â Securityâ on p. 44. Time and date Use the num ber keys 1 âÂÂ9 to key in the curren t time and then th e date. Press OK to accept the settin gs. The Scroll key Press the Sc r ol l key on the top , bottom , left and right (shown with blue arrows 1 to 4) to move in the Menu. Scroll to an application or a folder and press the Scr oll key in the m iddle (shown with blue ar row 5) to open it. 1 2 3 4 5
[ 1 0 ] For example : 1 T o open an Options list, pr ess Opti on s . T he small arrow a t the bottom of the displa y ( 1 ) indicat es if th e list contains more item s. The lighte r the arrow , th e fewer the items left in the list. 2 To scroll down th e Options list, pre ss . A small ar row to the right ( 2 ) indicates a sublist. T o open a sublist, press . T o start a n action, s croll to a com mand and press . 3 Press to go to a tab (3 ), a new page, or view in a n applicat ion. Make a call 1 In the standby m ode, key in the ph one number , including th e area code. If you make a mistake , press to clear number s. 2 Press and wait for the answer . 3 Press to f inish the c all (or to ca ncel the call attempt). Copy from SIM card to phone m emory If you have stored names and phone numbers on a SIM card, you can copy them to the ph one memory . 1 Press to open the m ain Menu. 2 Use the Sc ro ll key to m ove to Contacts . 3 Press to open Co n tac ts . 4 Whe n y ou o pe n Contac ts for th e first tim e, the ph one asks you if you want to copy all your contact data from the SIM card to the phone me mor y . Pr es s OK . See also â Copy betwee n SIM card an d phone memory â on p. 50. 2 1 3
[ 1 1 ] General information Ke y g u a r d Use the keygua rd ( keypad lock) to pr event th e keys fr om b eing accidentally pressed. To lo c k : Press and the * key . W hen the keys are locked, appears on the display . To u nl o c k : Press an d the * key . When the keyguard is on, pr ess to answer a call. Dur ing a call, the phone can be operated normally . Note: When Keyguard is on, calls to the e mergency nu mber programmed into your phone (for example, 9 1 1) may be possible. K ey in the em ergency n umber and press . The number is displayed af ter y ou have keyed in the la st digit. Shortcuts in the s ta ndby mode ⢠Press to open the main Menu . ⢠Press to open a list of the last dia led numbers. Y ou can then press to view r eceived and m issed calls lists. ⢠Press to open Co n tac ts . ⢠T o change the profile, press briefly and select the pr ofile. ⢠Press the 1 key and to call you r voice m ailbox. See â Call your voice mailbox â on p. 22. Shortcuts in editors ⢠Press to open a list of commands related to writing and editin g text. Pre ss to switch between predictive, traditional text input and number mode ( Predic tiv e t ext â Predictive text on , Alpha mode , or Number mode ). ⢠As you w rite, pr ess the 1 key repeatedly to access different kinds of special char acters, or pr ess the * key to open a l i st of spec ia l cha ra c te rs . ⢠Press the 0 key to enter a space. ⢠Use to mark items. Press an d hold and a t the same time, move the Scroll key to mark text to be copied or e rased.
[ 12 ] Other shortcuts In the main Menu, press and hold to view all the applica tions that are currently open. From this view , you c an switch between application s by scrolling to one and pr essing . Standby mode The indicators describe d are shown when the ph one is r ead y for use, w ith no char acters keyed in . In this sta te, the phone is in the st andb y mode. A Shows the signal strength of the cellular network at your current loca tion. The higher the bar , the str on g er the sign al. The an tenn a symbol is replaced with the G PR S symbol when the GPRS connection ha s be en set to W hen a vailable an d a co nn e ct i o n is available in the sys tem or in the cu rr ent cel l . Se e â GPRS P ac ket da ta â on p. 3 8, and â GPRS â on p. 43. B Shows an analog or a di gital clock. Also see settings for â Date and time â on p. 4 3 and settings for Backgr ound image in â Stan dby mode â on p. 34. C Indi cates which cellular system the phone i s currently u sing. D Sh ows the batter y charge level. The higher th e bar , the more charge there is left in the battery . E Navigation bar: shows the currently active profile. If t he selected profile is Normal , the current date is displayed instead of the profile nam e. For fu rther infor ma tion, see â Navigation bar â on p. 17 and â Profile sâ on p. 1 0 6. A BC D E F
[ 13 ] General information F Shows the current shortcuts assign ed for the selection keys an d . Note: Y our phone has a screen s aver . If there are no actions for five minutes, the dis pla y is cleared and a scre en saver b ecome s visi ble. T o de a c t i v at e the screen saver , press any key . See â Displayâ on p. 34 . Y ou can change the selection key shortcuts and the background image. See the settings for â Standby mode â on p. 34 . Icons Several icons ma y appear on the main screen while the phon e is in the standby mode. T he icons that are displayed depe nd on wheth er they are related to activity , data connections, or enha ncements. ACTI VIT Y IND ICATO RS One or more of the f ollowing icons may be shown to indicate that an activity h as occu rred: Indicates that you have r eceived new messages to th e Inbox in Messaging. If th e indicator is blinking, the ph one memory is low and you must delete some data. For f urther information, see â Memory lowâ on p. 173. Indicates that you ha ve received n ew e-m ail. Indicates that you have received on e or mor e voice me ssages. See â Call your voice mailbox â on p. 22. Indicates that there are messages waitin g to be sent in Outbox. See â Outbox â on p. 97 . Indicat es that Rin ging options has been set to Silent and Message a lert tone to None in the currently active profile. See â Prof iles â on p. 1 06. Indicates that the ph one â s keypad is locked. Indicat es that you have an active alarm. See â Clockâ on p. 120. Indicates that a Bluetooth connection is activ e. Note that, when data is transmitted using a Bluetooth connection, is shown.
[ 14 ] DAT A CON NE CTIO N IND ICAT O RS When an applicatio n is establi shing a data connection, one of the indicators below blink s in the stan dby mo de. When an indicator is shown con tinuously , the connection is ac tive. Note: Check with your service pr ovider for availa bility of high-speed data call s. ENHANCEMENT IND ICATORS The foll ow ing ic ons indic ate that an enha nceme nt is con nect ed to your phone : Indicates that all calls to the phone are f orwarded. In dicates that all calls to the phone are forwarded to a voice mailbox. See â Settings for ca ll forwarding â on p. 25. I f you h ave two phone lines, the forward in dicator for the first lin e is and for the second line . See â Li ne i n use (s ystem se rvice ) â on p. 35 . Indicates that you can ma ke calls using phone line 2 only (system s ervice). Se e â Line in us e (sys tem servi ce ) â on p. 35. for a da ta call for a high-speed dat a call shown inst ead of the antenna symbol when there is a n active GPRS connection for when the GPR S connection is put on hold during voice calls fo r a fax c all for a Blu etooth connection for an infrared connection a headset is connected a Loopset is connected
[ 15 ] General information ⢠MENU Press (Men u key) to open the main Menu. In the Menu, you can access all the applications in your phone. Optio ns in the M enu are: Ope n , List vie w / Grid view , Mo ve , Mo ve to folder , New folder , Help , and Exit . ⢠Move i n t he Me nuâ Pres s the Scroll key on the top , bottom , left and right (shown with blue arr ows 1 to 4) to move in th e Menu. ⢠Open applications or folders â Scroll to an application or a f older and press the Scr oll ke y in the middle to open it. ⢠Close applic atio ns â Backs tep by pressing Back or Exit a s ma n y t ime s as is needed to return to the standby mode o r select Opti on s â Ex i t . If you press and h old , the phone returns to the standby mode a nd the application is le ft open in the background. Pressing always ends a call, e ven if another application is active and displayed. When you switch the phone off, applications are closed and any un saved data is saved a utomatically . Select Op ti ons â L ist view if y ou want to view the app licati ons in a li st. Use the Sc rol l key to move
[ 16 ] Rearrange the Menu Y ou c a n rea rr ang e th e Menu in any order yo u like. Y ou can m ove applications that you u se more often from a f older to the Menu, and place app lication s you u se l ess often in fold ers . Y ou can a lso cr eate new folders. 1 Scroll to the item you want to move and se lec t Opti ons â Mo ve . A check mark is placed beside th e application. 2 Move the selection wh ere you want the application to be and press OK . Switch between appl ications If you have several applications open and want to switch from on e application to another press and hold (Menu key). The application switching window opens showing a list of open applications. Scroll to an application and press . Note: If memory is getting low , the phone may close some applications. The phone saves any unsaved data before an application is closed. ⢠OPTIONS LISTS In this us er g uide, y ou can se e the Opti ons li st comman ds that tell you w hat commands are av ailable in dif ferent views and situation s. The available commands change depending on the view you are in. In some situations, when you pres s the Scroll key , a shorter option s list appears showing only the main com mands ava ilable in the view . Online help Y our phone has a help function that you can ac cess from any application or view . Pre ss Option s â Hel p to access the on line help.
[ 17 ] General information ⢠NA VIG ATI ON B AR In the n avigation bar , you can see: ⢠Small arrows or ta bs which tell you if there are more views, folders, or files you can move to. ⢠Editing indicators, see â Writ e text â on p. 76. ⢠Other information , for example, 2/14 in the f ollowing figure means that the current picture is the secon d of 14 pictu res in the f older . Press to see the next picture . ⢠ACTIONS COMMON TO ALL APPLICATIONS Open items for viewing If you want to open a n item when you are viewing a list of files or folders, scroll to th e item an d press the Scroll ke y , or select Opti on s â Ope n . Edit items T o ope n an it em for edi ting, yo u sometime s need to first op en it f or viewing and then se lect Opti ons â Edit , if you want to change its conte nts. Re na me i tem s T o give a ne w name to a f ile or folder , scr oll to it and select Opti on s â Re name . Remove, delete items Scroll to the item and select Options â Delete or press . T o delete many items at a t ime, you fi rs t need to ma r k the m. Mark an item There are sever al ways to select item s when you are in a list. ⢠T o select one item at a time, scroll to it and select Opti ons â Mar k/ Unma rk â Mark or pr ess and t he Scro ll key at the same time. A check m ark is placed next to th e item. ⢠T o sele c t al l ite ms in t he li st , sel e ct Option â Mark/Unmark â Mark all . For information on h ow to insert tex t and numbers, see â Write text â on p. 76.
[ 18 ] Mark multiple items Press and hold and at the same time move the Scroll key dow n or up. As the selection m oves, a check m ark is placed next to the items. To end the selection, stop the scr olling with the Scr oll ke y an d then release . ⢠After you have se lected all the items you want, you can move or delete them b y selecting Op t ions â Mov e to folder or Delete . ⢠T o unmark an item, scroll to it and select Op tion s â Mark/Unmark â Unma rk or press and the Scroll key at the s ame time. Create folders T o create a new folder , select Optio ns â New folder . Y ou ar e asked to give a name to th e folder (m ax. 35 letters). Move items to a folder T o move ite ms to a folder or betwee n folders, sele ct Op t ions â Mo ve to folder (not shown if there are no folders available). When you select Mo ve to folder , a list of available folder s opens and you can also see the root level of the application (for m oving an ite m out of a folder ). Se lect the location you wan t the item to be m oved to and pr ess OK . Search for items Y ou can search for a n ame, file, folder , or shortcut by using th e search field. In some situations the search field is not visible automatically , an d you can ac tivate it by selecting Opt ions â Find or just by starting to key in l etters. 1 To s earch f or an item, s tart to key in text in the se arch fie ld. T he phon e imme diately starts to search for m atches a nd moves the selection to the best m atch. T o make the search more accurate, key in more letters and the selection moves to the item that best matches th e letters. 2 When the correct item is found, press to open it.
[ 19 ] General information ⢠V OLUME CON TROL When you ha ve an active call or are listenin g to a sound, press to increase or to decrease th e volume level. ⢠LOUDSPEAKER Y our phon e has a loudspeaker for handsfre e use. The loudspeaker allows you to speak an d lis ten t o th e p hone f rom a sh ort di st anc e w itho ut h avin g t o hold the ph one to your ear . The lou dspeaker can be used du ring a call, w ith sound appl ic ations , and w hen vie wing m ult ime dia m essage s. Re alOne Pl ayer ⢠uses the loudspeaker by default w hen you watch a video. Using the loudspeaker makes it easier to use other applications during a call. V oice volume icons: â for earpiece mode. â for loudspeaker mode. ACTI VATE THE LOUDSPEAKER T o use the lou dspeaker dur ing an already active call, select Op ti ons â A ctivate loudsp. or press Loud sp. . A tone is played, is shown in the n avigation bar , and the volume indicator changes. V olume indicators for earpiece and loudspeaker modes are shown in the navigation bar . Note: The loudspeaker cannot be activated when you have a headset connected to th e phone. Import ant: Do not hold th e phone near your ear when th e lo ud sp e ak e r is in use because th e volume may be extre mely lo ud. The loudspeaker n eeds to be activated s eparately each tim e for phone calls, but the sound applications su ch as Composer and Recor der use the loudspeaker by defaul t. T UR N OFF THE LOUDS PEAKE R When you have an active call or a sound is playing, select Opti on s â A ctivate handset or press Handset .
[ 20 ] ⢠HEADSET T o adjust the volume level wh en a headset is connected to your phone, press or or use the he adset â s keys. ⢠SHARED MEMORY The following features in your phone u se shared memory: contacts, text , text messa ges, multimedia m essages, images and ringing ton es, video record er and player , calendar an d to-do notes, a nd downloaded a pplications. Using any of these features leaves less memory for other featu res. This is especially true with heavy use of any of the features. For example, saving many images may take all of the shared memory and your phone m ay display th at the me mory is f ull. In this case, dele te some of the in formatio n or entries reserving the shared m emory .
[ 2 1 ] Y ou r phone 3 Y o ur phone ⢠MAKE A CALL 1 In th e standby mode, key in the phone number , inclu ding the ar ea code. Press or to move the curs or . Press to remove a number . For inte rnation al calls, p ress the * key twice for th e intern ational prefix (the char acter replaces the international ac cess code) and then key in the cou ntry code, the a rea code w ithout 0 , and th e phone number . T o adjust the volume du ring a call, press to incre ase and to decrease the volume level. Note: Calls described h ere as international may , in some cases, be made betwe en regions of th e same nation. 2 Press to call th e number . 3 Press to end the call (or to cancel the call attempt). Norm al p ositi on: Hold the phone as you would hold any oth er telephone. Note: Pressin g will a lways end a call, even if anot her applic ation is active and displayed on the display . Make a call using th e Contacts directory 1 To open the Contacts directory , go to Menu â Con tact s . 2 To find a contact, scroll to the desired name, or key in the first letters of th e name. The Search field open s automatically and matching cont acts are listed. 3 Press to start t he call. If the contact ha s more than one phone number , scr oll to the number and press to start the call.
[ 22 ] Call your voice mailbox The voice mailbox (system service) is an answering machine where callers who are unabl e to rea ch y ou can leav e you voic e messa ges . ⢠T o call your voice m ailbox, press the 1 key and in the standby mode. ⢠If the pho ne asks for the voice mailbox number , key it in and pr ess OK . Y ou can obta in this n umber from your service provider . See also â Settin gs for call forwardingâ on p. 25. Each phone line may have its own voice mailbox number , see â Li ne in use (syste m serv ice) â on p. 35 . If your voice mail requires you to en ter a password every time you call to listen to your voice messages, you may wan t to add a touch tone number after the voice m ailbox number . This way the pas sword is gi ve n automa tica lly every time you call you r voice mail. For example, 1234567p1234# where 1234 is the pa ssword and â pâ inse rts a pause . Change the voice mailbox n umber T o change th e ph one numbe r of you r voice mail box , go to Menu â Tools â V oice mail an d select Optio ns â Change number . Ke y in th e number (obtained from your service pr ovider) and press OK . 1-touch dialing T o view th e 1-touch dialing gr id, go to Menu â T ools â 1-touch dial . ⢠Assign a phone number to one of the 1 -touch dialing k eys (t he 2 âÂÂ9 keys), see â Assi gn 1- touc h dial i ng key s â on p. 55. ⢠T o call the number : In the standby mode, press the cor responding 1-t ouch diali ng ke y and . If t he 1-to uc h d ial i ng fun ction is set to On , press and h old th e co rrespon ding 1-tou ch d ialing key until t he call is started. Make a conference call Confe rence calling is a sy stem ser vice that al lows you to m ake a confere nce call with a m aximum of six participants, including yourself.
[ 23 ] Y ou r phone 1 Make a ca ll to the first participant. 2 T o make a call to a new parti cipant, select Op ti ons â New cal l . 3 K ey in or search the memory for the phone number of the participant and press OK . The first call is automa tically put on hold. 4 When the new call h as been answered, join the first participant in the conference call. Select Opti on s â C onf er en ce . 5 To add a new person to the call, r epeat step 2 and then sele ct Opti on s â Confer ence â A dd to c onfe r en ce . ⢠T o have a private conversation with one of the participants: Select Op ti ons â C onfer enceâ Private . Scroll to the desired participant and press Priva te . The confere nce call is put on hol d in your phone , and the other participan ts can stil l conti nue talki ng with each other w hile you have a pr ivate discussion with one participant only . Once you have finished the private conver sation, sel e ct Op t ions â Add to conference to return to th e conference call. ⢠T o dro p one parti cipant from t he confer ence call, sele ct Options â Confer ence â Drop participant ; then scroll to the participant and press Dr op . 6 To end the active conference call , press . A conference call with two participants is shown. The quickest way to make a new call is to dial the number and p ress to start the call. The existing call is automatically put on hold. ⢠AN S WE R A C ALL ⢠T o answer an incoming call, press . ⢠T o end the call, press . If you do not want to answer a call, press . T he caller will be direc ted to voice mail.
[ 24 ] Note: If you have activated the Call forw ard â If busy function to forward calls, for exam ple, to your voice mailbox, rejecting an incoming call will a lso forward th e call. See â Settings for call forwardin g â on p. 25. When a call comes in, press Si le n ce to quickly mute the ringin g to n e . If you then want t he call t o be directed to vo ice mai l, p ress agai n f o r De clin e . T o adjust the ringing tones for diffe rent environments and even ts, for exampl e, whe n you want your phone to be silent, se e â Pr ofilesâ on p. 1 06. Note: It is possible that the phone assig ns a wrong name for the phone nu mb er . Thi s h appe ns i f t he p ho ne nu mber of t he ca lle r is no t st o red in Contacts but the seven last digits of th e number match another number that is stored in Contacts. In this case, call identification is not correct. Call wa iting (system service) If you h ave activated the Call w aiting service, the system will no tify you of a new incoming ca ll while you h ave a c all i n progress. See â Cal l waitin g (system servi ce) â on p. 35 . 1 During a call, press to answer the waiting call. T he first call is pu t on hold. T o switch betw een the two calls, press Swap . 2 To end the active call, pr ess . T o end both calls at the same time, select Op tion s â End all calls and press OK . Options during a call Many options that you can use during a call are system services. Press Op tion s durin g a call for some of the following option s: Mut e or Unmu t e , End ac tive call , E nd all calls , Hold or U nhold , Handset , BT h a n d s f re e , N ew call , Conference , Private , Drop participant , Answ er , an d Decl ine .
[ 25 ] Y ou r phone Swap is used to switch between the active call and the call on ho ld. Tra n s f e r is u sed to co nnec t an incom ing call or a call on hold w ith an acti ve call and to disconnect yourself from both ca lls. Se nd to uc h to ne s is use d to send to uch tone string s, fo r exam ple, passw ords or bank account numbers. 1 K ey in th e digits with the 0 âÂÂ9 keys. Each keystroke generates a tou ch tone, which is transmitted while the call is active. Press the * key repeatedly to p r o du ce : * , p (i ns er ts a pa us e of about two seco nds before , or between touch tone charact ers.), and w (i f yo u us e t hi s c har ac t er , t he re main i ng sequence is not sent until you press Send again during the call). Press the # key to produce # . 2 T o send th e tone, pre ss OK . Y ou can also store a sequence of tou ch tones for a contact car d. When you make a call to the con tact, you can retrieve the sequ ence. Add touch tones to the phone number or Tou ch to ne fields in a c ontac t card. Note: Touch to nes a re the t ones you hear when you p ress the nu mber keys on the phone keypad . Touch tones allow you to communic ate with voice mailboxes and com puterized telephony systems. Settings for call forwarding When call f orwarding is a ctivated, you c an direct your in coming calls to another number , for example, to your voice mailbox nu mber . For detai ls, contact your service provider . Go to Menu â T ools â Forward . ⢠Select one of th e forward options, for exam ple, select If busy to forward voice calls w hen your number is busy or when you decline incoming ca lls. ⢠Select Op ti ons â A ctivate to set the forward setting on , Cancel to set the forward setting of f, or Check status to check whethe r the for ward is act ivated or n ot. ⢠T o cancel all active forwards, sele ct Op tion s â Ca ncel all forwards .
[ 26 ] For in f orm a tio n a b ou t t he f orw ar d i ndi c at or s , see â Activity i nd icator s â on p. 13. Note: Rejection of in coming calls and ca ll forwarding ca nnot be activ e at the same time. See â Call restriction (s ystem serv ice) â on p. 48. ⢠LOG â CALL LOG AND GENERAL LOG Go to Menu â Log . In the log you can monitor phone calls, te xt messages, packet data connections, and fax and data calls registered by the phone. Y ou can filter the log to view j ust one type of even t and create new contact cards based on the log information. Note: The Log does no t track sent messages. T o view a list of sent messa ges, go to Mess aging â Sent . Note: Connectio ns to your r emote mail box, m ultimed ia messagin g cen ter , or br ow s er pa ges are sh ow n as d a ta c all s or pa cke t da ta co nn e cti o ns in the ge neral communications log. Recent calls log Go to Menu â Log â Recent calls . The phone r egisters the phone numbers of missed, received, an d dialed calls. The phone registers missed and received calls on ly if the system supports these functions, and the phone is switched on and within the sys te m â s se rvi ce a re a. Op tion s in t he Mi sse d, R eceiv ed, D ia led vi ews ar e: Call , Use n um ber , Delete , Clear list , A dd to Contacts , Hel p , and Exit . Icon s for mi ssed c al ls for re cei ved calls for dialed nu mbers
[ 27 ] Y ou r phone MISSED CAL LS AND REC EIVED CAL LS T o view the phone numbers of the last 20 missed calls, go to Log â Recent calls â Mi ssed calls . When you see a note in th e standby mode about missed calls, press Show to access the list of missed calls . T o call back, scroll to the number or name you wa nt and pre ss . T o view a list of th e 20 numbers or names from w hich you have m ost recently accepted calls (system service), go to Log â Recent calls â Received calls . DIALED NUMBERS Press in the st andby m ode to open the Dialed numbers v iew . T o view the 2 0 phone n umbers that you have m ost recently called or attempted to call, go to Log â Recent call s â Dialed numbers . ERASI NG REC ENT CALL LI STS ⢠T o clear all recent call lists, select Op t ions â Clear recent calls in th e Recent calls main view . ⢠T o clear one of the call reg isters, open the log you w ant to era se and se lec t Opti ons â Clear list . ⢠T o clear an individual event, ope n a log , scroll to th e event, and press . Call timers Go to Menu â Log â Call tim ers . Allows you to view the du ration of your in coming and outgoing calls. If you want the call duration timer to be displayed during your active calls, se lec t Log â Call timers , and then select Op tion s â Settin gs â Show call duration â Ye s . Note: Some timers, in cluding the lif e timer , may be reset dur ing service or software upgrades. Eras ing call dur ati on t ime rs â Select Log â Call timers , and then select Opti on s â Clear time rs . For this you need th e lock code. See â Securityâ on p. 44. To clear an individual event, scroll to it and press .
[ 28 ] Call costs (system service) Go to Log â Call costs. Call costs allows you to ch eck the cost of the last c all or a ll calls. T he call costs are displayed separately for each SIM card. The actual invoice for calls and services from your service provider may vary , depe nding upon sys tem features, r ounding-off for billing, taxes, and so forth. CALL C OST S LIMIT Y our service provider can lim it the cost of your calls to a certain amount of charging units or units of currency . When the limited charging mode is ac tive, calls can be m ade only a s long as the preset credit limit (call cost limit) is n ot exceeded and you are in a system that s upports call c ost limit. The number of remaining units is shown during a call and in the standby mode. When th e charging units have expired, the note Call cost limit reached is displayed. Contact your service provider for information on the lim ited charging mode and charging unit prices. COST SHOWN AS CHAR GING UNITS OR CURR ENCY Y ou can set the phone to show th e remaining talk-time in charging units or units of currency . For this, you may need the PIN2 code. See â Securityâ on p. 44. 1 Select Opt ions â Settings â Sho w costs in . The options are Currency an d Uni ts . 2 If you ch oose Cu rren cy , a note requesting you to w rite the unit price is sh own. K e y in the c ost of you r home system charging or credit unit and press OK . 3 Write a name for the cu rren cy . Use a three- letter a bbreviation, for exampl e, US D. Note: When no more c harging units or currency units are left, calls may only be possible to the emerge ncy number prog rammed into your phone (such as 9 1 1 or other official emer gency numbers).
[ 29 ] Y ou r phone SET A CAL L COST LI MIT 1 Select Op ti ons â Se ttings â Call cost limit â On . 2 The phone requests you to e nter the limit in units. For this you may need the PI N2 code. Depen ding on the Sh ow costs in setting, enter either the a mount of charging units or currency . When the charging limit you have set yourself is reached, the cou nter stops at its maximum valu e and the note R eset all calls' cost counter is displayed. T o be able to make calls, go to Op tion s â Settin gs â Call cost limit â Off . For this you n eed the PIN2 code. See â Securityâ on p. 44 . Note: The actual in voice for calls an d services f rom your service pr ov id er may vary , depending up on system feature s, round ing-off fo r billin g, t a xe s an d s o f o r th . ERASE CA LL CO ST COUNT ERS Select Opt ion s â Clear counte rs . For this you ne ed the PIN 2 code. To clear an individual event, scroll to it and pr ess . GPRS data counter Go to Log â GPR S c ount er . Allows you to chec k the amount of data sent and r eceived during packet data (GPRS) connections. Check with your service provider for information on how you will be ch arged. View the gener al log Go to Menu â Log and pr ess . In the gen eral log, for each commun ication event, you can see the sender or r ecipient n ame, phone number , name of the service provide r , or a ccess point. Note: Sub- events, such as a text message sent in mor e than one part and packet data con nections, are logged as o ne communication event.
[ 30 ] FILTE R THE LO G 1 Select Op ti ons â Filte r . A list of filters opens. 2 Scroll to a filter and press Select . Y ou cannot get to the Filter option u nless there are already calls in the log. ERASE THE CO NTENTS OF THE LO G T o permanently erase all the log contents, recent calls log, an d messaging delivery reports permanently , select Optio ns â Clear log . Con firm by pressing OK . P ACKET DATA COU NTER AND CO NNECT ION TI MER T o view how muc h data, m easu red in kilob yt es, has been tr ansferr ed and how long a certain GPRS connection has la sted, scroll to an Incoming or Outgoing event with th e access point icon and select Op ti on s â Vie w details . LOG SET TINGS Select Op ti ons â Se ttings . The list of settings opens. ⢠Log durationâ The log events remai n in the ph one me mory for a set numb er of days a fter which they ar e automa tically eras ed to free me mor y . If you select No log , all the log contents, Recent calls log, and Messaging delivery reports a re permanently deleted. ⢠For Call duration , Show costs in, Call cost limit , see â Call timersâ on p. 2 7 a nd â Call costs (system serv ice) â on p. 28 . Icon s for inco min g for outgoing for missed communication event s
[ 3 1 ] Y ou r phone ⢠SIM FOLDER Go to Menu â SIM . Y our SIM car d may provide addi tional services that you can access in this folder . See also â Copy betwee n SIM card and ph one me mor y â on p. 50, â Confirm SIM service actions â on p. 46, â Fix ed dialing â on p. 45, and â View messages on a SIM card â on p. 98. In the SIM directory , you can see th e n ames and numbe rs s tored on the SIM card, you can add or edit them, and you can make calls. T o view the SIM directory , go to Menu â SIM â SIM direct . Op ti on s in t he SI M d ire ct ory are : Ope n , Ca ll, Ne w SIM Contact , Edit, Delete , Mar k/ U nma rk , Copy to Contacts , O wn numb ers , SIM details , He lp , an d Exit . Note: For availability , rates and information on using SIM services, contact your SI M card v endor , e. g. syste m ope rator , serv ice provi der , or other vendor .
[ 32 ] 4 Set tings ⢠CHANGE GENERAL S ETTINGS Go to Menu â T ools â Settings . 1 Scroll to a settin g group and press to open it. 2 Scroll to a settin g you want to change and press to ⢠switch betwee n options if there are only two ( On / Off ). ⢠open a list of option s or an editor . ⢠open a settings slider such as the Cont ra st se t ti ng. P re ss or to increase or de crease the value. Note: Y ou may be able to receive some settings from your service prov ider in a te xt me s s ag e . ⢠PHONE S ETTIN GS General Phone language â Y ou can change the l anguage for the display texts in your phone. This change will also affect th e format used f or date and time and the s eparator s used, for exa mple, in calculat ions. Ther e are th ree languages installed in your ph one. If you select Automatic , th e p hon e selects the language acc ording to the information on your SIM car d. After you have changed th e display text language, you must restart the phone. Note: Changing the sett ings for Phone langu age or Writing l anguage affects every application in your phone and the change rem ains eff ecti v e un til you c ha nge t hese se tti ngs aga in.
[ 33 ] Settings Writing language â Y ou can change the writing la nguage of your phone permanently . Changing the language affects: ⢠The characters available when you press any key ( 1â 9 ). ⢠The predictive text dict ionary used. ⢠The sp ecial charac ters tha t are ava ilable wh en you pr ess th e * and the 1 key s . Y ou can also make th is change in some of the e ditors. Press and select Writing language . Example: Y ou are u sing a phone wh ere the display texts are in English bu t you want to write all you r messages in French. After you change the language, the predictive text dictionary searches for words in French and the most common special characters or pu nctuation marks used in the French language are a vailable when you press the * and 1 keys. Predictive text â Sets th e predictive text input On or Of f for a ll editors in the phone. Y ou can also change this settin g when you are in an editor by pre ssing and sele cting Predic tiv e te xt â Predictive text on or Pred ict iv e tex t â Of f. Note: The pred ictive t ex t dictio nary i s not avail able for all l anguag es. W elcome note or logo â P ress to open the se tting. T he welcome note or logo is d isplayed briefly each tim e you switch on the phone. Select Defaul t i f you want to use the default image or anim ation. Select Text to write a wel come note (max. 50 letters). Sele ct Image to sele ct a photo or pictu re fro m Images . Orig. phone settin gs â Y ou c an r eset some of th e settings to th eir or iginal values. T o do this, you n eed the lock c ode. After resetting th e settings, the phone may take a longer time to power on. Note: All documents and files that you have cr eated are left as they are.
[ 34 ] Standby mode Ba ckgro und i mage â Y ou can sele ct any i mage t o be used as a ba ckgro und image in th e standby m ode. Select Ye s to select an im age from Image s . Left selection key an d Right selection key â Y o u ca n chang e th e short cuts that appear over the lef t and r ight selection keys in the standby mode. I n addition to the appl ications, you can have the shortcut point to a function, for example, N ew message . Note: Y ou cannot h ave a shortcu t to an application that you have installed. Display Contrast â T o change the con trast of the display to ligh ter or darker . Color palette â T o change the color palette used on the display . Screen saver timeout â Th e screen saver is activated when the scree n s ave r time-out period is over . When the screen saver is active, the display i s cleare d and you ca n se e the sc reen saver bar . T o deactivate the scree n save r press any k ey . Screen saver â Select what is sh own on the screen s aver bar: time and date or a text you have written yourself. The location and background color of the screen saver bar changes in one minute i nt e r v al s. Also, the screen sa ver changes to indicate th e n u mb e r of new messages or missed calls. ⢠C ALL S ETT I N GS Note: To chan ge the settings for call forwarding, see âÂÂSettings for call forwarding â on p. 25 . Send my caller ID This system ser vice allows you to s et your phone number to be displayed ( Ye s ) or hidden ( No ) from the person to whom you a re calling. Or , the value ma y be set by yo ur se rv ice pro v id e r wh e n yo u m ak e a su bs cr ip t i on ( def ault ).
[ 35 ] Settings Call wa iting (system service) The system will notify you of a new incoming call while you h ave a call in progress. Select Activa te to request the system to activate call waiting, Can c el to request the system to deactivate call waiting, or Check st atus to check if the f unction is active or not. Automatic redial When this setting is activated, you r phone w ill make a maxim um of ten attempts to conn ect the call after an unsuccessf ul call attempt. Press to stop automatic redialing. Summary after call Activate this setting if you want the phone to briefly display the duration and cost of the last cal l. To show costs, the Call cost limit must be acti vate d for your SIM card. 1-touch dialing Select On , and the n umbers assigned to the 1-tou ch dialing keys ( 2 âÂÂ9 ) can be dialed by pressing and holding the key . Anykey answ er Select On , and you can answer an incoming call by briefly pressing any key except , , and . Line in use (system service) This sett ing is shown o nly if t he SIM card suppor ts two subscribe r numbers, that is, two ph one lines. Sele ct which p hone line ( L ine 1 or Lin e 2 ) you want to use for making calls and sending text messages. Calls on both lines can be answered i rrespective of th e selected lin e. Note: Y ou will not be able to make calls if you select Lin e 2 and have not subscribed to th is system service. T o prevent lin e selection, select Line change â Disable if supported by your SIM card . To chan ge th is setting, you need the PIN2 code . T o switch between the phone lines, pre ss and hold the # key in the standby mode.
[ 36 ] V oic e me ssage in di cat or s: , , or is shown if you h ave one or more voice messages. ⢠CONNECTION SETTINGS Data connections and access points T o define set tings for access poi nts, go to Settings â C onnecti on setting s â A ccess poin ts . A dat a connection is r equired to c onnect to an a ccess point. Y our phone supports three k inds of data con nections: ⢠GSM data call ( ) ⢠GSM high-speed data call ( ) ⢠P acket data (G PRS) co nnection ( ) There are three different kinds of access points th at you can define: MMS acc e ss poin t, b rowser acce ss p oint, an d I ntern et acce ss poin t (IAP ). Chec k with your service provider for the kind of access point neede d for the service you wish to access. Y o u need to define access poi nt settings, if you want t o perfo rm the foll owi ng action s: ⢠Send and recei ve multimedia messages ⢠Send and recei ve e-mail ⢠Browse pages ⢠Download Java applications ⢠Use Image upload ⢠Use your phone as a modem Note: Access point â The point wh ere your phone connects to the Internet by way of a data call or packet data connection. An access poin t can be prov ided, for exampl e, by a commerci al Intern et ser vice prov ider (ISP), or servic e provid er . For more informatio n, see â Acce ss poin ts â on p. 38.
[ 37 ] Settings GSM D ATA C ALL S A GSM data call enables data tran smission rates to a maximum of 14.4 kb/s. For avai lability and subscription to data services, contact your service pr ovider . Minimum settings needed to make a d ata call T o ins er t a set of b asic G SM da ta c all se tti ngs, go t o Set t ings â Connectio n â A ccess points and select Opti on s â New acce ss po int . Fill in the fol lowing: ⢠Data bearer : GSM data ⢠Dial-up n umber: Us er defi ned ⢠Sessi on mode: P er manent ⢠Data call type: Analog ⢠Maximum data s peed: Automatic See â A ccess points â on p. 38 f or further information on how to cr eate, delete, and edit an access point. High -speed data call (Hig h-S peed Ci rcuit Swi tched Data , HSCS D) High-speed data enables data transmission rates to a maximum of 4 3.2 kb/s, which is three times faster than the sta ndard data rates of the GSM system. HSCS D is comparable to the spe ed of many com puter m odems that communicate with today's fixed teleph one systems. For availability and subscription to high-s peed data services, ple ase contact your service provider . Note: Sending data in HSCSD m ode may drain the phone â s bat te ry faster than n ormal voice or data calls, as the phone may send data mo re freq ue ntly to the syst em. The Settings wiza rd program included in the PC Suite can help you configure access point and mailbox settings. Y ou can also copy existing settings, for example, fr om your compu ter to you r phone. See the CD-ROM supplie d in the sales pa ckage.
[ 38 ] GPRS P ACKET DAT A P acket data, or General P a cket Radi o Service (GPRS), u ses packet data technology where i nformation is sen t in short bu rsts of data over the mobile system. Th e benefit of sen ding data in packets is th at the system is occupied only when sen ding or receiving data. Because GPRS uses th e system efficiently , it allows fo r q u ic k da t a c on ne ctio n s e t up an d f as t da t a transmission speeds. Minimum s ettings needed to m ake a packet dat a connect ion ⢠Y ou need to subscribe to the GPRS service. For availability and subscription to GPRS, contact your service provider . ⢠Go to Setti ngs â Connection settings â A ccess points a nd select Opti on s â New access point . Fill in th e followin g: Data bearer : GPRS an d Access point name : enter the name give n to you by your service provi der . Se e â Create an acce ss poin t â on p. 38 for further informati on. Pri cing f or pack et data an d app li cat ions Both the active GPR S connection and the applications used over GPRS require a fe e (for examp le, using services, sending and r eceiving data, and text messages). For more detailed information on fees, cont act your service provider . ⢠ACCESS POIN TS Create an access point Op tion s in t he Acce ss poi nts list are: Edit , New access poin t , Delete , Hel p , and Ex it . Y ou may have p reset access point setting s in your Nokia mobile phone. Or , you may receive access point s ettings in a s mart message f rom a service provider . If no access points are defined wh en you open A ccess poin ts , you will be asked if you want to cr ea t e o n e.
[ 39 ] Settings If access points are de fined, to create a n ew access point, select Opti on s â New access poin t and se lect: ⢠Use default settings to use the defaul t settings. Make the needed changes and press Back to save the s ettings. ⢠Use existing settings to use ex isting setting information as the basis for the new access point settings. A list of existing access points is opened. S elect one and pr ess OK . Access point settin gs are opene d with some fields alre ady filled. Delete an access point In the list of access poin ts, scroll to th e access point you want to remove and select Op tion s â De lete . Edit an access point When you open Access points, the list of already available access points opens. Scroll to th e access point you want to edit, and press . Op tion s whe n edi ting acce ss po int se tti ngs are : Change , Ad v a n c e d settings , He l p , a nd Exit . Here you can see a short explanation for eve ry setting that may be neede d for different data connections and access points. Note: Start en tering settin gs on Conn ect ion na me an d go down the list from th ere because depending on which data connection you select ( Data bear er ) or whet her you ne ed to i nser t a Gate way IP ad dress , o nly certain setting fields ar e available. Note: Follow the instructions given to you by your service provider very carefully . Conn ectio n na me â Give a descriptive name for the con nection. Data bearer â The options ar e GSM da ta , High speed G SM , a nd GPR S . Depending on what data con nection you sele ct, only certain setting fields are available. Fill in all fields m arked with Must be defin e d , or marked with a red asterisk. Other fields can be left e mpty , unle ss you have been instructed otherwise b y your service pr ovider .
[ 40 ] See also â Se tting s for multimedia message s â o n p . 101 , â Settings for e- mail â on p. 1 03, and â Phone browser service settings â on p. 12 6. Note: T o use a d ata connection, th e sys tem service provider mu st support this feature, and if necessar y , activate it for your SIM card. Access point name (for packet data only) â The access point name is needed to establi sh a con nection to the G PRS system. Y ou obtain th e access point name from your service pr ovider . Dial-up number (for GSM data and high-s peed data only) â The mode m telephone number of the a ccess point. User na me â Write a user n ame if r equired by the service provider . The u ser name may be neede d to make a da ta connection, an d is usually pro v id ed by the servi ce pr ovide r . The us er name is often case-sen sitive. When you are writing, press the * key to open the spec ial characters ta ble. Press the 0 key to enter a space. Prompt password â If you must key in a new password every time you log on to a server , or if you do not want to save your password to the phone, choose Ye s . Pa s s w o r d â A pass word may be needed to make a data connection, and is usu ally pr ovided by th e serv ice provi der . The passwor d is ofte n case-sen sitiv e. When you are writing the password, the characters you enter are shown brief ly and then chan ged to asterisk s (*). The e asiest way to ente r numbers is to press and select Insert numb er and th en co nt in ue e nte rin g let t ers . Authenticat ion â No rm al / Secure . Gateway IP address â The IP address used by requ ired browser gateway . Homepage â Depending on what you are setting u p, enter one of the following: ⢠the service addres s ⢠the address of th e multimedia messaging cen ter
[ 4 1 ] Settings Note: ISDN connections are a way to establish a data ca ll between your ph one and you r access po int. ISD N conne ctions are d igi tal from end to end and as such offer quicker set-u p times and faster data rates than analog connections. In order to use an ISDN connection, both your service provider and your Internet service provider m ust support it. Connec tion security â Ch oose wh ethe r Tr ansport Layer Secu rity (TLS) is u sed for the c onnectio n. Foll ow the in structio ns fr om your serv ice pro vider . Session mode â Pe r m a n e n t / Te mporary . Data call type (for GSM data and high-speed data only) â Analog , ISDN v. 1 1 0 , or ISD N v .120 defines whether the phone uses an analog or digital connection. This setting depen ds on both your GSM service pr ov i d er an d I n te rne t Se r vi c e Pr o v id e r (IS P), b e ca u s e so m e GS M sys tem s do not suppor t certain types of I SDN connections. For details, contact your IS P . If ISDN connections are available, they establish connections more quickly than analog methods. Maximum da ta speed (for GSM da ta an d high-speed data on ly) â The options are Automatic / 9600 / 14400 / 1920 0 / 28800 / 38400 / 43200 , depending on what y ou have chosen in Session m ode and Data ca ll type . This option allows you to lim it the max imum connec tion speed when high-speed data is used. Higher data r ates may cost more , depending on the s ystem service provider . Note: The spe eds a bove repr esent the ma ximum speed at which your connection will opera te. During the connection, the operating speed may be less, de pending on system conditions. Note: DNS â Domain Name Service. An Internet s ervice that translates domain na mes such a s www .no kia.c om into IP addre sses lik e 192.1 0 0.124.19 5 . Opti on s â Advanced settings Phone IP addr ess â The IP address of your phone. Primary n ame ser ver â The IP address of th e primary DNS server . Seco nd name ser ver â The IP address of the s econdary DNS server .
[ 42 ] Note: If you need to enter the Phone IP address , Primary nam e server , or Second name se rver , contact your In tern et se rvice provi der to obtain these addresses. The following settings are shown if you have selected data call and high- speed data as the connection type: Use callback â This option allows a server to call you back once you have made the initial call, so you ha ve a connection without paying f or the call. Contact your service provider to subscr ibe to t his service. Note: Charges may apply for certain types of received calls, such as roaming and high-speed data calls. Con tact your GSM service provider for m ore information. Note: T he phone expects the callback call to use the same data call settings that were us ed in the callback-requesting call. The system must support this type of call in both dir ections, to and from the phone. Callback type â The options are Us e ser ver no. / Us e ot h er no. Ask your service provider for the correct settin g; it will depend on the service provider â s configuration. Callback number â K ey in your phone â s data phone num ber which the dial back server u ses. Usual ly , this number is th e data call phone number of your phone. Use PPP com pression â When s et to Ye s , this option speeds up th e data transfer , if supported by the rem ote PPP server . If you have problems with establishing a connection, tr y setting this to No . Conta ct your ser vice provider for guidance. Note: PPP ( P oint-to-P oin t Protocol) â a common networking software protocol that en ables any computer w ith a modem and a ph one line to con nect directly to th e Internet. Use login script â The options are Ye s / No . Login script â Insert the login script. Modem initialization â (Modem initialization string) â Controls your p ho n e usin g mod e m A T c omman ds. If requ ir ed, ent er c harac ter s spec if ie d b y y o u r GSM system s ervice provider or Internet service provider .
[ 43 ] Settings GPRS Go to Setti ngs â Connection settings â GPR S . The GPRS settings affect all access points using a packet data connection. GPRS connection â If you select When available and you are in a system that supports packet data, the phone re gisters to the GPRS system and sending text me ssages will be done usin g GPRS. Also, starting an active packet data conn ection , for e xample, to send and r eceive e- mail, is quicke r . If you select When ne e ded , the phone will use a packet dat a connection only if you st art an appli cation or action that nee ds it. The GPRS connec tion is closed after it is n ot used by any application. Note: If there is n o GPRS coverage and you have c hosen When available , the ph one will period ically try to establish a packet data connect ion. Access point â The access point name is needed w hen you want to use your phone a s a packet da ta modem to your computer . Data call Go to Setti ngs â Connection settings â Data call . The Data call settings affect all access points using a d ata call an d high-speed data call. Online time â If there are no ac tions the data call is dropped automatically after a time-out period. The options are User d efi ne d , in wh ich cas e you enter a tim e, or Unlimited . ⢠DATE AND TIME The date and time settings allow you to define the date and time used in your phone, as well as change th e date an d time f ormat and separators. Choose Cloc k ty pe â A nalog or Digital to change the clock shown in the standby mode. Choose Au to time update if you wan t the mobile ph one system to update time, date, and time zone information to your ph one (syste m serv ice). For the A uto time update setting to take eff ect, the phone n eeds to be restarted.
[ 44 ] ⢠SECURITY Phone and SIM Explanations for the different security codes that may be needed: ⢠PIN code (4 to 8 dig it s) â The PIN (P erson al Identification Number) code protects your SIM card against unauthorized use. The PIN code is usual ly suppli ed with th e SIM card. After thr ee cons ecutiv e incorr ect PIN code e ntries, th e PIN code is blocked. If the PI N code is blocked, you need to u nblock the PIN code befor e you can use th e SIM card again. See the in formation about the PUK code. ⢠PIN 2 co de (4 to 8 di gits ) â The PIN2 code, supplied with some SIM cards, is r equired to access som e functions, su ch as call cos t counters. ⢠L ock code (5 dig its) â The lock code can be u sed to lock the phone and keypad to avoid unauthorized u se. Note: Th e factory setti ng for the lock code is 1234 5 . T o avoid unauthor ized use of you r ph one, ch ange t he lo ck code. Keep the new code se cret and in a safe place separate fr om your phone . ⢠PUK and PU K2 cod es ( 8 digi ts ) â The PUK (P ersona l Unblocking Key) code is requir ed to change a blocked PIN code . The PUK2 code is required to change a blocked PIN2 code. If the codes are not supplied with the SIM car d, contact the operator wh ose SIM card is in your phone for the codes. Y ou can change the following codes: lock code, PIN code, and PIN2 code. These codes can only include th e number s from 0 to 9 . Note: Avoid using access codes similar to the emergency numbers, such as 9 1 1, to pre vent acc ide ntal dialin g of t he em ergen cy nu mber . PIN code request â Wh en the PIN code request is active, the code is requested each time the phone is switched on . Note that deactiv ating the PIN code r equest may not be allowed by some SIM cards. PIN code / PIN 2 code / Lock code â Open th is setting if you want to change the code. T o lock t he phone ma nually , press . A lis t of com mands opens. Select Lock phone .
[ 45 ] Settings Autolock period â Y o u can set an autolock period, a time -out after which the phone is automatically locked and can be used only if the correct lock code is ente red. Key in a numbe r fo r the t ime- out in m inut es or select Non e to turn off the autolock period . To unlock the phon e, key in the lo ck code. Note: When the phone is locked, calls m ay be pos sible to the emergency number programed in to your phone (e.g. 9 1 1 or other official emergen cy number). Lock if SIM changed â Se le ct Ye s if you want the phone to ask for the lock code when an u nknown, new SIM c ard is inserted into your phone. The phone mainta ins a list of SIM car ds that are recognized as the owner â s ca rd s. Fixed dialing â Y ou can restrict your outgo ing calls to selected phone numbers, if supported by your SIM card. Y o u need the PIN2 code for this function. When this f unction is active, you can only ca ll those phone numbers that are included in the fixed dialing list or which begin with the same digit(s) as a phone number on the list. T o view th e list of Fixed dia ling numbers, go to Menu â SIM â Fixed dialing . Op ti on s in t he Fix ed dial in g vie w ar e: Open , Call , New contact , Edit , Delete , A dd to Con tacts , A dd from Contacts , Help and Ex i t . Note: When Fixed Dialing is set on, calls may be possible to certain emergency numbers programmed into your phone (9 1 1 or other official emergenc y numbers). T o add new numbe rs to the Fixed dial ing l ist, se lect Options â New c ontact or A dd from Contacts . Closed user group (system service) â Y ou can specif y a group of people to whom you can call and who can call you. For mo re information, contact your service provider . Select Default to activate the defa ult group agreed on wi th the serv ice pr ovider , On if you w ant to u se anoth er gr oup (you n eed to know the gr oup index n umber), or Off . Note: When calls are limite d to Closed U ser Gro ups, calls may be possible to certain emergency number s programmed into you r phone (9 1 1 or other official emergency numbers).
[ 46 ] Confirm SIM services (networ k service ) â Y ou can set the phone to display confirmation messages when you are using a SIM card service. Certificate management In the C ertificate managem ent main view , you can see a list of authority certificates that have been stored in your phone. T o manage certificates, go to Me n u â Settings â Secu rity â Certif. management . Pre ss to see a list of user certificates, if a vailable. Options in the certificate management main view are: Certificate details , Delete , T rust settings , Mar k/U nm ark , He lp , and Exi t . Digital certificates are used to ve rify the or igin of browse r pages and installed software. However , they can on ly be trusted if the origin of the certificate is known to be authentic. Digital certificates are needed if you want to: ⢠Connect to a n online bank, anot her site, or r emote server for actions that involve transferring confidential in formation. ⢠Minimize the risk of viruses or other malicious so ftware and be sure of the auth enticity of software when downloadin g and insta lling software. Authority certificates are used by some services, such as banking services, for che cking signatu res or server certif icates o r ot her au thority ce rtific ates. User certifi cates are issued to users by a Cer tifying Authority . Import ant: Alth ou gh the us e of ce rt if ica te s mak e s the r is ks in vo l ved in re mote con nections a nd s oftware installation cons iderably smaller , th ey m us t be u s ed co rr e ct ly in or de r to ben ef it fr om inc rea se d secu r ity . The existe nce of a certif icate doe s not offe r any prote ction by i tsel f; the certificate manage r must c ontain correct, authen tic, or trusted certif icates fo r incre ased sec urity to be avail able . VIEWIN G C ERTIF IC ATE DETA ILS â CHE CKIN G AU THE NT ICIT Y Y ou can only be sure of the correct identity of a br owser gateway or a server when the signature and the perio d of validity of a browser gateway or server certificate h ave been che cked.
[ 47 ] Settings Y ou will be notified on t he phone â s display: ⢠If the ide ntity of th e browser ser ver or gateway is n ot authentic. ⢠If you do n ot have the correct se curity certificate in you r phone. T o check certificate details, scroll to a certif icate and select Opt ion s â Certificate details . When you ope n certificate details, C ertificate management checks the validity o f the certificate and one of the following notes m ay appear : ⢠Certificate not tru sted â Y ou h ave not set any application to use the cert ificate . Fo r m ore i nfo rmatio n, see â Change the trust settings of an authority certificate â on p. 47 . ⢠Expired certificate â The period of v alidity has ended for th e selected certificat e. ⢠Certificate not valid yetâ Th e period of validity has not yet begun for the selected certificate. ⢠Certificate corruptedâ The ce rtificate cannot be used. Contac t the certificate issuer . Import ant: Certificates have a restricted lif etime. If Expired certificate or Certificate not valid yet is shown even if the certi ficate should be valid, che ck t hat the cu rrent d ate and t ime in yo ur phon e are correct. CHA NGE THE TR UST SET TINGS OF AN A UTHOR IT Y CERTI FICAT E Scroll to an a uthority certificate a nd select Opti ons â T rust settings. Depending on the cer tificate, a list of the a pplications that can u se the selected certificate is shown. For example: Services / Ye s â the certificate is able to cert ify sites. Application manager / Yes â the certifi cate is able to certify the or igin of ne w soft ware. Int ernet / Ye s â the certificate is able to certify e-mail and imaging servers. Import ant: Before changing the se settings, you must m ake sure that you really trust th e owner of the certificate and that the certif icate really belo ngs to the l isted owne r .
[ 48 ] ⢠CALL R ESTRICT ION (SY STEM SERVIC E) Call restriction allows you to restrict the making and receiving of calls with your phone. For th is function, get th e restriction password from your service provider . 1 Scroll to on e of the r estriction options. 2 Select Opt i ons â Activate to request the system to set call restriction on, Can cel to set th e selected call r estriction off, or Check s tatus to check if the calls are restr icted or not. ⢠Select Op ti ons â Edit r estriction pass w . to change the restriction pa ssword. ⢠Select Op ti ons â Can cel all re strictions to cancel all active call r estrictions. Note: When calls are r estricted, calls may be pos sible to certain emergency numbers programmed into your phone (9 1 1 or other official emergency numbers). Call restricting a ffects all calls , in cl u d in g data calls. Y ou cannot have restric tion of incom ing calls and c al l fo rw ardin g or fixe d dialing active at the same time. ⢠SYSTEM System selection Choose Automatic to set the phone to automatically s earch for and select one of the cellular systems available in you r area. Or , choose Manual if you want to select the desired system manually f rom a list of systems. If the connection to the manually selected system is lost, the phone will sound an error tone and ask you to select a system agai n. The selected system must have a roaming agreement with your home system, that is, th e operator wh ose SIM card is in your phone. Note: Roaming a greem ent â An a greem ent between tw o or m ore system service provider s to enable the users of on e service provider to use th e services of other service providers.
[ 49 ] Settings Cell info display Select On to se t the phone to indicate when it is used in a cellular system based on M icro Cellular Network (MCN) tech nology and to activate cell info reception. ⢠ENHANCEMENT SETTINGS Scroll to an enhancement folder and open the settings: ⢠Select Default pr ofile to select the profile you want to be activated each time whe n you con nect a certa in en hancem ent to you r phon e. ⢠Select Auto matic answ er to set the phone to answer an incoming call automatically after five seconds time. If the Ringing option is set to Beep once or Silen t , automatic answer cannot be in use. If you are using a Loopset or a Phone Adapter , you need to activate it separately . Select Menu â T ools â Settings â A ccessory â A ccessory in use â Headset / Loopset / TTY . If you have activated a Loopset, the headset will use th e same settings as th e Loopset. For m ore information, see â Enha nce m ent s â o n p . 166.
[ 50 ] 5C o n t a c t s T o open Contacts, press in the standby mode o r go to Menu â Co n ta ct s . In Con t acts , y o u ca n s to re an d ma nage co nt act information, such as name s, phone numbers, and addresses. Con tacts use shared memory . See â Sha red memo ry â on p. 20. Y ou can also add a personal ringing tone, voice tag, or a thumbnail image to a contact card. Y ou can cr eate contact groups, which allow you t o send text me ssages or e-mail to many recipients at the same time. ⢠CREATE CONT ACT CARDS 1 Open Co ntac ts and select Option s â New contact . An empty contact card opens. 2 Fill in the fields you want and pr ess Done . The contact card is saved and closed, and app ear s in t he Con t act s d ir ec tor y . ⢠COPY BETWEEN SIM CARD AND PHONE MEMORY ⢠T o copy names and n umb ers from a SIM card to your ph one, go to Menu â SIM â S I M dir ectory . Select th e name(s) you want to copy and select Op tion s â C opy to Contacts . ⢠If you want to copy a phone , fax, or pager number from C ontacts to your SIM card, go to C ontacts, open a contact card, scroll to the number , and select Op ti ons â Copy to SIM direct.
[ 5 1 ] Contacts ⢠EDIT C ONTACT CARDS Optio ns in the C ontacts direct ory are: Open , Ca ll , Create mess age , New contact , Edit , Delete , Duplicate , Add to group , Belongs to groups , Mark/ Unma rk , Sen d business card , Contacts info , Help , an d Exi t . Optio ns when ed iting a contact card are: A dd thumbnail / Remove thumbnail , Add detail , De lete detail , Edit label , Help , and Exit . 1 In the Contacts directory , scroll to the contact card you want to edit and press to open it. 2 To change the info rmation on the card, select Op ti ons â Edit . 3 T o save your changes and to return to the con tact card view , press Do ne . Delete c ontact cards In the Con tacts directory , scroll to th e contact card you want to delete and select Op tion s â De lete . T o delete m any contact cards 1 Mark the cards to be deleted. Scroll to a con tact you want to delete and select Op tion s â Mark . A check mark is placed next to th e contact car d. 2 When you have marked a ll the con tacts you w ant to delete, select Opti on s â Del ete . Y ou ca n also mark many it ems if you pr ess and hold and simultan eously press . S ee a lso â Actions common to all applications â on p. 17 . Add and remove contact card fields 1 Open a contact card and select Opti ons â Edi t . 2 To add an extra field, select Options â A dd detai l . T o delete a field you do not need, select Options â Delete detail. T o rename a contact card field label, select Opt ion s â Edit label .
[ 52 ] Add a picture to a contact card There are two different types of pictu res you can add to a con tact card. See â Camera and images â on p. 59 for m ore information on how to take and store pictures. ⢠T o attach a small th umbnail image to a contact c ard, open a contact card, sele ct Op t i ons â Edit and the n select Options â A dd th um bn ai l . The thumbnail image is also shown when the contact is calling you. Note: After you attach a thum bnail im ag e to a co ntact card , you ca n select Add thumbnail to replace th e image with a differen t thumbna il or Remove thum bnai l to remove t he thum bnail from the con tact c ard. ⢠T o a dd an image to a co ntact car d, open a contact ca rd, an d press to open the image view ( ). To attach an image, select Op ti ons â A dd image . ⢠VIEW A CONTACT CAR D Contact information view ( ) shows all information inserted in the contact card. Press to open the Image view . Only fields that h ave information ar e displayed in the contact information view . Select Op ti ons â Edi t if you want to see all fields a nd add more data to the con tact. Options when viewing a contact card (when t he selection is on a phone number) are: Call , Create message, Edit, Dele te, Defaults , Add voice tag / V oice tags , A ssign 1-touch dial / Rem ove 1- to uc h dial , Ringing ton e , C opy to SIM direct. , S end bus ine ss car d , He lp , and Exit . Assign default numbers and addresses If a contact h as several phone numbers or e-mai l addresses, to speed up calling and sending m essages, you can define certain n umbers and addresses to be u sed as the def ault.
[ 53 ] Contacts Open a contact card and select Options â Defaults . A pop-up win dow opens, listing th e different options. Example: Scrol l to Phone numb er and press Assign . A list of p hone n umber s in the selected con tact car d is shown. Scroll to the one you wan t to have as the defau lt and press . W hen you return to the contact card view , you can see the defau lt number un derlined. V oice dialing Y ou can make a phone call by saying a voice tag that has bee n added to a contact ca rd. Any spoken word(s) can be a voice tag. Before using voice dialing, note th at: ⢠V oice tags are not language dependent. T hey are dependen t on the sp eak e r's vo i ce . ⢠V oice tags are sen sitive to background noise. Record them and make calls in a qu iet environment. ⢠V ery short names are n ot accepted. Use long names and avoid similar name s fo r dif f ere nt num ber s . Example: Y ou ca n use a pers on â s name for a voice tag, for example, â Johnâ s cellâ . Note: Y ou must s ay the name exactly as you s aid it when you recorded it. T his may be difficult in a noisy environme nt or during an emergency , so you should n ot rely solely upon voice dialing in all circumstan ces. ADD A VOICE TAG TO A PHONE NUM BER V oice tags can be any spoken words, for example, a person â s firs t nam e. V oice tags allow you to make phone calls by simply saying the word alou d. Y ou can have only one voice tag per con tact car d. V oice tags can only be added to phone nu mbers stored in ph one memory . See â Copy betwee n SIM card and phone memory â on p. 50. 1 In the Contacts directory , scroll to the contact to which you wan t to add a voice tag and press to open the contact card.
[ 54 ] 2 Scroll to th e number to w hich you want to add the voice tag and se lec t Opti ons â A dd voice tag . Press Start, then speak af ter tone is displayed. 3 Press Start to recor d a voice tag. The phone sounds a s tarting tone an d Speak now is displa yed. When recording, h old the ph one a short distance from your mouth. After the star ting tone, say clearly the word(s) you want to record as a voice tag. 4 After recording, the phone pl ays the recor ded tag and Playing voice tag is displayed. If you do not want to save the r ecording, press Quit . 5 When the voice tag has been successfully saved, V oi ce tag saved is displayed and a beep sou nds. A symbol can be seen next to th e number in th e contact card. Note: Y our ph one may have 30 phone numbe rs to which voice ta gs are attached. I f the me mory b ecomes fu ll, delete some of the voi ce tags. T o view a list of voice tags you have def ined, select Option s â Con t ac ts info â V oice tags in the Contacts director y . MAKE A CAL L BY SAY ING A VOI CE TAG Note: Y ou must say the voice tag exactly as you said it when you recor d ed it . 1 In th e stan dby mode, press and h old . A s hort tone is played and the n ote Spe ak now is displa yed. 2 When you are making a call by saying a voice tag, the loudspeaker is in use. Hold the phone at a s hort distance away from your mouth and face and say th e voice tag cle arly . 3 The phone plays the original voice tag, displays the name and number , and after 1 .5 seconds dials the number of the recognized voice t ag. If t he phon e plays th e wr ong vo ice tag or to r etry voice di aling, press Retry .
[ 55 ] Contacts Note: When an application using a data call or GPRS connection is sending or receivin g data, you cannot make a call by u sing voice dialing. To make a call by using a voice tag, end all active data connections. REPL AY , ERASE, OR CHANG E A VOI CE TAG 1 To replay , erase, or ch ange a voice tag, open the Contacts directory and select Op tion s â Contacts info â V oice tags . A list of contacts with voice tags is displayed. 2 Scroll to a contact , select Options , and the n sele ct o ne of t he fol lowin g: Playback to listen to the voice t ag again . Delete to eras e the voice tag. Chan ge to record a new voice tag instead of the old one. Press Start to record . Assign 1-touch di aling keys 1-touch dialin g is a quick way to call frequently used numbers. Y ou can assign 1-touch dialing keys to eight phone numbers. Num ber 1 is reserved for th e voice mailbox . 1 Open the cont act card for which you wan t a 1-touch dialin g key an d select Op tions â A ssig n 1- touc h no . The 1-touch dialing grid opens, showing you the numbers from 1 âÂÂ9 . 2 Scroll to a number and press Assign . When you return to the contact informat ion vie w , you can see th e 1-tou ch dial icon nex t to the number . T o call the contact by 1-touch dialin g, go to the standby mode and press the 1-touch dialing key and .
[ 56 ] Add a ringing tone for a contact card or group Y ou can set a ringing ton e for each contact card and group. When that contact or group member calls you, the phon e plays the ch osen ringing tone (if th e caller â s telephone number is sent with the call and your phon e recognizes it). 1 Press to open a contact card or go to the Groups list and select a contact group. 2 Select Op ti ons â Ringing tone . A list of ringing ton es opens. 3 Use the scroll key to select the r inging tone you wish to u se for the contact or group and pr ess Select . T o remove th e ringing ton e, select No personal tone from the list of ringing ton es. Note: For an individual contact, th e phone will always us e the ringing tone that was assigned last. So, if you first change a gr oup ringing tone and then the r inging tone of a sin gle contact that belongs to that group, the ringing tone of the s ingle contact will be us ed whe n the contact calls you th e next time. T o listen to a ringing tone, go to Recorder . Send contact information Y ou can send co ntact informa tion through text message, e-m ail, Bluetooth connection, or infrared connection. 1 In the Contacts directory , scroll to th e card you want to send. 2 Select Op ti ons â Send then select the m ethod; the choices are : Via text message , Via e-mail ( available only if the correct e-mail settings are in place), Via Bluetooth , or Via Infrared . For fu rth er info rma tio n, s ee the â Messagingâ chapter , â Send and rec eiv e da t a u s in g in fra r ed â on p. 146, an d â Send data using Blu etoot h connecti on â on p . 1 42 . Y ou can add r eceived contact ca rds to your Contacts directory . See â Receive sma rt mess ages â on p. 90 for further information.
[ 57 ] Contacts Note: When you sen d or receive contact information, the term â bus iness ca rd â is used. A business ca rd is a contact card in a f ormat suitable to be sent in a te xt message, usually in â vCard â fo rmat . ⢠MANAGE CONTACT GROU PS Op ti on s in t he Gro ups li st vi e w ar e: Open , New grou p , Del ete , Rename , Ringing tone , Contacts info , Help , a nd Exit . Y ou c an creat e contac t gro ups th at can, for e xample , be use d as distribu tion lists for sending text m essages and e-mail. See â Add a ringing tone for a contact card or group â on p. 56. Create contact groups 1 In the Contacts directory , press to open the G roups list. 2 Select Op ti ons â New group . 3 Write a na me for the gr oup or use the default name Group and press OK . Add members to a group 1 In the Contacts directory , scroll to th e contact you want to add to a group and se lec t Opti ons â A dd to group: . A list of available groups opens. 2 Scroll to th e group to wh ich you w ant to add the contact an d press . ADD MULTIP LE MEMB ERS AT A TI ME 1 In the Grou ps list, open a group and sele ct Opti on s â Add memb ers . 2 Scroll to a contact a nd press to ma rk it. Repeat this action on all the contacts you wan t to a dd and press OK to add them to th e selected group.
[ 58 ] Remove members from a group 1 Go to the Groups list, scroll to the group you want to modify , and press . 2 Scroll to th e contact you w ant to remove and select Options â Remo ve from group . 3 Press Ye s to remove the contact from the group. ⢠IMPORT DATA FROM OTHER NOKIA PHONES Y ou can move calendar , contacts, and to-do data from many diff erent Nokia phones to your Nokia 3620 or Nokia 3 660 us ing the PC Suite Data Import application. Instructions f or using the application can be found in the PC Su ite onlin e help on th e CD -ROM.
[ 59 ] Camera and images 6 Cam era and ima ges With th e came ra you can take pictu res of pe ople or eve nts while on the mo ve. Th e pictu res are automa tically sav ed in the Im ages appli cation, where you can rena me them an d organi ze them in folde rs. Y ou can also send photo s to your friends in a multimedia me ssage, as an e-ma il attachment, or through a Bluetooth or in frare d con necti on. T he camer a produ ce s JPEG pic tur es. Press Camera in the standby mode or go to Menu â Cam e ra . Op tion s befo re taking a pict ure are: Capture , Go to Images , Settings , Help , and Exit . Note: JPEG is a standardized image compression format. JPEG files ca n be v iewe d w ith the mo st commo n ima ge v iew ers , i mag e ed itor s, and Internet browsers. Y ou can recognize these files by their *.jpg extens ion, f or example , boats.jpg ⢠TA K E P I C T U R E S Note: Y our phone m ust be switched on to use this function. Do n ot switch the phone on wh en wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause inter ference or danger . 1 Press Camer a in the standby mode. The Camera application opens and you can see the view to be ca ptured. Y ou can see th e viewf inder and the croppi ng lines, which show you the ima ge area to be captured. Y ou can a lso see th e ima ge counter , which shows you how many im ages, depending o n the selected imag e quality , f it in the m emory of you r phone. 2 To take a picture, pr ess .
[ 60 ] Note: Do not move the phone before the Camera applicat ion starts to save the p hoto. The p hotos ar e save d automa tica lly in the Image s application. The Camer a goes into ba ttery savin g mode within a mi nute if the re ha ve been no ke y pr ess es. To cont in ue t akin g pictures, press . Afte r the im age has been saved: ⢠If you do not want to sav e the photo in Images, select Opt ions â Delete . ⢠T o return to the viewfinder to take a new picture, press . Op tion s af ter a p icture has be en ta ken are : New image , De lete, Send , Rename image , Go to I mages , Settin gs , Help , and Exit . Import ant: Obey all local laws gove rni ng the taking of picture s. Do not use thi s feature ille gall y . Settings In the Camera application settings, you can adjust the image quality setting and change the de fault image name. 1 Select Op ti ons â Settings . 2 Scroll to th e setting you want to change: ⢠Image qu alityâ High , Normal , an d Basic . T he better the image qu al ity , th e m ore me mo ry t he i m ag e c ons um es . Se e als o â Im ages and memory consumption â on p. 62. ⢠Default image nameâ By default, the Camera names photos in the JPEG forma t (for exam ple, â Image .jpgâ ). Defaul t im age name allows you to set a name for the pi ctures taken. ⢠Me mor y i n u se â Select w hether you want to store your images in the phone memo ry or the memor y card, if you use one. Example: If you se t â Beachâ as the default image na me, Camera will name all the pictures you take â Beach â , â Beac h(0 1) â , â Bea ch( 02 ) â , and so on, until you c hange the s etting.
[ 6 1 ] Camera and images Camera modes With the different Camera modes, you can affect the size and orientation of the picture to be taken. When you are ta king a picture, press or to change between the dif ferent modes. Choose: ⢠Standard when you want to take normal lan dscape pictures. ⢠Po r t r a i t when you want to take a s maller icon-sized, vertical picture, which can be added to a contact card. ⢠Night when th e ligh ting is dim and t he Camer a needs a l onger exp osure time f or the pi cture t o b e of good quality . N ote th at, in dim cond itions, any movement while taking a picture may cause it to get blurred. The image size and or ientation is the same for Standard and Night. T ry out the different Camera m odes to see how th ey affect the picture taken. IMAGE R ESOLUTI ON S ⢠When you are taking a picture in Standard or Ni ght mode, the viewfinder resolutio n is 160x120 pixels and 80x96 for P or trait mode. ⢠The images taken in Standard or N ight mode are saved i n 640x480 pixel (VGA) format and those taken in P ortra it mode are saved in 80x96 pix el form at .
[ 62 ] ⢠When you are viewing images, they are scaled to fit the display , which has 176x208 pixe ls. This means that Standard and Night mode pictu res will appear more detailed when v iewed on a higher resolution sc reen, for example, a com puter or w hen z oomed in Images. No t e: Resolution â A measure for the s harpness a nd clar ity of a n image. Resolution refers to the number of dot s (pixels) in an im age or a display . The more pixel s there are, the more detai led the picture is. Resolution is usually m easured in pixels, for e xample, 640x480=300 kilopixels (kpix)=0.3 megapixel s (Mpix). IMAGE S AND ME MORY C ONSUMPTI ON Y our phone has a pproximately 3 MB (m egabytes) of free memor y for images, con tact information, calendar , messages, and so on . See â Share d me mor y â on p. 20. P ortrait images (always taken in High quality) are so small th at they tak e up v ery littl e me mory . Im ages ta ken usin g the High q uality setting and those taken in Night mode take up the mo st memory . If 1 MB of memory is used for images only , it would fit approximately 22 Normal quality images taken in Standard mode. I n the table below , you can see ap proximately how m any images would f it in 1 MB of memory . By using a memory card with your phone you can increas e the number of images you can store. To see how much memory is avail able on your phone a nd me mory card, see â Ch eck memory consumption â on p. 124. Image quality Ima ge ty pe Basic No rm al High St and a rd 55 22 15 Night 50 25 18 Port rait --> 3 0 0
[ 63 ] Camera and images ⢠STORE PIC TURES IN IMAGES Go to Menu â Images . Images allows you to vie w , organize, delete, and send photos and pictures stored in your phone. In Images you can organize ph otos: ⢠T aken w ith the ca mera . ⢠Sent to you r Inbox in a multimedia or a pictur e mess age , as an e-ma il a t t a c hm en t, th rou gh an infr are d or Bluetooth connection. After receiving the ima ge in Inbo x, you need to save it in I mages. In the Im ages main view , you can see a list of ph otos and folder s. The list shows: ⢠The date and tim e a photo or an image was taken or saved. ⢠A small thumbnail picture, a preview of the image. ⢠The numb er of im ages inside a folder . ⢠A tab showing w hether the photos or folders are located in th e phone â s me mor y or th e m emory ca rd , if y ou use one . Opti ons in Im ages are: Op en , Se nd , Image uploade r , Delete , Mo ve to folder , New f old er , Mark/ Unmark , Re name , Receive via infrared (only from a digi tal came ra th at sup p orts th e IrT ran- P pr oto col , oth erw ise u se th e Infr ared applicatio n, see â Send an d r eceive data u sing in frared â on p. 146), View details , A dd to F avorites , Help , a nd Exit . View images Note: When you open Im ages and you use a memory ca rd, the starting tab is determined by which memory is selected a s the Mem ory in us e . 1 Press or to move fr om one memor y tab to another .
[ 64 ] 2 To browse the im ages, press an d . 3 Press to open an image. When the im age is open, you can see the name of the image and the number of images in the folder on the top of the displa y . When you are viewing an image, pressing o r takes you to the next or previous picture in the current folder . Y ou can view an imat ed GIF f iles in th e same wa y as ot her ima ges. An ima tion s are played on ly once. When an animation stops, you will see a fixed image. T o view the animation again, you must close it and then reopen it. Optio ns when vie wing an ima ge are: Send , Rotate , Zoom in , Zoom ou t , Full screen , Delete , Rename , View details , A dd to F avorites , He lp , and Ex it . ZOOM I N OR ZOO M OUT 1 Select Op t ions â Zoom in or Zoom out . Y ou can see th e zoomi ng ratio at the top of the display . See also the section â K eyboard shor tcuts â later in this chapter . 2 Press Bac k to return to the initial view . The zoom ratio is not stor ed permanen tly . Y ou cannot zoom in on GIF animations while they are playing. Full sc reen When you select Op ti ons â Full screen , th e panes around the picture are removed so that you can see more of the im age. Press to go back to the initial view . Move the focal poi nt When you are zooming or view ing an image in full screen m ode, use the Scroll key to move the f ocal point to the left, right, up, or down, s o that you can take a closer look at one part of the picture, for example, its upper right corner.
[ 65 ] Camera and images Ro ta te Select Op ti ons â Rotateâ Le ft to rotate an image 90 degrees counterclockwise or Righ t to rotate the image clockwise. The rotation status is not s tored permanently . KE Y B O A R D S H O R T C U T S ⢠Rotate: 2 keyâ counterclockwise, 9 ke yâ clockwise. ⢠Scroll: â up, â do w n, â left , â right. ⢠Zoom: 1 keyâ zoom in, 0 keyâ zoom out. Pr ess and hold to retur n to the no rmal v iew . ⢠Change between full screen and normal view: the * key . IMAGE DETA ILS VIEW T o view the detailed in formation about an image, scroll to the image and se lec t Opti ons â View details . A list of image inform ation appears: Format â JPEG , GI F , PNG , TIFF , MBM , BMP , WBMP , OTA , WM F , Unsupported , or Unk no wn . Date and Tim e â wh en the image wa s created or saved, n x n - th e siz e of the im age in pixels. Resolutn . â the size of the image in pixels. See â Image resoluti ons â on p. 6 1. Size â in bytes or kilobytes. Color â True color , 65536 colors, 4096 colors, 2 56 colors , 1 6 colors , Grayscale , or B lack/white . Arrange images and folders ⢠T o remove an image or folder , scroll to it and select Op ti ons â Delete . ⢠T o rename an image or a folder , scroll to the image or f older you want to r ename a nd se lec t Opti ons â Rename . Write the new name and press . See â A ctions common to all applica tions â on p. 17 f or further in formation on how to cr eate folders and mark and m ove items to folder s.
[ 66 ] Send images Y ou can send photos or images by different messaging services. 1 Scroll to th e image you want to send and sele ct Opti on s â Send . 2 Then select th e meth od. The choices are Via multimedia , Via e -mail , Via infrared , or Via Bluetooth . ⢠If you select to send the image in an e-mail or a multi media message, an editor opens. Press to select the recipient(s) from the Contacts directory or write the phone number or e-mail address of the r ecipient in the To : f ield. Add text or s ound and se lec t Opti ons â Send . For mo re inform atio n, se e â Create a nd se nd new messa ges â on p. 80. ⢠If yo u want to se nd the im age by in frared or Blu etooth con necti on, se e â Send data using Bluetooth connection â on p. 142, and â Sen d and receive data using infrared â on p. 1 46 for m ore information. Picture messages folder Op ti on s in t he Pi ctu re mes s ag es fo ld er ar e: Ope n , Send , Delete , Mar k/ Un mar k , Ren ame , View details , He l p , a nd Exit . In the Picture messages folder , you can find graphics sent to you in picture messages. If you want to sav e a gr aphic y ou hav e recei ved in a picture message , go t o Messaging â Inbo x , open the message, and select Options â Save picture . VIEW PICT URES 1 Scroll to the picture you wan t to view a nd press . T he picture opens. Press to view th e next picture in the folder . 2 Press Back to return to the Pictures m ain view .
[ 67 ] Video recorder 7 Video recorder Go to Menu â Video recorder . Note: Obey all local laws governing th e taking of videos. Do n ot use this featu re illegally . Y our phone must be s witched on to use the Video recorder . Do not switch the phone on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may c ause interference or danger . With the Video recorder you can record video clips, and play video clips stored on your phone or on a memory ca rd. Also, the Video recorder is integrated with the messaging features allowing you to e asily send created clips. Video record er uses sh ared mem ory . See â Shared memory â on p. 20 . ⢠RECOR D A V IDEO CLIP Note: 3GPP file format (.3g p) is the sta ndard video file format for Multimedia Messagin g. Y ou can record video clips up to 95 KB in siz e, or approx imatel y 1 0 seco nds in dur ation. Recorded vide o clips are in the .3gp for mat. 1 To begin recording open the Video rec ord er a nd sel ect Options â Record and you can see th e view to record. 2 T o star t re cording press . The progress bar on th e bottom of th e screen shows you how much recording time remains. T o pau se recording at any time press . T o immediately play the video clip you just recor ded, press . The video clip is saved to either the phone â s me mor y o r t he me mor y c ard , depending on the setting of your Mem ory in use . See â Set up your Vide o re cord er â on p. 68. Op ti on s in v ide o cl ip v ie w of Vid eo r eco r der ar e: Play , Recor d, Send , Delete , Renam e , Settings , About product , He l p , an d Exit .
[ 68 ] ⢠W ATCH A VIDEO CLIP T o watch a video clip from the Video recorder video clip list: 1 Open th e Video recorde r . 2 Scroll to a vide o clip and select Optio ns â Play . Once a video clip is playing, you h ave similar options available to you as when playing a vide o clip in Re alOne Player ⢠. See â RealOne Player â¢â on p. 69. Send video clips Y ou can s end video clips by using th e Send option from you r video clip list. 1 Scroll to th e video clip you want to sen d and select Op tion s â Sen d . 2 Select Via multime dia , Via e-mail , Via Bluetooth , or Via infrared . Set up your Video recorder Y ou can def ine whether you store your video clips in the phone â s memory or on the memory card , if you have one, and how to name you r video clips. Select Optio ns â Settings and one of the f ollowing: ⢠Me mor y in us e â Choose between Phone memory an d Me mo ry ca rd . ⢠Default video name â Define the de fault name of your video clips. Exam pl e: If you se t â Holiday â as the def ault video clip n ame, Video recorder will name a ll the video clips y ou take â Holidayâ , â Holiday(0 1) â , â Holiday(0 2) â , and so on, until you c hange the setting a gain.
[ 69 ] RealOne Playe r ⢠8 RealOne Playe r ⢠Go to Menu â RealOne Player . With the RealOne Player you can play media files st ored in the phone â s me mor y o r o n a memory card, play music and video f iles, or stream live cont ent from the internet. Optio ns in list view are: Play , Open , Ren ame , Delete , Mo ve to folder , New folder , Mark/ Unma rk , Se nd , A dd to F avorites , Se ttings , Help , About product , and Ex it . RealOn e P layer us es sha red m emor y . See â Sha red memo ry â on p. 20. Note: Streaming is playin g sound or video in real time a s it is downloaded from th e internet, as opposed to storing it in a local file firs t. ⢠PLAY MEDIA FILES Y ou can play an y music or video file from the list show n when you start t he Re alOne Playe r , or directly f rom the internet. T o play a media file stored in your phone â s memory or me mory card, open Real One Player , scroll to th e file an d select Opti ons â Play . Note: Media files are vi deo, music or audio clips that you can play on a me dia pl ayer l ike the R ealOne Playe r . Files with exten sions . 3gp, .amr , .rm, .ram, .ra, and . rv are su pported by the RealOne Player .
[ 7 0 ] T o play a media file directly from the inter net: 1 Select Op ti ons â Open â URL address . 2 Enter the UR L of the site fr om which you want to play or stream content. Before your media file or stre am begins play ing, your phone will connect to th e site and load the file. Note: Bu ffering is the tem porary storage of a p art of your streaming content into the ph one â s mem ory before it is pl ayed. Media guide Y ou can open a browser page tha t allows you to access a media guide with links to streaming media sites and files. T o stream from the Internet: 1 Configure your RealOne Player default access point (s ee â Default Access P oint setting â , on p. 7 1). 2 From the m ain Menu, open Services (XHTML browser ). 3 In the Bookmarks view , open th e Mobile Media Guide bookm ark. Note: In the RealOne Player , you can on ly open an rstp://url address. Y ou cannot open an http://url addres s . 4 Find a lin k to a str eaming si te that interests you, and selec t the link. If you ar e not connected to th e server , y ou will be prompted to connect. Pr ess Ye s . Y our streaming s ession begins. ÷ Note: Y ou cannot stream from a site unless you have correctly config ure d an Access P oint in RealOne Player , see â Defau lt Access P oint setting â , p. 7 1. Many service providers require you to use an Internet Access P oin t (IAP) fo r your Default Access P oint in RealOne Pl a ye r . Ot h er se rvice providers allow you to use a W AP access point . C on tac t yo u r service provider f or advice and availability .
[ 7 1 ] RealOne Playe r ⢠V olume control ⢠T o increase the volume press , or to decrease the volume press . ⢠T o mut e th e sound press and hold un til th e ind icator is dis playe d. ⢠T o turn on the sound press and hold until you see the ind icator . ⢠SEND MEDIA FILES Y ou can send media f iles by using the Se nd option fro m your video cli p list. 1 Scroll to th e file you want to send and select Option s â Sen d . 2 Select Via infr ared , Via Bluetooth , Via multimedia or Via e-mail . ⢠CHANGE THE SETTINGS To c h a n g e t h e Vide o settin gs, select Opti ons â Video to open th e following list of settings: ⢠Video qualityâ Choo s e Sharp images to have better picture quality , but slower fram erate, or H igh fra mera te fo r fast er fr a mera te , but lower picture quality . ⢠Automatic scalingâ Choose On to have automatic resizing of the video image. To c h a n g e t h e Pl ayback settin gs, se lect Op tions â Playback to open the following setting: ⢠Repeat â Choose On to h ave the playing video or audio file restart automatically once it has finished. To c h a n g e t h e Netw o rk settin gs, select Options â Network to open th e following list of settings: ⢠Default Access P oint â As def ined in Con nection settings , se e â Access points â on p. 3 8. ⢠Bandwi dth â Choose Auto matic t o have the best del ivery ra te availabl e. ⢠Maxi mum band width â Choose the max imum bandwidth for streaming co nten t .
[ 72 ] ⢠Connection time -outâ Ope n the slider view to change the waiting time for t he initial server connection on a streaming session. ⢠Server time-out â Open th e slider view to change th e time allowed for no response f rom the ser ver . ⢠Highest P ort an d Lowest P ort â Enter the port n umbers for s treaming. If you are not sure of the numb ers, contact your service provider . To ch a n g e t he Proxy se tti ngs , se le ct Opti on s â Proxy â Use Proxy / Host address / Po r t . When you sel ect one of th e settings, a tab view is opened. Press or to m ove between the different settin g tabs. The followi ng icons indicate which setting you a re in: for Video for Playback for Netwo rk for Proxy
[ 73 ] Messaging 9 Messaging Go to Menu â Messagin g . Options in the Messagin g main view: Cr eate messa ge , Connect (shown if you have defined settings for the mailbox), or Disconnect ( s h o w n i f t h e r e is an active connection to mailbox), SIM messages , C ell broadcast , Ser vice command , Settings , He lp , and Exit . In Messaging you can cr eate, send, receive, vie w , e dit, and or ganize: ⢠text message s ⢠multimedia m essages ⢠e-ma il messa ges ⢠smart m essa ges (s pecial text messa ges con taining data) In addition to these, you can receive messages and data by an infrared or Bluetooth connection, receive serv ice messages, cell broadcast me ssages, as well as send service com mands. T ext and m ultimedia messages us e shared m emory . See â Shared memo ry â on p. 20. Note: Before you can cr eate a m ultimedia message, write an e-mail, or connect to your remote mailbox, you m ust have the correct connection settings in place. See â Settings f or e-mail â on p. 1 03 and â Settings for multimedia messages â on p. 1 0 1. When you open Messaging, you can see the Create messa ge f unction and a list of def ault folders: Inb ox â Contains received messages except e -mail and cel l broadcast messages. E-ma il messages a re stored in the M ailbox . Y ou can read cell broadcas t me ssages by selecting Op tions â Cell bro adcast .
[ 74 ] My fold ers â For organizing your me ssages into folders. Organize your messages by adding new f olders under My folders. When you have opened one of the default folders, for example, Sent, you can ea sily move between the folders by pressing to open the next f older (Outbox), or by pressing to open the previous folder (Dr afts). Mailbox â When you open this folder , you can either connect to your r emote mailbox to retr ieve your new e-mail m essages or view your previously retrieved e-mail m essages offline. See â View e-mail messages when online â an d â View e-mail messages when of fline â on p . 93 f or fu rther in for mation. After you have defined settings for a n ew mailbox, the name given to that mailbox will replace Mailbox in the main view . See â Settings f or e-mail â on p . 1 0 3. Dr af ts â Stores draft m essages that have not been sent. Ou tbox â Is a temporary storage place for messa ges waiting to be sent. Sent â Stores the last 1 5 messages that have been sent. T o change the number of messages to be saved, see â Settings for the Sent f older â on p. 1 05. Repo rt s â Y ou can request the system to send you a deliver y report of th e text messages, sm art mess ages, and multimedia messages you have sent. T o turn on delivery report r eception, select Opti on s â Settings â T ext message or Mu ltimedia message , scroll to Receive r eport , and select Ye s . Note: Receiving a delivery report of a multimedia message that has bee n sent to an e- mail address might not be possible.
[ 75 ] Messaging ⢠MESSAGING â GENERAL INFORMATION The me ssage s tatus i s always either draf t, sent , or receive d. Messag es can be saved to the Drafts folder befo re they are sent. Messages are temporar ily placed to Outbox to wait for sending. After a message has been sent, you can f ind a co py of the mess age in the Sen t f old er . Received and se nt mes sages are in read-only sta te until you select R eply or Forward , which copie s the message to an editor . Note that you cannot forw ard e-mail mess ages sent by you. Note: Messages or data that have be en sent by an infrared or Bluetooth connection are not saved in th e Draft or Se nt folders. Open a rec eived message When you receive a mes sage, and the n ote 1 n ew mes sag e is shown in the s tandby m ode. Press Sho w to open the message. If you have m ore than on e new messa ge, press Show to open the Inbox to see the message he adings. T o open a message in I nbox, scroll to it and press . Add a recipient to a m essage When you crea te a message , ther e are s everal wa ys to add a recipi ent: ⢠Add recipients f rom the Contacts directory . To open the Contacts directory , pr ess or in the To : or Cc: f ields, or select Op ti ons â A dd recipient . Scroll to a contact and press to mark it. Y ou can mark several recipients at a time. Press OK to return to the message. The recipients are listed in the To : f ield and automatically separated with a semicolon ( ; ). ⢠Write the phone number or e-mail addr ess of th e recipient in the To : field. ⢠Copy the recipie nt information f rom another application and then paste it to the To : fi eld. See â Copy text â on p. 80 . Press to the le ft of the cursor if you want to del ete a recipie nt.
[ 76 ] Note: I f you write many phone nu mbers or e-mail addresses in the To : field, you must remembe r to add a se micolon ( ; ) between each item to se parate th em from each ot her . When yo u retrie ve re cipien ts from the Contacts directory , the semicolon is added automatically . Example: 2 14 12 3 45 6 ; 972 456 876 Sending options T o change how a m essage is sent, select Op ti ons â Sen ding options when you are editing a message. When you save the message, its sending settings are also saved. ⢠WRITE TEXT Y ou can key in text in two dif ferent ways, using the method traditionally used in mobile ph ones or an other method c alled predictive text input. Icon s: and indicate the sele cted case. me a ns t ha t the first lett er of t he n ext word is written in u pper c as e, an d a l l o t he r l et t e r s are automatically written in lower case. indicates number mode. Use traditional text input The indicator is s hown on the top right of the display wh en you are wr iting text usi ng traditional text in put. ⢠Press a number key ( 1â 9 ), repeatedly until the desired char acter appears . Note, that there ar e more charac ters available f or a numbe r key than are printed on the key . ⢠T o insert a number , press and h old the number key . ⢠T o switch between le tter and number mode, press and hold th e # key . ⢠If the next letter is located on the same key as the present one, wait until the cursor appears (or press to end the time-out period), and then key in th e letter . ⢠If you make a mistake, press to remove a character . Press and hold to clear more than one character .
[ 77 ] Messaging ⢠The most common punc tuation marks are available under the 1 key . Press the 1 key repeatedly to reach the desir ed punctuation mark. ⢠Pr es s the * key to open a list of special characters. Use the Scroll key to move through the list, and press OK to select a character . ⢠To in se rt a sp a ce, pr es s the 0 key . ⢠T o move th e curs or to th e next line, pr ess the 0 key th ree times. ⢠T o switch betw een upper and lower case, press the # key . Use predictive te xt input T o set predictive text input on or off, press the # key twice quickly when writing text. T o activate predictive text inpu t, press and select Pre dictive text on . This will activate predictive text input for a ll editors in th e phone. The indicator is shown at th e top of the display . Write the desired word by pressing the 2 âÂÂ9 keys. Press each key only once for one letter . The word changes after every key press. Note: Do not pay attention to wh at appears on the display . The word ma tch is evolving. Wa it until you have keyed in the w hole word before you check the result. For example , to write â Nokiaâ when English dictionary is selected, press: the 6 key for N the 6 key for o the 5 key for k the 4 key for i the 2 key for a As y ou can s ee, the word suggestion changes after each key press.
[ 78 ] When you have finished th e word, check that it is correct. ⢠If the w ord is correct, you can conf irm it by pr essing or by pr es si ng t h e 0 key to insert a space. The underlin ing disappears and you can begin to wri te a new word. ⢠If the w ord is not correct, you h ave the f ollowing options: ⢠Press the * k ey repeatedly to view the match ing words the dictionary has found one by one. ⢠Press and select P re dic ti ve te xt â Matches to view a list of matching words. Scroll to the word you want to use a nd press to select it. ⢠If th e ? character is sh own after th e word, the word you int ended to write is not in the diction ary . To add a word to the dictionar y , pr ess Spel l , key in the wor d (max. 32 le tters) using traditional tex t input, and press Save . The word i s added to th e dictionary . When th e dictionary becomes full, a n ew word re places the oldest added word. ⢠To r e m o v e t h e ? and clear characters one by on e from th e word, press . TIPS ON USI NG PRED ICTIVE TEXT I NPU T ⢠T o erase a chara cter , press . Press and h old to clear more than one character . ⢠T o chan ge betwee n the different character cases Abc , abc , and AB C , press the * key . Note that if you press the * key qu ickly twice the predictive text inpu t is turned off. ⢠T o insert a number in letter mode, press and hold the desired number key , or press and sele ct Inse rt num b er , key in the number s you want, and press OK . T o switch between le tter and number mode, press and hold th e # key . ⢠The most common punc tuation marks are available under the 1 key . Press the 1 key repeatedly to reach the desir ed punctuation m ark. ⢠Press and ho ld the * key to open a list of special characters. Use th e Scroll k ey to scr oll through the list and press OK to select a chara cter . Or press and select In sert s ym bol .
[ 79 ] Messaging The predictive text input will tr y to guess which commonly used punctuation m ark ( .,?! â ) is needed . T he order and avai lability of the punctuation m arks depend on the language of the dictionar y . Press the * k ey repeatedly to view the matching words the dictionary has found one by one. Y ou can a lso pr ess , select Predictive tex t and select: ⢠Mat che s â to view a list of words that correspond to your key presses. Scroll to the de sired word and press the . ⢠Inse rt word â to add a word (max. 32 letters ) to the dictionar y by using traditional text input. When the dictionary becomes full, a new wor d replaces the oldest added word. ⢠Edi t wor d â to open a view wh ere you can e dit the wor d, available only if the word is active ( underlined). Write compound words Write the fir st half of a compound word and confirm it by pr essing . Write the last part of the compound wor d and complete the compound word by pressing the 0 k ey to add a sp ace . Tu rn off pred ictive text Press and select Pred icti ve te xt â Off to turn predictive text input off for all edi tors in the ph one. Editing option s When you p ress , th e following option s appear (de pending on th e editing mode and situation you are in): ⢠Predictive text (predictive text inpu t), Alpha mode (traditional t ext input), or Numbe r mode . ⢠Cut , Copyâ available only if text has been selected first. ⢠Pa s t e â available only when text has been either cut or copied to the clipboard. ⢠Inse rt num ber , Insert symbol . ⢠Writing languageâ changes the in put language for all edi tors in the phone. See â Phone settings â on p. 32 .
[ 80 ] ⢠COP Y T EX T If you want to copy te xt to the clipboard, the follow ing are the easiest methods: 1 To select letter s and words, press and h old . At the same time, press or . As the selection m oves, text is h ighlighted. T o select lines of text, press and hold . At the same time press or . 2 To end the selection, stop pressing the Scroll key . 3 To copy the text to clipboard, while still holdin g , press Co py . 4 Or , release and then press it on ce to open a list of editin g commands , for exa mple, Copy or Cu t . 5 If you want to r emove th e selected text from th e document, pr ess . 6 To ins ert the text i nto a document, press and hold and press P aste . Or , press once and select Pa s t e . ⢠CREATE AND SEND NEW MESSAGES Y ou can star t to create a mes sage in two ways: ⢠Select New messag e â Create:â Te x t message , Multimedia message , or E- mail in the M essaging main view . ⢠Start to create a message from an application that has the option Send . In this case the file that was selected (such a s an im age or text) is a dded to the mess age. Note: Whe n sen ding messa ges, your phone may display the wor ds Message Sent . This is an indication that the message has been sent by your ph one to the m essage center programmed into your phone. This is not an indication that t h e me ssage has be en rece iv ed at t he inten ded de stin atio n. For more deta i ls a bou t t he m ess agi ng s ervi ce s, c heck w it h y our se rvic e pro vider .
[ 8 1 ] Messaging ⢠T E XT MESSAGES Op tion s in t he te xt messag e edi tor are: Send , Add recipient , Insert , Delete , Message details , Sending options , Help , and Exi t . 1 Select New me ssa ge . A list of message options opens. 2 Select Cr ea te : â Text message . T he editor open s with the cursor in the To : fie ld. 3 Press to se lect recipients from the Contacts directory or write the phone number of the recipient. Press the # key to add a semicolon ( ; ) to separate each recipie nt. Press to move to the me ssage field. 4 Write th e mess age. Note: Y our phone suppor ts sending multiple text messages at t he s am e time; therefore, the normal 160 char acters limit for on e t ex t messa ge can be exceeded. If your tex t ex ceeds 160 char acters, it will be sent i n tw o o r mo r e me s sa g es a nd m e ss a ge s e nd in g m a y cost you more. In the n avigation bar , you can see th e message length i ndicator coun ti ng ba ckw ar ds fr om 16 0. F or examp l e, 1 0 (2) mea ns t ha t y ou can still add 1 0 characters for the text to be sent as two messages. 5 T o send th e message , select Optio ns â Send or press . Smart messages Smart messa ges are specia l text message s that ca n contain data . Y ou can se nd sm a rt me ss age s su c h as : ⢠Picture messages ⢠Busi ness c ards co nta ining co ntact info rmat ion in ge neric (v Card ) fo rmat ⢠Calendar n otes (v Calendar fo rmat) From the text me ssage editor , you m ay crate a sma rt message containing a picture (see â Create and send picture messa ges â on p. 82). For other types of sm art me ssages, s ee â Send contact information â on p. 56, â Send calendar ent ries â on p. 1 14, and â Send bookmarks â on p. 12 8. Y ou can also receive ringing tones, oper ator logos, or settings from service providers. See â Receive smart mes sages â on p. 90.
[ 82 ] Create and send picture messages Y our phone allows you t o send a nd receive picture m essages. Pictu re messages are text messages that contain small black-and-white graphics. Ther e are several def ault p ictures available in the Picture msg s. folder in Imag es . Note: This function can be used only if it is supported by your service provider . Only phones that offer picture message features can receive and display picture messages. T o send a picture message: 1 There are two possibili ties. Choose on e of the following: ⢠Select Messagi ng â New message â Create: â Text message , and then sele ct Opti on s â Inser t â Picture . ⢠Go to Images â Pict ur e m s gs . an d select a picture to be sent. Select Op ti ons â Sen d. 2 Enter recipien t information and add text. 3 Select Op ti ons â Send or pr ess . Note: Each picture message is made up of sever al text me ssages. Therefore, sending one picture message may cost m ore than sending one te xt message. ⢠MULTIMEDIA MESSAGES A multimedia m essage can contain text, images, and either video or s ound clips. Note: This function can be used only if it is supported by your service provider . Only de vices that offer compatible multimedia message or e- mail features can receive and display multimedia messa ges. Devices tha t don â t ha ve these f eatur es m ay rece ive details of a link to a w eb page.
[ 83 ] Messaging Settings needed for multimedia messaging Options in the multimedia message editor are: Send , A dd re cipient , Inse rt , Preview message , Objects , Rem o v e , Delete , Message de tails , Sending options , Help , an d Exit . Y ou ma y receive the se ttings as a smart messa ge fr om your serv ice provider . See â Receive sm art mess ages â on p. 90. For availability of and subscription to data services, ple ase contact your service provider . 1 Go to Setti ngs â Con nection settings â A ccess poin ts an d defi ne the settin gs for a multimedia messagin g access point: Conn ectio n na me â Give a descriptive name for the connection. Session mode â Se lect a data connection type: GSM da ta , High speed GSM , or GPR S . Gateway IP address â Enter the addr ess. Example: Doma in names su ch a s www .nokia.com can be tr anslate d into IP addresses like 192.1 00.124.1 95 . Homepage â Enter the addre ss of the multimedia messaging cen ter . ⢠If you selected GSM da ta or High sp eed GSM , fill in Dial-up numb er â a phone number for the data call. ⢠If you selected GPRS , fill in Access point nam e â the name given to you by your service provide r . For further in formation on differe nt data c onn ections, see also â Conn ect ion settin gs â on p. 36. 2 Go to Messag ing â Options â Settings â Multimedia message . 3 Op en Pref erre d conne ction and select the acce ss point you create d to be u sed as th e pref erred conn ection. Se e al so â Settin gs for multim edia messages â on p. 1 0 1.
[ 84 ] Set up the m essaging store The messaging store defines whether th e phone â s me mo ry or th e mem o ry card are used as def ault. To define the messaging store: Messag ing â Options â Settings â M essaging store and select either th e phone â s memory or th e memory car d, if on e is used. Create multimedia messages When you ar e sending a multimedia m essage to any phone other than the Nokia 3620 or Nokia 3660, it is recom mended to use a smaller image size and a sound clip that is n o longer th an 15 seconds. T he default setting is Image siz e: Small . If you want to check the image size setting, go to Messaging â O ptions â Settings â Multimedia message or select Opti on s â Sendin g options wh en you are creating a multimedia me ssage. When you are sending a multimedia message to an e-mail address or ano the r Nok ia 36 20 or Nok ia 3660, sel e ct Op t ions â Sendin g Options â Image size â Larg e when you are creating a multimedia m essage. 1 In Messaging , select New message â Cr e at e â Multimedia me ssage and press . 2 Press to s elect the recipient(s) from the Contacts directory or write the phone number or e-mail address of the recipient in the To : field. Add a semicolon (;) to separate each r ecipient. Press to move to th e next fiel d. 3 Y ou can add the different objects of the multimedia m essage in any order you want: ⢠T o add an image, sele ct Op t ions â In sert â Image or New image . ⢠T o add a sou nd, select Option s â Ins ert â Sound clip or Ne w so u nd clip . W hen sound h as been added, the icon is shown in th e navigation bar . ⢠T o add video, sele ct Op tion s â Insert â Video clip. ⢠T o write text, press . ⢠If you select Ins ert â Im age , Sound clip , Video clip , or T emplate , a list of item s opens. Scr oll to the i tem you wish to add and press Select .
[ 85 ] Messaging Note: If you ch ose Imag e , first you ne ed to selec t wh ethe r the image is stored in the phone â s me mor y or t he me mor y card, if one is used. ⢠If you select Ins er t â New im age , Camera opens and you can take a new pi cture. Press Remov e to remove the pictu re and take another instead. ⢠If you select Ins er t â New s ound clip , Re corder o pens a nd you can record a new sound. The new photo or sound is automatically saved and a copy is inserted i n the message. Note: A multimedia m essage can contain on ly one photo and one sound or video clip. 4 T o send th e message , select Optio ns â Send or press . Preview a multimedia m essage T o see what th e multimedia message will look like, select Opti ons â Preview message . Remove object from a multimedia message T o remove a multimedia object, select Opti on s â Remo ve â Im age Video clip or Sound clip . Press to remove tex t. W o rk with different multimedia objects T o see all the different me dia objects included i n a multimedia message, open a multimedia message and select Opt i ons â Objects to open the Objects view . In the Ob jects view , you can change the order of the dif ferent obje cts, delete objects, or open an object in a cor responding application. Optio ns in the O bject s view a re: Ope n , Inse rt , Place image f irst / Place text first , Remov e , Help , and Ex it .
[ 86 ] ⢠E-MAIL MESSAGES Before you can send, r eceive, r etrieve, reply to, and for ward e-mail messa ges, you mus t: ⢠Configure an Internet Access P oint (IAP) correctly . See â Connection settings â on p. 36. ⢠Define your e-mail settings correctly . See â S ettings for e-mail â on p. 1 03. Note: Follow the instructions given by your remote m ailbox and Internet Ser vice Provider . Write and send e-mail messages Opti ons i n th e e- mail ed itor are: Send , A dd rec ipie nt , Insert , Attachments , Delete , Message details , Sending options , Help , and Exi t . 1 Select New messag e â Create:â E-mail . The editor opens. 2 P ress to sele ct the rec ipien t(s) from th e Co ntac ts directo ry or write the e -mai l address of the rec ipien t in t he To : f ie ld. A dd a sem ic o lon (;) to s ep a rat e ea ch re ci p ie nt. 3 If you want to send a copy of your e-mail to som eone, write the addre ss in the Cc: field. Press to move to the next f ield. 4 Write th e mess age. 5 If you want to add an attachment to the e-mail, select Option s â Inse rt â Image , Sound clip , Video clip , or Note . ⢠will appear in th e navigation bar to indicate that the e-mail has an attachment. T emplate adds pre-written text to the e-mai l. ⢠Y ou can a lso add a n attac hment to a n e-mail by selecting Opti on s â At tachmen ts in an open e-mail. The Attachments view opens where you ca n add, v iew , and remove atta chments. ⢠T o remove an attachment, scroll to the attachment and select Opti on s â Remove . ⢠If you choose to attach an Image , f irst you need to sele ct whethe r the image is stored in the phone â s me mor y or th e me m ory car d, if one is used .
[ 87 ] Messaging 6 To send the e-mail, select Options â Send or press . E-mail m essages are autom atica lly place d in Ou tbox be fore sendin g. I n case something goes wrong wh ile the ph one is sending the e -mail, the e-mail is le ft in Outbox with th e status Failed . If you want to send files othe r than photos, sounds, and notes as attachments, open the appropriate application and select the option Send â Via e-mai l , if available. Add and remove atta chments T o add an attach ment to an e-mail, select Op ti ons â Attachments in an open e- mail. The Attachme nts view opens where you can add, view , and remove a ttachment s. ⢠T o add an att achme nt, select Op ti ons â In sert â Image , Sound clip, Video clip , or Note . A list of ite ms opens. Scroll to the one you want to add an d press OK . will appear in the navigation bar to indicate that the e-mail has an attachment. ⢠If you choose Image , first you n eed to select whether the im age is stored in the phone â s me mory or the memory card, if one is u sed. ⢠T o remove an attachment, scroll to the attachment and select Opti on s â Remove . ⢠INBOX Optio ns in Inbo x are: Op en , C reate message , Delete , Me ssage details , Mov e to folder , Mo ve to phone m emory (sho wn i f y ou h ave def ine d the memo ry car d as th e messaging store) , Move to mem ory card (shown if you have de fined the ph one â s m emor y as the m essa ging store), Mark / Unma rk , Help , and Exi t . Messages an d data c an be received by text message, m ultimedia service, infrared con nection, or Blueto oth connection. W hen ther e ar e unread messages in Inbox, the icon chan ges to .
[ 88 ] In Inbox, unre ad messages appear in bold. The message icons tell you what kind of a message it is. Here are some of the icons that you may see: View messages T o open a message, scroll to the m essage and press . Use th e Scr oll key to move up and down in the message. Press or to move to the previous or next message in the fol der . Options in different message viewers The available options depend on the type of message you have opene d for viewing: ⢠Save pictureâ saves the pictur e to Images â Picture msgs. ⢠Replyâ copi es the addre ss of the sender to the To : fiel d. Select Reply â To a l l to copy the address of the sender and Cc field recipients to the new m essa ge. ⢠Forwardâ cop ies the me ssage conten ts to an editor . ⢠Callâ call by pressing . ⢠View imageâ allo ws you to view and save the image. ⢠Play sound clip â allows you to listen to the sound in the message. ⢠Objectsâ shows you a list of all the different multimedia objects in a multimedia m essage. ⢠Attachmentsâ sh ows you a list of files sent as e-mail attachments. for an u nr ea d text me ssa ge for an un read sm art message for an u nread multimedia message for an unre ad se rv ice me ss age for data received by in frared for data receive d by Bluetooth connection for an unknown me ssage type
[ 89 ] Messaging ⢠Message detailsâ shows detailed information abou t a m essage. ⢠Mo v e to folder / Co py t o fol der â allows you t o move or copy message (s) to My folders, Inbox, or other folders you have created. See â Move items to a f older â on p. 18 . ⢠A dd to Contacts â allows you to copy the phone n umber or e-mail address of the m essage sender to the Contacts dir ectory . Choose wh ether you want to create a new c ontac t card or add the i nform ation to an existing con tact car d. ⢠Findâ searches th e mes sage for phone n umber s, e- mail addre sses, an d Internet address es. Af ter t he search, you ca n ma ke a ca ll or send a message to the found number or e-m ail address, or save the data to Contacts or as a bookmark. View multimedia messages Y ou can recognize m ultimedia messages by their icon . T o open a multimedia message, scroll to it and press . Y ou can see an image, read a message and hear a sound, simultaneously . If sound is playing , press or to increase or decrease the sound volume. If you want to mute the sound, press St o p . MULTI MEDIA MESSAG E O BJECTS Optio ns in the O bject s view a re: Ope n , Save , Send , Call , and Exit . T o see what kinds of media objects have been included in the multimedia messa ge, open the me ssage and select Optio ns â O bjects . In the O bjects view y ou can vie w files t hat have been in clud ed in the multim edia m essage. Y ou can choose to save the file in your phone or to send it, for example , by infrared to another device. T o open a file, scroll to it and press the . Wa r n i n g : Multimedia message objects may contain viruses or otherwise be harmful to your ph one or PC. Do n ot open any attach ment if you ar e not su re of th e trustwort hiness of the sender . For mo re info rma tion, s ee â Certificate ma nagementâ on p. 46.
[ 90 ] Example: Y ou can open a vCard file and save the contact information in the file to Contacts. SOUND S IN A MULTIMED IA MESSAGE Sound objects in a multimedia me ssage are indicated by the in dicator in the navigatio n bar . Sou nds are by defaul t played through the loudspeaker . To stop the sound, pr ess Stop while sound is playing. Y ou can change the volume level b y pressing or . If you want to listen to a sou nd again after all the obje cts have be en shown and the playing of th e sound has stopped, select Op tion s â Play so und c lip . Receive smart messages If you receive a vCard file th at has a picture attach ed, the picture will be saved to Con tacts as well. Y our phone can receive ma ny kinds of smar t messag es, text mes sages that contain data ( also call ed Over-The-A ir (OT A) messages). To open a receive d smart message, open I nbox, scroll to the sm art message ( ), and press . ⢠Picture messageâ to sav e th e picture in the Picture ms gs. folder in Images for la ter us e, select Op tio ns â Save picture. ⢠Bu siness ca rd â to save t he contact in formation, select Op tions â Save business card . If certificat es or sound files ar e attach ed to business cards, th ey will not be saved. ⢠Ringing tone â to save the r inging tone to Composer , select Opti on s â Save . ⢠Operator logoâ to save the logo, select Opti on s â Save . The operator logo can now be s een in the stan dby mode instead of the service provider â s own identification. ⢠Calendar entry â to save th e invitation to Calendar , select Op tion s â S av e to Ca lendar . ⢠WAP m e s s a g e â to save the bookmark, select Op tio ns â Save to bookmarks . The bookmark is added to th e Bookmarks list in browser service.
[ 9 1 ] Messaging ⢠E-mail notifica tion â Tells yo u ho w ma ny n ew e- mail s y ou hav e i n your remote mailbox. An extended notification m ay list m ore detailed information such as subject, sender , attachments, and so on. If the message con tains both browser access poin t settings and bookmar ks, to save the data select Options â Save all . Or , sel ec t Op tions â Vi e w details to view t he bookmark a nd access point infor mation separa tely . If you do n ot want to save all data, sele ct a setting or bookmark, open the details and select Option s â Save to Settings or Save to bookmarks depending on what you are view ing. T o later change th e default access point settings for br owser service or multimedia me ssaging, go to Se rv ic e s â Opt ion s â Settingsâ Default access poin t or Messaging â Optionsâ Settingsâ Multimedia message â Preferred conn ection . In addition, you can receive a text message service number , voice mailbox number , profile settings for r emote synchronizat ion, access point settings for the browser , multimedia m essaging or e-mail, access point login script settings, or e-mail settings. To sa ve the settings, select Opti on s â Sav e to SMS s ett. , Save to V oice m ail , S ave to settings , or Save to e-mail sett. . Service messages Optio ns when viewing se rvice messa ge are: Do wnload message , Mov e t o folder , Message details, Help , and Ex it . Y ou can or der service m essages (pus hed messages) f rom service prov iders. Service messages are notifications of, fo r example, n ews headlines and they may contain a tex t message or address of a browser service. For availability and subscription, contact your service pr ovider . Service provider s can update an existing service message every ti me a new service m essage is received. Messages can be updated eve n if you have moved them to another f older than I nbox. When service messages expire, they are deleted au tomatically . VIEWING SERVI CE ME SSAGES IN IN BOX 1 In In box, scroll to a service m essage ( ) and press .
[ 92 ] 2 To download or view the service, press Downlo ad m essage . The note Do wnloading message is displayed. Th e phone starts to make a data connection, if ne eded. 3 Press Back to return to Inbox. VIEWING SERVI CE ME SSAGES IN THE BR OWSER When you are brows ing, sele ct Options â Read service msgs. to download and view new service messages. ⢠MY FOLDERS Op ti on s in M y fo ld er s are : Open , N ew message , Delete , Message details , Move to folder , New folder , Ren ame , Help , a n d Exit . In My folders you can organize your messages into folder s, create n ew folders, and rename and delete folders. Sele ct Options â Mo ve to folder , New f older , or Rena me folder . For more in form atio n, s e e â Move items to a folder â on p. 18 . Tem p l a t e s f o ld e r Y ou can use text templates to avoid rewriting messages that you send often. To create a new template, select Op ti ons â New template . ⢠REMOTE MAILBOX Select New messag e â Create:â E-mail or Mailbox in the Messaging main view . If you have not set up you r e-mail account, you will be prompted to do so. See â Settings for e- mail â on p. 1 03. When you o pen this folder , you can con nect to your remote mailbox to: ⢠Retrieve new e-mail headings or m essages. ⢠View your pr eviously retrieved e-mail headi ngs or messages offline. The Settings wi zard program included in the PC Suite can help you configure access point and mailbox settings. Y ou can also copy e xisting settings, for ex ample, from your com puter to your phone. See the CD-ROM supplied in the sales package.
[ 93 ] Messaging When you create a new m ailbox, the n ame yo u give to the m ailbox automatically replaces Mailbox in the Messaging main view . Y ou can have seve ral m ailboxes (m ax. six) . Open the mailbox When you o pen the mailbox, you can choose wh ether yo u want to view the previously retrieved e -mail me ssages and e-mail headings offlin e or connect to th e e-m ail s erver . When you s croll to your mailbox and press , the ph one asks you if you want t o Connect to mailb ox? . Select Ye s to con nect to your mailbox or No to view previously r etrieved e-ma il messages offline. Another way to star t a co nnection is t o select Optio ns â Connect. VIEW E-M AIL MESSAGES WHEN ONLI NE When you are onlin e, you are c on tinuousl y connect ed t o a remote m ailbo x by a data call or a packet data connection. See also â Data connection indicators â on p. 14, â GSM data calls â on p. 37, and â G PRS P acket data â on p. 38. Note: If you are us ing the PO P3 protocol , e-m ail messages are not up da t ed automatically in online m ode. To see the ne west e-mail messa ges, you need to disconn ect an d then make a new connection to your mailbox. Optio ns when vie wing e- mail head ings are: Open , N ew message, Connect / Disconnect , Retrieve , Dele te , Message details , Copy , Mar k/ Unma rk , Help , and Exi t . VIEW E-M AIL MESSAGES WHEN OFFLI NE When you view e- mail messages offline, you r phone is n ot connected to the remote mailbox. This mode may help you to save on conn ection costs. T o view e-mail messages offline, you must first retrieve e-mail messages from your mail box, see the next section . After you have retr ieved the e-mail messages to your ph one, to e nd the data connection, select Opti on s â Disconnect .
[ 94 ] Now you can contin ue reading th e retrieved e-mail headings and/or th e retrieved e-mail m essages offline. Y ou can write new e -mail messages, reply to the retrieved e-mail messages, and forward e-mail messa ges. Y ou can order the e-mail messa ges to be sent the next time you connect to the mailbox. When you open Mailbox the next time a nd you want to view and read the e -mail messages offline, answer No to the Connect to mailbox? quer y . Retrieve e-mail messages from the mailbox If you are offline, select Option s â Conn ect to s tart a connection to a remote mailbox. The remote mailbox view is simil ar to the Inbox f older in Messaging. Y ou can move up and down in the list by pressing or . T he following icons are used to sh ow the status of th e e-mail: â new e-mail (offline or online mode). The content has not been retrieved from the mailbox to your phone (the arrow in the icon is pointing outwards). â new e -mail, the content has been retrieved from the mailbox (arrow pointing inwards). â for e-ma il messages th at have been re ad. â for e -mail headings that h ave been read and the message con tent has been deleted from the phone. 1 When you have an open connection to a remote mailbox, select Opti on s â Re trieve , ⢠Newâ to retr ieve all new e- mail messages to your phon e. ⢠Selectedâ to retrieve only th e e -mail messa ges tha t h ave bee n selected. Use the Mar k/ Unma rk â Mark / Unm ark commands to select messages on e by one. See â Mar k multiple items â on p. 18 for info rmation on how to select m any items at the same time.
[ 95 ] Messaging ⢠All â to retrieve all messages from the mailbox. T o cancel retrieving, press Cancel . After you have retrieved the e-mail messages, you can continue viewing th em online. 2 Select Opti ons â Disconnect to close the connection and to view t he e-mail messages offline. COPY E- MAIL MESSA GES TO ANOT HER FOL DER If you want to copy an e-mail from th e rem ote mailbox to a fol der under My f olders, sele ct Op tions â Copy . Select a f older from th e li st and press OK . Open e-mail messages When you are vie wing e- mail messages either i n online or offline mode, scroll to the e-mai l you want to vie w and press to ope n it. If the e-ma il message has not been retrieved (arrow in the icon is poin ting outwards) and you are offline an d select Open , you will be asked if you want to retrieve this m essage from the mailbox. Note that the data connection is left ope n after th e e-mail has been retr ieved. Se lect Options â Disco nnect to end the data conn ection. Optio ns when vie wing a n e-mai l messag e are: Reply , Forward , De lete , Attachments , Message d etails , Mo ve to folder , Add to Contacts , Find , Help , an d Exit . Disconnect from mailbox When you are on line, select Op t ions â Disconnect to end the data call or GPRS conn ection to the r emote mailbox. Se e also â Data connection indicators â on p. 14. View e-mail attachments Op ti on s in th e At ta ch me nt s vie w are : Ope n , Re trie ve , Save , Sen d , De lete , Help , and Exit .
[ 96 ] Open a message that has the attachment indicato r and select Op ti ons â Attachments to open the Attachments view . In the Attachments view , you ca n retri ev e, open , or sav e atta chm ent s. Y ou can also send atta chm ent s by infrared or Blu etooth connection. Wa r n i n g : E-mail attachme nts may contain viru ses or otherwise be harmful to you r phone or PC. Do not open any a ttachment if you are not s ure of the tru stwort hiness of t he sender . For more information, see â Certificate management â on p. 46 . Retr ieve a ttac hmen ts to the phone If the attachment h as a dimmed indicator , it has n ot been retrieved to the phone. T o retrieve the a ttachment, s croll to it an d select Options â Re trieve . Note: If y our mailbox uses the IMAP 4 protocol, you can decide wheth er to retrieve e-mail headings only , messag es only , or messages and attach ments. With the PO P3 protocol, the options ar e e-mail headin gs only or m essages and attachment s. For further i nformation , see â Settings for e-mail â on p. 1 0 3. T o save memory , you can remove attach ments from an e-mail while retaining them on the e- mail se rver . Select Options â Delete in the Attach ments v iew . Open an attachment 1 In the Atta chments view , scroll to an attach ment and press to open it. ⢠If you are online, the attachment is retrieved di rectly from the server and open ed in the cor responding application. ⢠If you ar e offline, the phone asks if you want to r etrieve the attachment to the phone. I f you answer Ye s , a connection to th e remote mailbox is sta rted. 2 Press Back to return to the e -mail viewer . Supported image formats are listed on p. 59. T o see a lis t of oth er file formats su pported by the Nokia 3620 and Nokia 3660, see the pr oduct information a t www .no kia.com .
[ 97 ] Messaging SAVE ATTA CHMENT S SEPA RATE LY T o save an attach ment, select Op ti ons â Save in the Attach ments view . The attach ment is s aved in t he corresponding applicat ion. For example, sounds can be saved in Recorder and text files (.T XT) in Note s. Attachments such as images can be saved on a m emor y card, if one is use d. Delete e -mail messages T o delete an e-mail fr om the phone while still retaining it in the remote mailbox, select Op ti ons â Dele te â Ph one only . Note: The ph one mir ror s the e- mail he adings in the remote mailbox . So, although you dele te the message conten t, the e -mail heading stays in you r phone. I f you want to remove the heading as well, you have to first delete the e-mail message from your r emote mailbox and then make a con nection from yo ur phone to the rem ote ma ilbox again to update the status. T o delete an e-mail f rom both the phone and the remote mailbox, select Opti on s â Del ete â Phone an d server . Note: If you are of fline, the e-mail w ill be delete d first f rom your phone. During the next con nection to the remote mailbox, it will be automatically deleted from the remote mailbox. If you are using the POP3 protocol, messages marked to be de leted are removed only after you have closed the con nection to the rem ote mailbox. UNDEL ETE E-MAIL MESSAG ES WHEN OFFLI NE T o cancel deleting an e-mail fr om both the phone and serv er , scroll to an e-mail that has been marked to be deleted during the next connection ( ), and select Opt ions â Undelete . ⢠OUTBOX The Outbox is a tem porary storage place for messa ges waiting to be sent. Status of the messages in Outbox is displayed as follows: ⢠Sending â A connection is being made and the message is being sent.
[ 98 ] ⢠W a iting/Q ueued â Fo r exampl e, if there are two s imilar types o f messages in Outb ox, one of them is waitin g unti l the first one is sen t. ⢠Resen d at (time)â Sen ding has failed. The phone w ill try to send the message again after a time-out period. Press Se n d if y ou want to restart the sending immediately . ⢠Deferred â Y ou can set documen ts to be â on hold â while they are in Outbox. Scroll to a message that is being sen t and select Opti ons â Defer sending . ⢠F ailed â The maximum number of sending att empts has been reached. Sending ha s failed. If you we re tr ying to send a text m essage, open the message and check that the Sen ding settings are correct. Example: Messages are pla ced in th e Outbox, for exampl e, w hen you r phone is outside th e system coverage area. Y ou can al so schedule e -mail messages to be sent the next time you connect to your remote mailbox. ⢠VIEW MESSAGES ON A SIM CARD Before you can view SIM messages, you need to copy th em to a folder in your phone. 1 In the Messaging main view , select Op ti ons â SIM m essages . 2 Selec t Options â Mark/ Unmark â Mark or Mark all to mark me ssages. 3 Select Op ti ons â Copy . A list of folders opens. 4 Select a folder a nd press OK . Go to th e folder to view the messages. ⢠CELL BROADCAST (SYSTEM SERVICE) Op ti on s in C ell br oa dca st ar e: Op en , Subscribe / Unsubscribe , Hotmark / Unho tm ark , Topic, Settings, Help , an d Exit . In the Messaging main view , select Op ti ons â Ce ll broadcast . Y ou can receive m essages on various topics, such as weather or traffic conditions from your service pr ovider . For available topics and relevant topic n umbers, contact your service p rovider . In the main view you can see :
[ 99 ] Messaging ⢠The status of the topic: â for new , subscr ibed mess ages and â for new , unsubscribed m essages. ⢠The topic nu mber , topic name, an d whether it has been flagged ( ) for follow-up. Y ou will be n otified when messages belonging to a flagged topic have arrived. Note: A packet data ( GPRS) connection may prevent cell broadcas t reception . Contact your service p rovider for the correct GPRS settings. For f urthe r inf orm ation on the GPRS settin gs, see â GPRS P acket data â on p. 38. ⢠SERV ICE COMMA ND EDITOR In the Messagi ng main view , selec t Options â Service co mma nd. Y ou can send service requests, such as activation commands for system services (also known as USSD comman ds), to your service provider . F or more information, contac t your service provider . To send a request in the standby mode o r wh en you have an active call, key in the command number(s) a nd press Se nd . If yo u need to enter letters as well as number s, select Messag ing â Options â Service com mand . ⢠MESSAGING SETTINGS The Messaging settings ar e divided into gr oups according to the different message types. Scroll to the settings you want to edit and press . Settings for text messages Optio ns when ed iti ng text message cent er sett ings a re: New msg. center , Edit , Delete, Help , and Ex it . Go to Messag ing and select Opti ons â Settin gs â T ex t message to open the following list of settin gs: ⢠Me ssa ge cent e rs â Li sts all the text mess age se rvice centers that hav e been d efin ed. Se e â Add a new text message center â on p. 1 0 0. ⢠Msg. center in use (Mess age center in use) â Define s which mess age center is used for delivering text messages and s mart messages su ch as pict ure mess ages.
[ 1 00 ] ⢠Receive r eport (delivery report)â When this system s ervice is set to Ye s , the s ta t us o f th e se n t m es sag e ( P ending , Fai le d , Delivered ) is shown in the Log. ⢠Message validityâ I f the r ecipient of a m essage cannot be reached within the validity pe riod, the m essage is removed from the text message service ce nter . Note that the system must support this fe atu re . M axi mum t ime is the m aximum amount of time allowed by th e sy s t em . ⢠Mes sage sent as â The options are Te x t , Fax , P aging , and E-mail . For further information, contact your service provider . Note: C hange th is option only if you are sure th at your service cente r is able to convert te xt messages into these oth er form ats. ⢠Preferred connection â Y ou can send tex t messages by the normal GSM system or by GPRS, if supported by the system. See â GPRS P acket data â on p. 38. ⢠Reply via s ame ctr . (system se rvice) â By setting this option to Ye s , if the recipient replies to your message, the return message is sent using the same text message s ervice center number . Note that this may not work betw een all oper ators. ADD A NEW TEXT ME SSAGE C ENTER 1 Open Message center s and select Op ti ons â New msg. center . 2 Press , w rite a name for the service center and press OK . 3 Press , press and write the number of the text messa ge service center ( Must be defi ned ). Press OK . Y ou need the message center number to sen d text and picture messa ges. Y ou can get th e number from your serv ice provider . T o use the n ew settings, go back to the settings vi ew and scroll to Msg. center in use . Press and s elect the new s ervice center .
[ 101 ] Messaging Settings for multi media messages Go to Messag ing and select Op ti ons â Settings â Multimedia message to open the f ollowing list of settings: ⢠Preferred connection ( Mu st b e de fin ed )â Select wh ich access point is u sed as the preferred connection for th e multimedia messa ge center . See â Settin gs for multimedia messages â on p. 1 0 1. Note: If you receive multimedia messa ge settings in a smart message and save the m, the re ceived setti ngs are automa tically us ed for the P refe rred c onne cti on. S ee â Receive smart me ssages â on p. 90. ⢠Secondary conn.â Select which access point is used a s the secondary connection for th e multimedia message cente r . Note: Both Prefe rred c onne ction an d S eco n dar y c onn . mu st hav e the same Homepage sett in g poin ting to t he sam e m ultime dia se rvic e c en ter . On ly the da ta c on nect ion is di ffer ent. Example: If your pr eferred conne ction uses a packet data connection, you may want to us e high -spee d data or data cal l for the secon dary c onnectio n. This way you ar e able to s end and receive multimedia me ssages even when you are n ot in a system that supports packet data. For availability of and subscription to data services, ple ase contact your service provider . See also â Data connections and a ccess points â on p. 36. ⢠Multimedia receptionâ Select: ⢠Only in home net. â if you want to receive multimedia messages only when you are in your h ome syste m. When you are outside your home system, m ultimedia message reception is turned off. ⢠Alw ays o n â if you wan t to receive multime dia messages always . ⢠Off â if you do n ot want t o receive multimedia messages or advertisements at all. Note: When you a re ou tside your h ome s yste m, sendi ng a nd recei ving multi media mes sages ma y cost more. If th e sett ings Only in home net. or Always on have bee n selected, your phone can make an active data call or GPRS con nection without your knowle dge.
[ 1 0 2 ] ⢠On receiving msg. â Select: ⢠Retr . immediately â if you want the phone to retrieve multimedia message s instan tly . If there are message s with Defe rred status, they will be retrieved as well. ⢠Defe r re trieva l â if you wan t the multimedia m essaging center to save the m essage to be retrieved later . T o retr ieve the messa ge later , set On receiving m sg. to Retr . immediately . ⢠Reject me ssag eâ if you want to reject multimedia messages. The multimedia m essaging center will delete the messages. ⢠Allow anon. messa ges â Sel ec t No , if yo u want to rej ect mes sage s coming from an anonymous sender . ⢠Receive adverts â Define w hether you want to receive multimedia message adve rtiseme nts or not. ⢠Reportsâ Set to Ye s , if you wan t the st atus of th e sent message ( P ending , F ailed , Delivered ) to be shown in the Log. When set to No , only the status Deli vered is shown in the Log. See â Lo gâ Call log and general l og â on p. 26. ⢠Deny report s ending â C hoose Ye s , if you do not want your phone to send delivery report s of received multimedia messages. ⢠Message validityâ If the recipient of a message can not be reached with in the vali dit y peri od, th e messag e is remove d from th e mu ltimedia messaging center . Note th at the system m ust support this feature. Maxi mum time is the maxim um amount of time allow ed by the system . ⢠Image s ize â Define the size of th e image in a multimedia me ssage. The options are: Sm all (max. of 160* 120 pi xels) and La r ge (max. 640* 48 0 pi xels ). ⢠Speakerâ Choo s e Loud spea ker o r Norma l , if you w ant the sounds in a multimedia message to be played through the loudspeaker or th e earpie ce. For m ore infor mation , see â Loudsp eake r â on p. 19 .
[ 1 03 ] Messaging Settings for e-mail Go to Messagin g and select Option s â Settings â E-mail . Optio ns when e diting e-mail setti ngs a re: Editing options , Ne w mailbox , Delete , Call , a nd Ex i t . Open Mailbox in use to sel ect which mailbox you w ant to u se. Settings for Mailboxes Select Mailboxe s to open a list of mailboxes that h ave been defi ned. If n o mailboxes have been defined, you will be prompted to do so. The following list of settings is shown: ⢠Mailbox nameâ Write a descriptive n ame for the m ailbox. ⢠Access point in use ( Must b e de fin ed ) â The Internet Access P oint (IAP) used f or the mailbox. Choose an IAP f rom the list. For more information on how to create an IAP , see also â Connection settings â on p. 36. ⢠My mail address ( Mus t be defi n ed)â Write the e- mail address given to you by your s ervice provider . The address must con tain t he @ symbol. Replies to you r messages a re sent to th is address . ⢠Outgoing mail server ( Must be defined ) â Write the IP address or host name of the c om puter th at se nds yo u r e-m ai l. ⢠Send message â Defin e how e-mail is sen t from your phone . Immedi ately â A connection to the mailbox is started immediately after you have selected Se nd . Dur i ng ne xt con n. â E-mail is sent when you c onnec t to your re mote mailbox the next time. ⢠Send copy to self â Se le ct Ye s to save a copy of the e-mail to your remote mailbox and to the a ddress defined in My mail a ddress . ⢠Inc lude si gn atur e â Select Ye s if you want to attach a signature to your e-mail messa ges and to start to write or edit a signature text. ⢠User n ameâ Write yo ur user name, given to you by your service provider .
[ 1 04 ] ⢠Pa s s w o r d â Write your password. If you leave this field blank, you will be pr ompted for the password when you try to conn ect to your remote mailbox. ⢠Incoming mail se rver ( Mu st be defi n ed) â The IP address or h ost name of the com puter th at receives your e-mail. ⢠Mailbox typeâ Defines the e- mail protocol your remote mailbox service provider recommends. The options ar e POP3 and IM AP4 . Note: This setting ca n be selected only on ce and cannot be changed if you have saved or exited from the m ailbox settings. ⢠Securityâ Used wi th the POP3, I MAP4, and SMTP protocols to secure the connection to the remote m ailbox. ⢠APOP secure login â Used with the POP3 protocol to e ncrypt the sending of passwords to the remote e-ma il server . Not shown if IMAP4 is selected f or Mailbox type: . ⢠Retrieve atta chment (not shown if the e-mail prot ocol is set to POP3) â T o retrieve e-mail with or without attach ments. ⢠Retrieve header s â T o limit the n umber of e-mail h eaders you want to retrieve to your phone. The options are All and User def in ed . Used with IMAP4 protocol only . Settings for service messages When yo u g o to Messaging an d select Options â Settingsâ Se r v ic e message , the followin g list of settings opens: ⢠Service messages â Choose whether or not you want to re ceive se rvi ce me ss a ges . ⢠Authentic. need edâ Choose if you want to receive service messages only from a uthorized sources.
[ 1 05 ] Messaging Settings for Cell broadc ast Check with your ser vice provider to see if Cell broadcast is available and what topics a nd numbers are available. Go to Messagin g â Options â Settings â C ell broadcast to change the setti ngs: Reception â On or Off . ⢠Lang ua ge â All allows you to r eceive cell broadcast messages in every possible language. Selected allows you to ch oose in which lang uages you wish to receive cell broadcast me ssages. If the language you want could not be f ound in the list, sele ct Oth er . ⢠T opic detection â If you receive a messa ge that does not belong to any of the existing topics, Topic d etect io n â On allows you to save the topic number automatically . The topic number is saved to the topic list and shown without a name. Ch oose Off if you do not want to save new topic numbers automatically . Settings for the S ent folder Go to Messa ging and select Opti ons â Settingsâ Sent folder to open the following list of settings: ⢠Save sent me ssage s â Choose if you wan t to save a copy of every text message, multimedia message, or e-mail that you have sent to the Sent items folder . ⢠No. of saved msgs .â D efine how many sent messages will be saved to the Sent items f older at a tim e. The default limit is 20 messa ges. When the limit is reached, the oldest message is deleted. ⢠Me mor y i n u s e â Define memory store. Choices are phoneâ s me mo ry or memory card, if one is use d.
[ 1 06 ] 1 0 Profil es Go to Menu â Profiles . In Profile s, you can adjust and customize the phone tones for di fferent e vents, enviro nments, or caller groups. There are f ive preset profiles: Normal , S ilent , Meeting , Outdoor , and Pa g e r , which you can customize to meet your needs. Y ou can see t he cu rrently sel ected p rofile at the top of the di spla y in the stan dby mo de. If the No rm a l prof i le is in use , on ly th e cu rr en t da te is shown. The tones can be default r inging tones, tone s c r e a t e d in C o mp o se r , t o ne s r e ceived in a message, or transfer red to your phon e by infrared, PC, or Bl ue t o o t h connection and then saved to your phone. ⢠CHANGE THE PROFILE 1 Go to Menu â Pr ofiles . A lis t of profiles opens. 2 In the Profiles list, scroll to a profile and select Options â A ctivate . Shortcut: T o change the profile, press in the stan dby mode. Scroll to the profile you wan t to a ctivate and press OK . ⢠CUSTOMIZE PR OFILES 1 To modify a profile, scroll to the profi le in the Pr ofiles list and select Opti on s â Customiz e . A list of pr ofil e settin gs open s.
[ 1 0 7 ] Profiles 2 Scroll to th e setting you want to change and press to open the following choices: ⢠Ringing tone â T o set th e ringing tone f or voice calls, choose a ringing tone from the list. Whe n you scroll through th e list, you can stop on a ton e to listen to it before you make your selection. Press any key to s top the sou nd. If a memory ca rd is u sed, tones stored on it have the icon next to th e tone na me. Ringing tones use s hared m emo ry . See â Sha red memo ry â on p. 20. Note: Y ou can change ringing tones in two places: Prof iles or Co n ta c t s . S e e â Add a ringing tone for a contact card or grou p â on p. 56. ⢠Ringing op tionsâ When Ascending is selected, the ringing volume starts from level one and in creases level by le vel to the set volume level. ⢠Ringing volumeâ To set the volume le vel for the r inging and message alert tones. ⢠Message alert tone â T o set the ton e for messages. ⢠Vibrating aler t â To set the phone to vibrate at in coming voice calls a nd mess ages. ⢠Ke y p a d to n e s â To set the volume level for keypad tones. ⢠War ni n g t o n e s â T he phone sounds a war ning tone, f or ex ample, when the battery is running out of pow er . ⢠Ale rt for â To set the pho ne to ring only upon calls from phone numbers that belong to a selected contact group. Ph one calls coming from people outside the selected gr oup will have a silent alert. The ch oices are All calls / (list of contact groups, if you have created them) . See â Create contact groups â on p. 57. ⢠Profile nameâ Y ou can rename a profile with any name you want. The Normal profile cannot be renamed.
[ 1 08 ] 11 F a v o r i t e s Go to Menu â Fa v o r i t e s . Y ou can use F avorites to store shortcuts, links to your favorite photos, video clip s, notes, Recorder sound files, br owser bookmarks, and saved browser pa ges. The default s hortcuts are: â opens the Notes editor â opens the Calendar with the cu rrent date selected â open s the M essaging Inbox Optio ns in the Favorit es mai n view a re: Open , Edit shortcut n ame , Delete shortcut , Move , List view / Grid view , Help , and Exit . ⢠ADD SHORTCUTS Shortcuts can be added only f rom the individual applica tions. Not a ll applications have this f unctionality . 1 Open the application and scroll to the item that you want to add as a short cut to F avori tes. 2 Select Op ti ons â A dd to F avorites and press OK . Note: A shortcut in Fa vorites is au tomatically u pdated if you move the item it is pointing to, for e xample, from on e folder to another .
[ 1 09 ] Fa v o r i t e s ⢠SH ORTC U T OPT I ON S ⢠T o op en a s hor tcu t , scroll to the icon and press . T he file is opened in the cor responding application. ⢠T o delete a shor tcut , scroll to the shortcut you want to r emove and se lec t Opti ons â Delete s hor tcut . Removing a shortcut does not affect the f ile it is r eferring to. ⢠T o ch ange the short cut heading , se le ct Options â Edit sh ortcut nam e . Write the new name. This change a ffects only the s hortcut, not the file or item the sho rtcut refers to .
[ 1 1 0 ] 1 2 C a l e n d a r a n d T o - d o Go to Menu â Calendar . Note: Y our phone m ust be switched on to use this function. Do n ot switch the phone on wh en wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause inter ference or danger . Optio ns when edi ti ng a calendar entry a re: Delete , Send , Help , an d Ex it . In Calen dar , you can keep track o f your appointment s, meetings, bi rthdays, anniversaries, and other events. Y ou can also set a calendar alarm to remind you o f upcomi ng event s. Cal e n dar uses s ha re d m em ory . Se e â Shared memor yâ on p. 20. ⢠CREATE CA LENDAR E NTRIES 1 Select Op ti ons â New en try and select from the following options: ⢠Me eti ng to r emi nd you of a n appointment that has a specific date and time. ⢠Me mo to wr ite a general entry for a d ay . ⢠Anniversary to remin d you of birthday s or specia l dates. An niversary entries are repeated every year . 2 Fill in the fiel d s (see â C alend ar entry f ields â o n p. 1 1 1). U se the Scr oll key to m ove between fields. Press the # key to change betw een up per and lower case . 3 T o save the entry , press Done . Edit calendar entries 1 In the Day view , scroll to the en try and press to open it. 2 Edit the en try fields and pr ess Don e .
[ 111 ] Calendar and To-do ⢠If you are editing a repeated en try , choose how you w ant the changes to take effect: All occurrences â all repeated entries are ch anged / This entry only â only the current entry will be changed. Delete c alendar entries ⢠In the Day view , scroll to the entry you want to delete and select Opti on s â Del ete or press . Press OK to confirm. ⢠If you are deleting a repeated entry , choose how you w ant the change to take effect: All occurrences â all repeated entries are deleted / Th is entry only â o nly the cur rent entry will be deleted. Example: Y our weekly class has been cancelled. Y ou ha ve set the calendar to remi nd you eve ry week. Choose This en try only and the calendar will remin d you again next w eek. Calendar entry fields ⢠Subject / Occasionâ Write a description of the event. ⢠Locationâ The place of a meeting, optional. ⢠Start time , En d t im e , Start date , and End date . ⢠Ala r mâ Press to activate the fie lds for Alarm t ime and Ala rm d a te . ⢠Repeat â Press to change th e entry to be repeating. Shown with in the Da y view . Example: The repea t fun cti on is hand y if yo u hav e a rec urr ing ev ent, a weekly class, a biweekly meeting, or a daily routine you need to remember . ⢠Repeat unti l â Y ou can set an e nding date for the repeated entry , for example , the endi ng date of a weekly cou rse you are takin g. This opti on is shown only if you have selected to re peat the event. ⢠Synchronizationâ If you select Pri vat e , after sync hronization the calendar entry can be see n only by you an d it will not be shown to others with online a ccess to view the ca lendar . Th is is us eful w hen, for example , you synchron ize your calendar on a compatibl e compu ter a t work. If you select Pub lic , the calendar entry is shown to others who have access to view your calendar online. If you select None , th e calendar entry will n ot be copied to your PC when you synchronize your calendar .
[ 1 12 ] Cale nda r v iews MONTH VIEW In t he Mo nth vie w , one row e qua ls o ne week . The curre nt dat e is under l ine d. Dates that have calendar entries are marked w ith a small triangle at the right bottom corner . There is a frame around the currently selected date. ⢠T o open the Day vie w , scr oll to the date you want to open and press . ⢠T o go to a cer tain date, select Op tion s â Go to date . Write the date and press OK . If you press the # ke y in Month, Week, or Day views, the current date is automatically highlighted. Cale ndar ent r y ic o ns in Day a nd Week views Synchronization icons in Mont h view Me eti ng Pr iv at e Memo Public Anniversary None The day h as more than on e view
[ 1 13 ] Calendar and To-do W EEK VIEW In the Week view , the calen dar en tries for the sele cted wee k are shown in seven day boxes. T he current day of the week is underlined. Memos and Annive rsaries are pl aced before 8 A M. Meeting entr ies are marked with colored bar s according t o starting a nd ending tim es. T o view or edit an entry , scroll to the cell that h as an entr y and press to open the Day vie w , then scroll to the entry and pr ess to open it. Opti ons in the dif fe ren t ca lend ar views are: Open , Ne w entr y , W eek v iew / Mon t h vie w , Delete , Go to date , Sen d , Settings , Help , an d Ex it . DAY VI EW In the Day view , you can see the calendar entries for the sele cted day . The entries are gr ouped according to their starting time. Memos and Anniversaries are placed before 8 AM. ⢠T o open an en try for editing, scroll to it and press . ⢠Press to go to the next day or press to go to the previous day . SETTI NGS FOR CAL ENDAR VIEWS Select Op ti ons â Settin gs and select: ⢠Default view â To select the view that is sh own first wh en you open Calen dar . ⢠W eek starts on â T o chan ge the starting da y of the week. ⢠W eek view title â To change th e title of the W eek view to be the we ek number or th e week dates. Shortcut: To create a calendar entry , press an y key ( 1 â 0 ) in any c alendar view . A Meeting entr y is opened an d the charact ers you keye d in are added to the Subject f ield. ⢠SET CALENDAR ALARMS 1 Create a new Meeting or A nniversary entry , or open a previously created entry . 2 Scroll to Alarm and press to ope n the Al ar m ti m e and Alar m date fields.
[ 1 14 ] 3 Set the alarm time and date. 4 Press Don e . An alarm indi cator is shown next to the e ntry in the Day view . Stop a calendar alar m The alarm duration is one minute. Whe n the alarm time expires, press Stop to en d the calen dar alarm. If you press any other key , the alarm is set to snooze. ⢠SEND CALEN DAR ENTRIES In the Day view , scroll to the en try you wan t to send and select Option s â Send . Then select th e me thod, the choi ces ar e: Via text me ssage , Via e-mai l (available only if the cor rect e-mail settin gs are in place), Via Bluetooth , or Via infrared . For furth e r infor ma tion, see the â Messagin g â on p. 73, â Send and re ceive data u sing in fraredâ on p. 146, and â Send data using Blue tooth con nec tion â on p. 142. ⢠T O-DO Go to Menu â To -d o . In To-do you can keep a list of tasks that you need to do. The T o-do list uses shared memory . See â Shared memory â on p. 20. 1 T o star t t o write a t o-do note, press any key ( 1 â 9 ). The editor open s and the cursor blinks after the letter s you have ke yed in. 2 Write the task in the Su bject field. Pr ess th e * key to add s pecial char acters. ⢠T o set the due date, scroll to the Due date field and key in a date. ⢠T o set a prior ity , scroll to the Priority field and press .
[ 1 15 ] Calendar and To-do 3 To save the to- do note, press Done . Note: If you remove all characters and press Don e , the previously saved note will be delete d. ⢠To op en a t o -d o no te , scroll to it an d press . ⢠To delet e a to-d o note , scroll to it and select Opti on s â Delete or pr ess . ⢠T o mark a to-do not e as completed , scroll to it an d select Opti on s â Mark as don e . ⢠T o restor e a to-d o note , select Op ti ons â Mark as not done . ⢠IMPORT DATA FROM OTHER NOKIA PHONES Y ou can move calendar , contacts, and to-do data from many diff erent Nokia phones to your Nokia 3620 or Nokia 3 660 us ing the PC Suite Data Import application. Instructions f or using the application can be found in the PC Su ite onlin e help on th e CD -ROM. Prior it y i cons High Low no icon Normal Status i cons task completed task not completed
[ 1 16 ] 13 Extra s ⢠CALCULATOR Note: Y our phone m ust be switched on to use this function. Do n ot switch the phone on wh en wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause inter ference or danger . Go to Menu â Extr a s â Calculator . Opti ons in Calc ula tor are: Last re sult , Memory , Cle ar sc reen , Help , and Exit . 1 Enter the f irst number of your calcul ation. Press to erase an y m ist a ke s. 2 Scroll to a function a nd press to select it. Use to add, to su btract, to multiply , or to divide. 3 Enter the second number . 4 T o execute the calculation, scroll to and press . Note: The Calcul ator has limited accuracy a nd rounding errors may occur , especially in long division s. ⢠T o add a decimal, press the # key . ⢠Press a nd hold to clear the result of the previous calculation. ⢠Use and to view previous calculations and m ove in the sheet. ⢠Select to save a number to the memory , indicated by M . T o retrieve the number from th e mem ory , select . ⢠T o retrieve the result of the last calculation, select Opti on s â L ast re sul t . Press the # key repe atedly to scroll the functio ns. Y ou can see the selection change between th e functions.
[ 1 17 ] Ex tra s ⢠COMPOSER Go to Men u â Extras â Composer . Optio ns in the C ompos er main vi ew are: Open , New tone , Delete , Mark/Unmark , Rename , Du plicate , Hel p , a nd Exit . Composer allows you t o cr eate your own, cu stomized ringing t ones. Note that it is not possible to edit a default r inging tone. 1 Selec t Options â New t on e to ope n the edito r and t o start co mposing. ⢠Use the keys to add notes and rests. See the f ollowing table. Or , se lec t Options â Insert symbol to open a list of n otes and rests. The defau lt du rat ion for a no t e is 1/4 . ⢠T o list en to the tone , press or select Options â Play . The pl a yba ck is always started from the beginning of the tone. T o stop playin g, press Stop . ⢠T o adjust the volume while a tone is playing, press to increase or press to decrease it. Or , select Opti ons â V olume before you start to play the tone. ⢠T o adju st the tempo, select Opti ons â Te m p o . To increase or decrease the te mpo gradually , pr ess and hold or , respectively . T empo is measured in be ats per minute. The maximum is 250 beats, the default te mpo for a new tone is 160 beats , and th e minimum is 50 beats. ⢠T o select many notes or rests at t he same time, press and hold and press and hold or at the same time. ⢠T o apply different playing styles, select two or more notes and then select Opti on s â Style â Legato (notes are played in a smooth and even manner) or select one or m ore notes and then se lec t Staccato (notes are played separately to pr oduce short sh arp sou nd s ). ⢠T o move note(s) up or down on the st aff by a h alf step, scr oll to the note an d press or . ⢠For ex ampl e, pr ess and hol d toge ther with t h e 1 key to produce C #.
[ 1 18 ] 2 Select Ba c k to save. Op ti on s wh en com po si ng a r e: Play , Insert symbol , Style , Te m p o , V olume , Help and Ex i t . ⢠CON VER TER In Co nv erte r , yo u ca n c onver t m eas ures such a s Len gth fr om one unit ( Ya r d s ) to another ( Me ters ). Go to Menu â Extra s â Converte r . Optio ns in C onverter are: Select unit / Change cu rrency , Conversi on type , Curre ncy ra tes , He lp , an d Exit . Note: The Converter has limited ac curacy and rounding errors may occur . Key Note Key and function 1 C The 8 key shortens the duration of the sele cted note( s)/rest( s) in step s. 2 D The 9 key lengthens the du ration of the s elected note( s)/rest( s) in step s. 3 E The 0 key inse rts a rest. 4 F Press the * key to open a list of n otes and rests. 5 G The # key s witch es octaves, a ll selected note(s) or rest(s) is/are moved to the next octave. 6 A deletes selected note(s). 7 B A long press o f keys 0 â 7 produce s a lengt hen ed ( d o tt e d ) note or rest or shortens a lengthene d note.
[ 1 19 ] Ex tra s Convert u nits 1 Scroll to the Ty p e field and pr ess to open a list of mea sures. Scroll to the m easure you want to use and press OK . 2 Scroll to th e first Unit field and pr ess to open a list of av ailable units. Select the unit fro m which yo u want to conver t and p ress OK . Scroll to the n ext Unit field and se lect the unit to whic h y ou wa nt to convert. 3 Scroll to th e first Am oun t field and key in the value you want to convert. Th e other Amou nt field changes automatically to show the converted value. Press the # key to add a decimal and press th e * ke y for the , - (for temp erature ), and E (exponen t) symbols. Note: The conversion order changes if you write a value in the second Amou nt fiel d. The result is shown in the first Amount field. T o rename a currency , go to the Currency rates view , scroll to the currency , and select Op tion s â R ename cu rren cy . Set a base curr ency and exchange rates Before you can make currency conversions, you need to choose a base curr ency (usually your domestic currency) an d add exch ange rates. Note: The rate of the ba se currency is a lways 1. T he base currency determ ines the conversion rates of the othe r curren cies. Example: If y ou s et th e Uni ted Stat es D olla r (U SD ) as the ba se c u rren cy , a Euro is 1. 00. Thus, you wou ld w rite 1.00 as the exchange rate for the Euro. 1 Select Cur rency as the measure type and select Op ti ons â Cu rren cy rate s . A list of currencies open s and you can see the current base currency at the top. 2 To cha nge the base currency , scroll to th e currency (usually your domestic c urrency), and s elect Opti ons â Set as base curr . . Impo rtant : When you change the ba se currency , a ll previously s et ex ch a ng e rates are s et to 0 and yo u need t o key in ne w rates.
[ 120 ] 3 Add exch ange rates (see example), scroll to the currency , and key in a new rate, th at is, h ow many u nits of the cu rrency equal one unit of the bas e curr ency you have selected. 4 After you have inserted all the needed exchange rates, you can make currency conversions . See â Con ve rt un i ts â on p. 1 19. ⢠NOTE S Go to Menu â Extr a s â Notes . Y ou can link notes to Fa vorites and sen d them to other devices. Plain text files (TXT format) you receive can be saved to No tes. Press the 1 â 0 keys to start to write. Press to clear letters. Press Done to save. ⢠CL OCK Go to Menu â Extr a s â Clock . Op ti on s in C l ock are: Set alarm , Reset alarm , Remo ve alarm , Settin gs , Help , and Exit . Change clock settings T o change the tim e or date, select Option s â Settings in Clock. T o chan ge the clo ck shown in the stan dby mode, scroll down in the Date and time settin gs an d s e le ct Cl ock ty pe â Analog or Digital . Set an alarm 1 To set a new a lar m , s elec t Op ti ons â Set alarm . 2 Enter the ala rm time and press OK . When the al arm is active , the indicator is sh own. The alarm clock works even if the phon e is switched off. T o cancel an alarm, go to clock and select Op tion s â Remove alarm . T urn off an alarm ⢠Press Stop to turn off the alarm.
[ 12 1 ] Ex tra s ⢠When the alar m tone sounds, pre ss any key or Snooze to s top the alarm for f ive minutes, after wh ich it will resume. Y ou can do this a max imu m of five time s. If the alarm tim e is reached wh ile the phone is switched of f, the ph one switches itself on and starts sounding the alarm tone. If you press Stop , the phone asks wh ether you want to activate the phone for calls. Press No to switch off the phon e or Ye s to make and receive calls. Note: Do no t pre ss Ye s when wirele ss phone use is pr ohibited or when it may cause interfer ence or dange r . ⢠REC ORDE R Go to Menu â Extr a s â Recor der . Optio ns in R ecorder ar e: Open , Record sound clip , Delete , Mo ve to phone me m , Move to m em. card , Ren ame sound clip , Send , Add t o Fa vorites , Hel p , an d Exit . The voice recorder allows you to record t elepho ne conversations and voice memos. If you are re cording a telephone conversation, both pa rties will hear a tone every five seconds during recording. Note: When using th is feature, obey all laws and respect the privacy and legitimate rights of oth ers. Select Opti ons â Record sound clip and sc roll to a function and pres s to select it. U se: â to re c ord, â to p a u s e , â to stop, â to fas t f orw ar d, â t o fa st rew ind, or â to play an opened sound file. Note: Recorder cannot be used when a data call or a GPRS connection is active. ⢠MEMORY CARD Options in the memory card are: Backup phone mem. , Restore from car d , Format m em. card , M emo ry car d n ame , Set password , Change p assword , Remove pas sword , Unlock memory card , Me m. in use , Help and Ex i t .
[ 122 ] If you have a memor y card you can use it to stor e your multimedia files like video clips and sound files, photos, messaging information, and to backup information from your ph one â s memory . Import ant: K eep all m emory c ards out of the reach o f small ch ildren . Note: Details of how you can use the m emory card w ith other features and applications of the Nokia 3620 and Nokia 3660 are given in the sections describing these features and applications. Insert the memory card 1 Make sure the phone is switched off. 2 With the b ack of t he p hone fac ing y ou, slide open the cover an d re move the battery , see Quick start â In sert th e SI M card â for in structions on removing the cover . 3 P osition the memory ca rd in its slot. Make sure that the g old contacts of the card are facing down. 4 Slide the silver c atch over the memory car d to secure it. 5 When you h ave secured the card in place, replace the battery , then replace the cover by slidin g it back into place.
[ 123 ] Ex tra s Import ant: If you ar e inst al ling a n appli cation to the me mory card and nee d to rebo ot the phon e, do no t remove the card u ntil th e reb oot is compl ete. O therw ise th e app licati on files may be lost. Format the memory ca rd Y ou mu st form at th e mem ory car d befor e you c an use it for th e first time. Select Op ti ons â Format mem. card . Y ou w ill be asked to con firm your r equest and once you confirm, form atting sta rts. Back up and r estore phone me mory Y ou can backup in formation from your phone â s memor y to the memory card. Select Optio ns â Backup ph one mem. Y ou can restore inf ormation from the m emory card to the phone â s me mor y . Se le ct Opt ion s â Restore from card . Memory c ard password Y ou can set a password to protect your memory card against unauthorized use. Note: Th e password is s tored in your phone an d you do not h ave to enter it again while you ar e using the m emory card on t he same phone. If you w ant to us e the mem ory card on anoth er phone, you will be asked for the password. T o set up, ch ange, or remove your passw ord select Options â Se t pa s sw or d , Change p assword , or Remo ve pas sword . The password can be up to eight ch aract ers long. Import ant: Once the passw ord is re moved , the memo ry card can be used on any phon e without a pa ssword.
[ 124 ] UNLOC K A MEMORY C ARD If you insert another password protected memory card in your phone, you will be pr ompted to e nter the password of the card. To unlock the card, se lec t Opti ons â Unlock memory card . Check m emory consumption Using the Me m. in use option, y ou can ch eck the me mory consumption of different data groups and the available memory for installing new applications or s oftware on your memory ca rd. Select Op ti ons â Mem. in us e .
[ 125 ] Services (XHTML) 14 Services (XHTML) Go to Menu â Serv ices or press a nd hold the 0 key in t h e standby m ode. The 0 key i s marked with an internet symbol so that you can easily locate it an d use it to connect to th e internet. Note: Y our phone m ust be switched on to use this function. Do n ot switch the phone on wh en wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause inter ference or danger . XHTML browser supports pages written in th e Hypertext Markup Language (XHTML) and the Wireless Mar kup Language (WM L). V arious service providers on the Internet maintain pages specifically designed for mobile phones, offering services such as news, we ather reports, banking, trave l information, entertainment, and ga mes. With the XHTML browser you can view these services as WAP pages written in WML, XHTML pa ges written in XHTML, or a m ixture of both. Note: Check the availability of services, pricing, and tariffs with your network ope rator and/or service provider . Service providers will also give you instructions on how to use t hei r s ervi ces. ⢠BASIC STEPS FOR AC CESSIN G THE WEB ⢠Save the settings that are needed to access the web service that you want to use. See â Phone browser service settings â on p. 126. ⢠Connect to th e service. See â Make a connection â on p. 1 26. ⢠Start browsing the web pages. Se e â Brow sing â on p. 128. ⢠Disconnect from the service. â End a con nectionâ on p. 13 1.
[ 126 ] ⢠PHONE B ROWSER SER VICE SE TTINGS Receiving settings in a smart message Settings may be available, for example, on the site of a network operator or service pr ovider . Y ou may receive service settings in a special text m essage called a â sm art me ssa ge â from th e network operator or service provider that offers th e service. See â Receive smart messages â on p. 90 . For more information, contact your network ope rator or service pr ovider . K e y in the setting s manually Follow the instructions given to you b y your service pr ovider . 1 Go to Setti ngs â Connection settings â A ccess points and define the settings for an access point. See â C onnection settings â on p. 36 . 2 Go to Service s â O ptions â Add bookmark . Wr ite a n ame for th e bookmark and the a ddress of the browser page defined for the current access point. Make a connection T o access t he Bo ok mar ks view whil e b rowsin g , pr ess an d hold do wn . T o return to the browser view again, select Opti ons â Back to page. Once you have stored all the required connection settings, you can access browser pages. There are three dif ferent ways to access browser pages: ⢠Select the homepage ( ) of your ser vice p rovider . ⢠Select a bookmar k from the Bookmarks view . ⢠Press the 2 â 9 keys to s tart to write the address of a browser service. The Go to field at the bottom of the display is immediately activated and you can continue w riting the addr ess there. After you have sel ected a page or written the address, pr ess to start to download th e page. See also â Data connection indicator s â on p. 14.
[ 127 ] Services (XHTML) Connection security If the secu rity indicator is displayed during a connection, the data transmission between the phon e and th e browser gateway or server is encrypted and secure. Note: The secur ity icon does not indicat e th at data transmissio n betw een the gatewa y and the cont ent serve r (the place w here the requested re source is stored) is secure. It is up to the serv ice provider to s ec ure data transmission between the gateway a nd th e co n ten t s erv er . View bookmarks Options i n the B ookmarks view (selection on a bookmark or folder) are: Open , Downlo ad , Back to page , Send , Go to UR L address / Find bookmark , Add bookmark , Edit , Delete , Read service msgs. , Disconnect, Mo ve to f older , New folder , Mar k/ U nma rk, Ren ame , Clear cache , Details , A dd to Favorites , Settings , Help , and Exit . A bookm ark consists of an Internet address (mandator y), bookmark title, W AP access point, and if the service requires, a user nam e an d pa ssw o rd. Note: Y our phone may have some pre-installed bookmarks for sites not affiliated with Nokia. Nokia does no t warrant or endorse these sites. If you choose to access the m, you should tak e the same precautions, for secu rity or content, as you would with any site. In the Bookmarks view , you can see bookmarks pointing to different kinds of web pages. Bookmarks are in dicated by th e following icon s: â T he starting page defined for th e browser access point. If you use another web access point for browsing, the starting page is changed acc ordingly . â The last visited p age. When the phone is disconnected from th e service, the address of the las t visited page is kept in memory until a new page is visi ted during th e next con nection.
[ 128 ] â A bookm ark showing the title. When you scroll th rough bookmarks, you can see th e address of the highlighted bookmark in the Go to field at the bottom of th e display . See the bookmarks f igure in â Ke ys and commands used in browsin g â on p. 128. Optio ns when brow sing a re: Ope n , Service o ptions , Bookmarks , Hist ory , Go to URL address , View images , Read service msgs. , Save as bookm ark , Send bookmark , Reload , Dis connect , Show images , Clear cache , Save page , Find , Details , Session , Sec u ri t y , Settings , Help , an d Exit . Add bookmarks 1 In the Bookmarks view , select Op tion s â Add bookm ark . 2 Start to f ill in the f ields (see the bookmarks figure in â Ke y s a n d commands u sed in browsing â on p. 128). O nly the address m ust be defined. The default access point is assigned to the bookm ark if no other one is selected. Press to enter specia l characters su ch as / , . , : , an d @ . Press to clear charac ters. 3 Select Op ti ons â Save to save the bookm ark. Send bookmarks T o send a bookmark, scroll to it and select Option s â Send â Via text message . ⢠BROW SING On a browser page, new lin ks appear underlined in blue and pr eviously visited links in purple. I mages that act as links have a blu e border around them. K e ys and commands u sed in browsing ⢠T o open a link, press .
[ 129 ] Services (XHTML) ⢠T o scr oll t h e vi e w , u se the Scroll ke y . ⢠T o enter lette rs and numbers in a field, pr es s the 0 âÂÂ9 keys. Press the * key to enter s pecial ch aracters s uch as / , . , : , an d @ . Press to clear chara cters. (See â W rite textâ on page 7 6.) ⢠T o go to the previous page while browsing, press Back . If Back is not available, select Opti ons â His tory to view a chronologica l list of th e pages you have visited during a browsing session. The h istory list is cleare d each time a session is closed. ⢠T o check boxe s and make selection s, press . ⢠T o retri eve th e l at est co nten t from th e se rver , sel ect Options â Re load . ⢠T o open a sublist of commands or actions f or the curr ently open web page, select Op t io ns â Service options . ⢠Press to disconnect from a w eb service and to qu it browsing. VIEWING NEW SERVI CE MESSAGES WHILE B ROWSING T o download and view new service m essages while browsing: 1 Select Op ti ons â Read service msgs. (shown only if ther e are new m essa ges) . 2 Scroll to th e message and press to down load and open it. For mor e info rmation a bout s ervice me ssag es, see â Service messages â on p. 9 1. SAVING BOO KMARKS ⢠T o sa ve a bookmark wh ile browsing, select Op tion s â Save as bookmark . ⢠T o save a bookmark received in a smart message, open the message in the In box in Messaging and select Opti ons â Save to bookmarks . See also â Receive smart mes sages â on p. 90.
[ 130 ] ⢠VIEW SAVED PAGES Opti ons in th e Sa ved page s view ar e: Ope n , Back t o page , Rel oad , Re mo ve , Read service msgs. , Disconnect , Move to folder , Ne w folder , Mark/Unmark , Rena me , Cl e ar ca ch e , Details , Add to F avorites , Settings , Help , and Exit . If you r egularly browse pages containing information that doesn â t change very often, for example a train timetable, you can save and then browse them wh en offline. If you have a memory ca rd, you can sav e web pages on it instead of the ph one â s memor y . T o save a page, wh ile browsing select Opti on s â Save page . ⢠Saved web pages are in dicated by the icon. ⢠In the saved pages view you can also create f olders to store your saved web pages. Folders containing saved w eb pages are i ndicated by the icon. ⢠T o open the Saved pages view , pre ss in the Bookma rks view (see the saved pages figure on p. 1 30). In the Saved pages view , press to open a sa ved page. ⢠If you want to start a con nection to the web service and to retrieve the page again, s elect Options â Reload . Y ou can also ar rang e the pages into f olders. Note: The phone stays online after you r eload the pa ge. ⢠DOWNLOAD THROUGH T HE B ROWSER Y ou can download items s uch as rin ging tones, images, operator logos and video clips through the mobile browser . These items can be provided free or for a price. Once downloaded, items a re handled by the respective application s on your phone, for ex ample a downloaded photo will be saved in the Im ag es .
[ 13 1 ] Services (XHTML) Download directly from the web page T o download the item directly from a web page scroll to th e link and select Opti on s â Open . Purchase an item Digital Rig hts Manage ment (D RM) is a syste m f or prote cting the c opyrig ht of digital content that is distributed on line. Copyright protections ma y prevent some i mages, ringtones and other content from being copied, modified, tr ansferred or forwarded. T o do wn load the it em : ⢠Scroll to the lin k and select Options â Open . ⢠Select Buy if you want to buy the ite m. Check an item before downloading Y ou can s ee details about an item before you download it. Details about an item may inclu de the price, brief description and size. Note: Check with y our se rvice provide to see if th ey offer th is ser vice. ⢠Scroll to the lin k and select Opti on s â Open . Details about the item are displayed on your phone. ⢠If y ou wa nt to cont inue wi th the downloading, press Acce pt or if you want to cancel the dow nload, press Cancel . ⢠END A CONNECTION T o end a connection, select Op ti on s â Disconnect . Y ou can als o p res s and hold to quit browsing and to return to th e stan dby mode.
[ 132 ] Empty the cache The information or services you have accessed are stored in the cache memo ry of the pho ne. If you h ave tried to access or have accessed confidential information requiring passwords (f or example, your bank a ccount), empty the ca che of your ph one after each use. To empty the cache, select Op tion s â Clear cache . Note: A cache is a buffer memory that is used to store data tem porarily . ⢠BROW SER SETTINGS ⢠Default access pointâ If you want to chan ge the default access point, press to open a list of available access points. The cur rent default access point is highlighted. For more information, see â Connection settings â on p. 36. ⢠Show images â Ch oose if you want to view picture s when you are browsing. If you choose No , you can la ter load images during browsing by se lecting Op ti ons â Sho w images . ⢠Font sizeâ Y ou can choose f ive text size s in the browser: Smallest, Small, Normal, Large and Largest. ⢠Cookies â Allow / Reject . Y ou can en able or disable the receiving an d sending of cookies. ⢠Con firm touc h tones â Always / Fir st sen ding only . T he b rowser suppo rts functions you c an acc ess while browsing. Y ou can make a voice call while you are on a browser page, send touch tones while a voice call is in progress, and save in Contacts a name and phone number from a browser page. Choose whethe r you want to co nfirm befo re the ph one sen ds t ouch tone s dur ing a voi ce ca ll. ⢠T ext wrapping â Choose Off if you donâ t want the text in a paragraph to automatically wrap, or On if you do.
[ 133 ] Java ⢠Applications 15 Java ⢠Appl icat ions Note: Y our phone must be s witched on to u se this function. Do not s witch the phone on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may c ause interference or danger . Go to Menu â Applications . Optio ns in th e Appli cat io ns main vie w are: Ope n , Vie w details , Settings , Remo ve , Go to U RL address , Update , Help , a nd Exit . In the Applications m ain view you can ope n installed Java applications or remove them. In the Install view you can install new Java application s (file extensions .jad or .jar). Note: Y our phone suppor ts J2ME Java applica tions. Do not down load P ersonalJava applic ations to your phone as they ca nnot be installed . When you open Applications, you can see a list of Java a pplications that have been installed to your phone. Scroll to an application and select Opti on s â View details to view: ⢠Statusâ In stalled , Running , or Down loaded (shown only in Install view) ⢠Ve r s i o n â the application version number ⢠Supplierâ the supplier or man ufacturer of the application ⢠Sizeâ the size of the application f ile in kilobyte s ⢠Ty p e â a brief description of th e application ⢠URL â an address of an informat ion page on th e Internet ⢠Dataâ the siz e of application data such as high scores, in kilobytes T o start a data connection and to view extra information about the application, scroll to it and select Op tion s â G o to URL addre ss . T o start a data con nection and to check if there is an update available for the application, scr oll to it and select Opt ion s â Update . Applications uses shared memory . See â Share d me mor y â on p. 20.
[ 134 ] ⢠INSTALL A JAVA APPLICATION Opti ons in t he In stall vie w are : In stal l , View detail s , Delete , Help , and Exit . Installation files may be transferred to your phone from a compute r , downloaded during browsing, or sent to you in a multimedia mess age as an e-m ail at tachment u sing a B lueto oth co nnection or infrare d connec tion. If you are u sing PC Suite to tr ansfer the fil e, pl ace i t in t he c:\nokia\i nstal ls folder in your phone. Wa r n i n g : Only install sof tware from s ources that offer a dequate protection against viruses and other harmful software. 1 In the Applications main view , to vie w the installation pack ages, press to open the Downloaded view . Note: In th e Install view , you can only install Java software installation files with the extension . jad or .jar . 2 T o install an application, scroll to an installation file and select Opti on s â Install . Alternatively , search the phone memory for the installation file, select th e file, and press to start the in stallation. Example: If you have r ecei ved th e installati on file as an e -mai l attac hment, go to you r mailbox, open the e-mail, open the Attachments view , scroll to the installation file, and press to start the installation. Press Ye s to confirm the installation. The .jar f ile is required for installation. If it is m issing, the phone may as k you t o dow nload it. I f the re i s no acc ess poi nt de fin ed fo r Appl ic ation s, yo u will be asked to sel ect one. When y ou are dow nloadi ng th e JAR fil e, you may need to enter a user name and p assword to access t he server . Y ou obt ain these from the sup plier or manufactu re r of the appl ication. During installation, the phone checks the integrity of the package to be installed. The phone shows information about the ch ecks being c arried out, and you are given options wh ether to contin ue with or cancel the installation. On ce the ph one has checked the integrity of the s oftware package, the application is installed on your phone.
[ 135 ] Java ⢠Applications The phone infor ms you when installat ion is complete. To open the Java application after installation , you must go to the Application s main view . When you are br owsing WAP or browser pages, you can download an installation file and in stall it immediately . Note, howe ver , that the connection is left running in th e background during installation. OPENING A JAVA APPLICAT ION Scroll to an a pplication in the Applications m ain view and press to open it. UNINST ALLING A JAVA APPLICAT ION Select the application in the Applica tions main view a nd select Opti on s â Remove . ⢠JAVA APPLICATION SE TTINGS T o define a default access point for downloading missing application components, select Options â Setting s â Default acc ess point . For m ore information on creating access points, see the â Access points â on p. 38. Select an application a nd select Op tion s â Settings , and then select on e of the f ollowing: Access point â Select an access point to be used by the application for downloading extra data. Network conn ection â Some Jav a app lications may req uire a data co nnection to be made to a defined access poin t. If no access point h as been selected, you will be asked to select one. T he options are: ⢠Allowe d â The connect ion is crea ted imme diately wi thou t a notification . ⢠Ask fi rst â Y ou will be asked before the applica tion makes the connection. ⢠Not allowedâ Connections are not a llowed.
[ 136 ] 16 M anage r ⢠INSTALL APPLICATIONS AND SOFTWARE Note: Y ou r phone must be switched on to use th e functions in the T ools folder . Do not switch the ph one on when w ireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interferen ce or dange r . Go to Menu â T ools â Manag er . In Manager you can install new applications and software packages, and remove applications from your phone. Y ou can also check th e memory consumption. Optio ns in the M anager mai n view a re: View details , View cert ificate , Install , Remov e , View log , Send log , Memory de tails , Help , an d Ex it . When you o pen Manager , you can see a list o f: ⢠Installation packages th at have been saved to Ma nager . ⢠P artially installed applications (indicated by ). ⢠Fully installed application s that yo u can r emove (indicated by ). Note: In Manager , you can only use device software installation files with an .sis extension. T o inst al l Java ap pl icat io ns (f ile ext ens ion .jad or .j ar), go to Ap plic ati on s. F o r furt he r i nfo rma ti on, see â Java ⢠Applications â on p. 133. Scroll to an installation file and select Options â View det ails to view th e Name , V er sion , Ty p e , Size , Supp lier , an d Stat us of the software package. Scroll to a softwar e package an d select Optio ns â View certifica te to dis play the security certificate details of a software package. See â Certificate mana gem en t â on p. 46 . Wa r n i n g : Only install sof tware from s ources that offer a dequate protection against viruses and other harmful software.
[ 137 ] Manager T o help you, the software in stallation system uses digital signatures and certi ficates on software packages. D o not install the app licati on if Manag er gives a security warning during in stallation. Select Op ti ons â View log to see w hat software packages have been installed or removed and when. ⢠INSTALL SOFTWARE Y ou can in st all applica tions t hat are s pecifically intended f or th e Nokia 3620 and N okia 3 660 phones or suitable for the Symbian ope rating system. A software package is usually one large compressed file containing many component files. Note: If y ou install a program t hat is not intended specifically for the Nokia 3 620 and Nokia 3660 phones, it may function a nd look very di fferent from the usual N okia 3620 and N okia 3660 phone applications. Wa r n i n g : If you inst al l a file th at con tain s an upda te or repair to an exist ing applicatio n, you can only restore the original appl icati on if you have the or iginal installation file or a full back-up copy of the removed software package. To rest ore the origin al application, first remove the appli cation and then install the application again from the original installation file or the back-up copy . Installation packa ges may be transferred to you r phone from a computer , downloade d durin g bro wsing, or se nt to you in a multim edia message , as an e-ma il atta chment , by Blu et ooth co nnec tion, or by i nfrared. If y ou are u sing PC Su ite to tran sfer t he fi le, place i t in the c:\nokia\i nstal ls folder on yo ur ph on e. Example: If you have r ecei ved th e installati on file as an e -mai l attac hment, go to you r mailbox, open the e-mail, open the Attachments view , scroll to the installation file, and press to start the installation.
[ 138 ] Star t the i n stal la ti on: T o start the installation, open Manager , scroll to the installation package, and select Op tion s â In stall . Alte rn ati ve ly , sea rch the phone mem ory or the me mo ry card fo r th e installation file, select th e file, and press to start the installation. If you ar e installing s oftware without a digital signature or a certificate, the phone warn s you of the risks of installing s oftware. Continue insta llati on only if you are absolutel y sure of the or igin and contents of the software package. During installation, the phone checks the integrity of the package to be installed. The phone shows information about the ch ecks being c arried out and you are given options whether to con tinue or ca ncel the insta llation. Once the ph one has checked th e integrity of the software package, the application is installed on your ph one. T o send your inst allation log to a help desk so that th ey can see what has been installed or removed, select Option s â Send lo g â Via text messag e or Via e-m ail (available on ly if the cor rect e-mail settin gs are in place). ⢠REMOV E SO FTWARE 1 T o rem ove a soft ware packa ge, scroll to it and s elect Optio n s â Remo ve . 2 Press Ye s to confirm the r emoval. Wa r n i n g : I f you remove software, you can only re-install it if you have the or igin al software package or a full back-up of the remove d software packa ge. If you remove a software package, you may no lo n ge r be able to o pen docum ents created wit h th at s oftware. If another software package depends on the software package th a t you removed, the other sof tware packa ge may stop working. Re f er t o the documentation of the installed software package f or details.
[ 139 ] Manager ⢠VIEW MEMORY CONSUMPTION T o open the m emory view se lect Option s â Memor y de ta ils. Note: If you have a memory card installed on your phone, you wi ll ha v e a choi ce of tw o memor y views, on e for th e phon e or Ph one memory an d one for the Mem or y ca rd . If not, you will only have the Phone memor y vie w . When you open eithe r of the memor y views, the phone calculates the amount of fre e memory for storing data and installing new software. In the memory vi ews, yo u can view the memory consumpt ion of th e diffe rent data groups: Calen dar , Contacts , Documents, Messages , Images , Sou nd files , Video clips , Applicat ions , Mem. in use , and Free memor y . If the ph one me mory is getting low , remove some documents, or move them to the memory ca rd. See also the â Troubleshooting â on p. 173.
[ 140 ] 17 Connectivity Note: Y ou r phone must be switched on to use th e functions in the Connectivity folder . Do not switch the phone on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger . Y ou can transfer data f rom your phone to another compatible device, for example, a phone or a computer , using a Blu etooth connection or infrared. ⢠BLUE TOOT H CO NNE CT ION Go to Menu â Connect. â Bluetooth . Bluetooth connectivity en ables cost-free wireless connections between electronic devices w ithin a maxim um ra nge of 30 feet. A Blu etoo th con ne cti on can b e used to send images, texts, busin ess card s, and calenda r notes. It can also be used to conn ect wirelessly to products with or u sing Bluetooth wireless technology , such as computers. Since Bluetooth devices communicate using radio waves , your phon e and the other Bluetooth device do not need to be in direct line-of-s ight. The two devices only need to be within a maximum of 30 feet (1 0 meters) of each other , although the con nection can be s ubject to interference from obstructions such as walls or from oth er electronic devices. Using the Bluetooth a pplication con sumes the battery and the ph one's operating time w ill be reduced. Take this into account when performing other operations with your phone. There may be restrictions on usin g Bluetooth devices. Check with your local au thorities.
[ 14 1 ] Connectivity Bluetooth device compatibility The No kia 3620 a nd No kia 36 60 ph on es are d esi gned t o b e c ompl iant with and to a dapt to Bluetooth Specification 1 .1. Compatibility between th e phone and othe r products wi th Bluetoo th wir eless techno logy depe nds al s o on the pr ofiles and protoc ols used by both devices. The current profiles supported by t he Nokia 36 20 a nd Nokia 3660 a re: ⢠Dial-Up Networking pr ofile (DUN) as a g ateway ⢠F ax profile ( FAX) as a gateway ⢠Object Push profile (OPP) as a client and server ⢠File T ransfer profile (FTP) as a server ⢠Handsfree profile (HFP) as an audio gateway ⢠Generic Object Exchange pr ofile (GOEP) ⢠Generic Access pr ofile (GAP) ⢠Serial P ort profile (SPP) wi th the PC connectivity software For information on compatibi lity with other Bluetooth devices, con tact their m anu fac tur ers. Activate the Bluetooth application for the first time When you activate the Bl uetooth application for the first time, you are asked to give a Bluetooth name to your phon e. After you have set the Blu etooth application to be active and chan ged My phone's visibility to All , your phone an d this name can be seen by other Blu etooth device users. Write a na me ( max. 30 letter s) or use the default name. If you send da ta using a Blue too th conn ect ion befo re y ou ha ve g iv en an individu al B lu et oo t h na me to y ou r ph on e , the defau lt name will be used. T o send text using a Bluetooth c onnection (instead of text messa ges), go to Notes, write the text, a nd select Op ti ons â Send â Via Bl uetooth .
[ 142 ] Bluetooth application settings T o modif y the Bluetooth application settings, s croll to the s etting you want to change and press . ⢠Blue toot hâ Sele ct On if yo u wa nt to u se Blue toot h wi rele ss tec hno log y . I f you set the Bluetooth app lication Off all active Bluetoo th connection s are ended and the Bluetooth application can not be use d for sending or receiving da ta. ⢠My phone's visibility â If you s elect Shown to all , your ph one can be found by other Bluetooth device s during device search. If you se lec t Hidden , your phone cann ot be found by other devices du ring device search. ⢠My Blue t oot h name â Defi ne a Bluetooth name for your ph one. After you have set the Blu etooth application to be active and changed My ph one's visibility to All , this name can be see n by other Bluetooth device user s. When searching for devices, some Bluetooth devices may show only the unique Bluetooth a ddresses (device a ddresses). T o f ind out what the unique Bluetoo th address of yo ur phone is, ente r the code *#2820# in the s tandby m ode. Send data using Bluetooth c onnection Note: Ther e can be only one active Blu etooth connection at a time. 1 Open an application wher e the ite m you wish to send is store d. For ex ample, to send a ph oto to an other device, open the Im ag e s app l icat io n . 2 Scroll to th e item you want to sen d, for example, a photo and select Option s â Send â Via Bluetooth .
[ 143 ] Connectivity 3 The ph one star ts to se arch for device s within range. Blu etooth e nable d devices that a re within range start to appear on th e display on e by one. Y ou can see a device icon, th e device â s Bluetooth nam e, the device type, or a short name. P a ired de vices are shown wi th . Note: I f you have searched for Bluetooth devices earlier , a list of the devices that were foun d previou sly is shown first. To start a ne w se arc h, s elec t More devices. If you switch off the ph one, the list of devices is cleared and the de vice search needs to be started again before s ending data . T o interr upt the s earch, pr ess Stop . The device list freezes and you can start to form a connection to one of the devices already found. 4 Scroll to th e device you want to connect w ith and press Select . The item you are sending is copied to O utbox and the note Con nec ting is shown. 5 If r equired to pair with the oth er device, consider th e followin g: ⢠If t he o ther d evice requir es p airin g before data can be tran smitted , a tone sounds and you are asked to e nter a passcode. ⢠Create your o wn passcode (1-16 characters long, nu meric) and agree with the ow ner of the oth er Blu etooth device to use the same code. This passcode is used only once and you do not have to memorize it. ⢠After pairing, the device is saved to the P aired devices view (see â P aired devices view â on p. 1 44). Note: P air ing means authentication. The users of the Bluetooth enabled devices should agree on the passcode and use th e same passcode for both devices in order to pair them. Devices that d o not have a user interface have a factory set pass code. When the connection h as been su ccessfully establish ed, the note Sending data is shown. Note: Data received by a Bluetooth connection can be f o u n d i n t h e In box f olde r in Messagin g. See â In bo x â on p. 8 7 for fur ther informatio n.
[ 144 ] Note: I f sending fails, the m essage or data will be dele ted. The Drafts folder in Messaging doe s not store messages sent by a Bluetooth connection. Check the status of the Bl uetooth connection ⢠When is shown in the standby m ode, th e Blue tooth application is active. ⢠When is bli nkin g, yo ur pho ne is try ing to connect to the ot he r devic e. ⢠When is shown continuously , the B luetooth connection i s active. P aired devices view Optio ns in the pa ired de vices vi ew are: New pair ed device, Conne ct / Disconnect , A ssign short n ame , De lete , Delete all , Set as au thorized / Se t as unauthorized , He lp , and Exit . P airing with a d evice makes device searches easier and quicker . P aired devices are easier to recognize; they ar e indicated by in the sear ch result list. In the Bluetooth applica tion main view , pr ess to open a list of pa ired devices ( ). PA I R W I T H A D E V I C E 1 Select Op ti ons â New paired de vice in the P aired de vices view . Th e phone starts to sear ch for devi ces within range. Or , if you have searched for Bluetooth devices earlier , a list of the devices that were found previously is shown first. To start a new sear ch, select More device s . 2 Scroll to the device you want to pair with and press Select . 3 Exchange pa sscodes. See â Send data using Bluetooth connection â on p. 1 42. The device is added to the P a ired devices lis t. Ico ns fo r dif f eren t B lue to oth en able d devi ces Computer Phone Oth er Unk nown
[ 145 ] Connectivity Y ou can also play phone-to-phone games using a Bluetooth connection. CANC EL P AIR ING ⢠In the P air ed devices view , scroll to the device whose pairing you want to cancel and press or select Op tio ns â Delete . Th e device is removed from th e P aired devices list and the pairing is cancelled. ⢠If you want to cancel all pairings, select Op ti ons â Delete all. Note: If y ou are currently connected to a device and delete the pa i ri n g with that device, pairing is r emoved immediately bu t the co n n e c ti o n will remai n active. ASSIG N SHORT NAMES FOR PAIRED DEVICE S Y ou can defin e a sh ort n ame (nickname, alias) to he lp you r ecognize a certain device. T his name is stored in the phone m emory and cannot be seen by other Bluetooth device users. Example: G ive a sh ort name to your friend â s Bluetooth enabled device or to your own computer to be able to recognize it m ore easily . T o assign a short name, scroll to the device and select Opti on s â A ssign sh or t nam e . Write the sh ort name and press OK . Note: Choose a name which is easy to remember and recognize. L at e r when you ar e searching f or devices or a device is requesting a c on n e ct i o n , the name you h ave chos en will be used to iden tify the d evice. SET A DEVICE TO BE AUTHOR IZED OR UNAUTHORIZED After you have paired with a device, you can set it to be a uthorized or unauthorized: Unautho rized (defau lt) â Conn ection requests f rom this d evice nee d to b e accepted separa tely every time. Autho rized â Connections between your phone and this d evice can be made w ithout your knowledge. No separate acceptance or authorization is needed. Use this status for
[ 146 ] your own devices, f or ex ample, your PC, or de vices that belong to someone you trust. Th e icon is added ne xt to authorize d devices in th e P a ired devices view . In the P aired devices view , scroll to the device and sele ct Op t ions â Set as authorized / Set as unau thor ize d . Receive data using a Bluetooth connection When yo u rec ei ve da ta thr ough a Bl uet ooth co nnec tion, a ton e s ound s and you are asked if you want to accept the Blu etooth message. If you accept, is shown and th e item i s placed in the Inbox folder in Messaging. Bluetooth mess ages are indicated by . See â I nboxâ on p. 87 fo r furth er info r mation . Disconnect a Bluetooth connection A Bluetooth c onnection is dis connected au tomatically after sending or receiving data. ⢠INFRARE D CONNECTION T o start infrar ed, go to Menu â Connect. â Infra r ed Using in frared, you c an send or receive data such as business cards and calendar n otes to and from a com patible phone or data device. Do not point the I R (infrared) beam at anyone's eye or allow it to interfere with other IR devices. T his device is a Class 1 Laser product. Send and receive data using infrared Note: All items which are received by infrared are placed i n the Inbox folder in Messaging. New infrared messages are indicated by . See â Inboxâ on p. 87 fo r furth e r inf orma tio n. 1 Make sure that the infrared ports of the sending an d receiving devices are pointing at each other and that there are no obstructions between the devices. The preferable distance between the two devices is three feet at most. To find the infrared port, see the picture of the different keys in the Ge neral information section o f this guide.
[ 147 ] Connectivity 2 The user of th e receiving device activates the infrared por t. T o activate the infrared port of your phone to re ceive data by infrared, go to Me n u â Conne ct. â Infrar ed and pr ess . 3 The user of th e sending device selects the desired infrared function to start data transfer . T o send data by in frared, select Op tion s â Send â Via in frared in an application. If data transfer is not started within two minutes after the activation of the infrared port, the connection is ca ncelled and must be started a gain. Y ou can also play phone-to-phone games using infrared. Example: To send a con tact card by infrared: (1) Ask the recei ver to activate the infrared port in his/her device. (2) Go to Contacts , scroll to a card an d select Optio ns â Sendâ Via infrar ed. Note: Windows 2000: To be able to use infrared to transfer files betw een you r N okia 362 0 or N okia 3 660 and a compat ible com puter , go to â Con trol P anel â and select â Wire less Link â . In th e â Wireless Li nk â â File Tr ansfer â tab check the â Allow oth ers â to se nd fil e s to your computer u sing infrared. Check the status of th e infrare d connection ⢠When blinks, your phone is trying to connect to the othe r device or a connection has been lost. ⢠When is shown con tinuously , the infrared connection is active an d your ph one is r eady to send a nd receive dat a through its infrared por t. ⢠CON NECT YO UR PHON E TO A COMP UTER For further information on h ow to make a connection to a compa tible computer through infrared or a Bluetooth connection and how to install PC Suite, see â PC Suit e â on page 149. For further in formation on how to use the PC Suite application, see the PC Su ite online h elp.
[ 148 ] Use the CD-ROM The C D-ROM should launch itself after you ha ve inserted it in to the CD-ROM drive of your compatible PC. If not, pr oceed as follows: 1 Click the W indow Start bu tton a nd select Progra ms â Windows Explorer . 2 On the CD- ROM drive, locate a f ile calle d Noki a36 20_3 660 .exe and double-click it. The CD-ROM inte rface opens. 3 Y ou can find PC Suite in the â Insta ll â se ction. When you launch the file, an installation wizard will guide you through the installation process. ⢠USE YOUR PHON E AS A MODEM T o use your phone as a modem, go to Menu â Connect. â Modem . Using your phone as a m odem, you can connect to t he Internet and send or rece ive fa xes with a com puter . Y ou can use an infr ared o r a Bluetooth connection.
[ 149 ] PC Suite 18 PC Sui te With PC Su ite you c an: ⢠Share information betwe en your PC and phone. ⢠Make bac k-up copies of the phone files to protect data in case of loss or damage. ⢠Synchronize your calendar , contacts, and tasks with Microsoft and Lotus a pplications. ⢠Copy and move f iles between your PC and phone. ⢠Copy contacts and ca lendar in formation from a nother Nokia m obile phone, Nokia comm unicator , or P a lm devi ce to your Nokia 3620 or Nokia 36 60 pho ne. ⢠Configure phone settings. ⢠Install software on your phone. Please refer to oth er sections of this user guide f or instructions on operation, care, and maintena nce of you r Nokia phone, inclu ding important saf ety information. ⢠PC SUITE DO CUMENTATION AND HELP The following documen tation is available to assist you with installing and using PC Suite: ⢠Nokia 3620 and Nokia 3 660 User Guide â This se ction of the user guide explains how to install PC Suite on a compatible PC, how to con nect your phone to the PC, and how to start u sing PC Su ite. ⢠PC Suite on line helpâ For more detailed instructions an d t rouble- shooting on the use of PC Sui te, please refer to the online help th at is automaticall y installe d on you r PC when yo u install PC Su ite. T o access the online h elp, click th e Start bu tton, select Pr ograms and point to PC Suite for Nokia 3620 and Nokia 3660 , and th en click the f ile with Help in th e title.
[ 150 ] ⢠PC Suite R eadme fileâ The Readme file is a utomatically installed on your PC when you install PC Suite. It is recommended that you read this file before using PC Suite. Also, if you have problems installing or starting the applicatio n, you m ay find some trouble shooti ng assistance in this file. T o access the readme file , click the Start butto n, select Programs, point to PC Suite for Nokia 3620 and Nokia 3660 , and click the file with Rea dme.t xt in the title. ⢠SOFTWARE AN D HARDWAR E REQUIR EMENTS T o install and r un PC Suite, you ne ed: ⢠A compatible PC r unning Windows 98, Windows ME, W indows 2000 with Service Pa ck 2, or Windows XP . ⢠At leas t 1 1 0 MB of f ree disk spa ce. To conn ect y ou r No kia 362 0 or N oki a 366 0 phone t o th e PC, y ou n eed to have one of th e following: ⢠An infrared connection: an infrared port on the com puter . ⢠A Bluetooth connection: a Blu etooth card and the required sof tware, or built-in su pport for Blu etooth connectivity on th e PC. T o be able to connect your Nokia 36 20 or Nokia 3660 phone to you r PC, the Bluetooth software ne eds to support the Serial P ort Profile (SPP). ⢠INSTALL PC SUITE PC Suite is in the â Inst allâ section of th e CD-ROM included in the Nokia 3620 or Nokia 3660 pa ckage. The CD-ROM s hould launch automatically after you have inserted it in to the CD-ROM drive of your PC. If not, proceed as foll ows: 1 Click the W indows Start button, poin t to Program s , and select Windows Explorer . 2 Go to the CD-ROM root dir ectory and double-c lick the Nokia36 20_36 60.exe f ile. The C D-RO M us er in terfa ce opens . When the CD-ROM interface is ope n, proceed as follows: 1 Click Insta ll .
[ 15 1 ] PC Suite 2 Locate the Install now section and click PC Suite for Nokia 3620 and Nokia 3660 (depending on your phone mode l). 3 Select the language for the installation and click Next to start th e installation wizard. This wiz ard will guide you through the installation process. It is recommended that you accept the suggested destination folder and pr ogram folder . 4 As you go through the installation wi zard, make sure that the Insta ll the Nokia Connectivity SDK check box is selected in the Data I mport dialog box if you want to transfer calendar and contacts data from another Nokia mobile phone to your Nokia 3620 or Nokia 3 660 phone. If you do n ot install the N okia Connectivity SDK component, you can only tra nsfer data to your Nokia 3620 or Nokia 36 60 from th e No kia 3 60 0, Noki a 3650, N oki a 76 50, N ok ia 92 1 0 Comm uni cato r , Nokia 9290 Communicator , a P alm device, or another Nokia 3 620 or Noki a 3660 . 5 In the File Transfer Video and Au dio Converters dialog box it is rec om men de d t hat yo u le ave th e Install Vi deo and Audio Conv erte rs check box sele cted. When th e conver ters are installed, video and audio format files that you copy from the PC to your Nokia 3 620 or Nokia 3660 are automatically converted to the video and audio formats used by the phone . If you do n ot have th e CD-R OM, you can dow nload th e PC Sui te softw are fro m ww w .nokia usa .com . From the h ome page, select Phones and Softwar e . Enter your phon e model an d fol low scree n instruct ions to do wnlo ad th e PC Suite installatio n fil e. Once th e install ation file is downlo aded , go to the directory where you downloaded it and dou ble-click it. Follow th e in s tr u c ti o ns on the screen to install th e softwar e. ⢠CONN ECT YOUR PHONE TO THE PC When you use P C Suite f or the fi rst time, you mu st conn ect you r phon e to the PC. Ther eafter , you can use PC Suite wheth er or not your phone is conn ect ed to you r PC . Y ou ca n co nne ct your phon e t o th e PC t hro ug h an infrared or Bluetooth con nection.
[ 152 ] See the following online help topics for details: ⢠Conn ectin g y our No kia 3620 or Noki a 36 60 pho ne t o a P C ⢠Dis conne c ting a nd rec onn ect ing yo ur Nok ia 362 0 or N oki a 36 60 phone to a PC See â PC Suite documentation an d help â on page 149 to locate the online help. Note: When you con nect your phone to y our PC, PC Suite automatically synchronizes the clock on th e phone with t he PC. Th eref ore, you ne ed to make su re that th e clock on you r PC is correct. If you have problems con necting your ph one to the PC , check to see if both your phone and PC are switched on and that you have sele cted the correct communications port. Chec k the icons on th e taskbar to see the connection statu s. The connection icon changes to when your phone is conne cted to the PC. Y ou can double-click on this icon in you r Windows taskbar to open a Connection Propert ies window that identifies which communications port PC Sui te is using. ⢠START PC SUITE Y ou can start PC Suite from the Start menu: c lic k t he Start button, select Programs , select the PC Suite for Nokia 3 620 and Nokia 36 60 folder , an d then click P C Su ite for Nokia 3 620 and Nokia 3 660 . If you are connecting your phone to the PC for th e first time, after starting PC Suite you are asked to do two things: ⢠Name your phone. Y ou can use more than one Nokia 3620 or Nokia 3660 phone with PC Suite. To be able to identify individual phones, you must give a name to each phone.
[ 153 ] PC Suite ⢠Select tasks to be cr eated. T o be ab le to back up and syn chron ize i nformati on bet ween yo ur p hone and PC, you must have the appropriate tasks created. During th e first connection, PC Suite lists ta sks that c an be cr eated automatically . Y ou do not have to create these tasks at this point, if you do not want to. However , if you create th e tasks, you can edit them later . For more detaile d information, ref er to the PC Suite on line help (see â PC Suite docu mentation and helpâ on page 1 49). ⢠ONLINE A ND OFFLINE MODES Y ou can use PC Su ite e ither in on line mode or in of fline mode. Y ou have the following options: ⢠W ork online â Connect your ph one to the PC and let PC Suite iden tify it. In onl ine mode your phone i s connected to your co mpatible PC, and you can wor k with the in formation stored on the phone. ⢠W ork offline â Leave your ph one disconnected and choose the name of your phone from a list of n amed devices. The menus and other available option s in offline m ode differ from those of online mode. ⢠CONN ECTION STATUS The icon on the right-hand side of the status bar and on the Windows taskbar displays the con nection status as follows: Discon nected Con ne c te d Tran sferring data (animated i con) ⢠PC SUITE APPLICATIONS A number of icons are display ed on the left-hand side of the main PC Suite window â this area is known as the application bar . T o use an application, click its icon. For in formation on usin g an application, see the on line help.
[ 154 ] Backup/Restore With Backup/Restore, you can b ack up information on your phone. If you ever lose information from your phon e (for exam ple, through accidental deletion), o r need to refer to an earlier , backed up ve rsion, you can restore it to y our phone. Back up/Restore supports Memory ca rds. Note: Operator logos, r inging tones (polyphonic r inging tones (MI DI) an d single t one s) and J ava-ap plications that you h ave in st a lle d on yo ur phone after you first started using it are n ot saved durin g backup. Therefor e, these item s cannot be rest ored. On ly the original Nokia 36 20 and Nokia 3660 r inging tones a re saved. Control P anel Y ou can u se Control P anel to chan ge some of the general s ettings of PC Suite. The followin g features are in cluded in Control P anel: ⢠Connection enables you t o specify the por t that PC Suite u ses when attempting to connect to a ph one. ⢠Data Locat ion ena bles you to specif y wher e you want to s tore backups and synchronization files. ⢠File Converters enables you to select wh ich, if any , video and audio converters are used when files are copie d to th e phone u sing File Tra n s f e r . ⢠Device Manager enables you to see wh ich phones have been connected to your PC, and to r emove details of ph ones that you no longer want to connect. Import ant: Y ou cannot restor e inform ation that you h ave remo ved usin g Device Man ager . Data Import With Data Impor t, you ca n tra nsfer conta cts and ca lendar dat a to your Nokia 36 20 or Noki a 3660 fro m the Nok ia 33 20, Nokia 3360 , Nokia 360 0, Noki a 3 620, Nokia 36 50, Noki a 366 0, N okia 6 2 1 0, No kia 6250 , N okia 63 1 0, No kia 63 1 0i, N okia 632 0, No kia 6 340, No ki a 6360, N ok ia 637 0, Nokia 6385 ,
[ 155 ] PC Suite Nokia 65 1 0, N okia 6590, N okia 66 1 0, No kia 665 0, Nok ia 7 1 1 0, N okia 7 160, No kia 7 19 0, Nok ia 72 1 0, Nok ia 7650 , Nok ia 82 1 0, No ki a 8290, No kia 83 1 0 , No kia 8390, N okia 88 1 0, No kia 8 850, Noki a 88 90, No kia 89 1 0, Nok ia 92 1 0 Communicator , Nokia 9290 Communicator , or P alm device. Synchronize With Synchronize, you can s ynchronize your phone contacts a nd calendar data with Microsoft and Lotus applications. T o be able t o synchr onize, yo u must have tasks created for synchr onizatio n. When you connect your phone to your PC for the f irst time, PC Suite identifies your phone and creates a number of tasks. Y ou can modify these tasks an d create othe r tasks if you wan t. Y ou can also sche dule tas ks to be run at regular intervals, every tim e you conne ct your phone to you r PC, or on com mand only . The anima ted icon appears on the Windows taskbar when synchronization is in progress. The icon indicates that the data on your phone is being syn chronized with the data on the PC. File T ransfer With File T ransfer , you can copy files betw een your phone and your PC, as well as delete and rename selected files. With the Multimedia converters, video and audio format files that you copy from the PC to your phone are automatically c onverted to the video and audio format used by the phone. Image T ransfer With Image Transfer , you can copy , move, rename, and delete im age files on your phone and your PC. Y ou can also view image files if there is an associat ed viewer application. Settings wizard With th e Settings wizard, you can configure th e e-mail accou nt, rem ote connection, message center , and multimedia message center settings of your phone. For example, you can manage settings manually or copy a working configuration from the PC to th e phone. Y ou can also back up your phone s ettings to a file.
[ 156 ] Install software on your phone With PC Suite, you can in stall Java and device software on you r phone. These application s do not have an icon on th e application ba r . Instead, you can start these applications from the Tools m e nu . Se e th e In stalling so ftwa re online help topic for details. Installation pa ckages can be received in a multimedia message, a s an e-mail at tachment , by Bluetooth con nection, or by i nfrared and downloaded to your phone. If you are using PC Suite to transfer the file, save it to the c:\no kia\ instal ls folder . Note: Y ou can on ly use J ava install ation file s with the extens ion .j ad or .j ar , and de vice softwar e installatio n file s with the ex tensi on .sis. Import ant: Only instal l software fr om sources that offe r ade quate prot ection against vir uses and othe r har mful software. ⢠REMOVE PC SUITE FROM Y OUR PC Uninstalling PC Suite r emoves all files and folders that wer e added by the PC Suite installation program, but does n ot remove backed-up and archived files or synch ronization information. Therefore, if you reinstall PC Suite you can back up, restore, and synchronize u sing the same settin gs as be fore. Note: I f yo u want to remove back ed-up f iles, synchr onization s, and ot he r information relating to the phones you have connected, you must do this before removing PC Suite. For furth er information, see the Viewing and removing details of a N okia 3620 or Nokia 3 660 online help topic. T o remove PC Suite, pr oceed as follows: 1 Click the W indows Start button, point to Settings , and click Control P anel . 2 Double-click Add/Re move Programs . 3 Select PC Su ite for Nokia 3 620 and Nokia 3 660 from the list of installed programs, and click Add/Remove . A confirmation dialog box opens.
[ 157 ] PC Suite 4 Confirm that you want to remove the PC Suite sof tware from you r PC. After confirmin g that you w ant to remove PC Su ite, the uninstall program r emoves the pr ogram files a nd informs you that you n eed to restart your PC to complete the uninstall proc ess. When your PC restarts, the uninstall program completes the removal of PC Suite from your PC. Note: Uninstalling PC Suite does not remove t he Nokia Conn ectivit y SDK. Y ou can r emove the Nokia Connectivity SDK from your PC using the Add/Remove Programs application of the W indows Control P anel. The uni nstall pro gram leav es some file s on yo ur PC that contain in formation about the Nokia devices you have con nected to your PC. If you decide to reinstall PC Suite, you will be able to continue usin g PC Suite as before. Note: Remember to m ake back-up copies of all important data to protect against possible loss or alter ation.
[ 158 ] 19 Referen ce informatio n ⢠BATTERY STATEMENTS Charging and discharging Y our phone is powered by a rechar geable battery . Note that a new batter y's full per formance is achieved only after tw o or three complete charge and discharge cycles! The battery can be ch arged and discharged h undreds of times but it will eventually wear ou t. When the ope rating time (talk-time and standby time) is noticeably shor ter than normal, it is tim e to buy a new battery . Use only batte ries appr oved by the phone m anu facturer and recharge your battery only with the chargers approved by the manufacturer . Unplug the charger w hen not in u se. Do not leave the ba ttery connected to a charger for longer than a week, since overcharging may shorten its lifetime. If left unused a fully charged battery wil l discharge itself over tim e. T emperat ure extrem es can affect the ability of your battery to charge. Use the battery only for its intended purpose. Never use any ch arger or battery that is dam aged. Do not short-circu it the battery . Accidental short-circuiting can occur when a metallic object (coin, clip or pen) causes direct connection of the and - terminals of the battery (metal s trips on the battery) for example when you carry a spare battery in your pocket or purse. Sh ort-circu iting the terminals ma y damage the battery or th e connecting obje ct. Leaving the battery in hot or cold places, such as in a clos ed car in summer or winter conditions, will reduce the capacity and lifetime of the battery . Always try to keep the bat tery between 15 ð C and 25 ð C (59 ð F and 77 ð F). A phone with a hot or cold battery may temporarily n ot work, e ven when the battery is f ully charged. Battery pe rformance is particularly l imited in temperatures well be low freez ing. Do not dispose of batter ies in a fire ! Dispose of batteries according to local regu lations (e.g. recycling). Do n ot dispose as household was te. Remove th e battery only wh en the phone is switched off.
[ 159 ] Referenc e information ⢠USE PROPER CARE AND MAINTENANCE Y our phone is a product of super ior design and craftsman ship and should be treated with care. The suggestions below w ill help you to fulfill any warranty obligations and to enjoy this product for many year s. ⢠K eep the phone and all its parts and enhancem ents out of the reach of sm all children. ⢠K eep the phone dry . Precipitation, humidity and all t ypes of liquids or moisture can contain minerals that wil l corrode electr onic circuits. ⢠Do not use or st ore the phone in dusty , dirty areas. Its moving parts can be damaged. ⢠Do not store the phone in hot areas. High temperatures can shorten the life of electron ic devices, damage batter ies, and warp or melt cert ain plast ics. ⢠Do not store the phone in cold are as. When it warms up (to its normal te mpera ture ), mo is ture can form ins ide , wh ich ma y dam age el ect ron ic ci rcu it boa rds . ⢠Do not at tempt to open the phone. Non-expert handling ma y damage it. ⢠Do not drop, kn ock or shake the ph one. Rough handl ing can break internal circuit boards. ⢠Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solvents, or strong deter gents to clean the phone. ⢠Do not paint the phone. P aint can clog the moving parts and pr event proper operation. ⢠Use only the su pplied or an approved replacement antenna. Unauthorized antennas, modifications or attachments could damage the phone and may violate regulations governing radio de vices. All of the above su ggestions apply equally to your phone, battery , charger or any enhancement. If any of them is not working proper ly , tak e it to your nearest qualified service facility . The personnel th ere will assist you and, if nec e ss ary , a rra nge for servi c e.
[ 160 ] ⢠UNDERSTAND IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION T raffic Safety Do not us e a hand-he ld telephone while driving a vehicle. Always secure the phone in its holder; do not place the phone on th e passenger seat or where it can break loose in a collision or sudden stop. Rememb er ro ad safe ty alway s comes fir st! Operating environment Remembe r to follo w any spe cial regu lations in force in any area and always switch off you r phone wh enever it is forbidden to us e it, or when it may cause in terfer ence or da nger . Use the phone only in its normal operating positions. P arts of the ph one are magnetic. Metallic m aterials may be attracted to the phone, and persons with a hearing a id should not h old the phone to the e ar wi th the hear ing aid . Always se cure the phon e in its hol der , becau se metallic materials may be attracted by th e earpiece. Do not place credit ca rd s o r o t her magnet i c s t ora ge me dia ne a r t he ph on e, be ca use info rm at ion stored on them may be erased. Electronic devices Most modern electronic equ ipment is shielded from r adio frequency (RF) signals. How ever , certain e lectron ic equipm ent may not b e shie lded agains t the RF signals from your wireless phone. PACEM AK ERS P a ce mak er m anuf a ctu re rs re com men d t h at a min imu m se par a tio n o f 6 in (15.3 cm) be maintained between a wireless phone and a pacemaker to av oid po tential interferenc e with the pa cemaker . These recommen dations are consistent with the independent research by an d recomm endations of Wireless T e chnology Research. T o minimize the potential f or interference, persons with pacemakers should ⢠Always keep the device more than 6 in (15.3 cm) from their pacemaker w hen the device is switched on
[ 16 1 ] Referenc e information ⢠Not carry the device in a breast pocket ⢠Hold the device to the e ar opposite the pacemaker If you have any reason to suspect th at interference is taking place, switch off your device im mediately . HE ARI N G AIDS Some digital wireless phones may interfere with some hearing aids. In the event of such interf eren ce, you ma y want to consult you r service pr ovider . Other medical de vices Operation of a ny radio tra nsmitting equipment, including cellular phones, may interfere with the f unctionality of inadequately protected medical devices. Consult a physician or the manufacturer of the medical device to determ ine i f th ey are adequate ly shie ld ed from exter nal RF e nergy or if you have any questions. Switch off your phone in heal th care facilities when any regulations posted in th ese areas instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health car e f acilities may be u sing equipment that c ould be sensitive to extern al RF energy . Ve h i c l e s RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately sh ielded electronic syste ms in mo t or ve hicl e s (e .g. el ect ro nic fu el in jec t ion s yst em s, electronic anti-skid (anti-lock) braking systems, electronic spee d control systems, air bag systems). Check with the man ufacturer or its representative regarding your vehicle. Y ou should also consult the m anufacturer of any equipment th at has been added to your vehicle. P osted facilities Switch your phone off in any facility where posted notices s o require. P otentially explosive atmospheres Switch off your phone when in any area w ith a potentially explosive atmosphe re and obey all signs and in structions. Spar ks in such areas could cause an explosion or f ire resulting in bodily injury or even de ath.
[ 162 ] Users are advised to switch of f the phone w hen at a ref ueling point (service station). Users are reminded of the need to observe restrictions on the use of r adio equipment in f uel depots (f uel storage an d distribution areas), chemical plants or whe re blasting operations are in pr ogress. Areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere are often but not always clearly marked. T hey include be low deck on boats; chemical transfer or storage facilities; vehicles using liquified petroleum gas ( such as propane or butan e); ar eas where the a ir contains chemicals or par ticles, such as grain, d ust or m etal powde rs; and an y othe r area wh ere yo u would normall y be advised to turn off your vehicle engine. Ve h i c l e s Only qualified personnel should ser vice the ph one, or install the phone in a vehicle. F aulty ins tallation or ser vice may be dangerous and may invalidat e any warr anty which may apply to the unit. Check regula rly that all wireless phone equipment in your vehicle is mou nted and operating prope rly . Do not s tore or carry flammable liquids, gases or explosive materials in the same compartment as the phone , its parts or enh ancements. For vehicles equipped with an air bag, remember that an air bag inflates with great force. Do n ot place objects, including both installed or portable wirele ss equi pmen t in the area ove r the air bag or i n th e air bag dep loyme nt area. If in-vehicle w ireless equipmen t is improperly installed and the air bag inflates, serious injury could r esult. Using your ph one wh ile in the air is prohibite d. Switch off your phone before boarding an aircraf t. The use of wireless telephones in an aircraft may be dangerous to the operati on of the aircraf t, disrupt the w ireless telephone network and may be illegal. FCC regulations prohibit u sing your phone w hile in the air . Switch of f your phone before boarding an air craft. The use of w ireless teleph ones in an aircraft may be dangerous to the operation of th e aircraft, disrupt the wireless telephone n etwork and may be illegal. F ailure to observe these in structions may lead to suspension or denial of telephone services to the offender , or le gal action or both.
[ 163 ] Referenc e information Emergency calls Note: This phone, like any wi reless phone, ope rates using ra dio signals, wireless, and landline n etworks as well as user-programed functions. Because of this, connections in all conditions cannot be guar antee d. T her efore y ou s h ou ld n eve r rel y so le ly up on an y wir e le ss phone for essential com munications (for example, medical emer gencies). Emergency calls m ay not be pos sible on a ll wireless phone n etworks or when certain network services and/or phone features are in u se. Check with local service pr oviders. T o make an emergency call: 1 If th e phone is not on, swit ch it on. C heck for adequa te sign al strength . Some networks ma y require that a valid SIM card is pr operly inserted in the phone. 2 Press a s many times as needed (e.g. to exit a call, to exit a menu, etc.) to clear the dis play and ready the ph one for calls. 3 K ey in the em ergency number for your present loca tion (e.g. 9 1 1 or other officia l emergency n umber). Emergency n umbers vary by location . 4 Press the key . If certai n featu res are in use, you may first need to turn those featur es off before you can make an emergency call. Consult this guide an d your local cellular service pr ovider . When making a n emergency call, remember t o give all the n ecessary information as accurately as possible. Rem ember that your wireless phone may be the onl y means of communication at the scene of an accident â do not cut off th e call until given permission to do so.
[ 164 ] ⢠CERTIFIC ATION IN FORMATION (SAR) THIS MO DE L PHO NE MEE TS TH E GOVER NME NT 'S REQU IRE MENT S FO R EXPOSURE TO RADIO W AV ES. Y our wir eless phone is a radio transmitter and receiver . It is designed and manufactured not to exceed th e emission li mits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) energy set by the Federal Communications Commission of the U.S. G overnment. These limits are part of compr ehensive guidelin es and establish permitted levels of RF energy f or the general population. The guidelines are based on standar ds that were developed by in dependent scientific organizations through periodic and thorough evaluation of scientific studies. The standards include a substantial safety margin designed to assure the safety of all persons, regardless of age and health. The exposure standard for wireless mobile ph ones employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate, or SAR. The SAR limit set by the FC C is 1.6 W/kg.* T ests for SAR ar e conducted using standard operating pos iti ons accepted b y the FCC with the ph one transmitting at its highest certified powe r level i n all tested f requency bands. Although the SAR is determined at the highest certified pow er level, the actual SAR level of the phone wh ile operating can be well be low the maximum value. This is be cause the phone is designed to op erate at multiple power levels so as to u se only the power required to reach the network. In general, the closer you are to a wireless base station an tenna, the lower the p ower output. Before a phone mo del is available for sale to the public, it m ust be tested and certified to the FCC that it doe s not excee d the lim it established by the governm ent-adopted requirem ent for safe ex posure. The tests are performed in posi tions and locations (for example, at the ear and worn on the body) as r equired by the FCC f or each m odel.
[ 165 ] Referenc e information The highest SAR va lue for the Nokia 3620 model phone as reported to t he FCC whe n te sted fo r use a t th e ear is 1.1 2 W/kg, and w hen wor n on the body , as descr ibed in this user guide, is 1.28 W/kg. The highest SAR value for the Nokia 3660 model phone as r eported to the FCC when tested for use at the ear is 0.77 W/kg, and w hen worn on the body , as described in this user guide, is 1.13 W/kg. (Body-worn meas urements differ am ong phone models, depending upon available ac cessories and FCC requirements) . While there may be differe nces between the SAR le vels of various phones and at various positions, they al l meet the gove rnment requiremen t. The FCC h as granted an Equipment Authorization f or this model phone with all repor ted SAR levels evaluated as in compliance with the FCC RF exposure gu idelines. SAR information on th is model phon e is on file with the FCC and can be f ound under th e Display Grant section of http ://ww w .fcc.g ov/oe t/ fccid after searching on FCC ID QFXNHM-1 0X for the N okia 3620 model and FCC ID QFXNHL-8X fo r t he N o kia 36 60 model. For body worn operation, this phone has bee n tested and m eets the FCC RF exposure guide lines for use with a carry case, belt clip, or holder that cont ai ns no metal and that p osi ti ons the ha ndse t a min imu m of 5/ 8-i nc h (1.5 cm ) from the body . Use of other carry cases, belt clips, or holders may not ensure compliance w ith FCC R F exposure guidelines. I f you do no t use a body-worn accessory and are n ot holding the phone at the ear , position the handset a minimum of 5/ 8 inch (1.5 cm ) from y our body when the phone is s witched on. *In the United States and Canada, the SAR li mit for m obile phones used by the public is 1 .6 watts/kilogram (W/kg) averaged over one gram of tissue. The standard incorporates a substan tial margin of safety to give additional protection for the pu blic and to account for any variation s in measurements. SAR values may vary dependi ng on national r eporting requirements and the network band. For SAR in formation in other regions please look u nder pr oduct information at www .nokia.com/us .
[ 166 ] ⢠ENH A N C EM EN TS Original Nokia Enhance ments ensure the best possible operation of your Nokia mobile phone in various c onditions. Specifications are s ubject to ch ange without notice. The ava ilability of par ticular products and services may vary by region. Please check with the N okia deale r neare st you. Ope rations a nd some fea tures are ne twork dependen t. Nokia enhanceme nts enable th e best possible operation of your mobile phone in various conditions. V ar iation in operation times will occur depending on SIM card, n etwork and usage settings, usage style and environments. Please check the availa bility of W AP services with your networ k oper ator and/ or WAP service pr ovider . The avail abili ty of Blue tooth wireless technology may vary by cou ntry and Bluetooth products are not approved for use everywhere. Please check with the local authorities. Use enhancements safely A few practical rules for en hancem ent operation: ⢠K eep all enhancements ou t of the reach of small children. ⢠When you disconnect the power cord of any enhancement, grasp and pull the plu g, not the cor d. ⢠Check regularly that an y vehicle-installed enhancements are mounted and are ope rating properly . ⢠Installation of any complex car en hancemen ts must be m ade by qualified personnel only . ⢠Use only batter ies, chargers , an d enhancem ents that h ave been app ro v ed by the phon e manuf actur er . The use of any other types could inval idate any approva l or warranty apply ing to the phone and could be dangero us.
[ 167 ] Referenc e information Audio enhancements WIREL ESS HEADSET HDW-2 The N okia Wireless Hea dset HDW- 2 is design ed with Bluetoot h te chnolog y and is compatible w ith the Nokia 3620 a nd Nokia 36 60 p hon es a nd other phones suppor ting the Bluetooth 1.1 specification and Headset or Ha ndsfree profiles. The c om pac t head set gi ve s ha nds - free control of your phone without cables or wires. The ear piece fits in either ear a llowing for convenient and discreet access to a ll basic call controls. The Answer/End button lets you answer and make calls, redial, and switch the audio back and forth between the handset a nd headset . A separate volume control lets you change the call volume as necessary w hile moving from place to place. T o maximize call security , the headset also supports encryption of the wireless connection f or compatible phone m odels. HEADSET HDE-2 The HDE-2 Headset is a small and lightweigh t portable headset for easy handsfr ee operation. It has a clip to h old the he adset firmly in place. HEADSET HDC-5 The HDC-5 Headset, with a remote button, connects directly to the ph one. No extra adaptor is required, and the remote con trol is pr ovided. DUA L HEADS ET HDD- 1 The HDD-1 Dual Headset pr ovides comfortable handsfree ope ration with a remote control bu tton for answering and ending calls. RETRA CTA BLE HEADSET HDC-1 0 The HDC-1 0 Retractable Hea dset is a compact headset w ith a retractable mechanism and r emote control.
[ 168 ] BOOM H E ADS ET HD B -5 HDB-5 Headset provides handsfree functionality and a n ew â over th e ear â concept providing excellent audio quality . MOBI LE INDU CTIVE LO OP SET LPS-3 T he LPS-3 Mobile Loopset gives people with T- coil equipped hearing aids the ability to make and receive calls without noise in terference. The Loopset is e asy to use and gives hearing- impaired users clear access to digital telephony . Y ou wear the Loopset around your n eck, connect it to your ph one, and speak directly toward the m icrophone. If you are using a L oopset, you must activate it on your mobile phone by selecting Menu â T ools â Settings â A ccess ory â A ccessory in use â Loopset . Note: The Loopse t can be purch ased separa tely as an enhan ceme nt. For operating in structions, refer to the bookle t that comes with the LPS-3. For more in for ma tion, see â Learn about ac cessibility solutions â on p. 5. PHONE AD APTER H DA-9 The HDA-9 Phone Adapter is a Nokia enh anc ement that allows you to connect your mobile phone to a T elecommunications Device for the De af (TTY/TDD) to make a call in digital mode. 18 in.
[ 169 ] Referenc e information If you are using a Ph one Adapter , you must activate it on your m obile phone by se lecting Me n u â T ools â Settings â Accessor y â Acce ss or y i n use â TTY . In addition to the Nokia 3 620 or Nokia 3660 phone, you â ll ne ed the following for TTY/TDD com munication: ⢠A T T Y/T D D d e vi ce th at i s â cellu lar r eady â or â ce llular compatible â â¢ A ca ble for connecting the T TY/TDD to y our phone, usually supplied by the ma nufa cturer of th e TTY/TDD device ⢠The Phone Adapter (HDA-9), which ca n be purchased separately as an enha ncement at www . nok ia.c om For mo re info rma tion, s ee â Learn about ac cessibility solutions â on p. 5. Battery The 850 m Ah, Li-Ion based BL-5C battery provides power in a thin an d light package. It provides a talk time of up to 2 â 4 hour s and up to 15 0 â 200 hou rs standby tim e. Charging time is 1 hour and 35 mi nutes. V ariation in oper ation times will occur de pending on SIM card, network and usage settings, usage style and environmen ts. Talk time is reduced by 5 percent if En hanced Full Rate is active, and increased by up to 30 percent if Half R ate is active. Charge rs The N okia 36 20 a nd Noki a 3660 u se the ACP-12U standard charger and mobile char gers LC H-9 an d LCH-12. The LCH-12 mobile charger can be u sed with 1 2 Vdc or 24 V dc. Th e Nok ia 36 20 an d No kia 36 60 phones ar e als o compatible with th e ACP-12U and ACP-8U travel chargers. ACP- 12U
[ 17 0 ] Car enhancements WIREL ESS CAR KIT CARK-1 12 The wireless car kit offers a convenient handsfree option in a car , with a remote con trol bu tto n. The ki t incl udes th e Re mote Contro l Butt on CUW -2, Handsfree Unit HFW-1, Microphone HFM-8, HF Speaker HFS-12, and power cable PCU-4. MOBI LE HOLDER MBC-16 The MBC-16 Mobile Holder has er gonomic release buttons and a swivel mount. It supports use w ith the mobile charger and Plug-in HF Car Kit. PLUG -IN HF CA R KIT PP H-1 This handsfree car kit in cludes a built-in speaker . It uses the phone microphone, but also has a connector for an exter nal microphone, HFM-8. HEADRES T HANDSFREE BHF-2 This headres t installs on a ca r headrest for han dsfree audio. The terminal charges with the LC H-9 or LCH-12 m obile charger . MICROPHONE HFM-8 This HFM-8 is a s mall, directional microphone. Memory c ard The 64 M B memory car d provides r emovable storage for your phone. The m emory card increases available memory and storage for your multimedia files like video clips, and sound files, photos, messaging information, or to backup information from you r phone â s memo ry .
[ 17 1 ] Referenc e information ⢠NOKIA 3620 T ECHNI CAL IN FORMAT ION Feature Spec ific ati on We i g h t 4. 5 oz (1 30 g) wi th 85 0 -mA h Li -lo n battery Size 139 c c Frequency range Lowb an d 8 50 824 â 849 MHz (TX) 869 â 894 MHz (RX ) Hig hb and 190 0 1850 â 1 910 M H z ( T X ) 1930 â 1990 M Hz ( RX) T r ansmitte r ou tput powe r Lo wba nd up to 2 W Hig hba nd up to 1 W Ba ttery v olt age 3.7 V no mi nal Oper a tin g temp er atu r e 14 ð F to 131 ð F (- 1 0 ð C to 5 5 ð C) Number of channels 124 lowband 299 highband
[ 172 ] ⢠NOKI A 3660 TE CHNICAL IN FORMAT ION Feature Specif icati on We i g h t 4. 5 oz (1 30 g) wi th 85 0 -mA h Li -lo n battery Size 139 c c Frequency range Lowb an d 9 00 880 â 91 5 M H z ( T X ) 925 â 960 MHz (RX ) Highband 1 800 17 1 0 â 1769 M Hz (T X) 1805 â 1864 M Hz ( RX) Highband 1 900 1850 â 1 910 M H z ( T X ) 1930 â 1990 M Hz ( RX) T r ansmitte r ou tput powe r Lo wba nd up to 2 W High ba nd up to 1 W Ba ttery vo ltage 3.7 V no mi nal Operating temp erature 14 ð F to 13 1 ð F (- 1 0 ð C to 5 5 ð C) Number of channels 194 lowband 299 highband
[ 173 ] Referenc e information ⢠T R OUBLESHOOTIN G If you experie nce problems with your phon e, the infor mation below may help you resolve the problem. I f you cannot find a solution in this user guide, contact the Nokia Cust omer Ca re Center for furth er assist ance. See â Contact Nokia â on p. 5. Memory low When following notes are shown, the phone memory is low and you must start to delete some data: Not en ough memory to perfor m operation. Delete some dat a first. or Memory low . Delete som e data. ⢠T o view what kind of data you have and how much memory the different data groups consume, go to Ma n ag er and select Opti ons â Memory details . Delete the following items regularly: ⢠messages from the I nbox, Drafts, and Sent folders in Messaging ⢠retrieved e-mail messa ges from the ph one memory ⢠saved browser pa ges ⢠images and photos in Images ⢠If you want to delete contact information, calendar notes, call timers , call cost timers, game scores, or any other data, go to the respective application to rem ove the data. Note: If you are del eting multipl e i tems an d ano ther of the fol lowing note s i s sh o wn : Not enough memory to per form operation. Delete some data f irst . or Memo ry low . Dele te so me da ta. try deleting items one by on e (starting from th e smallest item). Clearing calendar memory T o rem ove more than one even t at a time, go to the Mon th view , s elect Opti on s â Del ete , and s elect one of the followin g: ⢠Before date â to delete all calen dar notes which take place befor e a certain date. Enter the date before which all calendar notes will be deleted . ⢠All e n tr ie s â to delete all calendar notes.
[ 174 ] Erasing log information T o erase all the log contents, Re cent calls log, and Messaging delivery reports permanently , go to Logs and select Option s â Clear log or go to Settings â Log du ration â No log . Different ways to store data ⢠Use PC Suite to take a back up copy of a ll data t o your computer . ⢠Send images to your e -mail address and then save the images to your computer . ⢠Send data by infrared or a Bluetooth connection to a nother device.
[ 175 ] Referenc e information ⢠NOKIA ONE-Y EAR LIMITED WARRANTY Nokia Inc. ( â Nokiaâ ) warrants that this cellular phone ( â Productâ ) is free from defects in mater ial and workmanship that result i n Product failure during normal usage, according to th e following terms and con ditions: 1 The lim ited w arranty for th e Produ ct exten ds for ONE (1) year beginn ing on the date of the pu rchase of the Product. T his one year pe riod is extended by each wh ole day that the Product is out of you r possession for repair under th is warranty . 2 The l imited warra nty extends on ly to the or ig inal pu rcha se r ( â Consumer â ) of the Product and is not assignable or transferable to an y subsequent purchaser/end- user . 3 The limited warranty ex tends only to Consumers who pu rchase the Product in the Un ited States of America. 4 During the limited warranty period, Nokia w ill repair , or r eplace, at Nokia â s sole option, any defective parts, or any parts that will not properly oper ate for their intende d use with new or refurbished replacement items if such repair or replacement is needed because of product malfunction or f ailure during normal usage. No ch arge will be m ade to the Consumer f or any such parts. Nokia will also pay for the labor ch arges incurred by Nokia in repairing or replacing the defective parts . The limited warranty does not cover defects in appear ance, cosmetic, decor ative or structu ral items, in cluding framing, and any non- operative p arts. Noki a â s limit o f li abili ty un der th e lim it ed warranty sh all be the actual cash value of the Product at the time the Consumer returns the Product for repair , dete rmined by the price paid by the Consumer for the Product less a re asonable amount f or usage. Nokia s hall not be lia ble for a ny other los ses or da mages. These rem edies are the Consu mer â s exclusive remedies for bre ach of warranty . 5 Upon reque st from Nokia, th e Consumer must prove th e date of the original purchase of the Product by a dated bill of sale or dated itemized receipt.
[ 176 ] 6 The Consumer shall bear the cost of shipping the Pr oduct to Nokia in Melbourne, Florida. Nokia shall bear the cost of shipping the Product back to the Con sumer after th e completion of service under thi s limited warranty . 7 The C onsumer shall have no coverage or benefits under this limited warranty if an y of the f ollowing conditions are a pplicable: a) The Product has bee n subjected to abnormal use, abnormal conditions, improper storage, exposure to moisture or dampness, unauthorized modifications, unauthorized connections, unauthorized repair , misuse, neglect, abuse, accident, alteration, improper installation, or other a cts which are n ot the fault of Nokia, including damage caused by shipping. b) The Pr oduct has bee n damaged from ex ternal causes such as collision with an object, or from fire, floodi ng, sand, dirt, windstorm, lightning, earthquake or damag e from exposure to weather conditions, an A ct of God, or battery leakage, theft, blown fuse, or i mpro per u se of any ele ctr ic al sou rce, dama ge cau s ed by comp ute r or internet vir uses, bugs, worms, Trojan Horses, cancelbots or damage caused by the connection to oth er products not recommended for interconnection by Nokia. c) Nokia was not advised in writing by the Consumer of th e alleged defect or malfunction of the Pr oduct within fourteen (14) da ys after the e xpiration of the applicab le limited w arranty period. d) Th e Product serial number plate o r the accessory data code has been rem oved, de faced or altered. e) The def ect or damage was caused by the defective f unction of the cellular system or by inadequate sign al reception by the ex ternal antenna, or viruses or oth er software problems introduced into the Product. 8 Nokia does not warrant uninterrupted or error-free operation of the Product. If a problem develo ps during the lim ited warranty period , the Consumer shall take the f ollowing step-by-step pr ocedure: a) The Consumer shall return the Pr oduct to the place of purchase for repair or r eplacement processing.
[ 177 ] Referenc e information b) If â a â is not conveni ent because of distance (more than 50 miles) or for other good cause, the C onsumer shall ship the Pr oduct prepaid and insured to: Nokia Inc., Attn: Repair Depar tment 795 West Na sa Bl vd. Melbourne, FL 3290 1 c) The Consumer shall include a return address, daytime phone number and/or fax number , complete description of the problem, proof of purchase and service agreement (if appl icable). Expenses related to removing the Product from an installation are not covered under th is limited warranty . d) T he Con sumer w ill be billed for any p art s or lab or ch arges n ot cover ed by th is limi ted war ranty . T he Co nsumer will b e resp onsible for any expe nses re lated to reinstall ation of the Produ ct. e) Nokia will repair th e Product under the limited w arranty with in 3 0 days aft er receipt of t he Product. If Nokia canno t perform repair s covered under this limited warran ty within 30 da ys, or a fter a reasonable number of attempts to repair the same defect, Nokia at its option, wil l provide a r eplacement Product or r efund the purchase price of the Product less a reason able amount for usage. In some states the Consumer may ha ve the right to a loaner if the repair of the Pr oduct take s more than ten (1 0) days. Ple ase contact the Customer Service Center at Nokia at the telephone number listed at the e nd of this warranty if you need a loaner and the repair of th e Product has ta ken or is estimated to t ake more than ten (1 0 ) days . f) If the Product is r eturned during the limited warranty period, but the problem with the Product is not covered under the ter ms and conditions of this limited war ranty , the Consumer will be n otified and given an estim ate of the charges the Consumer must pay to have the Product repaired, with all shipping charges billed to the Consumer . If the estimate is ref used, the Product will be return ed freight collect. If the Pr oduct is re turned after the e xpiration of the limited warranty period, Nokia â s nor mal service policies shall apply and th e Consumer will be responsible for all shipping ch arges.
[ 178 ] 9 Y ou (t he Co nsu me r) un d er sta nd th at the p ro duc t ma y c ons ist of refurbished equipment that contains used components, some of which have been repr ocessed. The used componen ts comply w ith Product performance and r eliability specifications. 10 ANY I MPLIED WARRANT Y OF M ERCHA NTA BIL ITY , OR FI TNESS FO R A P ARTICU LAR PU RPOSE OR USE, SHAL L BE L IMITED TO THE DURATION OF T HE FORE GOING LI MI TED W RIT TEN WARRA NTY . OTHER WISE , TH E FO REG OI NG LI MITE D W ARR A NTY I S T HE C ONSU MER â S SO LE AND E XCL US IVE REM ED Y AND IS IN LI EU OF AL L O TH ER W A RRA NT IE S, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. NOKIA SHALL NO T BE LIABLE FO R SPECIAL, INCIDE NTAL, PUNITIVE OR CONSE QUE NTIA L DAMAGE S, INCLUDIN G BU T N O T LI MI TE D T O LOSS O F ANT I CIP A T ED BE NE F ITS OR P RO FI TS, LOSS OF SA VINGS OR REVENUE, LOSS OF DA T A, PUNITIVE DAMA GES, LOSS OF USE OF THE PRODUCT OR ANY ASSOCIA TED EQUIPME NT , C OST OF CAPITAL, COST OF ANY SUBSTITUTE EQUIPME NT OR FACILIT IES, DO WNT IM E, THE C LAIM S OF ANY TH IR D P ARTIE S , INC LUD IN G CUST OMERS, AND I NJURY TO PROPERT Y , RESULTING FROM TH E PURC HAS E OR U SE O F TH E PR ODUC T OR AR ISIN G F ROM BRE A CH OF THE WARRANTY , BREACH OF CONT RACT , NEGLI GENCE, STRI CT TORT , OR ANY O T HER LEGAL OR EQ UIT ABLE T HEOR Y , EVEN IF NOKI A KN EW OF THE LIKELI HOOD OF SUC H DAMAG ES. NOKIA SHALL NO T B E LIABLE FOR DELA Y IN RENDERING SERVIC E UNDER THE LIMITED W ARR ANTY , OR LOS S OF USE DU RIN G THE PER IOD TH AT THE PROD UC T IS BEI NG REPAIRED. 11 Some states do not allow limitation of how long an implied warranty lasts, s o the one year warranty limitation may not a pply to you (the Consumer). Some states do not a llow the exclusion or limitation of incidental and consequential damages, so certain of th e above limitations or exclu sions may not apply to you (the C onsumer). This limited warranty gives the Con sumer specific legal r ights and the Consumer ma y also have other rights which vary f rom state to state.
[ 179 ] Referenc e information 12 Nokia neither assum es nor authorizes any authorized ser vice center or any oth er person or entity to assume f or it any other obligation or liability beyond that which is ex pressly provided for in this limite d warranty including the provider or seller of any extended warranty or serv ic e agree men t. 13 This is the entire warranty betwee n Nokia and the C onsumer , and super sedes all prio r and c onte mporan eous agree ments or u nder standi ngs, oral or wr itten, relating to th e Product, an d no representation, promise or condition not contained herein shall modify the se terms. 14 This limited warranty allocates the r isk of failur e of the Pr oduct between the Consumer and Nokia. The allocation is r ecognized by the Con sumer and is reflected in the pu rchase price. 15 Any action or la wsuit for br each of warranty m ust be commenced within eightee n (18) month s following purchase of th e Produ ct. 16 Questions c oncerning this lim ited warranty may be directed to: Nokia Inc. Attn: Customer Service 7725 W oodland Center Blvd., Ste. 150 Ta m p a , F L 3 3 614 T e le pho ne: 1- 88 8-N OKI A- 2U (1- 88 8- 665 -4 22 8) F ac si mile: ( 8 13) 28 7-6612 TTY/T DD Use rs O nly : 1-80 0- 24-NO KIA (1- 80 0-246 -6 54 2) 17 The limited warranty period for Nokia supplied attachments and accessories is specifically def ined within their own warranty cards and packagin g.
[ 180 ] Manu fac tured o r so ld unde r on e or more of th e foll owi ng US pa te nts: 4868846 4945633 500 1372 51 0 1 175 5 15 1946 5 173927 52 12834 523009 1 524 1583 5 3 1 1 15 1 53 17283 533 1638 5335362 5353328 537 148 1 5378935 5384782 5396657 5400949 54 16435 544252 1 5446364 547947 6 5526366 5553 125 5557639 556582 1 5570369 558 1244 5600 7 08 5625274 5677620 5692032 5729541 5760568 5794 142 5802465 58094 13 5827082 583 9101 5844884 5845219 5870683 5884 1 03 588977 0 590 7823 59 1257 0 59 14690 59 14796 59 17868 5920826 5956332 5956625 5956633 596637 8 5977887 5987 137 5991857 6006 1 14 60 1 1853 60 1455 1 60 14573 6026 161 6035189 6038238 6043760 6047 196 6049796 6050415 6055439 6060193 6069923 60 72787 6081732 6084920 6084962 6094587 6097964 61 05784 6 1 12099 6 1 156 17 61 19 180 6 12 1846 6128509 6 13809 1 6 140966 6 144243 6 144676 6 148209 6 15 1485 6 15150 7 6 163609 6 164547 6 167248 6185295 6188909 6249584 6259312 6266330 627236 1 6282436 6292668 6295286 63 1 1 054 63 14 166 6324389 63244 12 6347218 6363259 637 0362 6370389 6377820 638 1468 6392660 6400958 6453 179 6463278 647047 0 6487397 652267 0 6 198928 4969 192 5266782 5390 223 54448 16 5487 084 5640395 5664053 5699482 570 1392 57220 74 5754976 5805301 5835889 5857 15 1 5859843 5862 178 5898925 5930233 594665 1 5960354 5960389 596390 1 6005857 60 1 197 1 6031827 61 1 8775 6 128322 6 137789 6 167248 6 17 00 73 6178535 6 195338 6 199035 62400 76 626632 1 6285888 6356759 6377803 6430 163 643837 0 6456237 RE32580 58 18437 5953541 601 1554 455830 2
[ 18 1 ] Appendix A Message from th e CTIA Append ix A Message from the CTIA (Cellular T elecommunications & Inter net Assoc iation) to all users of mobi le phones. é 2001 Cellul ar T elecomm unications & In ternet Asso ciation . All Right s R eserv ed.1250 Conn ecticut A v enu e, NW S uite 800, W ashington, DC 20036. Phone: (202) 785-0081
[ 182 ] Saf ety is the m ost i mpo rtan t call you wil l ever make . A G u ide t o S a fe an d R es pon s ibl e Wi r ele s s P ho n e Us e T ens of mil lio ns of pe opl e in the U .S . toda y ta k e ad v antage o f t he unique co mbina tion of conv enienc e, safety and v alue d eliv er e d by the wireless telep hon e. Quit e sim ply , the wireless phone gi v es peo ple the po w erful ability to communicate b y v oice-- almo st anyw here, anytim e--with the b oss, with a client, with the kids, with emerge ncy personn el or e v e n with th e polic e. Each y e ar , Ame ricans ma k e billions of calls from their w ireless phone s, and the numbers are rapidly gro wing. But an imp ort ant responsibility acc ompanie s those b enefit s, one th at ev er y wireless phone user must u phold. When driving a car , driving is y our first r e sponsibilit y . A wireless phon e ca n be an inv aluab le too l, bu t go od judg men t must be exer cised at all tim es w hile d ri vin g a mot or v e hicle--w heth er on the ph on e or n ot. T he basic lessons ar e ones w e all learn ed as teena gers. Dri ving requir es ale rtness, cau tion and cou rt esy . It r equires a hea vy dose of basic commo n se nse---keep y our hea d up , k eep y our e y es on th e road, c heck y our mirrors frequently a nd w atch out f or ot her driv ers . It r e quires obeyin g all traff ic signs and signals and sta ying wit hin the speed limit . It means using se atbelts and requiring other p asseng ers to do the same . But with wireless phone use, driving safely means a little mo r e. This br oc hur e is a call to wireless phone users ev er yw her e to mak e safety their f irst priority w he n behind th e w hee l of a car . W ireless teleco mmun icati ons is ke eping u s in t ouch, simplify ing our liv es , protecting us in em ergenc ies and pro vid ing o ppo rt unities t o help ot hers in n eed . W hen it co mes to the use of w ir eless ph ones, saf ety is your most important ca ll . Wireless Phone âÂÂSafety Tip sâ Belo w ar e safety tips to f ollo w w hile driving and using a w ir eless pho ne w hich sh ou ld be eas y to r e me mbe r . 1 G et to kno w y o ur wir eless p hon e and it s features suc h as speed dial and r edial. Carefully r e ad y our instructio n man ual and learn to tak e ad v antage of v aluable features most ph one s offer , includin g auto mat ic r edial a nd me mor y . Also, w ork to me moriz e the phone k eypad so y o u c an use the spe ed dia l func tio n wit hout tak ing y o ur att entio n off th e road. 2 When a v a ilab l e, use a ha nds fr ee devi ce. A n umb er of han ds free wireless phone accessorie s are r eadily a v a ilab le toda y . Whethe r y ou c hoose an instal led m ounte d device f or y our wireless pho ne or a speaker phone ac cesso ry , tak e ad v an tage o f thes e dev ices i f a v ailable to y ou . 3 P o sitio n y our w ir eless p hone w ithin easy r each. Make sure y ou place y ou r wireless phon e wit hin ea sy r each and w he r e y ou ca n g ra b it witho ut r emo ving y our ey e s from the r oad. If y o u g et an inc oming call at an incon v e nient tim e, if possib le, le t y our v oice mail ans w er it f or y ou.
[ 183 ] Appendix A Message from th e CTIA 4 S uspend conv ersations d uring h azardous driving co ndition s or situatio ns. Let the person y ou are speakin g with kno w y ou ar e dri ving; if nece ssar y , suspend the call in hea vy traffic or haz ar dous w eathe r condit ions. R ain, slee t, sn o w an d ice can be h azar dou s, b ut so is hea vy traf f ic. A s a dri v er , y ou r first re sponsib ility is to pa y atte ntion to t he ro ad. 5 D o not ta ke notes or look up ph one numbers w h ile driving. If y ou are r eading an addr ess boo k or b usiness c ard, or writi ng a âÂÂto d oâ list w hile driving a ca r , y ou ar e not w a tching w here y ou are going. Itâ s comm on sense . D onâ t g et ca ugh t in a dang e r ous situation be cause y o u are r e ading or writ ing and not pa y ing atte ntion to th e roa d o r near by v eh icles. 6 Dial sen sibly and assess the traff ic ; if possible, place calls w hen y ou ar e not mo ving or befor e pulling into tr aff ic. T r y to plan y our calls bef or e y ou begin y our trip or a ttem pt to co incide y our calls w ith times y o u ma y b e st opped at a sto p sign, red light or otherw ise station ar y . But if y ou nee d to di al w hile driving, f oll o w this simple tip--dial only a few n umbers, ch eck the road and y our m irr ors, t hen co nt i n ue . 7 D o not e ng age in stressful or em otion al conv ersatio ns tha t ma y be distracting. Str ess ful or emo tional c on v ersations and dri ving do not mix--th ey ar e distra cting and ev en dan ge rous w hen y ou are behind t he w he el of a car . M ak e peo ple y ou ar e talking with a w are y ou ar e driving an d if necessar y , suspend con v ersations w hich ha v e the po te ntia l to div er t y ou r atten tio n from th e road. 8 Use y our w ir eless phon e to call for help . Y ou r wireless phon e is one o f the greatest to ols y o u can o w n to protect y ou rself a nd y our f amily in dang e r ous situa tions--w ith y o ur phone at y our sid e, help is o nly three numbers a w a y . D ial 9- 1- 1 o r o th er lo ca l em er gency n umber in t he cas e o f f ir e, t raf fi c a cci d en t , r oad hazard or me dical e mergenc y . R emem ber , it is a free call on y our wireless phone ! 9 Use y our wir eless phon e to help o thers in e mergencies. Y our wireless phone pr o vide s y ou a perf ect opp ortunity to be a âÂÂGood Sama rit anâ i n y our comm u nit y . If y o u see an auto acc ident , crim e in progress or ot her serio us e mergenc y w her e li v es ar e in dan ger , call 9-1-1 or other loc al emergenc y number , as y ou w ould w ant others t o do f or y ou. 10 Call r o adsid e assistance or a special wir eless non-emergenc y assistance n umber w hen n ecessar y . Cer tain situ ations y o u enco unt er w hile dri ving ma y r equ ir e attention, but ar e not urgent enou gh to merit a call f or emergenc y services. But y ou still can u se y our w ir eless p hone t o lend a h and. If y ou see a brok en-do wn v eh icle posing n o serious h azard, a brok en traff ic signal, a mi nor traff ic accide nt w her e no one app ears injured or a v ehicle y ou kno w to be sto len , call roadside assistance or othe r special no n-emer gen cy wireless n umber . Careless, distracted ind i viduals a nd peop le driv ing irr esponsibly r epresent a hazard to e v er y one on the r oad. Since 1984, the Cellular T ele communications Industry Ass ocia tio n and the wir eless in dustry ha v e con duct ed educ ation al outr eac h to in f orm wir eless ph one users of their responsibilities as safe dri v e rs and good citizens. As w e appr oa ch a new cen tur y , more and m ore of us w ill ta k e ad v an tage of t he be ne f its of wireless telepho ne s . And, as w e tak e to th e roads, w e all ha v e a r espo nsibili ty to driv e safely .
[ 184 ] T he wir eless industry remind s you to use your phon e saf e l y when drivin g . F or mo r e inf o rmation, please call 1-888-901-SA FE. F or up dat es: http://www .w o w-co m.com/ consu mer/issu es/driving/ artic les .cfm?ID= 85 é 20 01 Ce llu lar T e leco mmun ication s & Inte rnet Ass ociatio n. Al l Ri ghts R e serv ed. 1250 Connecticut A v enue, NW Suite 800, W ashington , DC 20036. Phone: (202) 7 85-0081
[ 185 ] Appendix B Message from the FDA Append ix B Message from the FDA (U.S. Food and Drug Administration) to all users of mobile phones. J uly 18, 2001 ..... F or up dates: http://www .fda.go v/cdrh/phone s
[ 186 ] Consumer Up date on Wireless P hones U.S. Foo d an d Dr ug A dmi nistr at ion 1. Do wir eless phones pose a healt h hazard ? Th e a v ailab le scienti f ic evidence does no t sho w that any health problems ar e associ ated w ith usin g wireless ph ones. T here is no proof , ho w ev er , that wireless phone s ar e a bsolutely safe. W ir eless p hones e mit lo w lev els o f r adiof r equenc y energ y (RF) in the mic r o w a v e r ang e w hile being used . They also emit v er y lo w lev els of RF w hen in t he sta nd-by m ode. Whereas high lev els of RF can p roduce h ealth effects (b y heating tissue) , e xposu r e to lo w lev el R F that does not produce heating eff ects causes no k no wn ad v erse health effects . Many studies of lo w lev el R F ex posures ha v e not f ound a ny b iological e ff ect s . Some st udies h a v e su gg est ed th at some bio logical effects m a y occ ur , but such findings ha v e not be en confirme d by additional r esear c h. In some cases, other resear c hers ha v e had d iff iculty in r eproducin g tho se stud ies, or in de te rmin ing th e reason s f or in co nsistent results. 2. Wha t is FDA's role concern ing the safety of wireless pho nes? Under t he la w , F D A d oe s not revie w the safet y of radiat ion -emittin g con sum er products such as w ireless phon es b ef or e the y can be sold , as i t d oes w ith n ew drugs or medic al device s . H o w ev er , t he agenc y h as a uthorit y to tak e acti on if wireless phone s are sho wn t o em it radiof r equ enc y ene rg y (RF) a t a lev el that is hazardou s to the user . In such a case, FD A coul d r equire the manufact ur ers of wireless phone s to notif y users o f the hea lth h azard and to repair , replace or r ecall the pho nes so t hat the ha za r d no lo ng er exists. Although t he existing scientific data do no t justify FD A r egulator y ac tions, FD A has ur ged the wir el ess pho ne industry to tak e a nu mber of st eps, in cl ud ing the f ollo wing: ⢠Supp or t n eed ed researc h into po ssible biologica l e f fect s of RF o f the typ e emitt ed by wire less ph ones; ⢠Design wire less phones in a w a y that minimizes any RF e xposur e to the user tha t is n ot n ec es sar y for device fu nc tio n; a nd ⢠Co operate in p r o viding users of wireless phone s with the be st possible inf o r mati on o n possible effects of wireless phon e use on hum an he alth . FD A be longs to a n int era g enc y w or king g roup of th e fed eral agenc ies tha t ha v e r esponsibilit y f o r differ ent aspects of R F safety to ensu r e coordinated eff orts at the federal lev el. The f o llo wing ag encies b elo ng to this w or king group: ⢠National Institute f or Occupational Saf ety and Health ⢠En vir onme nta l Protection Ag en cy ⢠F eder a l C omm u nic a tio n s Co mm is si on ⢠Oc cupational Safe ty and Health Administra tion ⢠Nat ional T elec ommunic ations and Inf or mation Adm inistration T he National In stitutes of He alth par ticipat es in some in teragenc y w orking group acti vities, as w ell.
[ 187 ] Appendix B Message from the FDA FD A shares r egulator y responsibilit ies f o r wireless phon es with t he F ederal Commun icat ions Co mmi ssion (F CC). All pho ne s that are sold in the United State s must co mply wit h FCC safety gu ideline s that lim it RF exposure . FC C r elies on F D A and o ther h ealth ag en cies f or safety que stio ns about wireless pho nes. FCC also r egulates the base station s that the wireless phon e netw orks r ely upon. While these base stati ons opera te at high er po w e r than do the wireless phon es the msel v es, the RF exposure s that people g et from these base stations are typically thousand s of times lo w er t han those the y can g et from wir eless phon es . Base stations ar e thus not the subjec t of the safety quest ions disc ussed in this d ocume nt. 3. What kinds of phones are the subject of this up d ate? T he term wir eless phon e re fers her e to hand-held wireless phones wit h b uilt-in antenn as, ofte n ca lled cel l mob ile or PCS pho ne s . T hese t ype s of wi r eless phone s can expose the user to m eas urab le radio frequenc y en erg y (RF) bec ause of th e sho rt di st an ce b et w een the ph on e a nd th e u ser â s he ad . T h es e RF e xpos ur es ar e li mi te d b y F e deral Co mmunicat ions Com mission safety guide line s that w ere dev eloped w ith t he a d vice of FD A a nd o t he r f eder al he al th an d sa f ety a g enc i es . W he n t he p hone i s loc ate d at g rea ter dist ance s from th e u ser , the exp osu re to RF is d rasti ca lly lo w e r because a person's R F exposure decr eases rapidly wi th increasing dista nce from the source. The so-calle d cordless p hones; w h ich ha v e a ba se un it c onnec te d to th e telephon e wirin g in a ho use, typic ally op erate at far lo w er po w er lev els, and thus produce RF exposures far belo w the F CC sa fety limits. 4. Wha t are the resu lt s of the research don e already? T h e r e sea r c h done th us fa r ha s pr odu ce d co nf li ct ing r e sul t s , an d man y st udi es ha v e suffe re d fr om f la w s in t heir r esear c h metho ds . An imal ex periment s in v e stig ating the ef fect s of r adio fr equ ency ene r g y (RF ) e xpos ur es c har ac te ri st ic of wi r e les s phon e s ha v e yielded con f lict ing r esults th at often cann ot be repeated in other laboratorie s . A fe w animal st udies, ho w e v e r , ha v e sug g ested that lo w lev els of RF could acc elerate the d ev elop men t of ca ncer in laborator y anim als. Ho w e v e r , man y of th e stud ies tha t sho w ed increased t umo r dev elo pment used anim al s that had be en g enet ically eng in eer ed or t r eated wi th ca ncer -c ausi ng c h emi cal s s o a s to be p r e-di sp ose d t o dev elop can cer in the absence of RF exposure . Other stu dies e xposed t he animals to RF f or up to 22 hours pe r da y . T hese condition s are not similar t o the condit ions under w hic h peop le u se wireless pho nes, so w e donâ t kn o w wit h cer t aint y w hat the r esults of such studies me an f o r hu man health. Th ree lar ge e pidemio log y stud ies h a v e been pu blished since De cem ber 2000. Bet w een th em , the s tudie s in v est ig at ed any po ss ib le as soc iatio n betw een th e use of wireless phon es and prim ar y brain can cer , g liom a, me ningioma, o r acou stic neuroma, tum ors of the b rain or sali v ar y gl and, leuk emia , or othe r canc ers. None of th e st udi e s de mon str ate d th e e xiste nc e of any harmful heal t h ef f ect s from wireless phon e R F e xposures. Ho w ev er , none o f the studies c an answ er questi ons about lo ng- ter m exposures, since th e a v e ra g e period of pho ne use in these stud ies w a s around t hree y ear s .
[ 188 ] 5. What research i s needed to decide whether RF exposure from wireless phones poses a h ealth ri sk? A comb ination of la borator y studies and epidemio logical studies of peo ple actually using wi r eless ph ones w ould pro vide so me of the da ta th at are neede d. Lifet ime animal e xposure studies co uld be c ompleted in a fe w y ears. Ho w ev er , v e ry large n umb ers of a nimals w ould b e ne eded to p r o v ide r elia ble p r oof of a ca nc er pr omoting ef f ec t if one e xist s . Ep ide mi olog i cal s tud ie s can pr o vid e data tha t is d ir ectl y a ppli ca ble to hum an p opu latio ns, b ut 10 or more y ears f ollo w -up ma y be ne eded t o pro vide ans w ers about so me healt h effects, such as canc er . This is bec ause the int erv al betw een t he tim e of exposure to a can cer -cau sing ag en t and the t ime tum ors dev e lop - if th ey do - ma y be many , many y ears . The interpr etation o f epidemiolo gical stu dies is hamp er ed b y di ff iculti es in mea sur ing a ctual RF e xp osur e during da y-t o-da y u se of wir eless phones. Ma ny factors affe ct this measur ement, such as t he angle at w h ic h the ph one is h eld, o r w hich mode l of pho ne is us ed. 6. What is FDA do in g to f ind ou t more a bout the po ssibl e h ea lth effe ct s of wir eless phone RF? FD A is w or king w ith the U .S . N ation al T oxicolog y Program an d with g roups of in v estigators ar o und the w or ld to ensur e that high priority animal studies ar e condu ct ed to a ddress impo rta nt q ue stion s a bout the e ff ect s of exposure to radiofrequen c y en erg y (RF) . FD A has be en a lea ding particip ant in the W or ld Hea lth Or g anizati on Int erna tiona l Elect ro magneti c Fie lds (EMF ) Project sin ce its in ceptio n in 1996. An inf lue ntial re sul t of thi s w or k has b een th e de v elopme nt of a detai led a g enda of r esear c h needs th at has dri v en the esta b lishme nt o f n e w r esear ch pr o gr ams ar ound the w or l d. T he Pr oject ha s al so help ed dev elop a seri es of pub lic inf ormat ion do cume nts on EMF is su es . FD A and the Cellular T e lecom munication s & Int erne t Associ ation (C TIA) ha v e a f or m al Coo perativ e R ese arc h and D ev elo pme nt Ag reem en t (CR AD A) to d o r esearc h on wireless phon e safet y . FD A pro vides the scient ific o v ersight, ob tain ing input f rom e xper t s in go v e rnme nt, ind ustr y , and aca demic o r g aniz ation s . CTIA- funde d resear ch is conduc ted t hrough con tracts to inde pen dent in v estig ator s . T he initial r esearc h will include bot h laboratory studie s and stud ies of wireless pho ne users. T h e C RAD A will also include a broad assessmen t of additional researc h needs in th e cont ext of th e latest r esearc h dev elopment s around the w or l d. 7. How can I find out how much radi ofre quency ener gy expos ur e I can get by u s ing m y w irel ess pho ne? All pho nes sold in the Un ited States must comp ly with F ede ral Commun ications Comm ission (FC C) guid elines th at limit radiofrequenc y ene r g y ( RF) exposures . FCC e stab lished these guide line s in consu lta tion with F D A and t he ot her federa l hea lth a nd safe ty agen cie s . The FCC limit for RF exposu r e from w ir eless t eleph ones is set at a Specific Absor ption Rate (SAR) of 1. 6 w atts pe r kilogram (1.6 W/kg). The FCC lim it is c onsiste nt wit h the safety sta ndards dev elope d by the Inst itute of Electr ical an d El ectr o nic Eng ineer ing (IEEE) and th e N ation al C ounc il o n R a diat ion Pr otection a nd Measur ement. T he e xposur e limit tak es into cons ider a tion the b odyâ s a bility to remo v e heat from the tissu es that ab sorb e nerg y from the wireless phone and is set w e ll belo w le v e ls kno wn to h a v e e f fects.
[ 189 ] Appendix B Message from the FDA Manufactu r ers of w ir eless pho nes must r epor t the RF e xposu r e lev el f o r each model of pho ne to the FC C. The FC C w ebsit e (ht tp: //www . fcc.go v /oet/ rfsafet y) giv es directions f or locating the FC C iden tif ica tion number on y o ur pho ne so y ou can find y our pho neâ s RF exposure lev el in the o nline list ing. 8. What has FDA do ne to measure the radiofrequency energy coming from wireless phones? The Instit ute o f E lectrica l a nd El ectronic Engin ee rs (IE EE) is d ev elop ing a technic al stan dar d f or measuri ng th e radiof r eque ncy e ne r g y ( RF) exposure fr om wireless phone s and o ther wireless ha ndset s with t he par ticipa tion an d lead ersh ip of FD A scient ists a nd engin eer s . The stan dard, R eco mmen ded Practic e f or De ter minin g the Spatial-P eak Specific Absor ption Rate (SAR ) in th e Human Body Due to W ir eless Commun icat ions Device s: Expe rime ntal T ec h niqu es, sets forth t he first cons istent test m ethod olog y f or measu ring t he rate at w h ich RF is deposi ted in the head s of wireless phon e users. T he te st met hod use s a tissue -simulating mode l of the huma n head. Standar d ized SAR test meth odology is expected to gr eatly impr o v e the consist enc y of m easu r emen ts m ade at different labora torie s on th e same ph one. SAR is th e m easurement of the a m ount o f e nerg y absorb ed in tissu e, e ith er by the w hole bo dy or a small part of the body . It is measur e d in w a tts/kg (or milliw atts/g ) of m att er . T his mea su r ement i s u sed t o det er min e w hethe r a wi r eles s ph one compli es wit h safety guideline s . 9. What step s can I t ake to reduce my exposure to radiofrequency energy from my wir eless phone? If t he r e i s a r isk fr om thes e p r o duct s-- and at th is po i nt w e do n ot kn o w that th e r e is--it is pr o bab ly v er y small. But if y ou ar e con cern ed a bout a v oiding ev en poten tial risks, y ou can t ak e a few simple steps to minim ize y our expo sur e to radiofrequenc y energ y (R F). Since tim e is a k ey fa cto r in ho w much e x po sur e a person receiv es, r educing t he amo unt of time sp ent usi ng a wireless phone will reduce RF expo sur e. If y o u must co nd uct exte nded c on v ersa tions by wireless phone ev er y da y , y ou co uld plac e more distance bet w ee n y our bo dy a nd the sou r ce of the RF , since the exposur e lev el drops off dramatica lly wit h distance . F or e xam ple, y ou co uld us e a head set an d carr y the wireless pho ne a w a y from y our bod y or use a wireless phone conn ecte d to a r emote antenna. Ag a in, the sc ientific data do not demon strate t hat wir eless ph ones a r e har mf ul. But if y ou are co ncer ne d a bout the R F exposu r e from the se p r oduc ts, y ou ca n u se mea su r es li k e t hos e des c rib e d a bo v e to r edu ce y ou r R F e xpos ur e fr om wi r e les s phone use. 10. What about chi ldren using wir eless phones? T he s cienti f ic ev idenc e does not sho w a danger to us ers of w ir eless phones , inc lud in g c hi ldr en and teena g ers . I f y ou w ant to tak e steps to l o w er e xposur e to r adio fr equency energ y (R F), the mea sures described abo v e w o uld apply to children and t eenag ers using wi r eless ph ones. R educ ing the tim e of wireless pho ne u se and increasing th e distance betw een the use r and the RF source will r educe R F exposure.Some g r oups sponsored b y other natio nal go v e rn ment s ha v e ad v ised that childr en be discourag ed fr om using w ireless phones at all. F or e xamp le, the go v ern ment in the Unit ed
[ 190 ] Kingdom distrib uted leaf lets cont aining such a r ecomm endation in December 2000. They noted th at no ev idence exists tha t using a wireless pho ne caus es brain t umors or othe r ill effects . T heir recomm end ation t o limit wireless pho ne u se by c hildr en w as strictly p r ecautionar y; it w as n ot based on scientific e vidence that any health haz ar d e xists. 1 1. What about wireless phone i nterference w ith medi cal equipmen t? Radiofrequen c y en erg y ( RF ) from w ireless pho nes ca n intera ct w ith so me ele ct r onic de v ic es . F or t his r e as on, F D A he lp ed de v elop a detai le d t es t meth o d t o me asur e elect r omagn eti c int erference (E M I) of impl ant ed ca r diac p ac ema k ers an d defibrillators fr om wire less telepho nes. T his t est meth od is no w par t of a standard sponsored b y the Asso ciation f or the Ad v ancemen t of Med ical instrum entation (AAMI ). T he final dra ft, a joint eff or t by FD A, med ical d evice man ufacturers, and many other g r oups, w as completed in late 2000. This standar d will allo w manu fact urers to ensure that car diac pacem ak ers and defibrillators ar e safe fr om wireless phon e EM I. FD A has te sted h earing aid s f or interfer enc e fr om ha ndhe ld wireless phone s and he lped dev e lop a v olunt ar y sta nda r d sponso r ed b y the In stit ute of Electri cal a n d Ele ctr on ic Engine ers (IEEE) . T his standa rd specif i es t est met hods and performanc e requir ement s f or hearing aid s and w ireless phone s so that n o interference occ urs w h en a perso n u ses a co mp atible pho ne an d a acc om panie d hearing aid at t he same time. T h is standar d w as a ppr o v ed b y the IEEE in 2000. FD A co ntinues to monit or the use of wir eless pho nes f or possible interactions wi th othe r medical d evices. Should ha rmfu l interference b e f ound t o occu r , FD A will condu ct te stin g to a sse ss th e in terfe r ence and w or k to resolv e the problem. 12. Wh ere can I f ind ad ditional in formation? F or a dditional in f orm ation, ple ase refer to the f ollo wing resour ces: ⢠FD A w eb page on wireless ph ones http ://ww w .fda.go v/cdrh /phon es/ind ex.html ⢠F ederal Communications Commission (FCC) RF Safety Pr o gram http://www .fcc.go v/ oet/rfsafety ⢠In tern atio nal Co mm ission on Non -Ioniz ing Radia tion Protec tion http://w ww .icnir p .de ⢠W or ld Heal th Org an izati on ( WHO ) I nter na tional E M F Projec t http ://www .w ho .in t/emf ⢠N ationa l Radiological P rotection B oa r d (UK) http ://www .n rp b .org.uk/ J uly 18, 2001 F or update s: http://www .fda.go v/c drh/phones
[ 19 1 ] In de x Numerics 1-t ouch d ia ling Assign a phone number 55 Making ca lls 22 A Access codes 44 Access points 36 Adva nce d set ti ngs 41 Settings 38 Accessibility solutions 5 See also En han ce me nt (LPS-3 and HDA -9) Accessory , See E nhanc ement Activate loudspeaker 19 Alarm clock 120 Snooze 12 1 Animations 64 Answering a ca ll 23 Automatic an swer 49 Applications 13 3 Install a Jav a application 134 Java a pplication settings 135 Open a Java application 135 Uninsta ll a Java application 135 Attach ments 95 Audio files, See Media files Automatic an swer 49 B Background image, changing 34 Battery infor mation 158 Battery saving mode 60 Bluetooth connection 14 0 Cancel pairing 145 Connection r equests 143 Connection status indicators 144 Device icons 144 Dis co nnec t 146 P aired devices short n ames 145 P airing requ ests 143 P asscode 143 Receive da ta 146 Send data 142 Settings 142 Bookmarks Add 128 Send 128 View 127 Browser Access points, see Access poin ts Brows ing 128 Connect 126 Emp ty memo ry 13 2 End connections 13 1 W AP pages 125 XHTML pages 12 5 Bu fferi ng 70 Bu siness card, s ending 56 C Cache, emptying 132 Calculator 11 6
[ 192 ] Calendar 11 0 Ala r m 11 3 Calendar entry fields 111 Sending entries 11 4 Settings 11 3 Stopping a larms 11 4 Views 11 2 Call cost limit Resetting the counter 29 Set by a service provider 28 Call register , See Lo g Call restrictions 48 Calling 21 Calls 1-t ouch d ia ling 22 Ans we r 23 Charging units 28 Conferen ce calls 22 Cost limit 28 Declining 23 Dialed 27 Duration 27 Forwarding 25 Int ern ati ona l 21 Mi ssed 26 Options during a ca ll 24 Received 26 Settings 34 Tra n s f e r r i n g 25 Using the Cont acts directory 21 Camer a 59 Battery saving mode 60 Image types 61 Me mor y c ard 62 Memory consumption 62 CD-ROM 14 8 Cell broadcas t messages 98 Cell info display 49 Certifi cates 46 T rust settings 47 Char ges P acket data 38 Clear ing memo ry Calendar entries 17 3 Log information 17 4 Clip, See Video recorder Clock 120 Al ar m 120 Settings 120 Composer 11 7 Adjusting s ound volume 11 7 Adjusting temp o 11 7 Changing tone s tyle 11 7 Listening to tones 11 7 Computer con nections 147 Conferen ce calls 22 Connection ind icators, See Ic ons Connection settings 36 Contact cards Adding voice tags 53
[ 193 ] Assigning 1-touch dialing numb ers 55 Assign ing de fault numbers and ad dresse s 52 Attaching ringing tones 56 Changing v oice tags 55 Crea ting 50 Deleting voice tags 55 Listening to voice tags 55 Remove ri nging tones 56 V oice tags 53 Contact groups 57 Ad ding many memb er s at the sa me ti me 57 Adding ringing ton es 56 Re movin g m emb ers 58 Converter 11 8 Adding exchange rates 120 Conve rtin g c urr enci es 11 9 Co n ver ti ng un i ts 11 9 Copying Contacts between the SIM card and phone memory 50 T ext 80 Custom er care 5 Cutting text 79 D Data connections Icons 14 Settings 36 Date, settings 43 Declining calls 23 Delete all en tries 173 Deleting Calendar entries 111 Contact cards 51 Delivery reports 74 Dialed n umbers 27 Digital rights management 13 1 Display s ettings 34 DNS, Domain Name Service 41 DRM 13 1 DT M F t o n e s 25 E Editing Calendar entries 11 0 Contact cards 51 T ext 76 E-ma i l 86 Attach ments 95 Deleting 97 Offl i ne 93 Online 93 Ope ning 95 Remote m ailbox 92 Retrieving f rom mailbox 94 Sa vi ng a tt a ch me nt s 97 Settings 10 3 Emergency calls 16 3 Enha n ce men t Activatin g 49, 1 68 HDA-9 Ph one Ada pter 168 LPS-3 Loopset 16 8 Settings 49
[ 194 ] Enha nce men ts 166 Era si ng Call cost counters 29 Log 30 Recent calls log 27 F Fa v o r i t e s 10 8 Adding a shortcut 10 8 File formats JAD and JAR 136 RealOn e P layer 69 SIS file 13 6 Supported 96 Fixed dialing 45 Folders 18 Forwarding ca lls 23 G Genera l settings 32 GIF an imations 64 GP R S, S e e P acket data H Handsfr ee, See Lou d spe ak er Hea dset 20 High speed data 37 HSCSD, See High speed data I Icons Activity 13 Bluetooth connection 144 Browser 12 7 Calendar entries 11 2 Data c onnection 14 E-mail s tatus 94 Fa v o r i t e s 10 8 In standby m ode 13 Infr ared 147 Messaging 88 Synchronization 11 2 To -d o 11 5 Idle state, See Standby mode Image modes 61 Image s 63 Format s 65 Full screen 64 K eyboard shortcuts when viewing images 65 Memory consumption 62 Moving the focal poin t 64 Org aniz ing 65 Picture messages folder 66 Receive f rom a digital camera 63 Rotating 65 Viewing image details 65 Zooming 64 Indicators, Se e Icon s Info se rvi ce 98 Infr ared 14 6 Installing software 137 Internet access points (IAP) See A ccess points Internet ser vice provider 36 IP address 41
[ 195 ] ISDN 41 ISP , See Internet service pr o vider J JAD and JAR files 136 Ja va , See Applications JPEG 59 L Language, f or wr iting 33 Limit for ca ll cost s 28 Lock code 44 Log Erasing contents 30 Filtering 30 Recent calls 26 Settings 30 Loopset, See Enh anc em ent Lou dsp e ake r Activatin g 19 T urning off 19 M Mailbox 92 Disconnect ing 95 Making ca lls 21 Media files File formats 69 Playing 69 Sending 71 Me mor y c ard 122 Camer a 62 Consumption 12 4 Format 123 Pa s s w o r d 123 Restore 123 Video clips 122 Memory low T roubleshooting 17 3 Viewing memo ry consumption 124 , 139 Me nu 15 Me nu k ey 15 Re arr ange t h e ma in M en u 16 Messaging Delivery reports 74 Genera l settings 10 5 Inbox 87 Mai n v ie w 73 Messages on the SI M card 98 Multimedia messages 82 My folders 92 Outbox 97 Picture messages 82 Save picture messa ge graphics 66 Settings 99 T ext messa ges 81 Writing e-mail 86 Writing text 76 Missed c alls 26 Modem GPRS access po int 43 Initialization 42 Using your phone as a modem 14 8
[ 196 ] Multimedia messages 82 Playing sounds 90 Re-playing sounds 90 Music files, See Media files My folders 92 N Notes 120 O Offline 93 Online 93 Org anizi ng , Me nu 16 Outbox 97 P P acket data 38 Connection time r 30 Data counter 30 Pricing 38 Settings 43 P airing 143 P a sswo rd , me mory card 123 P asting tex t 79 PC, connecting to 147 Phone Adapter , See E nha ncement Phonebook, See Contacts Pictures Ta ki n g 59 Viewing 63 PIN code 44 Unblocking 44 Playing video 68, 6 9 Predictive text input Tips 78 T urning off 79 Prepaid SIM cards 28 Prices for packet data 38 Profiles 10 6 Renam ing 107 Settings 10 7 R RealOne Player ⢠69 File formats 69 V olume control 71 Received calls 26 Receiving Data v ia in fr ared 14 6 Ringing tones, operator logos, and settings, See Smart messages Recent calls log 26 Call charging units 28 Call cost limit 28 Call costs 28 Call duration 27 Dialed n umbers 27 Eras ing call lists 27 Missed c alls 26 Received calls 26 Recorder , recor ding sounds 12 1 Recording video 67 Remote m ailbox 92 Dis co nnec ting 95
[ 197 ] Removing sof tware 13 8 Reports 74 Resolution 62 Restricting calls 48 Ringing tones 10 6 Adding a personal ringing ton e 56 Mut ing 24 Receiving in a smart message 90 Settings 107 S Safety informa tion Care and maintenance 159 Electronic devices 160 Emergency calls 163 Operat ing environm ent 160 P otentially explosive atm os pher es 16 1 Tra f f i c sa f e t y 16 0 Ve h i c l e s 162 Screen saver , settings 34 Search field 18 Security Access codes 44 Security certif icates 46 Settings 44 Sending Calendar entries 11 4 Con tact cards, bu siness cards 56 Data via infr ared 146 Media files 71 Video clips 68, 7 1 Service command editor 99 Service messages Service message settings 10 4 Service messages 91 Service provider for data connections 36 Settings 32 Access codes 44 Applications (Java ) 135 Bluetooth connection 14 2 Calendar 11 3 Call restrictions 48 Call settings 34 Certifi cates 46 Clock 120 Connection 36 Date and time 43 Display 34 E-ma i l 10 3 Enha n ce men t 49 Fixed dialing 45 Ge nera l settin gs for Messaging 10 5 Info se rvi ce 10 5 Lock c ode 44 Log 30 Messaging 99 Phone settings 32 PIN code 44 RealOne Player 71 Security 44
[ 198 ] Service messages 10 4 Sounds 107 T ext messa ges 99 Video recorder 68 Shortcuts in F a vorites 10 8 in Images 65 SIM card Copying names an d numbers 50 Me ssa g es 98 Names an d nu mbe rs 31 Viewing messages on SI M 31 SIS file 13 6 Smart mes sages Receiving 90 Sending 81 Snooze 12 1 Software Installing 13 7 Removing 138 T ransferring a .sis file to your phone 137 Sound files, S ee Media files Sounds 10 6 Remove personal ringing t one 56 Standby mode 12 Icons 13 Settings 34 Stopping Alarm clock 120 Calen dar alarm 11 4 Streaming 69 Switching between applications 16 T T aking pictures 59 T ext input 76 T ext mes sage s ervice cen ter Add ing n ew 10 0 T ext messa ges 81 Writing and sending 81 T ext templates 92 Time, settings 43 To -d o 11 4 To ne s 10 6 T ools 1-t ouch , S ee 1-touch dialing Forward 25 Man ag e r 136 Settings, See Settings V oice mail, See V oice mail T raditional text in put 76 T ransferring calls 25 T roubleshooting 173 TTY/TDD communication 168 U Uni t co nve rter 11 8 USSD commands 99 V Video clips, See Media f iles Video player , Se e RealOne Playe r â¢
[ 199 ] Video recorder 67 Me mor y c ard 68 Saving video clips 67 Sending video clips 68 Settings 68 Video clips 68 Viewing GIF an imations 64 Image s 63 V oice dialing 53 V oice mail Changing mailbox nu mber 22 Check messages 22 Forwarding ca lls to 25 V oice recor der 12 1 V oice tags 53 Adding 53 Changing 55 Deleting 55 List eni ng 55 Making ca lls 54 V olume control 19 During a call 21 W W allpaper , See Backgr ound image 34 W AP pages, browser 125 Writing 76 Predictive text input 77 T raditional text in put 76 X XHTML browser 125 Z Zooming 64
[ 200 ] 10 / 0 3 NO TES P ara obtener un manual del u suario en espa ñ ol favor de ll am ar o en via r u n fa x a l t e l é fon o 1- 888- N OKI A-2U , fax 8 1 3-24 9- 96 19.
Nokia 3620 and Nokia 3660 User Guid e
The wireless phones described in this guide are approved for use in the GSM network. LEGA L INFOR MA TION P art No. 93 10 245 , Issue No. 1 1 1 Copyright é 2003 N okia. All ri ghts reserved. No kia , N ok ia Conn ectin g P eop le , N oki a 3620, No ki a 3660 , an d t he Nok ia O r ig inal Enhan c emen t s logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Nokia Corporation. All other product and compa ny names men tion ed he rein may be tra dem arks o r trad en ames of th eir respe ct ive ow ners . Printed in Canada Oc tober 2003 US P at ent No 58 18437 and other pending patent s. T9 text input software Copyright é 1999-2003. T egic Commu nications, Inc. All ri ghts reserved. Includes RSA BSAFE cryptographic or security protocol software from RSA Security . Java is a t rademark of Sun Microsy stems, In c. Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, I nc. The inform ation in this user guide was written for th e Nokia 3620 and Nokia 3660 phones. Nokia operate s a policy of ongoing development . Nokia reserves the right to make changes and improvements to any of the products described in this document without prior notice. UNDER NO CIR CUMST ANCES SHAL L NOKIA BE RESPONSIB LE FOR ANY LOSS OF D A T A OR INCOME OR ANY SPECIA L, INCIDEN T AL, AND CO NSEQUENTIAL OR INDIREC T DAMAG ES HOW SOEVE R CA USE D . THE CONTENT S OF THIS DO CUMENT A RE PROVIDED âÂÂAS IS.â EXCEPT AS REQ UIRED BY APPLICABL E LAW , N O WARRANTIES OF ANY KI ND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCL UDING, BUT NO T LIMITED T O , THE IMPLIED W ARRA NTIES OF MERC HANT ABI LITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PU RPOSE, ARE M ADE IN R ELATION T O THE A CCURAC Y AND RELIABIL ITY OR CONTENTS O F THIS DOCU MENT . N OKIA RESERV ES THE RIGHT TO REVISE THIS DO CUM ENT OR WITHDRAW IT AT ANY TIM E WITH OUT PRIOR NOT ICE. EXPORT CONTROLS This product contains commodities, technology or software exported from the United States in accordance with the Export Administration regulat ions. Diversion contrary to U.S. law is prohibited. FCC/INDUSTRY CANADA NOTICE Y our phone may caus e TV or radio interference (for example, when using a t elephone in close proximity to receiving equipment). The FCC or In dustry Canada can r equire you to stop using your telephone if such interf erence cannot be eliminated. If you requir e assistance, contact your loca l serv ice f ac ilit y . T his de vice c om plies wit h p ar t 1 5 of th e FCC ru les. Th is device co ntai ns a radi o transceiver a nd digital c ircuitry th at supports its features. Oper ation of the di gital device circuitry is subject to the followin g two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmfu l interference, and (2) this dev ice must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired oper ation. Modifications to this device not authorized by Nokia may void the authority granted for operation of this device and should not be made.
[ iii ] Contents 1 For your safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 2 General inform ation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Register your phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Follow graphic clues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Network services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Contact Nokia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Learn about accessibility solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Nokia 3 620 and Nokia 3 660 phon es at a glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Understand your phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 5 Options lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Navigation bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Actions common to all applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Volume control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Loudspeaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Headset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Shared memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 3 Your phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Make a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Answer a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Log â call log and general log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 SIM folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
[ iv ] 4 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Change general settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Phone settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Call settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Connection settin gs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Access points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Date and time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Call restriction (system service) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 8 Enhancement settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 5 Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Create contact cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Copy between SIM card and phone memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Edit contact cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 View a contact card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Manage contact groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Import data from othe r Nokia phones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 6 Camera an d images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Take pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Store pictures in images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 7 Video recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Record a video clip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 7 Watch a video clip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
[ v ] 8 RealOne Player⢠. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Play media files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Send media files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Change the set tings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 9 Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Messaging â General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Write text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Copy text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Create and send new messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Text messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Multimedia messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 E-mail messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Inbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 My folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Remote mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Outbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 View messages on a SIM card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Cell broadcast (system service) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Service command editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Messaging settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 10 Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Change the profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 06 Customize profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 06 11 Favorites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Add shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Shortcut options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
[ vi ] 12 Calendar and To-do . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Create calendar entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Set calendar alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 13 Send calendar entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 14 To-do . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Import data from othe r Nokia phones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 15 13 Extras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 16 Composer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 20 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Memory card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 21 14 Serv ices (XHTML) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Basic steps for accessing the web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Phone browser service settin gs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Browsing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 View saved pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Download through the browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 End a connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Browser settin gs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 15 J ava ⢠Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Install a Java application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 34 Java application settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 35
[ vii ] 16 Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Install applications and software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 36 Install software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Remove software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 View memory consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 17 Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Bluetooth c onnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Infrared connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Connect your phone t o a computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Use your phone as a modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 18 PC Suite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 PC Suite documentation and help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Software and hardware requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Install PC Suite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 50 Connect your ph one to the PC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Start PC Suite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 52 Online and offline modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 53 Connection status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 PC Suite applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Remove PC Suite from your PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 19 Reference information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Battery st atements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Use proper care and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 59 Understand important safety infor mation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Certification informa tion (SAR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 64 Enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 66
[ viii ] Nokia 3620 technical information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 71 Nokia 3660 technical information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 72 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Appendix A Message from the CTIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Appendix B Message from the FDA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 5 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 1
[ 1 ] For your safety 1 For your safety Read these simple gu idelines. B reaking the r ules may be dangerous or illegal. Further detailed in formation is given in this user guide. Do not switch the phone on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it ma y cause in terferen ce or danger . ROA D SAF ET Y COMES FIRST Don't use a h and-held p hone while driving. INT ERF EREN CE All wireless phones may get in terference, w hich could af fect perf or manc e. SWITCH OFF IN HOSPITA LS Follow any regulatio ns or rules. Switch the phone off near medical equipment. SWITCH OFF I N AIRC RAFT Wireless devices can cause interference in aircraft. SWIT CH OFF WHEN REFUELING Don't use the ph one at a refuelling point. Don't use n ear fuel or chemicals. SWITCH OFF NE AR BL ASTI NG Don't use th e phone where blasti ng is in progress. Ob serve restrictions, and follow any regulations or rules. USE S E NSI B L Y Use only in th e normal position. Don't touch the a ntenna unne ce ssari ly . QUAL IFIED SE RVI CE Only qu alif ie d per s onnel may inst all or re p air p hon e eq uip men t.
[ 2 ] ENHANC EMEN TS AND BA T TERIES Use on ly approved enhancem ents and batteries. Do not connect incompatible products. W A TER-R ESISTA NCE Y our ph one is not water -resistant. K eep it dr y . BACKU P COPIE S Remember to make backup copies of all important data. CONNE CTING T O OTHER DEVIC ES When connecting to any other device, read its user guide for detailed safety instructions. Do not connect incompatible products. CA LLIN G Ensure th e phon e is switche d on and in ser vice. Enter the phon e num ber , incl ud ing the ar ea c ode , t hen pre ss . T o en d a call, press . T o answer a call, press . EMER GENC Y C AL LS Ensure th e phone is sw itche d on and in se rvice. Pre ss as ma ny t imes a s nee ded (e.g . to ex it a ca ll, t o exi t a menu , etc . ) to clear the display . Enter the emergency number , then press . Give your location. Do n ot end th e call until told to do so.
[ 3 ] General information 2 Gen eral inform ation Congratulations on your purchase of a Nokia mobile phone. Y our phone provides many functions which are practical for daily u se, such as a digital camera, a video recorder , messa ging, e-ma il, a clock, an alarm clock, a calculator , and a calendar . A variety of Xpress-on ⢠color covers a re also available. Y our phone can con nect to a PC, la ptop, or other device u sing Blue toot h t echno lo gy or the bu ilt -in IR port . F or mor e in forma tion o n connectivity , refer to the PC Connectivity Guide. The PC C onnectivity guide, Nokia PC Suite, and all related software can be dow nl oa d e d f ro m the U.S. Mo bile Phone pr oduct s sect ion of www .noki a.com . ⢠REGISTER YOUR PHONE Make sure to r egister your phone at www .warr anty .nokiau sa.com or call 1-88 8- NOKIA -2U ( 1-888 -6 65-4 22 8) s o t hat we c an s erv e you r nee ds better if you should need to call the center or have your phone repaired. When you register your ph one, you can sign up f or the Nokia e-newsletter , Nokia Connections. Y ou will receive tips and tricks on using you r phone, enhancement information, and special offers. ⢠FOLLOW GRAPHIC CL UES This guide uses certain icon s to alert you to important information. Note: Explains a featu re or points out an important concept. Import ant: In dic a tes cr it ic al in form at i on on us in g a fe at ure . Wa r n i n g : Helps you avoid personal in jury , damage to the phone, or property da mage.
[ 4 ] ⢠NETWORK S ERVICES The wireless phones described in this guide are approved for u se on the following networks: ⢠Noki a 36 20 : GS M 8 50 and 190 0 ⢠Noki a 36 60 : GS M 9 00, 1800 , and 1900 A number of f eatures included in this guide are calle d Network Service s. Thes e are spe cial s ervices that you ar range thr ough your wirele ss service provider . Before you can ta ke advantage of an y of th ese Network Services, you must subscribe to the m through your service pr ovider and obtai n instructions for their use from your service pr ovider . Note: Some networks may n ot support all language- dependent characters and/or services. Wa r n i n g : All of th e features in th is device, other than th e alarm, require the ph one to be switched on to use th e features. Do not switch the phone on wh en wir eless phone use may cause interference or danger . Check the model n umber of any charger be fore use wi th this device. This device is intended for use when supplied with power from ACP-12U, ACP-8U, LCH-9, and LCH-12. Wa r n i n g : Use only batte ries, ch argers, and en hancemen ts appro ved by the phon e man ufact urer for u se w ith this particu lar phon e mode l. The use of any other types m ay invalidate any appr oval or warranty applying to the phone and may be dangerous. For availa bility of approved e nhancements, please check with you r dealer . When you d isconnect the power cord of any enhancement , gr asp and pull the plug, n ot the cord.
[ 5 ] General information ⢠CON TACT NO KIA T o help Nokia promptly answer your questions, please have the f ollowing information available bef ore contacting th e Nokia Customer Care Center: ⢠Y our ph one model number: Nokia 36 20 Nokia 36 60 ⢠Ty p e n u m b e r ⢠IMEI n umbe r ⢠Y our local z ip code ⢠The phone or en hancem ent in question Note: The model, type, and IMEI numbers are located on the back of your phone under th e battery and memory card. ⢠LEARN AB OUT ACCESSIB ILITY SOLUTIONS Nokia i s comm itted to making mobi le ph ones easy to u se for al l ind ividual s including those with disabilities. For more informa tion, visit www . no kia acces sibi lit y . com . For more inf ormation on accessibi lity enh ancemen ts, see â Mobile Induc tive Loopse t LPS-3 â on p . 168 a n d â Phone Adapter HDA-9 â on p. 16 8. Nokia Customer Care Center , USA Custome r C are, Canada Nokia Mobile Phones 7725 W oodland Center Blvd. Suite #150 T ampa, Florida 336 14 Tel : 1-88 8- NOKIA -2U (1- 888 -665 -4 228) Fax : 1- 813- 249 -9 619 For TT Y/T DD use rs: 1- 800 -2 4-NOK IA (1- 800 -246 -6 542) Nokia Products Ltd. 60 1 W est ney Roa d Sou th Ajax, Ontario L1S 4 N7 Tel : 1-88 8- 22 -NO KI A (1-88 8- 2 26-6 54 2) W ebsite: w ww .n o ki a.c a
[ 6 ] ⢠NOKIA 3620 AND N OKIA 366 0 PHONES AT A GLANCE 1 Po w e r key ( ) (on top of the phone) 2 Earpiece 3 Display screen 4 Left s electio n key 5 Send key ( ) 6 Edit key ( ) Inse rt numb ers , symbols, or punctuation in to text message s. 7 Menu key ( ) Opens the m ain menu s cree n. Acce sses all applications. 8 * key ( ) 9 # ke y ( ) 10 Cl ea r key ( ) 11 End key ( ) 12 R ight se lectio n ke y 13 Scroll key Used to navigate u p, down, left, an d right on the display scre en and adjust volume du ring a call. Pr ess the ce nter to select or open i tems, snap pictures, etc. 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 6 9 10 13 12 11
[ 7 ] General information ⢠UNDER STAND YO UR PHONE Insert the SIM card and load the battery Import ant: Ke ep all min iature SIM cards out of the reach of small child ren. Note: Before rem oving the covers, always sw itch off the power an d disconnect the phone from the charger or any other de vice. Always store and use the ph one with the covers attached. 1 Open th e cover w ith the back of the ph one facing you . Press th e loc king catc h ( 1 ) in the direction of t he arrow and slide th e cover ( 2 ). 2 Remove th e battery and find th e SIM card sl ot ( 3 ). 3 Place the SIM card carefully into the slot. Mak e sure that the be vele d corner on the SIM card faces the bottom of the phone and that the golden contac t area on the card faces downward. 4 Slide the silver ca tch over th e SIM c ard to secure it. ( 4 ). Camera lens 1 2 3 4
[ 8 ] 5 Replace the battery (5 ). Ali gn t he g ol den c onta ct s of the bat tery with th e corresponding connectors on the ph one, and pu sh the opposite end of the bat tery until it snaps into place. Replace the cov er . Charge the battery 1 Connect the l ead to th e charger . Y ou will hear it click into place. 2 Connect the ch arger to an ac wall outlet. 3 Connect the lead from the ch arger to the base of t he phone. The battery indicator bar st arts scrolling. Note, that you can us e the ph one while ch arging. 4 When the battery is fully charged, the bar stops scrolling. Disconnect the char ger from the ph one an d then f rom the ac ou tlet. See also â Battery statements â on p. 158. Note: Remove the battery only w hen the ph one is switche d off. Switch the phone on o r off Press and hold the powe r key located on top of the phone. Wa r n i n g : Do not switch on the phone when wireless phone u se is prohibited or when it may cause in terfer ence or da nger . 5
[ 9 ] General information Antenna Y our phone has a built-in a ntenna (gray area in picture). As with any other radio transmitting device, do n ot touch the antenna unnecessa rily when the phone is s wi tched on. Contact with the a ntenna affects ca ll quality and may cause th e phone to operate at a h igher power le vel than oth erwise needed. Not touchi ng the antenna area du ring a ph one call optimizes the antenna performance and the talk time of your phone. PIN code The PI N code i s usu all y suppli ed with t he SI M card. If you are requ ested t o enter a PIN code, Ke y in the code (di splayed as ****) and press OK . Security c ode If you are requested to enter a security code, key in the security code (displayed a s *****) a nd press OK . The factory setting for the security code is 1234 5 . For more information on th e a ccess codes, se e â Securityâ on p. 44. Time and date Use the num ber keys 1 âÂÂ9 to key in the curren t time and then th e date. Press OK to accept the settin gs. The Scroll key Press the Sc r ol l key on the top , bottom , left and right (shown with blue arrows 1 to 4) to move in the Menu. Scroll to an application or a folder and press the Scr oll key in the m iddle (shown with blue ar row 5) to open it. 1 2 3 4 5
[ 1 0 ] For example : 1 T o open an Options list, pr ess Opti on s . T he small arrow a t the bottom of the displa y ( 1 ) indicat es if th e list contains more item s. The lighte r the arrow , th e fewer the items left in the list. 2 To scroll down th e Options list, pre ss . A small ar row to the right ( 2 ) indicates a sublist. T o open a sublist, press . T o start a n action, s croll to a com mand and press . 3 Press to go to a tab (3 ), a new page, or view in a n applicat ion. Make a call 1 In the standby m ode, key in the ph one number , including th e area code. If you make a mistake , press to clear number s. 2 Press and wait for the answer . 3 Press to f inish the c all (or to ca ncel the call attempt). Copy from SIM card to phone m emory If you have stored names and phone numbers on a SIM card, you can copy them to the ph one memory . 1 Press to open the m ain Menu. 2 Use the Sc ro ll key to m ove to Contacts . 3 Press to open Co n tac ts . 4 Whe n y ou o pe n Contac ts for th e first tim e, the ph one asks you if you want to copy all your contact data from the SIM card to the phone me mor y . Pr es s OK . See also â Copy betwee n SIM card an d phone memory â on p. 50. 2 1 3
[ 1 1 ] General information Ke y g u a r d Use the keygua rd ( keypad lock) to pr event th e keys fr om b eing accidentally pressed. To lo c k : Press and the * key . W hen the keys are locked, appears on the display . To u nl o c k : Press an d the * key . When the keyguard is on, pr ess to answer a call. Dur ing a call, the phone can be operated normally . Note: When Keyguard is on, calls to the e mergency nu mber programmed into your phone (for example, 9 1 1) may be possible. K ey in the em ergency n umber and press . The number is displayed af ter y ou have keyed in the la st digit. Shortcuts in the s ta ndby mode ⢠Press to open the main Menu . ⢠Press to open a list of the last dia led numbers. Y ou can then press to view r eceived and m issed calls lists. ⢠Press to open Co n tac ts . ⢠T o change the profile, press briefly and select the pr ofile. ⢠Press the 1 key and to call you r voice m ailbox. See â Call your voice mailbox â on p. 22. Shortcuts in editors ⢠Press to open a list of commands related to writing and editin g text. Pre ss to switch between predictive, traditional text input and number mode ( Predic tiv e t ext â Predictive text on , Alpha mode , or Number mode ). ⢠As you w rite, pr ess the 1 key repeatedly to access different kinds of special char acters, or pr ess the * key to open a l i st of spec ia l cha ra c te rs . ⢠Press the 0 key to enter a space. ⢠Use to mark items. Press an d hold and a t the same time, move the Scroll key to mark text to be copied or e rased.
[ 12 ] Other shortcuts In the main Menu, press and hold to view all the applica tions that are currently open. From this view , you c an switch between application s by scrolling to one and pr essing . Standby mode The indicators describe d are shown when the ph one is r ead y for use, w ith no char acters keyed in . In this sta te, the phone is in the st andb y mode. A Shows the signal strength of the cellular network at your current loca tion. The higher the bar , the str on g er the sign al. The an tenn a symbol is replaced with the G PR S symbol when the GPRS connection ha s be en set to W hen a vailable an d a co nn e ct i o n is available in the sys tem or in the cu rr ent cel l . Se e â GPRS P ac ket da ta â on p. 3 8, and â GPRS â on p. 43. B Shows an analog or a di gital clock. Also see settings for â Date and time â on p. 4 3 and settings for Backgr ound image in â Stan dby mode â on p. 34. C Indi cates which cellular system the phone i s currently u sing. D Sh ows the batter y charge level. The higher th e bar , the more charge there is left in the battery . E Navigation bar: shows the currently active profile. If t he selected profile is Normal , the current date is displayed instead of the profile nam e. For fu rther infor ma tion, see â Navigation bar â on p. 17 and â Profile sâ on p. 1 0 6. A BC D E F
[ 13 ] General information F Shows the current shortcuts assign ed for the selection keys an d . Note: Y our phone has a screen s aver . If there are no actions for five minutes, the dis pla y is cleared and a scre en saver b ecome s visi ble. T o de a c t i v at e the screen saver , press any key . See â Displayâ on p. 34 . Y ou can change the selection key shortcuts and the background image. See the settings for â Standby mode â on p. 34 . Icons Several icons ma y appear on the main screen while the phon e is in the standby mode. T he icons that are displayed depe nd on wheth er they are related to activity , data connections, or enha ncements. ACTI VIT Y IND ICATO RS One or more of the f ollowing icons may be shown to indicate that an activity h as occu rred: Indicates that you have r eceived new messages to th e Inbox in Messaging. If th e indicator is blinking, the ph one memory is low and you must delete some data. For f urther information, see â Memory lowâ on p. 173. Indicates that you ha ve received n ew e-m ail. Indicates that you have received on e or mor e voice me ssages. See â Call your voice mailbox â on p. 22. Indicates that there are messages waitin g to be sent in Outbox. See â Outbox â on p. 97 . Indicat es that Rin ging options has been set to Silent and Message a lert tone to None in the currently active profile. See â Prof iles â on p. 1 06. Indicates that the ph one â s keypad is locked. Indicat es that you have an active alarm. See â Clockâ on p. 120. Indicates that a Bluetooth connection is activ e. Note that, when data is transmitted using a Bluetooth connection, is shown.
[ 14 ] DAT A CON NE CTIO N IND ICAT O RS When an applicatio n is establi shing a data connection, one of the indicators below blink s in the stan dby mo de. When an indicator is shown con tinuously , the connection is ac tive. Note: Check with your service pr ovider for availa bility of high-speed data call s. ENHANCEMENT IND ICATORS The foll ow ing ic ons indic ate that an enha nceme nt is con nect ed to your phone : Indicates that all calls to the phone are f orwarded. In dicates that all calls to the phone are forwarded to a voice mailbox. See â Settings for ca ll forwarding â on p. 25. I f you h ave two phone lines, the forward in dicator for the first lin e is and for the second line . See â Li ne i n use (s ystem se rvice ) â on p. 35 . Indicates that you can ma ke calls using phone line 2 only (system s ervice). Se e â Line in us e (sys tem servi ce ) â on p. 35. for a da ta call for a high-speed dat a call shown inst ead of the antenna symbol when there is a n active GPRS connection for when the GPR S connection is put on hold during voice calls fo r a fax c all for a Blu etooth connection for an infrared connection a headset is connected a Loopset is connected
[ 15 ] General information ⢠MENU Press (Men u key) to open the main Menu. In the Menu, you can access all the applications in your phone. Optio ns in the M enu are: Ope n , List vie w / Grid view , Mo ve , Mo ve to folder , New folder , Help , and Exit . ⢠Move i n t he Me nuâ Pres s the Scroll key on the top , bottom , left and right (shown with blue arr ows 1 to 4) to move in th e Menu. ⢠Open applications or folders â Scroll to an application or a f older and press the Scr oll ke y in the middle to open it. ⢠Close applic atio ns â Backs tep by pressing Back or Exit a s ma n y t ime s as is needed to return to the standby mode o r select Opti on s â Ex i t . If you press and h old , the phone returns to the standby mode a nd the application is le ft open in the background. Pressing always ends a call, e ven if another application is active and displayed. When you switch the phone off, applications are closed and any un saved data is saved a utomatically . Select Op ti ons â L ist view if y ou want to view the app licati ons in a li st. Use the Sc rol l key to move
[ 16 ] Rearrange the Menu Y ou c a n rea rr ang e th e Menu in any order yo u like. Y ou can m ove applications that you u se more often from a f older to the Menu, and place app lication s you u se l ess often in fold ers . Y ou can a lso cr eate new folders. 1 Scroll to the item you want to move and se lec t Opti ons â Mo ve . A check mark is placed beside th e application. 2 Move the selection wh ere you want the application to be and press OK . Switch between appl ications If you have several applications open and want to switch from on e application to another press and hold (Menu key). The application switching window opens showing a list of open applications. Scroll to an application and press . Note: If memory is getting low , the phone may close some applications. The phone saves any unsaved data before an application is closed. ⢠OPTIONS LISTS In this us er g uide, y ou can se e the Opti ons li st comman ds that tell you w hat commands are av ailable in dif ferent views and situation s. The available commands change depending on the view you are in. In some situations, when you pres s the Scroll key , a shorter option s list appears showing only the main com mands ava ilable in the view . Online help Y our phone has a help function that you can ac cess from any application or view . Pre ss Option s â Hel p to access the on line help.
[ 17 ] General information ⢠NA VIG ATI ON B AR In the n avigation bar , you can see: ⢠Small arrows or ta bs which tell you if there are more views, folders, or files you can move to. ⢠Editing indicators, see â Writ e text â on p. 76. ⢠Other information , for example, 2/14 in the f ollowing figure means that the current picture is the secon d of 14 pictu res in the f older . Press to see the next picture . ⢠ACTIONS COMMON TO ALL APPLICATIONS Open items for viewing If you want to open a n item when you are viewing a list of files or folders, scroll to th e item an d press the Scroll ke y , or select Opti on s â Ope n . Edit items T o ope n an it em for edi ting, yo u sometime s need to first op en it f or viewing and then se lect Opti ons â Edit , if you want to change its conte nts. Re na me i tem s T o give a ne w name to a f ile or folder , scr oll to it and select Opti on s â Re name . Remove, delete items Scroll to the item and select Options â Delete or press . T o delete many items at a t ime, you fi rs t need to ma r k the m. Mark an item There are sever al ways to select item s when you are in a list. ⢠T o select one item at a time, scroll to it and select Opti ons â Mar k/ Unma rk â Mark or pr ess and t he Scro ll key at the same time. A check m ark is placed next to th e item. ⢠T o sele c t al l ite ms in t he li st , sel e ct Option â Mark/Unmark â Mark all . For information on h ow to insert tex t and numbers, see â Write text â on p. 76.
[ 18 ] Mark multiple items Press and hold and at the same time move the Scroll key dow n or up. As the selection m oves, a check m ark is placed next to the items. To end the selection, stop the scr olling with the Scr oll ke y an d then release . ⢠After you have se lected all the items you want, you can move or delete them b y selecting Op t ions â Mov e to folder or Delete . ⢠T o unmark an item, scroll to it and select Op tion s â Mark/Unmark â Unma rk or press and the Scroll key at the s ame time. Create folders T o create a new folder , select Optio ns â New folder . Y ou ar e asked to give a name to th e folder (m ax. 35 letters). Move items to a folder T o move ite ms to a folder or betwee n folders, sele ct Op t ions â Mo ve to folder (not shown if there are no folders available). When you select Mo ve to folder , a list of available folder s opens and you can also see the root level of the application (for m oving an ite m out of a folder ). Se lect the location you wan t the item to be m oved to and pr ess OK . Search for items Y ou can search for a n ame, file, folder , or shortcut by using th e search field. In some situations the search field is not visible automatically , an d you can ac tivate it by selecting Opt ions â Find or just by starting to key in l etters. 1 To s earch f or an item, s tart to key in text in the se arch fie ld. T he phon e imme diately starts to search for m atches a nd moves the selection to the best m atch. T o make the search more accurate, key in more letters and the selection moves to the item that best matches th e letters. 2 When the correct item is found, press to open it.
[ 19 ] General information ⢠V OLUME CON TROL When you ha ve an active call or are listenin g to a sound, press to increase or to decrease th e volume level. ⢠LOUDSPEAKER Y our phon e has a loudspeaker for handsfre e use. The loudspeaker allows you to speak an d lis ten t o th e p hone f rom a sh ort di st anc e w itho ut h avin g t o hold the ph one to your ear . The lou dspeaker can be used du ring a call, w ith sound appl ic ations , and w hen vie wing m ult ime dia m essage s. Re alOne Pl ayer ⢠uses the loudspeaker by default w hen you watch a video. Using the loudspeaker makes it easier to use other applications during a call. V oice volume icons: â for earpiece mode. â for loudspeaker mode. ACTI VATE THE LOUDSPEAKER T o use the lou dspeaker dur ing an already active call, select Op ti ons â A ctivate loudsp. or press Loud sp. . A tone is played, is shown in the n avigation bar , and the volume indicator changes. V olume indicators for earpiece and loudspeaker modes are shown in the navigation bar . Note: The loudspeaker cannot be activated when you have a headset connected to th e phone. Import ant: Do not hold th e phone near your ear when th e lo ud sp e ak e r is in use because th e volume may be extre mely lo ud. The loudspeaker n eeds to be activated s eparately each tim e for phone calls, but the sound applications su ch as Composer and Recor der use the loudspeaker by defaul t. T UR N OFF THE LOUDS PEAKE R When you have an active call or a sound is playing, select Opti on s â A ctivate handset or press Handset .
[ 20 ] ⢠HEADSET T o adjust the volume level wh en a headset is connected to your phone, press or or use the he adset â s keys. ⢠SHARED MEMORY The following features in your phone u se shared memory: contacts, text , text messa ges, multimedia m essages, images and ringing ton es, video record er and player , calendar an d to-do notes, a nd downloaded a pplications. Using any of these features leaves less memory for other featu res. This is especially true with heavy use of any of the features. For example, saving many images may take all of the shared memory and your phone m ay display th at the me mory is f ull. In this case, dele te some of the in formatio n or entries reserving the shared m emory .
[ 2 1 ] Y ou r phone 3 Y o ur phone ⢠MAKE A CALL 1 In th e standby mode, key in the phone number , inclu ding the ar ea code. Press or to move the curs or . Press to remove a number . For inte rnation al calls, p ress the * key twice for th e intern ational prefix (the char acter replaces the international ac cess code) and then key in the cou ntry code, the a rea code w ithout 0 , and th e phone number . T o adjust the volume du ring a call, press to incre ase and to decrease the volume level. Note: Calls described h ere as international may , in some cases, be made betwe en regions of th e same nation. 2 Press to call th e number . 3 Press to end the call (or to cancel the call attempt). Norm al p ositi on: Hold the phone as you would hold any oth er telephone. Note: Pressin g will a lways end a call, even if anot her applic ation is active and displayed on the display . Make a call using th e Contacts directory 1 To open the Contacts directory , go to Menu â Con tact s . 2 To find a contact, scroll to the desired name, or key in the first letters of th e name. The Search field open s automatically and matching cont acts are listed. 3 Press to start t he call. If the contact ha s more than one phone number , scr oll to the number and press to start the call.
[ 22 ] Call your voice mailbox The voice mailbox (system service) is an answering machine where callers who are unabl e to rea ch y ou can leav e you voic e messa ges . ⢠T o call your voice m ailbox, press the 1 key and in the standby mode. ⢠If the pho ne asks for the voice mailbox number , key it in and pr ess OK . Y ou can obta in this n umber from your service provider . See also â Settin gs for call forwardingâ on p. 25. Each phone line may have its own voice mailbox number , see â Li ne in use (syste m serv ice) â on p. 35 . If your voice mail requires you to en ter a password every time you call to listen to your voice messages, you may wan t to add a touch tone number after the voice m ailbox number . This way the pas sword is gi ve n automa tica lly every time you call you r voice mail. For example, 1234567p1234# where 1234 is the pa ssword and â pâ inse rts a pause . Change the voice mailbox n umber T o change th e ph one numbe r of you r voice mail box , go to Menu â Tools â V oice mail an d select Optio ns â Change number . Ke y in th e number (obtained from your service pr ovider) and press OK . 1-touch dialing T o view th e 1-touch dialing gr id, go to Menu â T ools â 1-touch dial . ⢠Assign a phone number to one of the 1 -touch dialing k eys (t he 2 âÂÂ9 keys), see â Assi gn 1- touc h dial i ng key s â on p. 55. ⢠T o call the number : In the standby mode, press the cor responding 1-t ouch diali ng ke y and . If t he 1-to uc h d ial i ng fun ction is set to On , press and h old th e co rrespon ding 1-tou ch d ialing key until t he call is started. Make a conference call Confe rence calling is a sy stem ser vice that al lows you to m ake a confere nce call with a m aximum of six participants, including yourself.
[ 23 ] Y ou r phone 1 Make a ca ll to the first participant. 2 T o make a call to a new parti cipant, select Op ti ons â New cal l . 3 K ey in or search the memory for the phone number of the participant and press OK . The first call is automa tically put on hold. 4 When the new call h as been answered, join the first participant in the conference call. Select Opti on s â C onf er en ce . 5 To add a new person to the call, r epeat step 2 and then sele ct Opti on s â Confer ence â A dd to c onfe r en ce . ⢠T o have a private conversation with one of the participants: Select Op ti ons â C onfer enceâ Private . Scroll to the desired participant and press Priva te . The confere nce call is put on hol d in your phone , and the other participan ts can stil l conti nue talki ng with each other w hile you have a pr ivate discussion with one participant only . Once you have finished the private conver sation, sel e ct Op t ions â Add to conference to return to th e conference call. ⢠T o dro p one parti cipant from t he confer ence call, sele ct Options â Confer ence â Drop participant ; then scroll to the participant and press Dr op . 6 To end the active conference call , press . A conference call with two participants is shown. The quickest way to make a new call is to dial the number and p ress to start the call. The existing call is automatically put on hold. ⢠AN S WE R A C ALL ⢠T o answer an incoming call, press . ⢠T o end the call, press . If you do not want to answer a call, press . T he caller will be direc ted to voice mail.
[ 24 ] Note: If you have activated the Call forw ard â If busy function to forward calls, for exam ple, to your voice mailbox, rejecting an incoming call will a lso forward th e call. See â Settings for call forwardin g â on p. 25. When a call comes in, press Si le n ce to quickly mute the ringin g to n e . If you then want t he call t o be directed to vo ice mai l, p ress agai n f o r De clin e . T o adjust the ringing tones for diffe rent environments and even ts, for exampl e, whe n you want your phone to be silent, se e â Pr ofilesâ on p. 1 06. Note: It is possible that the phone assig ns a wrong name for the phone nu mb er . Thi s h appe ns i f t he p ho ne nu mber of t he ca lle r is no t st o red in Contacts but the seven last digits of th e number match another number that is stored in Contacts. In this case, call identification is not correct. Call wa iting (system service) If you h ave activated the Call w aiting service, the system will no tify you of a new incoming ca ll while you h ave a c all i n progress. See â Cal l waitin g (system servi ce) â on p. 35 . 1 During a call, press to answer the waiting call. T he first call is pu t on hold. T o switch betw een the two calls, press Swap . 2 To end the active call, pr ess . T o end both calls at the same time, select Op tion s â End all calls and press OK . Options during a call Many options that you can use during a call are system services. Press Op tion s durin g a call for some of the following option s: Mut e or Unmu t e , End ac tive call , E nd all calls , Hold or U nhold , Handset , BT h a n d s f re e , N ew call , Conference , Private , Drop participant , Answ er , an d Decl ine .
[ 25 ] Y ou r phone Swap is used to switch between the active call and the call on ho ld. Tra n s f e r is u sed to co nnec t an incom ing call or a call on hold w ith an acti ve call and to disconnect yourself from both ca lls. Se nd to uc h to ne s is use d to send to uch tone string s, fo r exam ple, passw ords or bank account numbers. 1 K ey in th e digits with the 0 âÂÂ9 keys. Each keystroke generates a tou ch tone, which is transmitted while the call is active. Press the * key repeatedly to p r o du ce : * , p (i ns er ts a pa us e of about two seco nds before , or between touch tone charact ers.), and w (i f yo u us e t hi s c har ac t er , t he re main i ng sequence is not sent until you press Send again during the call). Press the # key to produce # . 2 T o send th e tone, pre ss OK . Y ou can also store a sequence of tou ch tones for a contact car d. When you make a call to the con tact, you can retrieve the sequ ence. Add touch tones to the phone number or Tou ch to ne fields in a c ontac t card. Note: Touch to nes a re the t ones you hear when you p ress the nu mber keys on the phone keypad . Touch tones allow you to communic ate with voice mailboxes and com puterized telephony systems. Settings for call forwarding When call f orwarding is a ctivated, you c an direct your in coming calls to another number , for example, to your voice mailbox nu mber . For detai ls, contact your service provider . Go to Menu â T ools â Forward . ⢠Select one of th e forward options, for exam ple, select If busy to forward voice calls w hen your number is busy or when you decline incoming ca lls. ⢠Select Op ti ons â A ctivate to set the forward setting on , Cancel to set the forward setting of f, or Check status to check whethe r the for ward is act ivated or n ot. ⢠T o cancel all active forwards, sele ct Op tion s â Ca ncel all forwards .
[ 26 ] For in f orm a tio n a b ou t t he f orw ar d i ndi c at or s , see â Activity i nd icator s â on p. 13. Note: Rejection of in coming calls and ca ll forwarding ca nnot be activ e at the same time. See â Call restriction (s ystem serv ice) â on p. 48. ⢠LOG â CALL LOG AND GENERAL LOG Go to Menu â Log . In the log you can monitor phone calls, te xt messages, packet data connections, and fax and data calls registered by the phone. Y ou can filter the log to view j ust one type of even t and create new contact cards based on the log information. Note: The Log does no t track sent messages. T o view a list of sent messa ges, go to Mess aging â Sent . Note: Connectio ns to your r emote mail box, m ultimed ia messagin g cen ter , or br ow s er pa ges are sh ow n as d a ta c all s or pa cke t da ta co nn e cti o ns in the ge neral communications log. Recent calls log Go to Menu â Log â Recent calls . The phone r egisters the phone numbers of missed, received, an d dialed calls. The phone registers missed and received calls on ly if the system supports these functions, and the phone is switched on and within the sys te m â s se rvi ce a re a. Op tion s in t he Mi sse d, R eceiv ed, D ia led vi ews ar e: Call , Use n um ber , Delete , Clear list , A dd to Contacts , Hel p , and Exit . Icon s for mi ssed c al ls for re cei ved calls for dialed nu mbers
[ 27 ] Y ou r phone MISSED CAL LS AND REC EIVED CAL LS T o view the phone numbers of the last 20 missed calls, go to Log â Recent calls â Mi ssed calls . When you see a note in th e standby mode about missed calls, press Show to access the list of missed calls . T o call back, scroll to the number or name you wa nt and pre ss . T o view a list of th e 20 numbers or names from w hich you have m ost recently accepted calls (system service), go to Log â Recent calls â Received calls . DIALED NUMBERS Press in the st andby m ode to open the Dialed numbers v iew . T o view the 2 0 phone n umbers that you have m ost recently called or attempted to call, go to Log â Recent call s â Dialed numbers . ERASI NG REC ENT CALL LI STS ⢠T o clear all recent call lists, select Op t ions â Clear recent calls in th e Recent calls main view . ⢠T o clear one of the call reg isters, open the log you w ant to era se and se lec t Opti ons â Clear list . ⢠T o clear an individual event, ope n a log , scroll to th e event, and press . Call timers Go to Menu â Log â Call tim ers . Allows you to view the du ration of your in coming and outgoing calls. If you want the call duration timer to be displayed during your active calls, se lec t Log â Call timers , and then select Op tion s â Settin gs â Show call duration â Ye s . Note: Some timers, in cluding the lif e timer , may be reset dur ing service or software upgrades. Eras ing call dur ati on t ime rs â Select Log â Call timers , and then select Opti on s â Clear time rs . For this you need th e lock code. See â Securityâ on p. 44. To clear an individual event, scroll to it and press .
[ 28 ] Call costs (system service) Go to Log â Call costs. Call costs allows you to ch eck the cost of the last c all or a ll calls. T he call costs are displayed separately for each SIM card. The actual invoice for calls and services from your service provider may vary , depe nding upon sys tem features, r ounding-off for billing, taxes, and so forth. CALL C OST S LIMIT Y our service provider can lim it the cost of your calls to a certain amount of charging units or units of currency . When the limited charging mode is ac tive, calls can be m ade only a s long as the preset credit limit (call cost limit) is n ot exceeded and you are in a system that s upports call c ost limit. The number of remaining units is shown during a call and in the standby mode. When th e charging units have expired, the note Call cost limit reached is displayed. Contact your service provider for information on the lim ited charging mode and charging unit prices. COST SHOWN AS CHAR GING UNITS OR CURR ENCY Y ou can set the phone to show th e remaining talk-time in charging units or units of currency . For this, you may need the PIN2 code. See â Securityâ on p. 44. 1 Select Opt ions â Settings â Sho w costs in . The options are Currency an d Uni ts . 2 If you ch oose Cu rren cy , a note requesting you to w rite the unit price is sh own. K e y in the c ost of you r home system charging or credit unit and press OK . 3 Write a name for the cu rren cy . Use a three- letter a bbreviation, for exampl e, US D. Note: When no more c harging units or currency units are left, calls may only be possible to the emerge ncy number prog rammed into your phone (such as 9 1 1 or other official emer gency numbers).
[ 29 ] Y ou r phone SET A CAL L COST LI MIT 1 Select Op ti ons â Se ttings â Call cost limit â On . 2 The phone requests you to e nter the limit in units. For this you may need the PI N2 code. Depen ding on the Sh ow costs in setting, enter either the a mount of charging units or currency . When the charging limit you have set yourself is reached, the cou nter stops at its maximum valu e and the note R eset all calls' cost counter is displayed. T o be able to make calls, go to Op tion s â Settin gs â Call cost limit â Off . For this you n eed the PIN2 code. See â Securityâ on p. 44 . Note: The actual in voice for calls an d services f rom your service pr ov id er may vary , depending up on system feature s, round ing-off fo r billin g, t a xe s an d s o f o r th . ERASE CA LL CO ST COUNT ERS Select Opt ion s â Clear counte rs . For this you ne ed the PIN 2 code. To clear an individual event, scroll to it and pr ess . GPRS data counter Go to Log â GPR S c ount er . Allows you to chec k the amount of data sent and r eceived during packet data (GPRS) connections. Check with your service provider for information on how you will be ch arged. View the gener al log Go to Menu â Log and pr ess . In the gen eral log, for each commun ication event, you can see the sender or r ecipient n ame, phone number , name of the service provide r , or a ccess point. Note: Sub- events, such as a text message sent in mor e than one part and packet data con nections, are logged as o ne communication event.
[ 30 ] FILTE R THE LO G 1 Select Op ti ons â Filte r . A list of filters opens. 2 Scroll to a filter and press Select . Y ou cannot get to the Filter option u nless there are already calls in the log. ERASE THE CO NTENTS OF THE LO G T o permanently erase all the log contents, recent calls log, an d messaging delivery reports permanently , select Optio ns â Clear log . Con firm by pressing OK . P ACKET DATA COU NTER AND CO NNECT ION TI MER T o view how muc h data, m easu red in kilob yt es, has been tr ansferr ed and how long a certain GPRS connection has la sted, scroll to an Incoming or Outgoing event with th e access point icon and select Op ti on s â Vie w details . LOG SET TINGS Select Op ti ons â Se ttings . The list of settings opens. ⢠Log durationâ The log events remai n in the ph one me mory for a set numb er of days a fter which they ar e automa tically eras ed to free me mor y . If you select No log , all the log contents, Recent calls log, and Messaging delivery reports a re permanently deleted. ⢠For Call duration , Show costs in, Call cost limit , see â Call timersâ on p. 2 7 a nd â Call costs (system serv ice) â on p. 28 . Icon s for inco min g for outgoing for missed communication event s
[ 3 1 ] Y ou r phone ⢠SIM FOLDER Go to Menu â SIM . Y our SIM car d may provide addi tional services that you can access in this folder . See also â Copy betwee n SIM card and ph one me mor y â on p. 50, â Confirm SIM service actions â on p. 46, â Fix ed dialing â on p. 45, and â View messages on a SIM card â on p. 98. In the SIM directory , you can see th e n ames and numbe rs s tored on the SIM card, you can add or edit them, and you can make calls. T o view the SIM directory , go to Menu â SIM â SIM direct . Op ti on s in t he SI M d ire ct ory are : Ope n , Ca ll, Ne w SIM Contact , Edit, Delete , Mar k/ U nma rk , Copy to Contacts , O wn numb ers , SIM details , He lp , an d Exit . Note: For availability , rates and information on using SIM services, contact your SI M card v endor , e. g. syste m ope rator , serv ice provi der , or other vendor .
[ 32 ] 4 Set tings ⢠CHANGE GENERAL S ETTINGS Go to Menu â T ools â Settings . 1 Scroll to a settin g group and press to open it. 2 Scroll to a settin g you want to change and press to ⢠switch betwee n options if there are only two ( On / Off ). ⢠open a list of option s or an editor . ⢠open a settings slider such as the Cont ra st se t ti ng. P re ss or to increase or de crease the value. Note: Y ou may be able to receive some settings from your service prov ider in a te xt me s s ag e . ⢠PHONE S ETTIN GS General Phone language â Y ou can change the l anguage for the display texts in your phone. This change will also affect th e format used f or date and time and the s eparator s used, for exa mple, in calculat ions. Ther e are th ree languages installed in your ph one. If you select Automatic , th e p hon e selects the language acc ording to the information on your SIM car d. After you have changed th e display text language, you must restart the phone. Note: Changing the sett ings for Phone langu age or Writing l anguage affects every application in your phone and the change rem ains eff ecti v e un til you c ha nge t hese se tti ngs aga in.
[ 33 ] Settings Writing language â Y ou can change the writing la nguage of your phone permanently . Changing the language affects: ⢠The characters available when you press any key ( 1â 9 ). ⢠The predictive text dict ionary used. ⢠The sp ecial charac ters tha t are ava ilable wh en you pr ess th e * and the 1 key s . Y ou can also make th is change in some of the e ditors. Press and select Writing language . Example: Y ou are u sing a phone wh ere the display texts are in English bu t you want to write all you r messages in French. After you change the language, the predictive text dictionary searches for words in French and the most common special characters or pu nctuation marks used in the French language are a vailable when you press the * and 1 keys. Predictive text â Sets th e predictive text input On or Of f for a ll editors in the phone. Y ou can also change this settin g when you are in an editor by pre ssing and sele cting Predic tiv e te xt â Predictive text on or Pred ict iv e tex t â Of f. Note: The pred ictive t ex t dictio nary i s not avail able for all l anguag es. W elcome note or logo â P ress to open the se tting. T he welcome note or logo is d isplayed briefly each tim e you switch on the phone. Select Defaul t i f you want to use the default image or anim ation. Select Text to write a wel come note (max. 50 letters). Sele ct Image to sele ct a photo or pictu re fro m Images . Orig. phone settin gs â Y ou c an r eset some of th e settings to th eir or iginal values. T o do this, you n eed the lock c ode. After resetting th e settings, the phone may take a longer time to power on. Note: All documents and files that you have cr eated are left as they are.
[ 34 ] Standby mode Ba ckgro und i mage â Y ou can sele ct any i mage t o be used as a ba ckgro und image in th e standby m ode. Select Ye s to select an im age from Image s . Left selection key an d Right selection key â Y o u ca n chang e th e short cuts that appear over the lef t and r ight selection keys in the standby mode. I n addition to the appl ications, you can have the shortcut point to a function, for example, N ew message . Note: Y ou cannot h ave a shortcu t to an application that you have installed. Display Contrast â T o change the con trast of the display to ligh ter or darker . Color palette â T o change the color palette used on the display . Screen saver timeout â Th e screen saver is activated when the scree n s ave r time-out period is over . When the screen saver is active, the display i s cleare d and you ca n se e the sc reen saver bar . T o deactivate the scree n save r press any k ey . Screen saver â Select what is sh own on the screen s aver bar: time and date or a text you have written yourself. The location and background color of the screen saver bar changes in one minute i nt e r v al s. Also, the screen sa ver changes to indicate th e n u mb e r of new messages or missed calls. ⢠C ALL S ETT I N GS Note: To chan ge the settings for call forwarding, see âÂÂSettings for call forwarding â on p. 25 . Send my caller ID This system ser vice allows you to s et your phone number to be displayed ( Ye s ) or hidden ( No ) from the person to whom you a re calling. Or , the value ma y be set by yo ur se rv ice pro v id e r wh e n yo u m ak e a su bs cr ip t i on ( def ault ).
[ 35 ] Settings Call wa iting (system service) The system will notify you of a new incoming call while you h ave a call in progress. Select Activa te to request the system to activate call waiting, Can c el to request the system to deactivate call waiting, or Check st atus to check if the f unction is active or not. Automatic redial When this setting is activated, you r phone w ill make a maxim um of ten attempts to conn ect the call after an unsuccessf ul call attempt. Press to stop automatic redialing. Summary after call Activate this setting if you want the phone to briefly display the duration and cost of the last cal l. To show costs, the Call cost limit must be acti vate d for your SIM card. 1-touch dialing Select On , and the n umbers assigned to the 1-tou ch dialing keys ( 2 âÂÂ9 ) can be dialed by pressing and holding the key . Anykey answ er Select On , and you can answer an incoming call by briefly pressing any key except , , and . Line in use (system service) This sett ing is shown o nly if t he SIM card suppor ts two subscribe r numbers, that is, two ph one lines. Sele ct which p hone line ( L ine 1 or Lin e 2 ) you want to use for making calls and sending text messages. Calls on both lines can be answered i rrespective of th e selected lin e. Note: Y ou will not be able to make calls if you select Lin e 2 and have not subscribed to th is system service. T o prevent lin e selection, select Line change â Disable if supported by your SIM card . To chan ge th is setting, you need the PIN2 code . T o switch between the phone lines, pre ss and hold the # key in the standby mode.
[ 36 ] V oic e me ssage in di cat or s: , , or is shown if you h ave one or more voice messages. ⢠CONNECTION SETTINGS Data connections and access points T o define set tings for access poi nts, go to Settings â C onnecti on setting s â A ccess poin ts . A dat a connection is r equired to c onnect to an a ccess point. Y our phone supports three k inds of data con nections: ⢠GSM data call ( ) ⢠GSM high-speed data call ( ) ⢠P acket data (G PRS) co nnection ( ) There are three different kinds of access points th at you can define: MMS acc e ss poin t, b rowser acce ss p oint, an d I ntern et acce ss poin t (IAP ). Chec k with your service provider for the kind of access point neede d for the service you wish to access. Y o u need to define access poi nt settings, if you want t o perfo rm the foll owi ng action s: ⢠Send and recei ve multimedia messages ⢠Send and recei ve e-mail ⢠Browse pages ⢠Download Java applications ⢠Use Image upload ⢠Use your phone as a modem Note: Access point â The point wh ere your phone connects to the Internet by way of a data call or packet data connection. An access poin t can be prov ided, for exampl e, by a commerci al Intern et ser vice prov ider (ISP), or servic e provid er . For more informatio n, see â Acce ss poin ts â on p. 38.
[ 37 ] Settings GSM D ATA C ALL S A GSM data call enables data tran smission rates to a maximum of 14.4 kb/s. For avai lability and subscription to data services, contact your service pr ovider . Minimum settings needed to make a d ata call T o ins er t a set of b asic G SM da ta c all se tti ngs, go t o Set t ings â Connectio n â A ccess points and select Opti on s â New acce ss po int . Fill in the fol lowing: ⢠Data bearer : GSM data ⢠Dial-up n umber: Us er defi ned ⢠Sessi on mode: P er manent ⢠Data call type: Analog ⢠Maximum data s peed: Automatic See â A ccess points â on p. 38 f or further information on how to cr eate, delete, and edit an access point. High -speed data call (Hig h-S peed Ci rcuit Swi tched Data , HSCS D) High-speed data enables data transmission rates to a maximum of 4 3.2 kb/s, which is three times faster than the sta ndard data rates of the GSM system. HSCS D is comparable to the spe ed of many com puter m odems that communicate with today's fixed teleph one systems. For availability and subscription to high-s peed data services, ple ase contact your service provider . Note: Sending data in HSCSD m ode may drain the phone â s bat te ry faster than n ormal voice or data calls, as the phone may send data mo re freq ue ntly to the syst em. The Settings wiza rd program included in the PC Suite can help you configure access point and mailbox settings. Y ou can also copy existing settings, for example, fr om your compu ter to you r phone. See the CD-ROM supplie d in the sales pa ckage.
[ 38 ] GPRS P ACKET DAT A P acket data, or General P a cket Radi o Service (GPRS), u ses packet data technology where i nformation is sen t in short bu rsts of data over the mobile system. Th e benefit of sen ding data in packets is th at the system is occupied only when sen ding or receiving data. Because GPRS uses th e system efficiently , it allows fo r q u ic k da t a c on ne ctio n s e t up an d f as t da t a transmission speeds. Minimum s ettings needed to m ake a packet dat a connect ion ⢠Y ou need to subscribe to the GPRS service. For availability and subscription to GPRS, contact your service provider . ⢠Go to Setti ngs â Connection settings â A ccess points a nd select Opti on s â New access point . Fill in th e followin g: Data bearer : GPRS an d Access point name : enter the name give n to you by your service provi der . Se e â Create an acce ss poin t â on p. 38 for further informati on. Pri cing f or pack et data an d app li cat ions Both the active GPR S connection and the applications used over GPRS require a fe e (for examp le, using services, sending and r eceiving data, and text messages). For more detailed information on fees, cont act your service provider . ⢠ACCESS POIN TS Create an access point Op tion s in t he Acce ss poi nts list are: Edit , New access poin t , Delete , Hel p , and Ex it . Y ou may have p reset access point setting s in your Nokia mobile phone. Or , you may receive access point s ettings in a s mart message f rom a service provider . If no access points are defined wh en you open A ccess poin ts , you will be asked if you want to cr ea t e o n e.
[ 39 ] Settings If access points are de fined, to create a n ew access point, select Opti on s â New access poin t and se lect: ⢠Use default settings to use the defaul t settings. Make the needed changes and press Back to save the s ettings. ⢠Use existing settings to use ex isting setting information as the basis for the new access point settings. A list of existing access points is opened. S elect one and pr ess OK . Access point settin gs are opene d with some fields alre ady filled. Delete an access point In the list of access poin ts, scroll to th e access point you want to remove and select Op tion s â De lete . Edit an access point When you open Access points, the list of already available access points opens. Scroll to th e access point you want to edit, and press . Op tion s whe n edi ting acce ss po int se tti ngs are : Change , Ad v a n c e d settings , He l p , a nd Exit . Here you can see a short explanation for eve ry setting that may be neede d for different data connections and access points. Note: Start en tering settin gs on Conn ect ion na me an d go down the list from th ere because depending on which data connection you select ( Data bear er ) or whet her you ne ed to i nser t a Gate way IP ad dress , o nly certain setting fields ar e available. Note: Follow the instructions given to you by your service provider very carefully . Conn ectio n na me â Give a descriptive name for the con nection. Data bearer â The options ar e GSM da ta , High speed G SM , a nd GPR S . Depending on what data con nection you sele ct, only certain setting fields are available. Fill in all fields m arked with Must be defin e d , or marked with a red asterisk. Other fields can be left e mpty , unle ss you have been instructed otherwise b y your service pr ovider .
[ 40 ] See also â Se tting s for multimedia message s â o n p . 101 , â Settings for e- mail â on p. 1 03, and â Phone browser service settings â on p. 12 6. Note: T o use a d ata connection, th e sys tem service provider mu st support this feature, and if necessar y , activate it for your SIM card. Access point name (for packet data only) â The access point name is needed to establi sh a con nection to the G PRS system. Y ou obtain th e access point name from your service pr ovider . Dial-up number (for GSM data and high-s peed data only) â The mode m telephone number of the a ccess point. User na me â Write a user n ame if r equired by the service provider . The u ser name may be neede d to make a da ta connection, an d is usually pro v id ed by the servi ce pr ovide r . The us er name is often case-sen sitive. When you are writing, press the * key to open the spec ial characters ta ble. Press the 0 key to enter a space. Prompt password â If you must key in a new password every time you log on to a server , or if you do not want to save your password to the phone, choose Ye s . Pa s s w o r d â A pass word may be needed to make a data connection, and is usu ally pr ovided by th e serv ice provi der . The passwor d is ofte n case-sen sitiv e. When you are writing the password, the characters you enter are shown brief ly and then chan ged to asterisk s (*). The e asiest way to ente r numbers is to press and select Insert numb er and th en co nt in ue e nte rin g let t ers . Authenticat ion â No rm al / Secure . Gateway IP address â The IP address used by requ ired browser gateway . Homepage â Depending on what you are setting u p, enter one of the following: ⢠the service addres s ⢠the address of th e multimedia messaging cen ter
[ 4 1 ] Settings Note: ISDN connections are a way to establish a data ca ll between your ph one and you r access po int. ISD N conne ctions are d igi tal from end to end and as such offer quicker set-u p times and faster data rates than analog connections. In order to use an ISDN connection, both your service provider and your Internet service provider m ust support it. Connec tion security â Ch oose wh ethe r Tr ansport Layer Secu rity (TLS) is u sed for the c onnectio n. Foll ow the in structio ns fr om your serv ice pro vider . Session mode â Pe r m a n e n t / Te mporary . Data call type (for GSM data and high-speed data only) â Analog , ISDN v. 1 1 0 , or ISD N v .120 defines whether the phone uses an analog or digital connection. This setting depen ds on both your GSM service pr ov i d er an d I n te rne t Se r vi c e Pr o v id e r (IS P), b e ca u s e so m e GS M sys tem s do not suppor t certain types of I SDN connections. For details, contact your IS P . If ISDN connections are available, they establish connections more quickly than analog methods. Maximum da ta speed (for GSM da ta an d high-speed data on ly) â The options are Automatic / 9600 / 14400 / 1920 0 / 28800 / 38400 / 43200 , depending on what y ou have chosen in Session m ode and Data ca ll type . This option allows you to lim it the max imum connec tion speed when high-speed data is used. Higher data r ates may cost more , depending on the s ystem service provider . Note: The spe eds a bove repr esent the ma ximum speed at which your connection will opera te. During the connection, the operating speed may be less, de pending on system conditions. Note: DNS â Domain Name Service. An Internet s ervice that translates domain na mes such a s www .no kia.c om into IP addre sses lik e 192.1 0 0.124.19 5 . Opti on s â Advanced settings Phone IP addr ess â The IP address of your phone. Primary n ame ser ver â The IP address of th e primary DNS server . Seco nd name ser ver â The IP address of the s econdary DNS server .
[ 42 ] Note: If you need to enter the Phone IP address , Primary nam e server , or Second name se rver , contact your In tern et se rvice provi der to obtain these addresses. The following settings are shown if you have selected data call and high- speed data as the connection type: Use callback â This option allows a server to call you back once you have made the initial call, so you ha ve a connection without paying f or the call. Contact your service provider to subscr ibe to t his service. Note: Charges may apply for certain types of received calls, such as roaming and high-speed data calls. Con tact your GSM service provider for m ore information. Note: T he phone expects the callback call to use the same data call settings that were us ed in the callback-requesting call. The system must support this type of call in both dir ections, to and from the phone. Callback type â The options are Us e ser ver no. / Us e ot h er no. Ask your service provider for the correct settin g; it will depend on the service provider â s configuration. Callback number â K ey in your phone â s data phone num ber which the dial back server u ses. Usual ly , this number is th e data call phone number of your phone. Use PPP com pression â When s et to Ye s , this option speeds up th e data transfer , if supported by the rem ote PPP server . If you have problems with establishing a connection, tr y setting this to No . Conta ct your ser vice provider for guidance. Note: PPP ( P oint-to-P oin t Protocol) â a common networking software protocol that en ables any computer w ith a modem and a ph one line to con nect directly to th e Internet. Use login script â The options are Ye s / No . Login script â Insert the login script. Modem initialization â (Modem initialization string) â Controls your p ho n e usin g mod e m A T c omman ds. If requ ir ed, ent er c harac ter s spec if ie d b y y o u r GSM system s ervice provider or Internet service provider .
[ 43 ] Settings GPRS Go to Setti ngs â Connection settings â GPR S . The GPRS settings affect all access points using a packet data connection. GPRS connection â If you select When available and you are in a system that supports packet data, the phone re gisters to the GPRS system and sending text me ssages will be done usin g GPRS. Also, starting an active packet data conn ection , for e xample, to send and r eceive e- mail, is quicke r . If you select When ne e ded , the phone will use a packet dat a connection only if you st art an appli cation or action that nee ds it. The GPRS connec tion is closed after it is n ot used by any application. Note: If there is n o GPRS coverage and you have c hosen When available , the ph one will period ically try to establish a packet data connect ion. Access point â The access point name is needed w hen you want to use your phone a s a packet da ta modem to your computer . Data call Go to Setti ngs â Connection settings â Data call . The Data call settings affect all access points using a d ata call an d high-speed data call. Online time â If there are no ac tions the data call is dropped automatically after a time-out period. The options are User d efi ne d , in wh ich cas e you enter a tim e, or Unlimited . ⢠DATE AND TIME The date and time settings allow you to define the date and time used in your phone, as well as change th e date an d time f ormat and separators. Choose Cloc k ty pe â A nalog or Digital to change the clock shown in the standby mode. Choose Au to time update if you wan t the mobile ph one system to update time, date, and time zone information to your ph one (syste m serv ice). For the A uto time update setting to take eff ect, the phone n eeds to be restarted.
[ 44 ] ⢠SECURITY Phone and SIM Explanations for the different security codes that may be needed: ⢠PIN code (4 to 8 dig it s) â The PIN (P erson al Identification Number) code protects your SIM card against unauthorized use. The PIN code is usual ly suppli ed with th e SIM card. After thr ee cons ecutiv e incorr ect PIN code e ntries, th e PIN code is blocked. If the PI N code is blocked, you need to u nblock the PIN code befor e you can use th e SIM card again. See the in formation about the PUK code. ⢠PIN 2 co de (4 to 8 di gits ) â The PIN2 code, supplied with some SIM cards, is r equired to access som e functions, su ch as call cos t counters. ⢠L ock code (5 dig its) â The lock code can be u sed to lock the phone and keypad to avoid unauthorized u se. Note: Th e factory setti ng for the lock code is 1234 5 . T o avoid unauthor ized use of you r ph one, ch ange t he lo ck code. Keep the new code se cret and in a safe place separate fr om your phone . ⢠PUK and PU K2 cod es ( 8 digi ts ) â The PUK (P ersona l Unblocking Key) code is requir ed to change a blocked PIN code . The PUK2 code is required to change a blocked PIN2 code. If the codes are not supplied with the SIM car d, contact the operator wh ose SIM card is in your phone for the codes. Y ou can change the following codes: lock code, PIN code, and PIN2 code. These codes can only include th e number s from 0 to 9 . Note: Avoid using access codes similar to the emergency numbers, such as 9 1 1, to pre vent acc ide ntal dialin g of t he em ergen cy nu mber . PIN code request â Wh en the PIN code request is active, the code is requested each time the phone is switched on . Note that deactiv ating the PIN code r equest may not be allowed by some SIM cards. PIN code / PIN 2 code / Lock code â Open th is setting if you want to change the code. T o lock t he phone ma nually , press . A lis t of com mands opens. Select Lock phone .
[ 45 ] Settings Autolock period â Y o u can set an autolock period, a time -out after which the phone is automatically locked and can be used only if the correct lock code is ente red. Key in a numbe r fo r the t ime- out in m inut es or select Non e to turn off the autolock period . To unlock the phon e, key in the lo ck code. Note: When the phone is locked, calls m ay be pos sible to the emergency number programed in to your phone (e.g. 9 1 1 or other official emergen cy number). Lock if SIM changed â Se le ct Ye s if you want the phone to ask for the lock code when an u nknown, new SIM c ard is inserted into your phone. The phone mainta ins a list of SIM car ds that are recognized as the owner â s ca rd s. Fixed dialing â Y ou can restrict your outgo ing calls to selected phone numbers, if supported by your SIM card. Y o u need the PIN2 code for this function. When this f unction is active, you can only ca ll those phone numbers that are included in the fixed dialing list or which begin with the same digit(s) as a phone number on the list. T o view th e list of Fixed dia ling numbers, go to Menu â SIM â Fixed dialing . Op ti on s in t he Fix ed dial in g vie w ar e: Open , Call , New contact , Edit , Delete , A dd to Con tacts , A dd from Contacts , Help and Ex i t . Note: When Fixed Dialing is set on, calls may be possible to certain emergency numbers programmed into your phone (9 1 1 or other official emergenc y numbers). T o add new numbe rs to the Fixed dial ing l ist, se lect Options â New c ontact or A dd from Contacts . Closed user group (system service) â Y ou can specif y a group of people to whom you can call and who can call you. For mo re information, contact your service provider . Select Default to activate the defa ult group agreed on wi th the serv ice pr ovider , On if you w ant to u se anoth er gr oup (you n eed to know the gr oup index n umber), or Off . Note: When calls are limite d to Closed U ser Gro ups, calls may be possible to certain emergency number s programmed into you r phone (9 1 1 or other official emergency numbers).
[ 46 ] Confirm SIM services (networ k service ) â Y ou can set the phone to display confirmation messages when you are using a SIM card service. Certificate management In the C ertificate managem ent main view , you can see a list of authority certificates that have been stored in your phone. T o manage certificates, go to Me n u â Settings â Secu rity â Certif. management . Pre ss to see a list of user certificates, if a vailable. Options in the certificate management main view are: Certificate details , Delete , T rust settings , Mar k/U nm ark , He lp , and Exi t . Digital certificates are used to ve rify the or igin of browse r pages and installed software. However , they can on ly be trusted if the origin of the certificate is known to be authentic. Digital certificates are needed if you want to: ⢠Connect to a n online bank, anot her site, or r emote server for actions that involve transferring confidential in formation. ⢠Minimize the risk of viruses or other malicious so ftware and be sure of the auth enticity of software when downloadin g and insta lling software. Authority certificates are used by some services, such as banking services, for che cking signatu res or server certif icates o r ot her au thority ce rtific ates. User certifi cates are issued to users by a Cer tifying Authority . Import ant: Alth ou gh the us e of ce rt if ica te s mak e s the r is ks in vo l ved in re mote con nections a nd s oftware installation cons iderably smaller , th ey m us t be u s ed co rr e ct ly in or de r to ben ef it fr om inc rea se d secu r ity . The existe nce of a certif icate doe s not offe r any prote ction by i tsel f; the certificate manage r must c ontain correct, authen tic, or trusted certif icates fo r incre ased sec urity to be avail able . VIEWIN G C ERTIF IC ATE DETA ILS â CHE CKIN G AU THE NT ICIT Y Y ou can only be sure of the correct identity of a br owser gateway or a server when the signature and the perio d of validity of a browser gateway or server certificate h ave been che cked.
[ 47 ] Settings Y ou will be notified on t he phone â s display: ⢠If the ide ntity of th e browser ser ver or gateway is n ot authentic. ⢠If you do n ot have the correct se curity certificate in you r phone. T o check certificate details, scroll to a certif icate and select Opt ion s â Certificate details . When you ope n certificate details, C ertificate management checks the validity o f the certificate and one of the following notes m ay appear : ⢠Certificate not tru sted â Y ou h ave not set any application to use the cert ificate . Fo r m ore i nfo rmatio n, see â Change the trust settings of an authority certificate â on p. 47 . ⢠Expired certificate â The period of v alidity has ended for th e selected certificat e. ⢠Certificate not valid yetâ Th e period of validity has not yet begun for the selected certificate. ⢠Certificate corruptedâ The ce rtificate cannot be used. Contac t the certificate issuer . Import ant: Certificates have a restricted lif etime. If Expired certificate or Certificate not valid yet is shown even if the certi ficate should be valid, che ck t hat the cu rrent d ate and t ime in yo ur phon e are correct. CHA NGE THE TR UST SET TINGS OF AN A UTHOR IT Y CERTI FICAT E Scroll to an a uthority certificate a nd select Opti ons â T rust settings. Depending on the cer tificate, a list of the a pplications that can u se the selected certificate is shown. For example: Services / Ye s â the certificate is able to cert ify sites. Application manager / Yes â the certifi cate is able to certify the or igin of ne w soft ware. Int ernet / Ye s â the certificate is able to certify e-mail and imaging servers. Import ant: Before changing the se settings, you must m ake sure that you really trust th e owner of the certificate and that the certif icate really belo ngs to the l isted owne r .
[ 48 ] ⢠CALL R ESTRICT ION (SY STEM SERVIC E) Call restriction allows you to restrict the making and receiving of calls with your phone. For th is function, get th e restriction password from your service provider . 1 Scroll to on e of the r estriction options. 2 Select Opt i ons â Activate to request the system to set call restriction on, Can cel to set th e selected call r estriction off, or Check s tatus to check if the calls are restr icted or not. ⢠Select Op ti ons â Edit r estriction pass w . to change the restriction pa ssword. ⢠Select Op ti ons â Can cel all re strictions to cancel all active call r estrictions. Note: When calls are r estricted, calls may be pos sible to certain emergency numbers programmed into your phone (9 1 1 or other official emergency numbers). Call restricting a ffects all calls , in cl u d in g data calls. Y ou cannot have restric tion of incom ing calls and c al l fo rw ardin g or fixe d dialing active at the same time. ⢠SYSTEM System selection Choose Automatic to set the phone to automatically s earch for and select one of the cellular systems available in you r area. Or , choose Manual if you want to select the desired system manually f rom a list of systems. If the connection to the manually selected system is lost, the phone will sound an error tone and ask you to select a system agai n. The selected system must have a roaming agreement with your home system, that is, th e operator wh ose SIM card is in your phone. Note: Roaming a greem ent â An a greem ent between tw o or m ore system service provider s to enable the users of on e service provider to use th e services of other service providers.
[ 49 ] Settings Cell info display Select On to se t the phone to indicate when it is used in a cellular system based on M icro Cellular Network (MCN) tech nology and to activate cell info reception. ⢠ENHANCEMENT SETTINGS Scroll to an enhancement folder and open the settings: ⢠Select Default pr ofile to select the profile you want to be activated each time whe n you con nect a certa in en hancem ent to you r phon e. ⢠Select Auto matic answ er to set the phone to answer an incoming call automatically after five seconds time. If the Ringing option is set to Beep once or Silen t , automatic answer cannot be in use. If you are using a Loopset or a Phone Adapter , you need to activate it separately . Select Menu â T ools â Settings â A ccessory â A ccessory in use â Headset / Loopset / TTY . If you have activated a Loopset, the headset will use th e same settings as th e Loopset. For m ore information, see â Enha nce m ent s â o n p . 166.
[ 50 ] 5C o n t a c t s T o open Contacts, press in the standby mode o r go to Menu â Co n ta ct s . In Con t acts , y o u ca n s to re an d ma nage co nt act information, such as name s, phone numbers, and addresses. Con tacts use shared memory . See â Sha red memo ry â on p. 20. Y ou can also add a personal ringing tone, voice tag, or a thumbnail image to a contact card. Y ou can cr eate contact groups, which allow you t o send text me ssages or e-mail to many recipients at the same time. ⢠CREATE CONT ACT CARDS 1 Open Co ntac ts and select Option s â New contact . An empty contact card opens. 2 Fill in the fields you want and pr ess Done . The contact card is saved and closed, and app ear s in t he Con t act s d ir ec tor y . ⢠COPY BETWEEN SIM CARD AND PHONE MEMORY ⢠T o copy names and n umb ers from a SIM card to your ph one, go to Menu â SIM â S I M dir ectory . Select th e name(s) you want to copy and select Op tion s â C opy to Contacts . ⢠If you want to copy a phone , fax, or pager number from C ontacts to your SIM card, go to C ontacts, open a contact card, scroll to the number , and select Op ti ons â Copy to SIM direct.
[ 5 1 ] Contacts ⢠EDIT C ONTACT CARDS Optio ns in the C ontacts direct ory are: Open , Ca ll , Create mess age , New contact , Edit , Delete , Duplicate , Add to group , Belongs to groups , Mark/ Unma rk , Sen d business card , Contacts info , Help , an d Exi t . Optio ns when ed iting a contact card are: A dd thumbnail / Remove thumbnail , Add detail , De lete detail , Edit label , Help , and Exit . 1 In the Contacts directory , scroll to the contact card you want to edit and press to open it. 2 To change the info rmation on the card, select Op ti ons â Edit . 3 T o save your changes and to return to the con tact card view , press Do ne . Delete c ontact cards In the Con tacts directory , scroll to th e contact card you want to delete and select Op tion s â De lete . T o delete m any contact cards 1 Mark the cards to be deleted. Scroll to a con tact you want to delete and select Op tion s â Mark . A check mark is placed next to th e contact car d. 2 When you have marked a ll the con tacts you w ant to delete, select Opti on s â Del ete . Y ou ca n also mark many it ems if you pr ess and hold and simultan eously press . S ee a lso â Actions common to all applications â on p. 17 . Add and remove contact card fields 1 Open a contact card and select Opti ons â Edi t . 2 To add an extra field, select Options â A dd detai l . T o delete a field you do not need, select Options â Delete detail. T o rename a contact card field label, select Opt ion s â Edit label .
[ 52 ] Add a picture to a contact card There are two different types of pictu res you can add to a con tact card. See â Camera and images â on p. 59 for m ore information on how to take and store pictures. ⢠T o attach a small th umbnail image to a contact c ard, open a contact card, sele ct Op t i ons â Edit and the n select Options â A dd th um bn ai l . The thumbnail image is also shown when the contact is calling you. Note: After you attach a thum bnail im ag e to a co ntact card , you ca n select Add thumbnail to replace th e image with a differen t thumbna il or Remove thum bnai l to remove t he thum bnail from the con tact c ard. ⢠T o a dd an image to a co ntact car d, open a contact ca rd, an d press to open the image view ( ). To attach an image, select Op ti ons â A dd image . ⢠VIEW A CONTACT CAR D Contact information view ( ) shows all information inserted in the contact card. Press to open the Image view . Only fields that h ave information ar e displayed in the contact information view . Select Op ti ons â Edi t if you want to see all fields a nd add more data to the con tact. Options when viewing a contact card (when t he selection is on a phone number) are: Call , Create message, Edit, Dele te, Defaults , Add voice tag / V oice tags , A ssign 1-touch dial / Rem ove 1- to uc h dial , Ringing ton e , C opy to SIM direct. , S end bus ine ss car d , He lp , and Exit . Assign default numbers and addresses If a contact h as several phone numbers or e-mai l addresses, to speed up calling and sending m essages, you can define certain n umbers and addresses to be u sed as the def ault.
[ 53 ] Contacts Open a contact card and select Options â Defaults . A pop-up win dow opens, listing th e different options. Example: Scrol l to Phone numb er and press Assign . A list of p hone n umber s in the selected con tact car d is shown. Scroll to the one you wan t to have as the defau lt and press . W hen you return to the contact card view , you can see the defau lt number un derlined. V oice dialing Y ou can make a phone call by saying a voice tag that has bee n added to a contact ca rd. Any spoken word(s) can be a voice tag. Before using voice dialing, note th at: ⢠V oice tags are not language dependent. T hey are dependen t on the sp eak e r's vo i ce . ⢠V oice tags are sen sitive to background noise. Record them and make calls in a qu iet environment. ⢠V ery short names are n ot accepted. Use long names and avoid similar name s fo r dif f ere nt num ber s . Example: Y ou ca n use a pers on â s name for a voice tag, for example, â Johnâ s cellâ . Note: Y ou must s ay the name exactly as you s aid it when you recorded it. T his may be difficult in a noisy environme nt or during an emergency , so you should n ot rely solely upon voice dialing in all circumstan ces. ADD A VOICE TAG TO A PHONE NUM BER V oice tags can be any spoken words, for example, a person â s firs t nam e. V oice tags allow you to make phone calls by simply saying the word alou d. Y ou can have only one voice tag per con tact car d. V oice tags can only be added to phone nu mbers stored in ph one memory . See â Copy betwee n SIM card and phone memory â on p. 50. 1 In the Contacts directory , scroll to the contact to which you wan t to add a voice tag and press to open the contact card.
[ 54 ] 2 Scroll to th e number to w hich you want to add the voice tag and se lec t Opti ons â A dd voice tag . Press Start, then speak af ter tone is displayed. 3 Press Start to recor d a voice tag. The phone sounds a s tarting tone an d Speak now is displa yed. When recording, h old the ph one a short distance from your mouth. After the star ting tone, say clearly the word(s) you want to record as a voice tag. 4 After recording, the phone pl ays the recor ded tag and Playing voice tag is displayed. If you do not want to save the r ecording, press Quit . 5 When the voice tag has been successfully saved, V oi ce tag saved is displayed and a beep sou nds. A symbol can be seen next to th e number in th e contact card. Note: Y our ph one may have 30 phone numbe rs to which voice ta gs are attached. I f the me mory b ecomes fu ll, delete some of the voi ce tags. T o view a list of voice tags you have def ined, select Option s â Con t ac ts info â V oice tags in the Contacts director y . MAKE A CAL L BY SAY ING A VOI CE TAG Note: Y ou must say the voice tag exactly as you said it when you recor d ed it . 1 In th e stan dby mode, press and h old . A s hort tone is played and the n ote Spe ak now is displa yed. 2 When you are making a call by saying a voice tag, the loudspeaker is in use. Hold the phone at a s hort distance away from your mouth and face and say th e voice tag cle arly . 3 The phone plays the original voice tag, displays the name and number , and after 1 .5 seconds dials the number of the recognized voice t ag. If t he phon e plays th e wr ong vo ice tag or to r etry voice di aling, press Retry .
[ 55 ] Contacts Note: When an application using a data call or GPRS connection is sending or receivin g data, you cannot make a call by u sing voice dialing. To make a call by using a voice tag, end all active data connections. REPL AY , ERASE, OR CHANG E A VOI CE TAG 1 To replay , erase, or ch ange a voice tag, open the Contacts directory and select Op tion s â Contacts info â V oice tags . A list of contacts with voice tags is displayed. 2 Scroll to a contact , select Options , and the n sele ct o ne of t he fol lowin g: Playback to listen to the voice t ag again . Delete to eras e the voice tag. Chan ge to record a new voice tag instead of the old one. Press Start to record . Assign 1-touch di aling keys 1-touch dialin g is a quick way to call frequently used numbers. Y ou can assign 1-touch dialing keys to eight phone numbers. Num ber 1 is reserved for th e voice mailbox . 1 Open the cont act card for which you wan t a 1-touch dialin g key an d select Op tions â A ssig n 1- touc h no . The 1-touch dialing grid opens, showing you the numbers from 1 âÂÂ9 . 2 Scroll to a number and press Assign . When you return to the contact informat ion vie w , you can see th e 1-tou ch dial icon nex t to the number . T o call the contact by 1-touch dialin g, go to the standby mode and press the 1-touch dialing key and .
[ 56 ] Add a ringing tone for a contact card or group Y ou can set a ringing ton e for each contact card and group. When that contact or group member calls you, the phon e plays the ch osen ringing tone (if th e caller â s telephone number is sent with the call and your phon e recognizes it). 1 Press to open a contact card or go to the Groups list and select a contact group. 2 Select Op ti ons â Ringing tone . A list of ringing ton es opens. 3 Use the scroll key to select the r inging tone you wish to u se for the contact or group and pr ess Select . T o remove th e ringing ton e, select No personal tone from the list of ringing ton es. Note: For an individual contact, th e phone will always us e the ringing tone that was assigned last. So, if you first change a gr oup ringing tone and then the r inging tone of a sin gle contact that belongs to that group, the ringing tone of the s ingle contact will be us ed whe n the contact calls you th e next time. T o listen to a ringing tone, go to Recorder . Send contact information Y ou can send co ntact informa tion through text message, e-m ail, Bluetooth connection, or infrared connection. 1 In the Contacts directory , scroll to th e card you want to send. 2 Select Op ti ons â Send then select the m ethod; the choices are : Via text message , Via e-mail ( available only if the correct e-mail settings are in place), Via Bluetooth , or Via Infrared . For fu rth er info rma tio n, s ee the â Messagingâ chapter , â Send and rec eiv e da t a u s in g in fra r ed â on p. 146, an d â Send data using Blu etoot h connecti on â on p . 1 42 . Y ou can add r eceived contact ca rds to your Contacts directory . See â Receive sma rt mess ages â on p. 90 for further information.
[ 57 ] Contacts Note: When you sen d or receive contact information, the term â bus iness ca rd â is used. A business ca rd is a contact card in a f ormat suitable to be sent in a te xt message, usually in â vCard â fo rmat . ⢠MANAGE CONTACT GROU PS Op ti on s in t he Gro ups li st vi e w ar e: Open , New grou p , Del ete , Rename , Ringing tone , Contacts info , Help , a nd Exit . Y ou c an creat e contac t gro ups th at can, for e xample , be use d as distribu tion lists for sending text m essages and e-mail. See â Add a ringing tone for a contact card or group â on p. 56. Create contact groups 1 In the Contacts directory , press to open the G roups list. 2 Select Op ti ons â New group . 3 Write a na me for the gr oup or use the default name Group and press OK . Add members to a group 1 In the Contacts directory , scroll to th e contact you want to add to a group and se lec t Opti ons â A dd to group: . A list of available groups opens. 2 Scroll to th e group to wh ich you w ant to add the contact an d press . ADD MULTIP LE MEMB ERS AT A TI ME 1 In the Grou ps list, open a group and sele ct Opti on s â Add memb ers . 2 Scroll to a contact a nd press to ma rk it. Repeat this action on all the contacts you wan t to a dd and press OK to add them to th e selected group.
[ 58 ] Remove members from a group 1 Go to the Groups list, scroll to the group you want to modify , and press . 2 Scroll to th e contact you w ant to remove and select Options â Remo ve from group . 3 Press Ye s to remove the contact from the group. ⢠IMPORT DATA FROM OTHER NOKIA PHONES Y ou can move calendar , contacts, and to-do data from many diff erent Nokia phones to your Nokia 3620 or Nokia 3 660 us ing the PC Suite Data Import application. Instructions f or using the application can be found in the PC Su ite onlin e help on th e CD -ROM.
[ 59 ] Camera and images 6 Cam era and ima ges With th e came ra you can take pictu res of pe ople or eve nts while on the mo ve. Th e pictu res are automa tically sav ed in the Im ages appli cation, where you can rena me them an d organi ze them in folde rs. Y ou can also send photo s to your friends in a multimedia me ssage, as an e-ma il attachment, or through a Bluetooth or in frare d con necti on. T he camer a produ ce s JPEG pic tur es. Press Camera in the standby mode or go to Menu â Cam e ra . Op tion s befo re taking a pict ure are: Capture , Go to Images , Settings , Help , and Exit . Note: JPEG is a standardized image compression format. JPEG files ca n be v iewe d w ith the mo st commo n ima ge v iew ers , i mag e ed itor s, and Internet browsers. Y ou can recognize these files by their *.jpg extens ion, f or example , boats.jpg ⢠TA K E P I C T U R E S Note: Y our phone m ust be switched on to use this function. Do n ot switch the phone on wh en wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause inter ference or danger . 1 Press Camer a in the standby mode. The Camera application opens and you can see the view to be ca ptured. Y ou can see th e viewf inder and the croppi ng lines, which show you the ima ge area to be captured. Y ou can a lso see th e ima ge counter , which shows you how many im ages, depending o n the selected imag e quality , f it in the m emory of you r phone. 2 To take a picture, pr ess .
[ 60 ] Note: Do not move the phone before the Camera applicat ion starts to save the p hoto. The p hotos ar e save d automa tica lly in the Image s application. The Camer a goes into ba ttery savin g mode within a mi nute if the re ha ve been no ke y pr ess es. To cont in ue t akin g pictures, press . Afte r the im age has been saved: ⢠If you do not want to sav e the photo in Images, select Opt ions â Delete . ⢠T o return to the viewfinder to take a new picture, press . Op tion s af ter a p icture has be en ta ken are : New image , De lete, Send , Rename image , Go to I mages , Settin gs , Help , and Exit . Import ant: Obey all local laws gove rni ng the taking of picture s. Do not use thi s feature ille gall y . Settings In the Camera application settings, you can adjust the image quality setting and change the de fault image name. 1 Select Op ti ons â Settings . 2 Scroll to th e setting you want to change: ⢠Image qu alityâ High , Normal , an d Basic . T he better the image qu al ity , th e m ore me mo ry t he i m ag e c ons um es . Se e als o â Im ages and memory consumption â on p. 62. ⢠Default image nameâ By default, the Camera names photos in the JPEG forma t (for exam ple, â Image .jpgâ ). Defaul t im age name allows you to set a name for the pi ctures taken. ⢠Me mor y i n u se â Select w hether you want to store your images in the phone memo ry or the memor y card, if you use one. Example: If you se t â Beachâ as the default image na me, Camera will name all the pictures you take â Beach â , â Beac h(0 1) â , â Bea ch( 02 ) â , and so on, until you c hange the s etting.
[ 6 1 ] Camera and images Camera modes With the different Camera modes, you can affect the size and orientation of the picture to be taken. When you are ta king a picture, press or to change between the dif ferent modes. Choose: ⢠Standard when you want to take normal lan dscape pictures. ⢠Po r t r a i t when you want to take a s maller icon-sized, vertical picture, which can be added to a contact card. ⢠Night when th e ligh ting is dim and t he Camer a needs a l onger exp osure time f or the pi cture t o b e of good quality . N ote th at, in dim cond itions, any movement while taking a picture may cause it to get blurred. The image size and or ientation is the same for Standard and Night. T ry out the different Camera m odes to see how th ey affect the picture taken. IMAGE R ESOLUTI ON S ⢠When you are taking a picture in Standard or Ni ght mode, the viewfinder resolutio n is 160x120 pixels and 80x96 for P or trait mode. ⢠The images taken in Standard or N ight mode are saved i n 640x480 pixel (VGA) format and those taken in P ortra it mode are saved in 80x96 pix el form at .
[ 62 ] ⢠When you are viewing images, they are scaled to fit the display , which has 176x208 pixe ls. This means that Standard and Night mode pictu res will appear more detailed when v iewed on a higher resolution sc reen, for example, a com puter or w hen z oomed in Images. No t e: Resolution â A measure for the s harpness a nd clar ity of a n image. Resolution refers to the number of dot s (pixels) in an im age or a display . The more pixel s there are, the more detai led the picture is. Resolution is usually m easured in pixels, for e xample, 640x480=300 kilopixels (kpix)=0.3 megapixel s (Mpix). IMAGE S AND ME MORY C ONSUMPTI ON Y our phone has a pproximately 3 MB (m egabytes) of free memor y for images, con tact information, calendar , messages, and so on . See â Share d me mor y â on p. 20. P ortrait images (always taken in High quality) are so small th at they tak e up v ery littl e me mory . Im ages ta ken usin g the High q uality setting and those taken in Night mode take up the mo st memory . If 1 MB of memory is used for images only , it would fit approximately 22 Normal quality images taken in Standard mode. I n the table below , you can see ap proximately how m any images would f it in 1 MB of memory . By using a memory card with your phone you can increas e the number of images you can store. To see how much memory is avail able on your phone a nd me mory card, see â Ch eck memory consumption â on p. 124. Image quality Ima ge ty pe Basic No rm al High St and a rd 55 22 15 Night 50 25 18 Port rait --> 3 0 0
[ 63 ] Camera and images ⢠STORE PIC TURES IN IMAGES Go to Menu â Images . Images allows you to vie w , organize, delete, and send photos and pictures stored in your phone. In Images you can organize ph otos: ⢠T aken w ith the ca mera . ⢠Sent to you r Inbox in a multimedia or a pictur e mess age , as an e-ma il a t t a c hm en t, th rou gh an infr are d or Bluetooth connection. After receiving the ima ge in Inbo x, you need to save it in I mages. In the Im ages main view , you can see a list of ph otos and folder s. The list shows: ⢠The date and tim e a photo or an image was taken or saved. ⢠A small thumbnail picture, a preview of the image. ⢠The numb er of im ages inside a folder . ⢠A tab showing w hether the photos or folders are located in th e phone â s me mor y or th e m emory ca rd , if y ou use one . Opti ons in Im ages are: Op en , Se nd , Image uploade r , Delete , Mo ve to folder , New f old er , Mark/ Unmark , Re name , Receive via infrared (only from a digi tal came ra th at sup p orts th e IrT ran- P pr oto col , oth erw ise u se th e Infr ared applicatio n, see â Send an d r eceive data u sing in frared â on p. 146), View details , A dd to F avorites , Help , a nd Exit . View images Note: When you open Im ages and you use a memory ca rd, the starting tab is determined by which memory is selected a s the Mem ory in us e . 1 Press or to move fr om one memor y tab to another .
[ 64 ] 2 To browse the im ages, press an d . 3 Press to open an image. When the im age is open, you can see the name of the image and the number of images in the folder on the top of the displa y . When you are viewing an image, pressing o r takes you to the next or previous picture in the current folder . Y ou can view an imat ed GIF f iles in th e same wa y as ot her ima ges. An ima tion s are played on ly once. When an animation stops, you will see a fixed image. T o view the animation again, you must close it and then reopen it. Optio ns when vie wing an ima ge are: Send , Rotate , Zoom in , Zoom ou t , Full screen , Delete , Rename , View details , A dd to F avorites , He lp , and Ex it . ZOOM I N OR ZOO M OUT 1 Select Op t ions â Zoom in or Zoom out . Y ou can see th e zoomi ng ratio at the top of the display . See also the section â K eyboard shor tcuts â later in this chapter . 2 Press Bac k to return to the initial view . The zoom ratio is not stor ed permanen tly . Y ou cannot zoom in on GIF animations while they are playing. Full sc reen When you select Op ti ons â Full screen , th e panes around the picture are removed so that you can see more of the im age. Press to go back to the initial view . Move the focal poi nt When you are zooming or view ing an image in full screen m ode, use the Scroll key to move the f ocal point to the left, right, up, or down, s o that you can take a closer look at one part of the picture, for example, its upper right corner.
[ 65 ] Camera and images Ro ta te Select Op ti ons â Rotateâ Le ft to rotate an image 90 degrees counterclockwise or Righ t to rotate the image clockwise. The rotation status is not s tored permanently . KE Y B O A R D S H O R T C U T S ⢠Rotate: 2 keyâ counterclockwise, 9 ke yâ clockwise. ⢠Scroll: â up, â do w n, â left , â right. ⢠Zoom: 1 keyâ zoom in, 0 keyâ zoom out. Pr ess and hold to retur n to the no rmal v iew . ⢠Change between full screen and normal view: the * key . IMAGE DETA ILS VIEW T o view the detailed in formation about an image, scroll to the image and se lec t Opti ons â View details . A list of image inform ation appears: Format â JPEG , GI F , PNG , TIFF , MBM , BMP , WBMP , OTA , WM F , Unsupported , or Unk no wn . Date and Tim e â wh en the image wa s created or saved, n x n - th e siz e of the im age in pixels. Resolutn . â the size of the image in pixels. See â Image resoluti ons â on p. 6 1. Size â in bytes or kilobytes. Color â True color , 65536 colors, 4096 colors, 2 56 colors , 1 6 colors , Grayscale , or B lack/white . Arrange images and folders ⢠T o remove an image or folder , scroll to it and select Op ti ons â Delete . ⢠T o rename an image or a folder , scroll to the image or f older you want to r ename a nd se lec t Opti ons â Rename . Write the new name and press . See â A ctions common to all applica tions â on p. 17 f or further in formation on how to cr eate folders and mark and m ove items to folder s.
[ 66 ] Send images Y ou can send photos or images by different messaging services. 1 Scroll to th e image you want to send and sele ct Opti on s â Send . 2 Then select th e meth od. The choices are Via multimedia , Via e -mail , Via infrared , or Via Bluetooth . ⢠If you select to send the image in an e-mail or a multi media message, an editor opens. Press to select the recipient(s) from the Contacts directory or write the phone number or e-mail address of the r ecipient in the To : f ield. Add text or s ound and se lec t Opti ons â Send . For mo re inform atio n, se e â Create a nd se nd new messa ges â on p. 80. ⢠If yo u want to se nd the im age by in frared or Blu etooth con necti on, se e â Send data using Bluetooth connection â on p. 142, and â Sen d and receive data using infrared â on p. 1 46 for m ore information. Picture messages folder Op ti on s in t he Pi ctu re mes s ag es fo ld er ar e: Ope n , Send , Delete , Mar k/ Un mar k , Ren ame , View details , He l p , a nd Exit . In the Picture messages folder , you can find graphics sent to you in picture messages. If you want to sav e a gr aphic y ou hav e recei ved in a picture message , go t o Messaging â Inbo x , open the message, and select Options â Save picture . VIEW PICT URES 1 Scroll to the picture you wan t to view a nd press . T he picture opens. Press to view th e next picture in the folder . 2 Press Back to return to the Pictures m ain view .
[ 67 ] Video recorder 7 Video recorder Go to Menu â Video recorder . Note: Obey all local laws governing th e taking of videos. Do n ot use this featu re illegally . Y our phone must be s witched on to use the Video recorder . Do not switch the phone on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may c ause interference or danger . With the Video recorder you can record video clips, and play video clips stored on your phone or on a memory ca rd. Also, the Video recorder is integrated with the messaging features allowing you to e asily send created clips. Video record er uses sh ared mem ory . See â Shared memory â on p. 20 . ⢠RECOR D A V IDEO CLIP Note: 3GPP file format (.3g p) is the sta ndard video file format for Multimedia Messagin g. Y ou can record video clips up to 95 KB in siz e, or approx imatel y 1 0 seco nds in dur ation. Recorded vide o clips are in the .3gp for mat. 1 To begin recording open the Video rec ord er a nd sel ect Options â Record and you can see th e view to record. 2 T o star t re cording press . The progress bar on th e bottom of th e screen shows you how much recording time remains. T o pau se recording at any time press . T o immediately play the video clip you just recor ded, press . The video clip is saved to either the phone â s me mor y o r t he me mor y c ard , depending on the setting of your Mem ory in use . See â Set up your Vide o re cord er â on p. 68. Op ti on s in v ide o cl ip v ie w of Vid eo r eco r der ar e: Play , Recor d, Send , Delete , Renam e , Settings , About product , He l p , an d Exit .
[ 68 ] ⢠W ATCH A VIDEO CLIP T o watch a video clip from the Video recorder video clip list: 1 Open th e Video recorde r . 2 Scroll to a vide o clip and select Optio ns â Play . Once a video clip is playing, you h ave similar options available to you as when playing a vide o clip in Re alOne Player ⢠. See â RealOne Player â¢â on p. 69. Send video clips Y ou can s end video clips by using th e Send option from you r video clip list. 1 Scroll to th e video clip you want to sen d and select Op tion s â Sen d . 2 Select Via multime dia , Via e-mail , Via Bluetooth , or Via infrared . Set up your Video recorder Y ou can def ine whether you store your video clips in the phone â s memory or on the memory card , if you have one, and how to name you r video clips. Select Optio ns â Settings and one of the f ollowing: ⢠Me mor y in us e â Choose between Phone memory an d Me mo ry ca rd . ⢠Default video name â Define the de fault name of your video clips. Exam pl e: If you se t â Holiday â as the def ault video clip n ame, Video recorder will name a ll the video clips y ou take â Holidayâ , â Holiday(0 1) â , â Holiday(0 2) â , and so on, until you c hange the setting a gain.
[ 69 ] RealOne Playe r ⢠8 RealOne Playe r ⢠Go to Menu â RealOne Player . With the RealOne Player you can play media files st ored in the phone â s me mor y o r o n a memory card, play music and video f iles, or stream live cont ent from the internet. Optio ns in list view are: Play , Open , Ren ame , Delete , Mo ve to folder , New folder , Mark/ Unma rk , Se nd , A dd to F avorites , Se ttings , Help , About product , and Ex it . RealOn e P layer us es sha red m emor y . See â Sha red memo ry â on p. 20. Note: Streaming is playin g sound or video in real time a s it is downloaded from th e internet, as opposed to storing it in a local file firs t. ⢠PLAY MEDIA FILES Y ou can play an y music or video file from the list show n when you start t he Re alOne Playe r , or directly f rom the internet. T o play a media file stored in your phone â s memory or me mory card, open Real One Player , scroll to th e file an d select Opti ons â Play . Note: Media files are vi deo, music or audio clips that you can play on a me dia pl ayer l ike the R ealOne Playe r . Files with exten sions . 3gp, .amr , .rm, .ram, .ra, and . rv are su pported by the RealOne Player .
[ 7 0 ] T o play a media file directly from the inter net: 1 Select Op ti ons â Open â URL address . 2 Enter the UR L of the site fr om which you want to play or stream content. Before your media file or stre am begins play ing, your phone will connect to th e site and load the file. Note: Bu ffering is the tem porary storage of a p art of your streaming content into the ph one â s mem ory before it is pl ayed. Media guide Y ou can open a browser page tha t allows you to access a media guide with links to streaming media sites and files. T o stream from the Internet: 1 Configure your RealOne Player default access point (s ee â Default Access P oint setting â , on p. 7 1). 2 From the m ain Menu, open Services (XHTML browser ). 3 In the Bookmarks view , open th e Mobile Media Guide bookm ark. Note: In the RealOne Player , you can on ly open an rstp://url address. Y ou cannot open an http://url addres s . 4 Find a lin k to a str eaming si te that interests you, and selec t the link. If you ar e not connected to th e server , y ou will be prompted to connect. Pr ess Ye s . Y our streaming s ession begins. ÷ Note: Y ou cannot stream from a site unless you have correctly config ure d an Access P oint in RealOne Player , see â Defau lt Access P oint setting â , p. 7 1. Many service providers require you to use an Internet Access P oin t (IAP) fo r your Default Access P oint in RealOne Pl a ye r . Ot h er se rvice providers allow you to use a W AP access point . C on tac t yo u r service provider f or advice and availability .
[ 7 1 ] RealOne Playe r ⢠V olume control ⢠T o increase the volume press , or to decrease the volume press . ⢠T o mut e th e sound press and hold un til th e ind icator is dis playe d. ⢠T o turn on the sound press and hold until you see the ind icator . ⢠SEND MEDIA FILES Y ou can send media f iles by using the Se nd option fro m your video cli p list. 1 Scroll to th e file you want to send and select Option s â Sen d . 2 Select Via infr ared , Via Bluetooth , Via multimedia or Via e-mail . ⢠CHANGE THE SETTINGS To c h a n g e t h e Vide o settin gs, select Opti ons â Video to open th e following list of settings: ⢠Video qualityâ Choo s e Sharp images to have better picture quality , but slower fram erate, or H igh fra mera te fo r fast er fr a mera te , but lower picture quality . ⢠Automatic scalingâ Choose On to have automatic resizing of the video image. To c h a n g e t h e Pl ayback settin gs, se lect Op tions â Playback to open the following setting: ⢠Repeat â Choose On to h ave the playing video or audio file restart automatically once it has finished. To c h a n g e t h e Netw o rk settin gs, select Options â Network to open th e following list of settings: ⢠Default Access P oint â As def ined in Con nection settings , se e â Access points â on p. 3 8. ⢠Bandwi dth â Choose Auto matic t o have the best del ivery ra te availabl e. ⢠Maxi mum band width â Choose the max imum bandwidth for streaming co nten t .
[ 72 ] ⢠Connection time -outâ Ope n the slider view to change the waiting time for t he initial server connection on a streaming session. ⢠Server time-out â Open th e slider view to change th e time allowed for no response f rom the ser ver . ⢠Highest P ort an d Lowest P ort â Enter the port n umbers for s treaming. If you are not sure of the numb ers, contact your service provider . To ch a n g e t he Proxy se tti ngs , se le ct Opti on s â Proxy â Use Proxy / Host address / Po r t . When you sel ect one of th e settings, a tab view is opened. Press or to m ove between the different settin g tabs. The followi ng icons indicate which setting you a re in: for Video for Playback for Netwo rk for Proxy
[ 73 ] Messaging 9 Messaging Go to Menu â Messagin g . Options in the Messagin g main view: Cr eate messa ge , Connect (shown if you have defined settings for the mailbox), or Disconnect ( s h o w n i f t h e r e is an active connection to mailbox), SIM messages , C ell broadcast , Ser vice command , Settings , He lp , and Exit . In Messaging you can cr eate, send, receive, vie w , e dit, and or ganize: ⢠text message s ⢠multimedia m essages ⢠e-ma il messa ges ⢠smart m essa ges (s pecial text messa ges con taining data) In addition to these, you can receive messages and data by an infrared or Bluetooth connection, receive serv ice messages, cell broadcast me ssages, as well as send service com mands. T ext and m ultimedia messages us e shared m emory . See â Shared memo ry â on p. 20. Note: Before you can cr eate a m ultimedia message, write an e-mail, or connect to your remote mailbox, you m ust have the correct connection settings in place. See â Settings f or e-mail â on p. 1 03 and â Settings for multimedia messages â on p. 1 0 1. When you open Messaging, you can see the Create messa ge f unction and a list of def ault folders: Inb ox â Contains received messages except e -mail and cel l broadcast messages. E-ma il messages a re stored in the M ailbox . Y ou can read cell broadcas t me ssages by selecting Op tions â Cell bro adcast .
[ 74 ] My fold ers â For organizing your me ssages into folders. Organize your messages by adding new f olders under My folders. When you have opened one of the default folders, for example, Sent, you can ea sily move between the folders by pressing to open the next f older (Outbox), or by pressing to open the previous folder (Dr afts). Mailbox â When you open this folder , you can either connect to your r emote mailbox to retr ieve your new e-mail m essages or view your previously retrieved e-mail m essages offline. See â View e-mail messages when online â an d â View e-mail messages when of fline â on p . 93 f or fu rther in for mation. After you have defined settings for a n ew mailbox, the name given to that mailbox will replace Mailbox in the main view . See â Settings f or e-mail â on p . 1 0 3. Dr af ts â Stores draft m essages that have not been sent. Ou tbox â Is a temporary storage place for messa ges waiting to be sent. Sent â Stores the last 1 5 messages that have been sent. T o change the number of messages to be saved, see â Settings for the Sent f older â on p. 1 05. Repo rt s â Y ou can request the system to send you a deliver y report of th e text messages, sm art mess ages, and multimedia messages you have sent. T o turn on delivery report r eception, select Opti on s â Settings â T ext message or Mu ltimedia message , scroll to Receive r eport , and select Ye s . Note: Receiving a delivery report of a multimedia message that has bee n sent to an e- mail address might not be possible.
[ 75 ] Messaging ⢠MESSAGING â GENERAL INFORMATION The me ssage s tatus i s always either draf t, sent , or receive d. Messag es can be saved to the Drafts folder befo re they are sent. Messages are temporar ily placed to Outbox to wait for sending. After a message has been sent, you can f ind a co py of the mess age in the Sen t f old er . Received and se nt mes sages are in read-only sta te until you select R eply or Forward , which copie s the message to an editor . Note that you cannot forw ard e-mail mess ages sent by you. Note: Messages or data that have be en sent by an infrared or Bluetooth connection are not saved in th e Draft or Se nt folders. Open a rec eived message When you receive a mes sage, and the n ote 1 n ew mes sag e is shown in the s tandby m ode. Press Sho w to open the message. If you have m ore than on e new messa ge, press Show to open the Inbox to see the message he adings. T o open a message in I nbox, scroll to it and press . Add a recipient to a m essage When you crea te a message , ther e are s everal wa ys to add a recipi ent: ⢠Add recipients f rom the Contacts directory . To open the Contacts directory , pr ess or in the To : or Cc: f ields, or select Op ti ons â A dd recipient . Scroll to a contact and press to mark it. Y ou can mark several recipients at a time. Press OK to return to the message. The recipients are listed in the To : f ield and automatically separated with a semicolon ( ; ). ⢠Write the phone number or e-mail addr ess of th e recipient in the To : field. ⢠Copy the recipie nt information f rom another application and then paste it to the To : fi eld. See â Copy text â on p. 80 . Press to the le ft of the cursor if you want to del ete a recipie nt.
[ 76 ] Note: I f you write many phone nu mbers or e-mail addresses in the To : field, you must remembe r to add a se micolon ( ; ) between each item to se parate th em from each ot her . When yo u retrie ve re cipien ts from the Contacts directory , the semicolon is added automatically . Example: 2 14 12 3 45 6 ; 972 456 876 Sending options T o change how a m essage is sent, select Op ti ons â Sen ding options when you are editing a message. When you save the message, its sending settings are also saved. ⢠WRITE TEXT Y ou can key in text in two dif ferent ways, using the method traditionally used in mobile ph ones or an other method c alled predictive text input. Icon s: and indicate the sele cted case. me a ns t ha t the first lett er of t he n ext word is written in u pper c as e, an d a l l o t he r l et t e r s are automatically written in lower case. indicates number mode. Use traditional text input The indicator is s hown on the top right of the display wh en you are wr iting text usi ng traditional text in put. ⢠Press a number key ( 1â 9 ), repeatedly until the desired char acter appears . Note, that there ar e more charac ters available f or a numbe r key than are printed on the key . ⢠T o insert a number , press and h old the number key . ⢠T o switch between le tter and number mode, press and hold th e # key . ⢠If the next letter is located on the same key as the present one, wait until the cursor appears (or press to end the time-out period), and then key in th e letter . ⢠If you make a mistake, press to remove a character . Press and hold to clear more than one character .
[ 77 ] Messaging ⢠The most common punc tuation marks are available under the 1 key . Press the 1 key repeatedly to reach the desir ed punctuation mark. ⢠Pr es s the * key to open a list of special characters. Use the Scroll key to move through the list, and press OK to select a character . ⢠To in se rt a sp a ce, pr es s the 0 key . ⢠T o move th e curs or to th e next line, pr ess the 0 key th ree times. ⢠T o switch betw een upper and lower case, press the # key . Use predictive te xt input T o set predictive text input on or off, press the # key twice quickly when writing text. T o activate predictive text inpu t, press and select Pre dictive text on . This will activate predictive text input for a ll editors in th e phone. The indicator is shown at th e top of the display . Write the desired word by pressing the 2 âÂÂ9 keys. Press each key only once for one letter . The word changes after every key press. Note: Do not pay attention to wh at appears on the display . The word ma tch is evolving. Wa it until you have keyed in the w hole word before you check the result. For example , to write â Nokiaâ when English dictionary is selected, press: the 6 key for N the 6 key for o the 5 key for k the 4 key for i the 2 key for a As y ou can s ee, the word suggestion changes after each key press.
[ 78 ] When you have finished th e word, check that it is correct. ⢠If the w ord is correct, you can conf irm it by pr essing or by pr es si ng t h e 0 key to insert a space. The underlin ing disappears and you can begin to wri te a new word. ⢠If the w ord is not correct, you h ave the f ollowing options: ⢠Press the * k ey repeatedly to view the match ing words the dictionary has found one by one. ⢠Press and select P re dic ti ve te xt â Matches to view a list of matching words. Scroll to the word you want to use a nd press to select it. ⢠If th e ? character is sh own after th e word, the word you int ended to write is not in the diction ary . To add a word to the dictionar y , pr ess Spel l , key in the wor d (max. 32 le tters) using traditional tex t input, and press Save . The word i s added to th e dictionary . When th e dictionary becomes full, a n ew word re places the oldest added word. ⢠To r e m o v e t h e ? and clear characters one by on e from th e word, press . TIPS ON USI NG PRED ICTIVE TEXT I NPU T ⢠T o erase a chara cter , press . Press and h old to clear more than one character . ⢠T o chan ge betwee n the different character cases Abc , abc , and AB C , press the * key . Note that if you press the * key qu ickly twice the predictive text inpu t is turned off. ⢠T o insert a number in letter mode, press and hold the desired number key , or press and sele ct Inse rt num b er , key in the number s you want, and press OK . T o switch between le tter and number mode, press and hold th e # key . ⢠The most common punc tuation marks are available under the 1 key . Press the 1 key repeatedly to reach the desir ed punctuation m ark. ⢠Press and ho ld the * key to open a list of special characters. Use th e Scroll k ey to scr oll through the list and press OK to select a chara cter . Or press and select In sert s ym bol .
[ 79 ] Messaging The predictive text input will tr y to guess which commonly used punctuation m ark ( .,?! â ) is needed . T he order and avai lability of the punctuation m arks depend on the language of the dictionar y . Press the * k ey repeatedly to view the matching words the dictionary has found one by one. Y ou can a lso pr ess , select Predictive tex t and select: ⢠Mat che s â to view a list of words that correspond to your key presses. Scroll to the de sired word and press the . ⢠Inse rt word â to add a word (max. 32 letters ) to the dictionar y by using traditional text input. When the dictionary becomes full, a new wor d replaces the oldest added word. ⢠Edi t wor d â to open a view wh ere you can e dit the wor d, available only if the word is active ( underlined). Write compound words Write the fir st half of a compound word and confirm it by pr essing . Write the last part of the compound wor d and complete the compound word by pressing the 0 k ey to add a sp ace . Tu rn off pred ictive text Press and select Pred icti ve te xt â Off to turn predictive text input off for all edi tors in the ph one. Editing option s When you p ress , th e following option s appear (de pending on th e editing mode and situation you are in): ⢠Predictive text (predictive text inpu t), Alpha mode (traditional t ext input), or Numbe r mode . ⢠Cut , Copyâ available only if text has been selected first. ⢠Pa s t e â available only when text has been either cut or copied to the clipboard. ⢠Inse rt num ber , Insert symbol . ⢠Writing languageâ changes the in put language for all edi tors in the phone. See â Phone settings â on p. 32 .
[ 80 ] ⢠COP Y T EX T If you want to copy te xt to the clipboard, the follow ing are the easiest methods: 1 To select letter s and words, press and h old . At the same time, press or . As the selection m oves, text is h ighlighted. T o select lines of text, press and hold . At the same time press or . 2 To end the selection, stop pressing the Scroll key . 3 To copy the text to clipboard, while still holdin g , press Co py . 4 Or , release and then press it on ce to open a list of editin g commands , for exa mple, Copy or Cu t . 5 If you want to r emove th e selected text from th e document, pr ess . 6 To ins ert the text i nto a document, press and hold and press P aste . Or , press once and select Pa s t e . ⢠CREATE AND SEND NEW MESSAGES Y ou can star t to create a mes sage in two ways: ⢠Select New messag e â Create:â Te x t message , Multimedia message , or E- mail in the M essaging main view . ⢠Start to create a message from an application that has the option Send . In this case the file that was selected (such a s an im age or text) is a dded to the mess age. Note: Whe n sen ding messa ges, your phone may display the wor ds Message Sent . This is an indication that the message has been sent by your ph one to the m essage center programmed into your phone. This is not an indication that t h e me ssage has be en rece iv ed at t he inten ded de stin atio n. For more deta i ls a bou t t he m ess agi ng s ervi ce s, c heck w it h y our se rvic e pro vider .
[ 8 1 ] Messaging ⢠T E XT MESSAGES Op tion s in t he te xt messag e edi tor are: Send , Add recipient , Insert , Delete , Message details , Sending options , Help , and Exi t . 1 Select New me ssa ge . A list of message options opens. 2 Select Cr ea te : â Text message . T he editor open s with the cursor in the To : fie ld. 3 Press to se lect recipients from the Contacts directory or write the phone number of the recipient. Press the # key to add a semicolon ( ; ) to separate each recipie nt. Press to move to the me ssage field. 4 Write th e mess age. Note: Y our phone suppor ts sending multiple text messages at t he s am e time; therefore, the normal 160 char acters limit for on e t ex t messa ge can be exceeded. If your tex t ex ceeds 160 char acters, it will be sent i n tw o o r mo r e me s sa g es a nd m e ss a ge s e nd in g m a y cost you more. In the n avigation bar , you can see th e message length i ndicator coun ti ng ba ckw ar ds fr om 16 0. F or examp l e, 1 0 (2) mea ns t ha t y ou can still add 1 0 characters for the text to be sent as two messages. 5 T o send th e message , select Optio ns â Send or press . Smart messages Smart messa ges are specia l text message s that ca n contain data . Y ou can se nd sm a rt me ss age s su c h as : ⢠Picture messages ⢠Busi ness c ards co nta ining co ntact info rmat ion in ge neric (v Card ) fo rmat ⢠Calendar n otes (v Calendar fo rmat) From the text me ssage editor , you m ay crate a sma rt message containing a picture (see â Create and send picture messa ges â on p. 82). For other types of sm art me ssages, s ee â Send contact information â on p. 56, â Send calendar ent ries â on p. 1 14, and â Send bookmarks â on p. 12 8. Y ou can also receive ringing tones, oper ator logos, or settings from service providers. See â Receive smart mes sages â on p. 90.
[ 82 ] Create and send picture messages Y our phone allows you t o send a nd receive picture m essages. Pictu re messages are text messages that contain small black-and-white graphics. Ther e are several def ault p ictures available in the Picture msg s. folder in Imag es . Note: This function can be used only if it is supported by your service provider . Only phones that offer picture message features can receive and display picture messages. T o send a picture message: 1 There are two possibili ties. Choose on e of the following: ⢠Select Messagi ng â New message â Create: â Text message , and then sele ct Opti on s â Inser t â Picture . ⢠Go to Images â Pict ur e m s gs . an d select a picture to be sent. Select Op ti ons â Sen d. 2 Enter recipien t information and add text. 3 Select Op ti ons â Send or pr ess . Note: Each picture message is made up of sever al text me ssages. Therefore, sending one picture message may cost m ore than sending one te xt message. ⢠MULTIMEDIA MESSAGES A multimedia m essage can contain text, images, and either video or s ound clips. Note: This function can be used only if it is supported by your service provider . Only de vices that offer compatible multimedia message or e- mail features can receive and display multimedia messa ges. Devices tha t don â t ha ve these f eatur es m ay rece ive details of a link to a w eb page.
[ 83 ] Messaging Settings needed for multimedia messaging Options in the multimedia message editor are: Send , A dd re cipient , Inse rt , Preview message , Objects , Rem o v e , Delete , Message de tails , Sending options , Help , an d Exit . Y ou ma y receive the se ttings as a smart messa ge fr om your serv ice provider . See â Receive sm art mess ages â on p. 90. For availability of and subscription to data services, ple ase contact your service provider . 1 Go to Setti ngs â Con nection settings â A ccess poin ts an d defi ne the settin gs for a multimedia messagin g access point: Conn ectio n na me â Give a descriptive name for the connection. Session mode â Se lect a data connection type: GSM da ta , High speed GSM , or GPR S . Gateway IP address â Enter the addr ess. Example: Doma in names su ch a s www .nokia.com can be tr anslate d into IP addresses like 192.1 00.124.1 95 . Homepage â Enter the addre ss of the multimedia messaging cen ter . ⢠If you selected GSM da ta or High sp eed GSM , fill in Dial-up numb er â a phone number for the data call. ⢠If you selected GPRS , fill in Access point nam e â the name given to you by your service provide r . For further in formation on differe nt data c onn ections, see also â Conn ect ion settin gs â on p. 36. 2 Go to Messag ing â Options â Settings â Multimedia message . 3 Op en Pref erre d conne ction and select the acce ss point you create d to be u sed as th e pref erred conn ection. Se e al so â Settin gs for multim edia messages â on p. 1 0 1.
[ 84 ] Set up the m essaging store The messaging store defines whether th e phone â s me mo ry or th e mem o ry card are used as def ault. To define the messaging store: Messag ing â Options â Settings â M essaging store and select either th e phone â s memory or th e memory car d, if on e is used. Create multimedia messages When you ar e sending a multimedia m essage to any phone other than the Nokia 3620 or Nokia 3660, it is recom mended to use a smaller image size and a sound clip that is n o longer th an 15 seconds. T he default setting is Image siz e: Small . If you want to check the image size setting, go to Messaging â O ptions â Settings â Multimedia message or select Opti on s â Sendin g options wh en you are creating a multimedia me ssage. When you are sending a multimedia message to an e-mail address or ano the r Nok ia 36 20 or Nok ia 3660, sel e ct Op t ions â Sendin g Options â Image size â Larg e when you are creating a multimedia m essage. 1 In Messaging , select New message â Cr e at e â Multimedia me ssage and press . 2 Press to s elect the recipient(s) from the Contacts directory or write the phone number or e-mail address of the recipient in the To : field. Add a semicolon (;) to separate each r ecipient. Press to move to th e next fiel d. 3 Y ou can add the different objects of the multimedia m essage in any order you want: ⢠T o add an image, sele ct Op t ions â In sert â Image or New image . ⢠T o add a sou nd, select Option s â Ins ert â Sound clip or Ne w so u nd clip . W hen sound h as been added, the icon is shown in th e navigation bar . ⢠T o add video, sele ct Op tion s â Insert â Video clip. ⢠T o write text, press . ⢠If you select Ins ert â Im age , Sound clip , Video clip , or T emplate , a list of item s opens. Scr oll to the i tem you wish to add and press Select .
[ 85 ] Messaging Note: If you ch ose Imag e , first you ne ed to selec t wh ethe r the image is stored in the phone â s me mor y or t he me mor y card, if one is used. ⢠If you select Ins er t â New im age , Camera opens and you can take a new pi cture. Press Remov e to remove the pictu re and take another instead. ⢠If you select Ins er t â New s ound clip , Re corder o pens a nd you can record a new sound. The new photo or sound is automatically saved and a copy is inserted i n the message. Note: A multimedia m essage can contain on ly one photo and one sound or video clip. 4 T o send th e message , select Optio ns â Send or press . Preview a multimedia m essage T o see what th e multimedia message will look like, select Opti ons â Preview message . Remove object from a multimedia message T o remove a multimedia object, select Opti on s â Remo ve â Im age Video clip or Sound clip . Press to remove tex t. W o rk with different multimedia objects T o see all the different me dia objects included i n a multimedia message, open a multimedia message and select Opt i ons â Objects to open the Objects view . In the Ob jects view , you can change the order of the dif ferent obje cts, delete objects, or open an object in a cor responding application. Optio ns in the O bject s view a re: Ope n , Inse rt , Place image f irst / Place text first , Remov e , Help , and Ex it .
[ 86 ] ⢠E-MAIL MESSAGES Before you can send, r eceive, r etrieve, reply to, and for ward e-mail messa ges, you mus t: ⢠Configure an Internet Access P oint (IAP) correctly . See â Connection settings â on p. 36. ⢠Define your e-mail settings correctly . See â S ettings for e-mail â on p. 1 03. Note: Follow the instructions given by your remote m ailbox and Internet Ser vice Provider . Write and send e-mail messages Opti ons i n th e e- mail ed itor are: Send , A dd rec ipie nt , Insert , Attachments , Delete , Message details , Sending options , Help , and Exi t . 1 Select New messag e â Create:â E-mail . The editor opens. 2 P ress to sele ct the rec ipien t(s) from th e Co ntac ts directo ry or write the e -mai l address of the rec ipien t in t he To : f ie ld. A dd a sem ic o lon (;) to s ep a rat e ea ch re ci p ie nt. 3 If you want to send a copy of your e-mail to som eone, write the addre ss in the Cc: field. Press to move to the next f ield. 4 Write th e mess age. 5 If you want to add an attachment to the e-mail, select Option s â Inse rt â Image , Sound clip , Video clip , or Note . ⢠will appear in th e navigation bar to indicate that the e-mail has an attachment. T emplate adds pre-written text to the e-mai l. ⢠Y ou can a lso add a n attac hment to a n e-mail by selecting Opti on s â At tachmen ts in an open e-mail. The Attachments view opens where you ca n add, v iew , and remove atta chments. ⢠T o remove an attachment, scroll to the attachment and select Opti on s â Remove . ⢠If you choose to attach an Image , f irst you need to sele ct whethe r the image is stored in the phone â s me mor y or th e me m ory car d, if one is used .
[ 87 ] Messaging 6 To send the e-mail, select Options â Send or press . E-mail m essages are autom atica lly place d in Ou tbox be fore sendin g. I n case something goes wrong wh ile the ph one is sending the e -mail, the e-mail is le ft in Outbox with th e status Failed . If you want to send files othe r than photos, sounds, and notes as attachments, open the appropriate application and select the option Send â Via e-mai l , if available. Add and remove atta chments T o add an attach ment to an e-mail, select Op ti ons â Attachments in an open e- mail. The Attachme nts view opens where you can add, view , and remove a ttachment s. ⢠T o add an att achme nt, select Op ti ons â In sert â Image , Sound clip, Video clip , or Note . A list of ite ms opens. Scroll to the one you want to add an d press OK . will appear in the navigation bar to indicate that the e-mail has an attachment. ⢠If you choose Image , first you n eed to select whether the im age is stored in the phone â s me mory or the memory card, if one is u sed. ⢠T o remove an attachment, scroll to the attachment and select Opti on s â Remove . ⢠INBOX Optio ns in Inbo x are: Op en , C reate message , Delete , Me ssage details , Mov e to folder , Mo ve to phone m emory (sho wn i f y ou h ave def ine d the memo ry car d as th e messaging store) , Move to mem ory card (shown if you have de fined the ph one â s m emor y as the m essa ging store), Mark / Unma rk , Help , and Exi t . Messages an d data c an be received by text message, m ultimedia service, infrared con nection, or Blueto oth connection. W hen ther e ar e unread messages in Inbox, the icon chan ges to .
[ 88 ] In Inbox, unre ad messages appear in bold. The message icons tell you what kind of a message it is. Here are some of the icons that you may see: View messages T o open a message, scroll to the m essage and press . Use th e Scr oll key to move up and down in the message. Press or to move to the previous or next message in the fol der . Options in different message viewers The available options depend on the type of message you have opene d for viewing: ⢠Save pictureâ saves the pictur e to Images â Picture msgs. ⢠Replyâ copi es the addre ss of the sender to the To : fiel d. Select Reply â To a l l to copy the address of the sender and Cc field recipients to the new m essa ge. ⢠Forwardâ cop ies the me ssage conten ts to an editor . ⢠Callâ call by pressing . ⢠View imageâ allo ws you to view and save the image. ⢠Play sound clip â allows you to listen to the sound in the message. ⢠Objectsâ shows you a list of all the different multimedia objects in a multimedia m essage. ⢠Attachmentsâ sh ows you a list of files sent as e-mail attachments. for an u nr ea d text me ssa ge for an un read sm art message for an u nread multimedia message for an unre ad se rv ice me ss age for data received by in frared for data receive d by Bluetooth connection for an unknown me ssage type
[ 89 ] Messaging ⢠Message detailsâ shows detailed information abou t a m essage. ⢠Mo v e to folder / Co py t o fol der â allows you t o move or copy message (s) to My folders, Inbox, or other folders you have created. See â Move items to a f older â on p. 18 . ⢠A dd to Contacts â allows you to copy the phone n umber or e-mail address of the m essage sender to the Contacts dir ectory . Choose wh ether you want to create a new c ontac t card or add the i nform ation to an existing con tact car d. ⢠Findâ searches th e mes sage for phone n umber s, e- mail addre sses, an d Internet address es. Af ter t he search, you ca n ma ke a ca ll or send a message to the found number or e-m ail address, or save the data to Contacts or as a bookmark. View multimedia messages Y ou can recognize m ultimedia messages by their icon . T o open a multimedia message, scroll to it and press . Y ou can see an image, read a message and hear a sound, simultaneously . If sound is playing , press or to increase or decrease the sound volume. If you want to mute the sound, press St o p . MULTI MEDIA MESSAG E O BJECTS Optio ns in the O bject s view a re: Ope n , Save , Send , Call , and Exit . T o see what kinds of media objects have been included in the multimedia messa ge, open the me ssage and select Optio ns â O bjects . In the O bjects view y ou can vie w files t hat have been in clud ed in the multim edia m essage. Y ou can choose to save the file in your phone or to send it, for example , by infrared to another device. T o open a file, scroll to it and press the . Wa r n i n g : Multimedia message objects may contain viruses or otherwise be harmful to your ph one or PC. Do n ot open any attach ment if you ar e not su re of th e trustwort hiness of the sender . For mo re info rma tion, s ee â Certificate ma nagementâ on p. 46.
[ 90 ] Example: Y ou can open a vCard file and save the contact information in the file to Contacts. SOUND S IN A MULTIMED IA MESSAGE Sound objects in a multimedia me ssage are indicated by the in dicator in the navigatio n bar . Sou nds are by defaul t played through the loudspeaker . To stop the sound, pr ess Stop while sound is playing. Y ou can change the volume level b y pressing or . If you want to listen to a sou nd again after all the obje cts have be en shown and the playing of th e sound has stopped, select Op tion s â Play so und c lip . Receive smart messages If you receive a vCard file th at has a picture attach ed, the picture will be saved to Con tacts as well. Y our phone can receive ma ny kinds of smar t messag es, text mes sages that contain data ( also call ed Over-The-A ir (OT A) messages). To open a receive d smart message, open I nbox, scroll to the sm art message ( ), and press . ⢠Picture messageâ to sav e th e picture in the Picture ms gs. folder in Images for la ter us e, select Op tio ns â Save picture. ⢠Bu siness ca rd â to save t he contact in formation, select Op tions â Save business card . If certificat es or sound files ar e attach ed to business cards, th ey will not be saved. ⢠Ringing tone â to save the r inging tone to Composer , select Opti on s â Save . ⢠Operator logoâ to save the logo, select Opti on s â Save . The operator logo can now be s een in the stan dby mode instead of the service provider â s own identification. ⢠Calendar entry â to save th e invitation to Calendar , select Op tion s â S av e to Ca lendar . ⢠WAP m e s s a g e â to save the bookmark, select Op tio ns â Save to bookmarks . The bookmark is added to th e Bookmarks list in browser service.
[ 9 1 ] Messaging ⢠E-mail notifica tion â Tells yo u ho w ma ny n ew e- mail s y ou hav e i n your remote mailbox. An extended notification m ay list m ore detailed information such as subject, sender , attachments, and so on. If the message con tains both browser access poin t settings and bookmar ks, to save the data select Options â Save all . Or , sel ec t Op tions â Vi e w details to view t he bookmark a nd access point infor mation separa tely . If you do n ot want to save all data, sele ct a setting or bookmark, open the details and select Option s â Save to Settings or Save to bookmarks depending on what you are view ing. T o later change th e default access point settings for br owser service or multimedia me ssaging, go to Se rv ic e s â Opt ion s â Settingsâ Default access poin t or Messaging â Optionsâ Settingsâ Multimedia message â Preferred conn ection . In addition, you can receive a text message service number , voice mailbox number , profile settings for r emote synchronizat ion, access point settings for the browser , multimedia m essaging or e-mail, access point login script settings, or e-mail settings. To sa ve the settings, select Opti on s â Sav e to SMS s ett. , Save to V oice m ail , S ave to settings , or Save to e-mail sett. . Service messages Optio ns when viewing se rvice messa ge are: Do wnload message , Mov e t o folder , Message details, Help , and Ex it . Y ou can or der service m essages (pus hed messages) f rom service prov iders. Service messages are notifications of, fo r example, n ews headlines and they may contain a tex t message or address of a browser service. For availability and subscription, contact your service pr ovider . Service provider s can update an existing service message every ti me a new service m essage is received. Messages can be updated eve n if you have moved them to another f older than I nbox. When service messages expire, they are deleted au tomatically . VIEWING SERVI CE ME SSAGES IN IN BOX 1 In In box, scroll to a service m essage ( ) and press .
[ 92 ] 2 To download or view the service, press Downlo ad m essage . The note Do wnloading message is displayed. Th e phone starts to make a data connection, if ne eded. 3 Press Back to return to Inbox. VIEWING SERVI CE ME SSAGES IN THE BR OWSER When you are brows ing, sele ct Options â Read service msgs. to download and view new service messages. ⢠MY FOLDERS Op ti on s in M y fo ld er s are : Open , N ew message , Delete , Message details , Move to folder , New folder , Ren ame , Help , a n d Exit . In My folders you can organize your messages into folder s, create n ew folders, and rename and delete folders. Sele ct Options â Mo ve to folder , New f older , or Rena me folder . For more in form atio n, s e e â Move items to a folder â on p. 18 . Tem p l a t e s f o ld e r Y ou can use text templates to avoid rewriting messages that you send often. To create a new template, select Op ti ons â New template . ⢠REMOTE MAILBOX Select New messag e â Create:â E-mail or Mailbox in the Messaging main view . If you have not set up you r e-mail account, you will be prompted to do so. See â Settings for e- mail â on p. 1 03. When you o pen this folder , you can con nect to your remote mailbox to: ⢠Retrieve new e-mail headings or m essages. ⢠View your pr eviously retrieved e-mail headi ngs or messages offline. The Settings wi zard program included in the PC Suite can help you configure access point and mailbox settings. Y ou can also copy e xisting settings, for ex ample, from your com puter to your phone. See the CD-ROM supplied in the sales package.
[ 93 ] Messaging When you create a new m ailbox, the n ame yo u give to the m ailbox automatically replaces Mailbox in the Messaging main view . Y ou can have seve ral m ailboxes (m ax. six) . Open the mailbox When you o pen the mailbox, you can choose wh ether yo u want to view the previously retrieved e -mail me ssages and e-mail headings offlin e or connect to th e e-m ail s erver . When you s croll to your mailbox and press , the ph one asks you if you want t o Connect to mailb ox? . Select Ye s to con nect to your mailbox or No to view previously r etrieved e-ma il messages offline. Another way to star t a co nnection is t o select Optio ns â Connect. VIEW E-M AIL MESSAGES WHEN ONLI NE When you are onlin e, you are c on tinuousl y connect ed t o a remote m ailbo x by a data call or a packet data connection. See also â Data connection indicators â on p. 14, â GSM data calls â on p. 37, and â G PRS P acket data â on p. 38. Note: If you are us ing the PO P3 protocol , e-m ail messages are not up da t ed automatically in online m ode. To see the ne west e-mail messa ges, you need to disconn ect an d then make a new connection to your mailbox. Optio ns when vie wing e- mail head ings are: Open , N ew message, Connect / Disconnect , Retrieve , Dele te , Message details , Copy , Mar k/ Unma rk , Help , and Exi t . VIEW E-M AIL MESSAGES WHEN OFFLI NE When you view e- mail messages offline, you r phone is n ot connected to the remote mailbox. This mode may help you to save on conn ection costs. T o view e-mail messages offline, you must first retrieve e-mail messages from your mail box, see the next section . After you have retr ieved the e-mail messages to your ph one, to e nd the data connection, select Opti on s â Disconnect .
[ 94 ] Now you can contin ue reading th e retrieved e-mail headings and/or th e retrieved e-mail m essages offline. Y ou can write new e -mail messages, reply to the retrieved e-mail messages, and forward e-mail messa ges. Y ou can order the e-mail messa ges to be sent the next time you connect to the mailbox. When you open Mailbox the next time a nd you want to view and read the e -mail messages offline, answer No to the Connect to mailbox? quer y . Retrieve e-mail messages from the mailbox If you are offline, select Option s â Conn ect to s tart a connection to a remote mailbox. The remote mailbox view is simil ar to the Inbox f older in Messaging. Y ou can move up and down in the list by pressing or . T he following icons are used to sh ow the status of th e e-mail: â new e-mail (offline or online mode). The content has not been retrieved from the mailbox to your phone (the arrow in the icon is pointing outwards). â new e -mail, the content has been retrieved from the mailbox (arrow pointing inwards). â for e-ma il messages th at have been re ad. â for e -mail headings that h ave been read and the message con tent has been deleted from the phone. 1 When you have an open connection to a remote mailbox, select Opti on s â Re trieve , ⢠Newâ to retr ieve all new e- mail messages to your phon e. ⢠Selectedâ to retrieve only th e e -mail messa ges tha t h ave bee n selected. Use the Mar k/ Unma rk â Mark / Unm ark commands to select messages on e by one. See â Mar k multiple items â on p. 18 for info rmation on how to select m any items at the same time.
[ 95 ] Messaging ⢠All â to retrieve all messages from the mailbox. T o cancel retrieving, press Cancel . After you have retrieved the e-mail messages, you can continue viewing th em online. 2 Select Opti ons â Disconnect to close the connection and to view t he e-mail messages offline. COPY E- MAIL MESSA GES TO ANOT HER FOL DER If you want to copy an e-mail from th e rem ote mailbox to a fol der under My f olders, sele ct Op tions â Copy . Select a f older from th e li st and press OK . Open e-mail messages When you are vie wing e- mail messages either i n online or offline mode, scroll to the e-mai l you want to vie w and press to ope n it. If the e-ma il message has not been retrieved (arrow in the icon is poin ting outwards) and you are offline an d select Open , you will be asked if you want to retrieve this m essage from the mailbox. Note that the data connection is left ope n after th e e-mail has been retr ieved. Se lect Options â Disco nnect to end the data conn ection. Optio ns when vie wing a n e-mai l messag e are: Reply , Forward , De lete , Attachments , Message d etails , Mo ve to folder , Add to Contacts , Find , Help , an d Exit . Disconnect from mailbox When you are on line, select Op t ions â Disconnect to end the data call or GPRS conn ection to the r emote mailbox. Se e also â Data connection indicators â on p. 14. View e-mail attachments Op ti on s in th e At ta ch me nt s vie w are : Ope n , Re trie ve , Save , Sen d , De lete , Help , and Exit .
[ 96 ] Open a message that has the attachment indicato r and select Op ti ons â Attachments to open the Attachments view . In the Attachments view , you ca n retri ev e, open , or sav e atta chm ent s. Y ou can also send atta chm ent s by infrared or Blu etooth connection. Wa r n i n g : E-mail attachme nts may contain viru ses or otherwise be harmful to you r phone or PC. Do not open any a ttachment if you are not s ure of the tru stwort hiness of t he sender . For more information, see â Certificate management â on p. 46 . Retr ieve a ttac hmen ts to the phone If the attachment h as a dimmed indicator , it has n ot been retrieved to the phone. T o retrieve the a ttachment, s croll to it an d select Options â Re trieve . Note: If y our mailbox uses the IMAP 4 protocol, you can decide wheth er to retrieve e-mail headings only , messag es only , or messages and attach ments. With the PO P3 protocol, the options ar e e-mail headin gs only or m essages and attachment s. For further i nformation , see â Settings for e-mail â on p. 1 0 3. T o save memory , you can remove attach ments from an e-mail while retaining them on the e- mail se rver . Select Options â Delete in the Attach ments v iew . Open an attachment 1 In the Atta chments view , scroll to an attach ment and press to open it. ⢠If you are online, the attachment is retrieved di rectly from the server and open ed in the cor responding application. ⢠If you ar e offline, the phone asks if you want to r etrieve the attachment to the phone. I f you answer Ye s , a connection to th e remote mailbox is sta rted. 2 Press Back to return to the e -mail viewer . Supported image formats are listed on p. 59. T o see a lis t of oth er file formats su pported by the Nokia 3620 and Nokia 3660, see the pr oduct information a t www .no kia.com .
[ 97 ] Messaging SAVE ATTA CHMENT S SEPA RATE LY T o save an attach ment, select Op ti ons â Save in the Attach ments view . The attach ment is s aved in t he corresponding applicat ion. For example, sounds can be saved in Recorder and text files (.T XT) in Note s. Attachments such as images can be saved on a m emor y card, if one is use d. Delete e -mail messages T o delete an e-mail fr om the phone while still retaining it in the remote mailbox, select Op ti ons â Dele te â Ph one only . Note: The ph one mir ror s the e- mail he adings in the remote mailbox . So, although you dele te the message conten t, the e -mail heading stays in you r phone. I f you want to remove the heading as well, you have to first delete the e-mail message from your r emote mailbox and then make a con nection from yo ur phone to the rem ote ma ilbox again to update the status. T o delete an e-mail f rom both the phone and the remote mailbox, select Opti on s â Del ete â Phone an d server . Note: If you are of fline, the e-mail w ill be delete d first f rom your phone. During the next con nection to the remote mailbox, it will be automatically deleted from the remote mailbox. If you are using the POP3 protocol, messages marked to be de leted are removed only after you have closed the con nection to the rem ote mailbox. UNDEL ETE E-MAIL MESSAG ES WHEN OFFLI NE T o cancel deleting an e-mail fr om both the phone and serv er , scroll to an e-mail that has been marked to be deleted during the next connection ( ), and select Opt ions â Undelete . ⢠OUTBOX The Outbox is a tem porary storage place for messa ges waiting to be sent. Status of the messages in Outbox is displayed as follows: ⢠Sending â A connection is being made and the message is being sent.
[ 98 ] ⢠W a iting/Q ueued â Fo r exampl e, if there are two s imilar types o f messages in Outb ox, one of them is waitin g unti l the first one is sen t. ⢠Resen d at (time)â Sen ding has failed. The phone w ill try to send the message again after a time-out period. Press Se n d if y ou want to restart the sending immediately . ⢠Deferred â Y ou can set documen ts to be â on hold â while they are in Outbox. Scroll to a message that is being sen t and select Opti ons â Defer sending . ⢠F ailed â The maximum number of sending att empts has been reached. Sending ha s failed. If you we re tr ying to send a text m essage, open the message and check that the Sen ding settings are correct. Example: Messages are pla ced in th e Outbox, for exampl e, w hen you r phone is outside th e system coverage area. Y ou can al so schedule e -mail messages to be sent the next time you connect to your remote mailbox. ⢠VIEW MESSAGES ON A SIM CARD Before you can view SIM messages, you need to copy th em to a folder in your phone. 1 In the Messaging main view , select Op ti ons â SIM m essages . 2 Selec t Options â Mark/ Unmark â Mark or Mark all to mark me ssages. 3 Select Op ti ons â Copy . A list of folders opens. 4 Select a folder a nd press OK . Go to th e folder to view the messages. ⢠CELL BROADCAST (SYSTEM SERVICE) Op ti on s in C ell br oa dca st ar e: Op en , Subscribe / Unsubscribe , Hotmark / Unho tm ark , Topic, Settings, Help , an d Exit . In the Messaging main view , select Op ti ons â Ce ll broadcast . Y ou can receive m essages on various topics, such as weather or traffic conditions from your service pr ovider . For available topics and relevant topic n umbers, contact your service p rovider . In the main view you can see :
[ 99 ] Messaging ⢠The status of the topic: â for new , subscr ibed mess ages and â for new , unsubscribed m essages. ⢠The topic nu mber , topic name, an d whether it has been flagged ( ) for follow-up. Y ou will be n otified when messages belonging to a flagged topic have arrived. Note: A packet data ( GPRS) connection may prevent cell broadcas t reception . Contact your service p rovider for the correct GPRS settings. For f urthe r inf orm ation on the GPRS settin gs, see â GPRS P acket data â on p. 38. ⢠SERV ICE COMMA ND EDITOR In the Messagi ng main view , selec t Options â Service co mma nd. Y ou can send service requests, such as activation commands for system services (also known as USSD comman ds), to your service provider . F or more information, contac t your service provider . To send a request in the standby mode o r wh en you have an active call, key in the command number(s) a nd press Se nd . If yo u need to enter letters as well as number s, select Messag ing â Options â Service com mand . ⢠MESSAGING SETTINGS The Messaging settings ar e divided into gr oups according to the different message types. Scroll to the settings you want to edit and press . Settings for text messages Optio ns when ed iti ng text message cent er sett ings a re: New msg. center , Edit , Delete, Help , and Ex it . Go to Messag ing and select Opti ons â Settin gs â T ex t message to open the following list of settin gs: ⢠Me ssa ge cent e rs â Li sts all the text mess age se rvice centers that hav e been d efin ed. Se e â Add a new text message center â on p. 1 0 0. ⢠Msg. center in use (Mess age center in use) â Define s which mess age center is used for delivering text messages and s mart messages su ch as pict ure mess ages.
[ 1 00 ] ⢠Receive r eport (delivery report)â When this system s ervice is set to Ye s , the s ta t us o f th e se n t m es sag e ( P ending , Fai le d , Delivered ) is shown in the Log. ⢠Message validityâ I f the r ecipient of a m essage cannot be reached within the validity pe riod, the m essage is removed from the text message service ce nter . Note that the system must support this fe atu re . M axi mum t ime is the m aximum amount of time allowed by th e sy s t em . ⢠Mes sage sent as â The options are Te x t , Fax , P aging , and E-mail . For further information, contact your service provider . Note: C hange th is option only if you are sure th at your service cente r is able to convert te xt messages into these oth er form ats. ⢠Preferred connection â Y ou can send tex t messages by the normal GSM system or by GPRS, if supported by the system. See â GPRS P acket data â on p. 38. ⢠Reply via s ame ctr . (system se rvice) â By setting this option to Ye s , if the recipient replies to your message, the return message is sent using the same text message s ervice center number . Note that this may not work betw een all oper ators. ADD A NEW TEXT ME SSAGE C ENTER 1 Open Message center s and select Op ti ons â New msg. center . 2 Press , w rite a name for the service center and press OK . 3 Press , press and write the number of the text messa ge service center ( Must be defi ned ). Press OK . Y ou need the message center number to sen d text and picture messa ges. Y ou can get th e number from your serv ice provider . T o use the n ew settings, go back to the settings vi ew and scroll to Msg. center in use . Press and s elect the new s ervice center .
[ 101 ] Messaging Settings for multi media messages Go to Messag ing and select Op ti ons â Settings â Multimedia message to open the f ollowing list of settings: ⢠Preferred connection ( Mu st b e de fin ed )â Select wh ich access point is u sed as the preferred connection for th e multimedia messa ge center . See â Settin gs for multimedia messages â on p. 1 0 1. Note: If you receive multimedia messa ge settings in a smart message and save the m, the re ceived setti ngs are automa tically us ed for the P refe rred c onne cti on. S ee â Receive smart me ssages â on p. 90. ⢠Secondary conn.â Select which access point is used a s the secondary connection for th e multimedia message cente r . Note: Both Prefe rred c onne ction an d S eco n dar y c onn . mu st hav e the same Homepage sett in g poin ting to t he sam e m ultime dia se rvic e c en ter . On ly the da ta c on nect ion is di ffer ent. Example: If your pr eferred conne ction uses a packet data connection, you may want to us e high -spee d data or data cal l for the secon dary c onnectio n. This way you ar e able to s end and receive multimedia me ssages even when you are n ot in a system that supports packet data. For availability of and subscription to data services, ple ase contact your service provider . See also â Data connections and a ccess points â on p. 36. ⢠Multimedia receptionâ Select: ⢠Only in home net. â if you want to receive multimedia messages only when you are in your h ome syste m. When you are outside your home system, m ultimedia message reception is turned off. ⢠Alw ays o n â if you wan t to receive multime dia messages always . ⢠Off â if you do n ot want t o receive multimedia messages or advertisements at all. Note: When you a re ou tside your h ome s yste m, sendi ng a nd recei ving multi media mes sages ma y cost more. If th e sett ings Only in home net. or Always on have bee n selected, your phone can make an active data call or GPRS con nection without your knowle dge.
[ 1 0 2 ] ⢠On receiving msg. â Select: ⢠Retr . immediately â if you want the phone to retrieve multimedia message s instan tly . If there are message s with Defe rred status, they will be retrieved as well. ⢠Defe r re trieva l â if you wan t the multimedia m essaging center to save the m essage to be retrieved later . T o retr ieve the messa ge later , set On receiving m sg. to Retr . immediately . ⢠Reject me ssag eâ if you want to reject multimedia messages. The multimedia m essaging center will delete the messages. ⢠Allow anon. messa ges â Sel ec t No , if yo u want to rej ect mes sage s coming from an anonymous sender . ⢠Receive adverts â Define w hether you want to receive multimedia message adve rtiseme nts or not. ⢠Reportsâ Set to Ye s , if you wan t the st atus of th e sent message ( P ending , F ailed , Delivered ) to be shown in the Log. When set to No , only the status Deli vered is shown in the Log. See â Lo gâ Call log and general l og â on p. 26. ⢠Deny report s ending â C hoose Ye s , if you do not want your phone to send delivery report s of received multimedia messages. ⢠Message validityâ If the recipient of a message can not be reached with in the vali dit y peri od, th e messag e is remove d from th e mu ltimedia messaging center . Note th at the system m ust support this feature. Maxi mum time is the maxim um amount of time allow ed by the system . ⢠Image s ize â Define the size of th e image in a multimedia me ssage. The options are: Sm all (max. of 160* 120 pi xels) and La r ge (max. 640* 48 0 pi xels ). ⢠Speakerâ Choo s e Loud spea ker o r Norma l , if you w ant the sounds in a multimedia message to be played through the loudspeaker or th e earpie ce. For m ore infor mation , see â Loudsp eake r â on p. 19 .
[ 1 03 ] Messaging Settings for e-mail Go to Messagin g and select Option s â Settings â E-mail . Optio ns when e diting e-mail setti ngs a re: Editing options , Ne w mailbox , Delete , Call , a nd Ex i t . Open Mailbox in use to sel ect which mailbox you w ant to u se. Settings for Mailboxes Select Mailboxe s to open a list of mailboxes that h ave been defi ned. If n o mailboxes have been defined, you will be prompted to do so. The following list of settings is shown: ⢠Mailbox nameâ Write a descriptive n ame for the m ailbox. ⢠Access point in use ( Must b e de fin ed ) â The Internet Access P oint (IAP) used f or the mailbox. Choose an IAP f rom the list. For more information on how to create an IAP , see also â Connection settings â on p. 36. ⢠My mail address ( Mus t be defi n ed)â Write the e- mail address given to you by your s ervice provider . The address must con tain t he @ symbol. Replies to you r messages a re sent to th is address . ⢠Outgoing mail server ( Must be defined ) â Write the IP address or host name of the c om puter th at se nds yo u r e-m ai l. ⢠Send message â Defin e how e-mail is sen t from your phone . Immedi ately â A connection to the mailbox is started immediately after you have selected Se nd . Dur i ng ne xt con n. â E-mail is sent when you c onnec t to your re mote mailbox the next time. ⢠Send copy to self â Se le ct Ye s to save a copy of the e-mail to your remote mailbox and to the a ddress defined in My mail a ddress . ⢠Inc lude si gn atur e â Select Ye s if you want to attach a signature to your e-mail messa ges and to start to write or edit a signature text. ⢠User n ameâ Write yo ur user name, given to you by your service provider .
[ 1 04 ] ⢠Pa s s w o r d â Write your password. If you leave this field blank, you will be pr ompted for the password when you try to conn ect to your remote mailbox. ⢠Incoming mail se rver ( Mu st be defi n ed) â The IP address or h ost name of the com puter th at receives your e-mail. ⢠Mailbox typeâ Defines the e- mail protocol your remote mailbox service provider recommends. The options ar e POP3 and IM AP4 . Note: This setting ca n be selected only on ce and cannot be changed if you have saved or exited from the m ailbox settings. ⢠Securityâ Used wi th the POP3, I MAP4, and SMTP protocols to secure the connection to the remote m ailbox. ⢠APOP secure login â Used with the POP3 protocol to e ncrypt the sending of passwords to the remote e-ma il server . Not shown if IMAP4 is selected f or Mailbox type: . ⢠Retrieve atta chment (not shown if the e-mail prot ocol is set to POP3) â T o retrieve e-mail with or without attach ments. ⢠Retrieve header s â T o limit the n umber of e-mail h eaders you want to retrieve to your phone. The options are All and User def in ed . Used with IMAP4 protocol only . Settings for service messages When yo u g o to Messaging an d select Options â Settingsâ Se r v ic e message , the followin g list of settings opens: ⢠Service messages â Choose whether or not you want to re ceive se rvi ce me ss a ges . ⢠Authentic. need edâ Choose if you want to receive service messages only from a uthorized sources.
[ 1 05 ] Messaging Settings for Cell broadc ast Check with your ser vice provider to see if Cell broadcast is available and what topics a nd numbers are available. Go to Messagin g â Options â Settings â C ell broadcast to change the setti ngs: Reception â On or Off . ⢠Lang ua ge â All allows you to r eceive cell broadcast messages in every possible language. Selected allows you to ch oose in which lang uages you wish to receive cell broadcast me ssages. If the language you want could not be f ound in the list, sele ct Oth er . ⢠T opic detection â If you receive a messa ge that does not belong to any of the existing topics, Topic d etect io n â On allows you to save the topic number automatically . The topic number is saved to the topic list and shown without a name. Ch oose Off if you do not want to save new topic numbers automatically . Settings for the S ent folder Go to Messa ging and select Opti ons â Settingsâ Sent folder to open the following list of settings: ⢠Save sent me ssage s â Choose if you wan t to save a copy of every text message, multimedia message, or e-mail that you have sent to the Sent items folder . ⢠No. of saved msgs .â D efine how many sent messages will be saved to the Sent items f older at a tim e. The default limit is 20 messa ges. When the limit is reached, the oldest message is deleted. ⢠Me mor y i n u s e â Define memory store. Choices are phoneâ s me mo ry or memory card, if one is use d.
[ 1 06 ] 1 0 Profil es Go to Menu â Profiles . In Profile s, you can adjust and customize the phone tones for di fferent e vents, enviro nments, or caller groups. There are f ive preset profiles: Normal , S ilent , Meeting , Outdoor , and Pa g e r , which you can customize to meet your needs. Y ou can see t he cu rrently sel ected p rofile at the top of the di spla y in the stan dby mo de. If the No rm a l prof i le is in use , on ly th e cu rr en t da te is shown. The tones can be default r inging tones, tone s c r e a t e d in C o mp o se r , t o ne s r e ceived in a message, or transfer red to your phon e by infrared, PC, or Bl ue t o o t h connection and then saved to your phone. ⢠CHANGE THE PROFILE 1 Go to Menu â Pr ofiles . A lis t of profiles opens. 2 In the Profiles list, scroll to a profile and select Options â A ctivate . Shortcut: T o change the profile, press in the stan dby mode. Scroll to the profile you wan t to a ctivate and press OK . ⢠CUSTOMIZE PR OFILES 1 To modify a profile, scroll to the profi le in the Pr ofiles list and select Opti on s â Customiz e . A list of pr ofil e settin gs open s.
[ 1 0 7 ] Profiles 2 Scroll to th e setting you want to change and press to open the following choices: ⢠Ringing tone â T o set th e ringing tone f or voice calls, choose a ringing tone from the list. Whe n you scroll through th e list, you can stop on a ton e to listen to it before you make your selection. Press any key to s top the sou nd. If a memory ca rd is u sed, tones stored on it have the icon next to th e tone na me. Ringing tones use s hared m emo ry . See â Sha red memo ry â on p. 20. Note: Y ou can change ringing tones in two places: Prof iles or Co n ta c t s . S e e â Add a ringing tone for a contact card or grou p â on p. 56. ⢠Ringing op tionsâ When Ascending is selected, the ringing volume starts from level one and in creases level by le vel to the set volume level. ⢠Ringing volumeâ To set the volume le vel for the r inging and message alert tones. ⢠Message alert tone â T o set the ton e for messages. ⢠Vibrating aler t â To set the phone to vibrate at in coming voice calls a nd mess ages. ⢠Ke y p a d to n e s â To set the volume level for keypad tones. ⢠War ni n g t o n e s â T he phone sounds a war ning tone, f or ex ample, when the battery is running out of pow er . ⢠Ale rt for â To set the pho ne to ring only upon calls from phone numbers that belong to a selected contact group. Ph one calls coming from people outside the selected gr oup will have a silent alert. The ch oices are All calls / (list of contact groups, if you have created them) . See â Create contact groups â on p. 57. ⢠Profile nameâ Y ou can rename a profile with any name you want. The Normal profile cannot be renamed.
[ 1 08 ] 11 F a v o r i t e s Go to Menu â Fa v o r i t e s . Y ou can use F avorites to store shortcuts, links to your favorite photos, video clip s, notes, Recorder sound files, br owser bookmarks, and saved browser pa ges. The default s hortcuts are: â opens the Notes editor â opens the Calendar with the cu rrent date selected â open s the M essaging Inbox Optio ns in the Favorit es mai n view a re: Open , Edit shortcut n ame , Delete shortcut , Move , List view / Grid view , Help , and Exit . ⢠ADD SHORTCUTS Shortcuts can be added only f rom the individual applica tions. Not a ll applications have this f unctionality . 1 Open the application and scroll to the item that you want to add as a short cut to F avori tes. 2 Select Op ti ons â A dd to F avorites and press OK . Note: A shortcut in Fa vorites is au tomatically u pdated if you move the item it is pointing to, for e xample, from on e folder to another .
[ 1 09 ] Fa v o r i t e s ⢠SH ORTC U T OPT I ON S ⢠T o op en a s hor tcu t , scroll to the icon and press . T he file is opened in the cor responding application. ⢠T o delete a shor tcut , scroll to the shortcut you want to r emove and se lec t Opti ons â Delete s hor tcut . Removing a shortcut does not affect the f ile it is r eferring to. ⢠T o ch ange the short cut heading , se le ct Options â Edit sh ortcut nam e . Write the new name. This change a ffects only the s hortcut, not the file or item the sho rtcut refers to .
[ 1 1 0 ] 1 2 C a l e n d a r a n d T o - d o Go to Menu â Calendar . Note: Y our phone m ust be switched on to use this function. Do n ot switch the phone on wh en wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause inter ference or danger . Optio ns when edi ti ng a calendar entry a re: Delete , Send , Help , an d Ex it . In Calen dar , you can keep track o f your appointment s, meetings, bi rthdays, anniversaries, and other events. Y ou can also set a calendar alarm to remind you o f upcomi ng event s. Cal e n dar uses s ha re d m em ory . Se e â Shared memor yâ on p. 20. ⢠CREATE CA LENDAR E NTRIES 1 Select Op ti ons â New en try and select from the following options: ⢠Me eti ng to r emi nd you of a n appointment that has a specific date and time. ⢠Me mo to wr ite a general entry for a d ay . ⢠Anniversary to remin d you of birthday s or specia l dates. An niversary entries are repeated every year . 2 Fill in the fiel d s (see â C alend ar entry f ields â o n p. 1 1 1). U se the Scr oll key to m ove between fields. Press the # key to change betw een up per and lower case . 3 T o save the entry , press Done . Edit calendar entries 1 In the Day view , scroll to the en try and press to open it. 2 Edit the en try fields and pr ess Don e .
[ 111 ] Calendar and To-do ⢠If you are editing a repeated en try , choose how you w ant the changes to take effect: All occurrences â all repeated entries are ch anged / This entry only â only the current entry will be changed. Delete c alendar entries ⢠In the Day view , scroll to the entry you want to delete and select Opti on s â Del ete or press . Press OK to confirm. ⢠If you are deleting a repeated entry , choose how you w ant the change to take effect: All occurrences â all repeated entries are deleted / Th is entry only â o nly the cur rent entry will be deleted. Example: Y our weekly class has been cancelled. Y ou ha ve set the calendar to remi nd you eve ry week. Choose This en try only and the calendar will remin d you again next w eek. Calendar entry fields ⢠Subject / Occasionâ Write a description of the event. ⢠Locationâ The place of a meeting, optional. ⢠Start time , En d t im e , Start date , and End date . ⢠Ala r mâ Press to activate the fie lds for Alarm t ime and Ala rm d a te . ⢠Repeat â Press to change th e entry to be repeating. Shown with in the Da y view . Example: The repea t fun cti on is hand y if yo u hav e a rec urr ing ev ent, a weekly class, a biweekly meeting, or a daily routine you need to remember . ⢠Repeat unti l â Y ou can set an e nding date for the repeated entry , for example , the endi ng date of a weekly cou rse you are takin g. This opti on is shown only if you have selected to re peat the event. ⢠Synchronizationâ If you select Pri vat e , after sync hronization the calendar entry can be see n only by you an d it will not be shown to others with online a ccess to view the ca lendar . Th is is us eful w hen, for example , you synchron ize your calendar on a compatibl e compu ter a t work. If you select Pub lic , the calendar entry is shown to others who have access to view your calendar online. If you select None , th e calendar entry will n ot be copied to your PC when you synchronize your calendar .
[ 1 12 ] Cale nda r v iews MONTH VIEW In t he Mo nth vie w , one row e qua ls o ne week . The curre nt dat e is under l ine d. Dates that have calendar entries are marked w ith a small triangle at the right bottom corner . There is a frame around the currently selected date. ⢠T o open the Day vie w , scr oll to the date you want to open and press . ⢠T o go to a cer tain date, select Op tion s â Go to date . Write the date and press OK . If you press the # ke y in Month, Week, or Day views, the current date is automatically highlighted. Cale ndar ent r y ic o ns in Day a nd Week views Synchronization icons in Mont h view Me eti ng Pr iv at e Memo Public Anniversary None The day h as more than on e view
[ 1 13 ] Calendar and To-do W EEK VIEW In the Week view , the calen dar en tries for the sele cted wee k are shown in seven day boxes. T he current day of the week is underlined. Memos and Annive rsaries are pl aced before 8 A M. Meeting entr ies are marked with colored bar s according t o starting a nd ending tim es. T o view or edit an entry , scroll to the cell that h as an entr y and press to open the Day vie w , then scroll to the entry and pr ess to open it. Opti ons in the dif fe ren t ca lend ar views are: Open , Ne w entr y , W eek v iew / Mon t h vie w , Delete , Go to date , Sen d , Settings , Help , an d Ex it . DAY VI EW In the Day view , you can see the calendar entries for the sele cted day . The entries are gr ouped according to their starting time. Memos and Anniversaries are placed before 8 AM. ⢠T o open an en try for editing, scroll to it and press . ⢠Press to go to the next day or press to go to the previous day . SETTI NGS FOR CAL ENDAR VIEWS Select Op ti ons â Settin gs and select: ⢠Default view â To select the view that is sh own first wh en you open Calen dar . ⢠W eek starts on â T o chan ge the starting da y of the week. ⢠W eek view title â To change th e title of the W eek view to be the we ek number or th e week dates. Shortcut: To create a calendar entry , press an y key ( 1 â 0 ) in any c alendar view . A Meeting entr y is opened an d the charact ers you keye d in are added to the Subject f ield. ⢠SET CALENDAR ALARMS 1 Create a new Meeting or A nniversary entry , or open a previously created entry . 2 Scroll to Alarm and press to ope n the Al ar m ti m e and Alar m date fields.
[ 1 14 ] 3 Set the alarm time and date. 4 Press Don e . An alarm indi cator is shown next to the e ntry in the Day view . Stop a calendar alar m The alarm duration is one minute. Whe n the alarm time expires, press Stop to en d the calen dar alarm. If you press any other key , the alarm is set to snooze. ⢠SEND CALEN DAR ENTRIES In the Day view , scroll to the en try you wan t to send and select Option s â Send . Then select th e me thod, the choi ces ar e: Via text me ssage , Via e-mai l (available only if the cor rect e-mail settin gs are in place), Via Bluetooth , or Via infrared . For furth e r infor ma tion, see the â Messagin g â on p. 73, â Send and re ceive data u sing in fraredâ on p. 146, and â Send data using Blue tooth con nec tion â on p. 142. ⢠T O-DO Go to Menu â To -d o . In To-do you can keep a list of tasks that you need to do. The T o-do list uses shared memory . See â Shared memory â on p. 20. 1 T o star t t o write a t o-do note, press any key ( 1 â 9 ). The editor open s and the cursor blinks after the letter s you have ke yed in. 2 Write the task in the Su bject field. Pr ess th e * key to add s pecial char acters. ⢠T o set the due date, scroll to the Due date field and key in a date. ⢠T o set a prior ity , scroll to the Priority field and press .
[ 1 15 ] Calendar and To-do 3 To save the to- do note, press Done . Note: If you remove all characters and press Don e , the previously saved note will be delete d. ⢠To op en a t o -d o no te , scroll to it an d press . ⢠To delet e a to-d o note , scroll to it and select Opti on s â Delete or pr ess . ⢠T o mark a to-do not e as completed , scroll to it an d select Opti on s â Mark as don e . ⢠T o restor e a to-d o note , select Op ti ons â Mark as not done . ⢠IMPORT DATA FROM OTHER NOKIA PHONES Y ou can move calendar , contacts, and to-do data from many diff erent Nokia phones to your Nokia 3620 or Nokia 3 660 us ing the PC Suite Data Import application. Instructions f or using the application can be found in the PC Su ite onlin e help on th e CD -ROM. Prior it y i cons High Low no icon Normal Status i cons task completed task not completed
[ 1 16 ] 13 Extra s ⢠CALCULATOR Note: Y our phone m ust be switched on to use this function. Do n ot switch the phone on wh en wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause inter ference or danger . Go to Menu â Extr a s â Calculator . Opti ons in Calc ula tor are: Last re sult , Memory , Cle ar sc reen , Help , and Exit . 1 Enter the f irst number of your calcul ation. Press to erase an y m ist a ke s. 2 Scroll to a function a nd press to select it. Use to add, to su btract, to multiply , or to divide. 3 Enter the second number . 4 T o execute the calculation, scroll to and press . Note: The Calcul ator has limited accuracy a nd rounding errors may occur , especially in long division s. ⢠T o add a decimal, press the # key . ⢠Press a nd hold to clear the result of the previous calculation. ⢠Use and to view previous calculations and m ove in the sheet. ⢠Select to save a number to the memory , indicated by M . T o retrieve the number from th e mem ory , select . ⢠T o retrieve the result of the last calculation, select Opti on s â L ast re sul t . Press the # key repe atedly to scroll the functio ns. Y ou can see the selection change between th e functions.
[ 1 17 ] Ex tra s ⢠COMPOSER Go to Men u â Extras â Composer . Optio ns in the C ompos er main vi ew are: Open , New tone , Delete , Mark/Unmark , Rename , Du plicate , Hel p , a nd Exit . Composer allows you t o cr eate your own, cu stomized ringing t ones. Note that it is not possible to edit a default r inging tone. 1 Selec t Options â New t on e to ope n the edito r and t o start co mposing. ⢠Use the keys to add notes and rests. See the f ollowing table. Or , se lec t Options â Insert symbol to open a list of n otes and rests. The defau lt du rat ion for a no t e is 1/4 . ⢠T o list en to the tone , press or select Options â Play . The pl a yba ck is always started from the beginning of the tone. T o stop playin g, press Stop . ⢠T o adjust the volume while a tone is playing, press to increase or press to decrease it. Or , select Opti ons â V olume before you start to play the tone. ⢠T o adju st the tempo, select Opti ons â Te m p o . To increase or decrease the te mpo gradually , pr ess and hold or , respectively . T empo is measured in be ats per minute. The maximum is 250 beats, the default te mpo for a new tone is 160 beats , and th e minimum is 50 beats. ⢠T o select many notes or rests at t he same time, press and hold and press and hold or at the same time. ⢠T o apply different playing styles, select two or more notes and then select Opti on s â Style â Legato (notes are played in a smooth and even manner) or select one or m ore notes and then se lec t Staccato (notes are played separately to pr oduce short sh arp sou nd s ). ⢠T o move note(s) up or down on the st aff by a h alf step, scr oll to the note an d press or . ⢠For ex ampl e, pr ess and hol d toge ther with t h e 1 key to produce C #.
[ 1 18 ] 2 Select Ba c k to save. Op ti on s wh en com po si ng a r e: Play , Insert symbol , Style , Te m p o , V olume , Help and Ex i t . ⢠CON VER TER In Co nv erte r , yo u ca n c onver t m eas ures such a s Len gth fr om one unit ( Ya r d s ) to another ( Me ters ). Go to Menu â Extra s â Converte r . Optio ns in C onverter are: Select unit / Change cu rrency , Conversi on type , Curre ncy ra tes , He lp , an d Exit . Note: The Converter has limited ac curacy and rounding errors may occur . Key Note Key and function 1 C The 8 key shortens the duration of the sele cted note( s)/rest( s) in step s. 2 D The 9 key lengthens the du ration of the s elected note( s)/rest( s) in step s. 3 E The 0 key inse rts a rest. 4 F Press the * key to open a list of n otes and rests. 5 G The # key s witch es octaves, a ll selected note(s) or rest(s) is/are moved to the next octave. 6 A deletes selected note(s). 7 B A long press o f keys 0 â 7 produce s a lengt hen ed ( d o tt e d ) note or rest or shortens a lengthene d note.
[ 1 19 ] Ex tra s Convert u nits 1 Scroll to the Ty p e field and pr ess to open a list of mea sures. Scroll to the m easure you want to use and press OK . 2 Scroll to th e first Unit field and pr ess to open a list of av ailable units. Select the unit fro m which yo u want to conver t and p ress OK . Scroll to the n ext Unit field and se lect the unit to whic h y ou wa nt to convert. 3 Scroll to th e first Am oun t field and key in the value you want to convert. Th e other Amou nt field changes automatically to show the converted value. Press the # key to add a decimal and press th e * ke y for the , - (for temp erature ), and E (exponen t) symbols. Note: The conversion order changes if you write a value in the second Amou nt fiel d. The result is shown in the first Amount field. T o rename a currency , go to the Currency rates view , scroll to the currency , and select Op tion s â R ename cu rren cy . Set a base curr ency and exchange rates Before you can make currency conversions, you need to choose a base curr ency (usually your domestic currency) an d add exch ange rates. Note: The rate of the ba se currency is a lways 1. T he base currency determ ines the conversion rates of the othe r curren cies. Example: If y ou s et th e Uni ted Stat es D olla r (U SD ) as the ba se c u rren cy , a Euro is 1. 00. Thus, you wou ld w rite 1.00 as the exchange rate for the Euro. 1 Select Cur rency as the measure type and select Op ti ons â Cu rren cy rate s . A list of currencies open s and you can see the current base currency at the top. 2 To cha nge the base currency , scroll to th e currency (usually your domestic c urrency), and s elect Opti ons â Set as base curr . . Impo rtant : When you change the ba se currency , a ll previously s et ex ch a ng e rates are s et to 0 and yo u need t o key in ne w rates.
[ 120 ] 3 Add exch ange rates (see example), scroll to the currency , and key in a new rate, th at is, h ow many u nits of the cu rrency equal one unit of the bas e curr ency you have selected. 4 After you have inserted all the needed exchange rates, you can make currency conversions . See â Con ve rt un i ts â on p. 1 19. ⢠NOTE S Go to Menu â Extr a s â Notes . Y ou can link notes to Fa vorites and sen d them to other devices. Plain text files (TXT format) you receive can be saved to No tes. Press the 1 â 0 keys to start to write. Press to clear letters. Press Done to save. ⢠CL OCK Go to Menu â Extr a s â Clock . Op ti on s in C l ock are: Set alarm , Reset alarm , Remo ve alarm , Settin gs , Help , and Exit . Change clock settings T o change the tim e or date, select Option s â Settings in Clock. T o chan ge the clo ck shown in the stan dby mode, scroll down in the Date and time settin gs an d s e le ct Cl ock ty pe â Analog or Digital . Set an alarm 1 To set a new a lar m , s elec t Op ti ons â Set alarm . 2 Enter the ala rm time and press OK . When the al arm is active , the indicator is sh own. The alarm clock works even if the phon e is switched off. T o cancel an alarm, go to clock and select Op tion s â Remove alarm . T urn off an alarm ⢠Press Stop to turn off the alarm.
[ 12 1 ] Ex tra s ⢠When the alar m tone sounds, pre ss any key or Snooze to s top the alarm for f ive minutes, after wh ich it will resume. Y ou can do this a max imu m of five time s. If the alarm tim e is reached wh ile the phone is switched of f, the ph one switches itself on and starts sounding the alarm tone. If you press Stop , the phone asks wh ether you want to activate the phone for calls. Press No to switch off the phon e or Ye s to make and receive calls. Note: Do no t pre ss Ye s when wirele ss phone use is pr ohibited or when it may cause interfer ence or dange r . ⢠REC ORDE R Go to Menu â Extr a s â Recor der . Optio ns in R ecorder ar e: Open , Record sound clip , Delete , Mo ve to phone me m , Move to m em. card , Ren ame sound clip , Send , Add t o Fa vorites , Hel p , an d Exit . The voice recorder allows you to record t elepho ne conversations and voice memos. If you are re cording a telephone conversation, both pa rties will hear a tone every five seconds during recording. Note: When using th is feature, obey all laws and respect the privacy and legitimate rights of oth ers. Select Opti ons â Record sound clip and sc roll to a function and pres s to select it. U se: â to re c ord, â to p a u s e , â to stop, â to fas t f orw ar d, â t o fa st rew ind, or â to play an opened sound file. Note: Recorder cannot be used when a data call or a GPRS connection is active. ⢠MEMORY CARD Options in the memory card are: Backup phone mem. , Restore from car d , Format m em. card , M emo ry car d n ame , Set password , Change p assword , Remove pas sword , Unlock memory card , Me m. in use , Help and Ex i t .
[ 122 ] If you have a memor y card you can use it to stor e your multimedia files like video clips and sound files, photos, messaging information, and to backup information from your ph one â s memory . Import ant: K eep all m emory c ards out of the reach o f small ch ildren . Note: Details of how you can use the m emory card w ith other features and applications of the Nokia 3620 and Nokia 3660 are given in the sections describing these features and applications. Insert the memory card 1 Make sure the phone is switched off. 2 With the b ack of t he p hone fac ing y ou, slide open the cover an d re move the battery , see Quick start â In sert th e SI M card â for in structions on removing the cover . 3 P osition the memory ca rd in its slot. Make sure that the g old contacts of the card are facing down. 4 Slide the silver c atch over the memory car d to secure it. 5 When you h ave secured the card in place, replace the battery , then replace the cover by slidin g it back into place.
[ 123 ] Ex tra s Import ant: If you ar e inst al ling a n appli cation to the me mory card and nee d to rebo ot the phon e, do no t remove the card u ntil th e reb oot is compl ete. O therw ise th e app licati on files may be lost. Format the memory ca rd Y ou mu st form at th e mem ory car d befor e you c an use it for th e first time. Select Op ti ons â Format mem. card . Y ou w ill be asked to con firm your r equest and once you confirm, form atting sta rts. Back up and r estore phone me mory Y ou can backup in formation from your phone â s memor y to the memory card. Select Optio ns â Backup ph one mem. Y ou can restore inf ormation from the m emory card to the phone â s me mor y . Se le ct Opt ion s â Restore from card . Memory c ard password Y ou can set a password to protect your memory card against unauthorized use. Note: Th e password is s tored in your phone an d you do not h ave to enter it again while you ar e using the m emory card on t he same phone. If you w ant to us e the mem ory card on anoth er phone, you will be asked for the password. T o set up, ch ange, or remove your passw ord select Options â Se t pa s sw or d , Change p assword , or Remo ve pas sword . The password can be up to eight ch aract ers long. Import ant: Once the passw ord is re moved , the memo ry card can be used on any phon e without a pa ssword.
[ 124 ] UNLOC K A MEMORY C ARD If you insert another password protected memory card in your phone, you will be pr ompted to e nter the password of the card. To unlock the card, se lec t Opti ons â Unlock memory card . Check m emory consumption Using the Me m. in use option, y ou can ch eck the me mory consumption of different data groups and the available memory for installing new applications or s oftware on your memory ca rd. Select Op ti ons â Mem. in us e .
[ 125 ] Services (XHTML) 14 Services (XHTML) Go to Menu â Serv ices or press a nd hold the 0 key in t h e standby m ode. The 0 key i s marked with an internet symbol so that you can easily locate it an d use it to connect to th e internet. Note: Y our phone m ust be switched on to use this function. Do n ot switch the phone on wh en wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause inter ference or danger . XHTML browser supports pages written in th e Hypertext Markup Language (XHTML) and the Wireless Mar kup Language (WM L). V arious service providers on the Internet maintain pages specifically designed for mobile phones, offering services such as news, we ather reports, banking, trave l information, entertainment, and ga mes. With the XHTML browser you can view these services as WAP pages written in WML, XHTML pa ges written in XHTML, or a m ixture of both. Note: Check the availability of services, pricing, and tariffs with your network ope rator and/or service provider . Service providers will also give you instructions on how to use t hei r s ervi ces. ⢠BASIC STEPS FOR AC CESSIN G THE WEB ⢠Save the settings that are needed to access the web service that you want to use. See â Phone browser service settings â on p. 126. ⢠Connect to th e service. See â Make a connection â on p. 1 26. ⢠Start browsing the web pages. Se e â Brow sing â on p. 128. ⢠Disconnect from the service. â End a con nectionâ on p. 13 1.
[ 126 ] ⢠PHONE B ROWSER SER VICE SE TTINGS Receiving settings in a smart message Settings may be available, for example, on the site of a network operator or service pr ovider . Y ou may receive service settings in a special text m essage called a â sm art me ssa ge â from th e network operator or service provider that offers th e service. See â Receive smart messages â on p. 90 . For more information, contact your network ope rator or service pr ovider . K e y in the setting s manually Follow the instructions given to you b y your service pr ovider . 1 Go to Setti ngs â Connection settings â A ccess points and define the settings for an access point. See â C onnection settings â on p. 36 . 2 Go to Service s â O ptions â Add bookmark . Wr ite a n ame for th e bookmark and the a ddress of the browser page defined for the current access point. Make a connection T o access t he Bo ok mar ks view whil e b rowsin g , pr ess an d hold do wn . T o return to the browser view again, select Opti ons â Back to page. Once you have stored all the required connection settings, you can access browser pages. There are three dif ferent ways to access browser pages: ⢠Select the homepage ( ) of your ser vice p rovider . ⢠Select a bookmar k from the Bookmarks view . ⢠Press the 2 â 9 keys to s tart to write the address of a browser service. The Go to field at the bottom of the display is immediately activated and you can continue w riting the addr ess there. After you have sel ected a page or written the address, pr ess to start to download th e page. See also â Data connection indicator s â on p. 14.
[ 127 ] Services (XHTML) Connection security If the secu rity indicator is displayed during a connection, the data transmission between the phon e and th e browser gateway or server is encrypted and secure. Note: The secur ity icon does not indicat e th at data transmissio n betw een the gatewa y and the cont ent serve r (the place w here the requested re source is stored) is secure. It is up to the serv ice provider to s ec ure data transmission between the gateway a nd th e co n ten t s erv er . View bookmarks Options i n the B ookmarks view (selection on a bookmark or folder) are: Open , Downlo ad , Back to page , Send , Go to UR L address / Find bookmark , Add bookmark , Edit , Delete , Read service msgs. , Disconnect, Mo ve to f older , New folder , Mar k/ U nma rk, Ren ame , Clear cache , Details , A dd to Favorites , Settings , Help , and Exit . A bookm ark consists of an Internet address (mandator y), bookmark title, W AP access point, and if the service requires, a user nam e an d pa ssw o rd. Note: Y our phone may have some pre-installed bookmarks for sites not affiliated with Nokia. Nokia does no t warrant or endorse these sites. If you choose to access the m, you should tak e the same precautions, for secu rity or content, as you would with any site. In the Bookmarks view , you can see bookmarks pointing to different kinds of web pages. Bookmarks are in dicated by th e following icon s: â T he starting page defined for th e browser access point. If you use another web access point for browsing, the starting page is changed acc ordingly . â The last visited p age. When the phone is disconnected from th e service, the address of the las t visited page is kept in memory until a new page is visi ted during th e next con nection.
[ 128 ] â A bookm ark showing the title. When you scroll th rough bookmarks, you can see th e address of the highlighted bookmark in the Go to field at the bottom of th e display . See the bookmarks f igure in â Ke ys and commands used in browsin g â on p. 128. Optio ns when brow sing a re: Ope n , Service o ptions , Bookmarks , Hist ory , Go to URL address , View images , Read service msgs. , Save as bookm ark , Send bookmark , Reload , Dis connect , Show images , Clear cache , Save page , Find , Details , Session , Sec u ri t y , Settings , Help , an d Exit . Add bookmarks 1 In the Bookmarks view , select Op tion s â Add bookm ark . 2 Start to f ill in the f ields (see the bookmarks figure in â Ke y s a n d commands u sed in browsing â on p. 128). O nly the address m ust be defined. The default access point is assigned to the bookm ark if no other one is selected. Press to enter specia l characters su ch as / , . , : , an d @ . Press to clear charac ters. 3 Select Op ti ons â Save to save the bookm ark. Send bookmarks T o send a bookmark, scroll to it and select Option s â Send â Via text message . ⢠BROW SING On a browser page, new lin ks appear underlined in blue and pr eviously visited links in purple. I mages that act as links have a blu e border around them. K e ys and commands u sed in browsing ⢠T o open a link, press .
[ 129 ] Services (XHTML) ⢠T o scr oll t h e vi e w , u se the Scroll ke y . ⢠T o enter lette rs and numbers in a field, pr es s the 0 âÂÂ9 keys. Press the * key to enter s pecial ch aracters s uch as / , . , : , an d @ . Press to clear chara cters. (See â W rite textâ on page 7 6.) ⢠T o go to the previous page while browsing, press Back . If Back is not available, select Opti ons â His tory to view a chronologica l list of th e pages you have visited during a browsing session. The h istory list is cleare d each time a session is closed. ⢠T o check boxe s and make selection s, press . ⢠T o retri eve th e l at est co nten t from th e se rver , sel ect Options â Re load . ⢠T o open a sublist of commands or actions f or the curr ently open web page, select Op t io ns â Service options . ⢠Press to disconnect from a w eb service and to qu it browsing. VIEWING NEW SERVI CE MESSAGES WHILE B ROWSING T o download and view new service m essages while browsing: 1 Select Op ti ons â Read service msgs. (shown only if ther e are new m essa ges) . 2 Scroll to th e message and press to down load and open it. For mor e info rmation a bout s ervice me ssag es, see â Service messages â on p. 9 1. SAVING BOO KMARKS ⢠T o sa ve a bookmark wh ile browsing, select Op tion s â Save as bookmark . ⢠T o save a bookmark received in a smart message, open the message in the In box in Messaging and select Opti ons â Save to bookmarks . See also â Receive smart mes sages â on p. 90.
[ 130 ] ⢠VIEW SAVED PAGES Opti ons in th e Sa ved page s view ar e: Ope n , Back t o page , Rel oad , Re mo ve , Read service msgs. , Disconnect , Move to folder , Ne w folder , Mark/Unmark , Rena me , Cl e ar ca ch e , Details , Add to F avorites , Settings , Help , and Exit . If you r egularly browse pages containing information that doesn â t change very often, for example a train timetable, you can save and then browse them wh en offline. If you have a memory ca rd, you can sav e web pages on it instead of the ph one â s memor y . T o save a page, wh ile browsing select Opti on s â Save page . ⢠Saved web pages are in dicated by the icon. ⢠In the saved pages view you can also create f olders to store your saved web pages. Folders containing saved w eb pages are i ndicated by the icon. ⢠T o open the Saved pages view , pre ss in the Bookma rks view (see the saved pages figure on p. 1 30). In the Saved pages view , press to open a sa ved page. ⢠If you want to start a con nection to the web service and to retrieve the page again, s elect Options â Reload . Y ou can also ar rang e the pages into f olders. Note: The phone stays online after you r eload the pa ge. ⢠DOWNLOAD THROUGH T HE B ROWSER Y ou can download items s uch as rin ging tones, images, operator logos and video clips through the mobile browser . These items can be provided free or for a price. Once downloaded, items a re handled by the respective application s on your phone, for ex ample a downloaded photo will be saved in the Im ag es .
[ 13 1 ] Services (XHTML) Download directly from the web page T o download the item directly from a web page scroll to th e link and select Opti on s â Open . Purchase an item Digital Rig hts Manage ment (D RM) is a syste m f or prote cting the c opyrig ht of digital content that is distributed on line. Copyright protections ma y prevent some i mages, ringtones and other content from being copied, modified, tr ansferred or forwarded. T o do wn load the it em : ⢠Scroll to the lin k and select Options â Open . ⢠Select Buy if you want to buy the ite m. Check an item before downloading Y ou can s ee details about an item before you download it. Details about an item may inclu de the price, brief description and size. Note: Check with y our se rvice provide to see if th ey offer th is ser vice. ⢠Scroll to the lin k and select Opti on s â Open . Details about the item are displayed on your phone. ⢠If y ou wa nt to cont inue wi th the downloading, press Acce pt or if you want to cancel the dow nload, press Cancel . ⢠END A CONNECTION T o end a connection, select Op ti on s â Disconnect . Y ou can als o p res s and hold to quit browsing and to return to th e stan dby mode.
[ 132 ] Empty the cache The information or services you have accessed are stored in the cache memo ry of the pho ne. If you h ave tried to access or have accessed confidential information requiring passwords (f or example, your bank a ccount), empty the ca che of your ph one after each use. To empty the cache, select Op tion s â Clear cache . Note: A cache is a buffer memory that is used to store data tem porarily . ⢠BROW SER SETTINGS ⢠Default access pointâ If you want to chan ge the default access point, press to open a list of available access points. The cur rent default access point is highlighted. For more information, see â Connection settings â on p. 36. ⢠Show images â Ch oose if you want to view picture s when you are browsing. If you choose No , you can la ter load images during browsing by se lecting Op ti ons â Sho w images . ⢠Font sizeâ Y ou can choose f ive text size s in the browser: Smallest, Small, Normal, Large and Largest. ⢠Cookies â Allow / Reject . Y ou can en able or disable the receiving an d sending of cookies. ⢠Con firm touc h tones â Always / Fir st sen ding only . T he b rowser suppo rts functions you c an acc ess while browsing. Y ou can make a voice call while you are on a browser page, send touch tones while a voice call is in progress, and save in Contacts a name and phone number from a browser page. Choose whethe r you want to co nfirm befo re the ph one sen ds t ouch tone s dur ing a voi ce ca ll. ⢠T ext wrapping â Choose Off if you donâ t want the text in a paragraph to automatically wrap, or On if you do.
[ 133 ] Java ⢠Applications 15 Java ⢠Appl icat ions Note: Y our phone must be s witched on to u se this function. Do not s witch the phone on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may c ause interference or danger . Go to Menu â Applications . Optio ns in th e Appli cat io ns main vie w are: Ope n , Vie w details , Settings , Remo ve , Go to U RL address , Update , Help , a nd Exit . In the Applications m ain view you can ope n installed Java applications or remove them. In the Install view you can install new Java application s (file extensions .jad or .jar). Note: Y our phone suppor ts J2ME Java applica tions. Do not down load P ersonalJava applic ations to your phone as they ca nnot be installed . When you open Applications, you can see a list of Java a pplications that have been installed to your phone. Scroll to an application and select Opti on s â View details to view: ⢠Statusâ In stalled , Running , or Down loaded (shown only in Install view) ⢠Ve r s i o n â the application version number ⢠Supplierâ the supplier or man ufacturer of the application ⢠Sizeâ the size of the application f ile in kilobyte s ⢠Ty p e â a brief description of th e application ⢠URL â an address of an informat ion page on th e Internet ⢠Dataâ the siz e of application data such as high scores, in kilobytes T o start a data connection and to view extra information about the application, scroll to it and select Op tion s â G o to URL addre ss . T o start a data con nection and to check if there is an update available for the application, scr oll to it and select Opt ion s â Update . Applications uses shared memory . See â Share d me mor y â on p. 20.
[ 134 ] ⢠INSTALL A JAVA APPLICATION Opti ons in t he In stall vie w are : In stal l , View detail s , Delete , Help , and Exit . Installation files may be transferred to your phone from a compute r , downloaded during browsing, or sent to you in a multimedia mess age as an e-m ail at tachment u sing a B lueto oth co nnection or infrare d connec tion. If you are u sing PC Suite to tr ansfer the fil e, pl ace i t in t he c:\nokia\i nstal ls folder in your phone. Wa r n i n g : Only install sof tware from s ources that offer a dequate protection against viruses and other harmful software. 1 In the Applications main view , to vie w the installation pack ages, press to open the Downloaded view . Note: In th e Install view , you can only install Java software installation files with the extension . jad or .jar . 2 T o install an application, scroll to an installation file and select Opti on s â Install . Alternatively , search the phone memory for the installation file, select th e file, and press to start the in stallation. Example: If you have r ecei ved th e installati on file as an e -mai l attac hment, go to you r mailbox, open the e-mail, open the Attachments view , scroll to the installation file, and press to start the installation. Press Ye s to confirm the installation. The .jar f ile is required for installation. If it is m issing, the phone may as k you t o dow nload it. I f the re i s no acc ess poi nt de fin ed fo r Appl ic ation s, yo u will be asked to sel ect one. When y ou are dow nloadi ng th e JAR fil e, you may need to enter a user name and p assword to access t he server . Y ou obt ain these from the sup plier or manufactu re r of the appl ication. During installation, the phone checks the integrity of the package to be installed. The phone shows information about the ch ecks being c arried out, and you are given options wh ether to contin ue with or cancel the installation. On ce the ph one has checked the integrity of the s oftware package, the application is installed on your phone.
[ 135 ] Java ⢠Applications The phone infor ms you when installat ion is complete. To open the Java application after installation , you must go to the Application s main view . When you are br owsing WAP or browser pages, you can download an installation file and in stall it immediately . Note, howe ver , that the connection is left running in th e background during installation. OPENING A JAVA APPLICAT ION Scroll to an a pplication in the Applications m ain view and press to open it. UNINST ALLING A JAVA APPLICAT ION Select the application in the Applica tions main view a nd select Opti on s â Remove . ⢠JAVA APPLICATION SE TTINGS T o define a default access point for downloading missing application components, select Options â Setting s â Default acc ess point . For m ore information on creating access points, see the â Access points â on p. 38. Select an application a nd select Op tion s â Settings , and then select on e of the f ollowing: Access point â Select an access point to be used by the application for downloading extra data. Network conn ection â Some Jav a app lications may req uire a data co nnection to be made to a defined access poin t. If no access point h as been selected, you will be asked to select one. T he options are: ⢠Allowe d â The connect ion is crea ted imme diately wi thou t a notification . ⢠Ask fi rst â Y ou will be asked before the applica tion makes the connection. ⢠Not allowedâ Connections are not a llowed.
[ 136 ] 16 M anage r ⢠INSTALL APPLICATIONS AND SOFTWARE Note: Y ou r phone must be switched on to use th e functions in the T ools folder . Do not switch the ph one on when w ireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interferen ce or dange r . Go to Menu â T ools â Manag er . In Manager you can install new applications and software packages, and remove applications from your phone. Y ou can also check th e memory consumption. Optio ns in the M anager mai n view a re: View details , View cert ificate , Install , Remov e , View log , Send log , Memory de tails , Help , an d Ex it . When you o pen Manager , you can see a list o f: ⢠Installation packages th at have been saved to Ma nager . ⢠P artially installed applications (indicated by ). ⢠Fully installed application s that yo u can r emove (indicated by ). Note: In Manager , you can only use device software installation files with an .sis extension. T o inst al l Java ap pl icat io ns (f ile ext ens ion .jad or .j ar), go to Ap plic ati on s. F o r furt he r i nfo rma ti on, see â Java ⢠Applications â on p. 133. Scroll to an installation file and select Options â View det ails to view th e Name , V er sion , Ty p e , Size , Supp lier , an d Stat us of the software package. Scroll to a softwar e package an d select Optio ns â View certifica te to dis play the security certificate details of a software package. See â Certificate mana gem en t â on p. 46 . Wa r n i n g : Only install sof tware from s ources that offer a dequate protection against viruses and other harmful software.
[ 137 ] Manager T o help you, the software in stallation system uses digital signatures and certi ficates on software packages. D o not install the app licati on if Manag er gives a security warning during in stallation. Select Op ti ons â View log to see w hat software packages have been installed or removed and when. ⢠INSTALL SOFTWARE Y ou can in st all applica tions t hat are s pecifically intended f or th e Nokia 3620 and N okia 3 660 phones or suitable for the Symbian ope rating system. A software package is usually one large compressed file containing many component files. Note: If y ou install a program t hat is not intended specifically for the Nokia 3 620 and Nokia 3660 phones, it may function a nd look very di fferent from the usual N okia 3620 and N okia 3660 phone applications. Wa r n i n g : If you inst al l a file th at con tain s an upda te or repair to an exist ing applicatio n, you can only restore the original appl icati on if you have the or iginal installation file or a full back-up copy of the removed software package. To rest ore the origin al application, first remove the appli cation and then install the application again from the original installation file or the back-up copy . Installation packa ges may be transferred to you r phone from a computer , downloade d durin g bro wsing, or se nt to you in a multim edia message , as an e-ma il atta chment , by Blu et ooth co nnec tion, or by i nfrared. If y ou are u sing PC Su ite to tran sfer t he fi le, place i t in the c:\nokia\i nstal ls folder on yo ur ph on e. Example: If you have r ecei ved th e installati on file as an e -mai l attac hment, go to you r mailbox, open the e-mail, open the Attachments view , scroll to the installation file, and press to start the installation.
[ 138 ] Star t the i n stal la ti on: T o start the installation, open Manager , scroll to the installation package, and select Op tion s â In stall . Alte rn ati ve ly , sea rch the phone mem ory or the me mo ry card fo r th e installation file, select th e file, and press to start the installation. If you ar e installing s oftware without a digital signature or a certificate, the phone warn s you of the risks of installing s oftware. Continue insta llati on only if you are absolutel y sure of the or igin and contents of the software package. During installation, the phone checks the integrity of the package to be installed. The phone shows information about the ch ecks being c arried out and you are given options whether to con tinue or ca ncel the insta llation. Once the ph one has checked th e integrity of the software package, the application is installed on your ph one. T o send your inst allation log to a help desk so that th ey can see what has been installed or removed, select Option s â Send lo g â Via text messag e or Via e-m ail (available on ly if the cor rect e-mail settin gs are in place). ⢠REMOV E SO FTWARE 1 T o rem ove a soft ware packa ge, scroll to it and s elect Optio n s â Remo ve . 2 Press Ye s to confirm the r emoval. Wa r n i n g : I f you remove software, you can only re-install it if you have the or igin al software package or a full back-up of the remove d software packa ge. If you remove a software package, you may no lo n ge r be able to o pen docum ents created wit h th at s oftware. If another software package depends on the software package th a t you removed, the other sof tware packa ge may stop working. Re f er t o the documentation of the installed software package f or details.
[ 139 ] Manager ⢠VIEW MEMORY CONSUMPTION T o open the m emory view se lect Option s â Memor y de ta ils. Note: If you have a memory card installed on your phone, you wi ll ha v e a choi ce of tw o memor y views, on e for th e phon e or Ph one memory an d one for the Mem or y ca rd . If not, you will only have the Phone memor y vie w . When you open eithe r of the memor y views, the phone calculates the amount of fre e memory for storing data and installing new software. In the memory vi ews, yo u can view the memory consumpt ion of th e diffe rent data groups: Calen dar , Contacts , Documents, Messages , Images , Sou nd files , Video clips , Applicat ions , Mem. in use , and Free memor y . If the ph one me mory is getting low , remove some documents, or move them to the memory ca rd. See also the â Troubleshooting â on p. 173.
[ 140 ] 17 Connectivity Note: Y ou r phone must be switched on to use th e functions in the Connectivity folder . Do not switch the phone on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger . Y ou can transfer data f rom your phone to another compatible device, for example, a phone or a computer , using a Blu etooth connection or infrared. ⢠BLUE TOOT H CO NNE CT ION Go to Menu â Connect. â Bluetooth . Bluetooth connectivity en ables cost-free wireless connections between electronic devices w ithin a maxim um ra nge of 30 feet. A Blu etoo th con ne cti on can b e used to send images, texts, busin ess card s, and calenda r notes. It can also be used to conn ect wirelessly to products with or u sing Bluetooth wireless technology , such as computers. Since Bluetooth devices communicate using radio waves , your phon e and the other Bluetooth device do not need to be in direct line-of-s ight. The two devices only need to be within a maximum of 30 feet (1 0 meters) of each other , although the con nection can be s ubject to interference from obstructions such as walls or from oth er electronic devices. Using the Bluetooth a pplication con sumes the battery and the ph one's operating time w ill be reduced. Take this into account when performing other operations with your phone. There may be restrictions on usin g Bluetooth devices. Check with your local au thorities.
[ 14 1 ] Connectivity Bluetooth device compatibility The No kia 3620 a nd No kia 36 60 ph on es are d esi gned t o b e c ompl iant with and to a dapt to Bluetooth Specification 1 .1. Compatibility between th e phone and othe r products wi th Bluetoo th wir eless techno logy depe nds al s o on the pr ofiles and protoc ols used by both devices. The current profiles supported by t he Nokia 36 20 a nd Nokia 3660 a re: ⢠Dial-Up Networking pr ofile (DUN) as a g ateway ⢠F ax profile ( FAX) as a gateway ⢠Object Push profile (OPP) as a client and server ⢠File T ransfer profile (FTP) as a server ⢠Handsfree profile (HFP) as an audio gateway ⢠Generic Object Exchange pr ofile (GOEP) ⢠Generic Access pr ofile (GAP) ⢠Serial P ort profile (SPP) wi th the PC connectivity software For information on compatibi lity with other Bluetooth devices, con tact their m anu fac tur ers. Activate the Bluetooth application for the first time When you activate the Bl uetooth application for the first time, you are asked to give a Bluetooth name to your phon e. After you have set the Blu etooth application to be active and chan ged My phone's visibility to All , your phone an d this name can be seen by other Blu etooth device users. Write a na me ( max. 30 letter s) or use the default name. If you send da ta using a Blue too th conn ect ion befo re y ou ha ve g iv en an individu al B lu et oo t h na me to y ou r ph on e , the defau lt name will be used. T o send text using a Bluetooth c onnection (instead of text messa ges), go to Notes, write the text, a nd select Op ti ons â Send â Via Bl uetooth .
[ 142 ] Bluetooth application settings T o modif y the Bluetooth application settings, s croll to the s etting you want to change and press . ⢠Blue toot hâ Sele ct On if yo u wa nt to u se Blue toot h wi rele ss tec hno log y . I f you set the Bluetooth app lication Off all active Bluetoo th connection s are ended and the Bluetooth application can not be use d for sending or receiving da ta. ⢠My phone's visibility â If you s elect Shown to all , your ph one can be found by other Bluetooth device s during device search. If you se lec t Hidden , your phone cann ot be found by other devices du ring device search. ⢠My Blue t oot h name â Defi ne a Bluetooth name for your ph one. After you have set the Blu etooth application to be active and changed My ph one's visibility to All , this name can be see n by other Bluetooth device user s. When searching for devices, some Bluetooth devices may show only the unique Bluetooth a ddresses (device a ddresses). T o f ind out what the unique Bluetoo th address of yo ur phone is, ente r the code *#2820# in the s tandby m ode. Send data using Bluetooth c onnection Note: Ther e can be only one active Blu etooth connection at a time. 1 Open an application wher e the ite m you wish to send is store d. For ex ample, to send a ph oto to an other device, open the Im ag e s app l icat io n . 2 Scroll to th e item you want to sen d, for example, a photo and select Option s â Send â Via Bluetooth .
[ 143 ] Connectivity 3 The ph one star ts to se arch for device s within range. Blu etooth e nable d devices that a re within range start to appear on th e display on e by one. Y ou can see a device icon, th e device â s Bluetooth nam e, the device type, or a short name. P a ired de vices are shown wi th . Note: I f you have searched for Bluetooth devices earlier , a list of the devices that were foun d previou sly is shown first. To start a ne w se arc h, s elec t More devices. If you switch off the ph one, the list of devices is cleared and the de vice search needs to be started again before s ending data . T o interr upt the s earch, pr ess Stop . The device list freezes and you can start to form a connection to one of the devices already found. 4 Scroll to th e device you want to connect w ith and press Select . The item you are sending is copied to O utbox and the note Con nec ting is shown. 5 If r equired to pair with the oth er device, consider th e followin g: ⢠If t he o ther d evice requir es p airin g before data can be tran smitted , a tone sounds and you are asked to e nter a passcode. ⢠Create your o wn passcode (1-16 characters long, nu meric) and agree with the ow ner of the oth er Blu etooth device to use the same code. This passcode is used only once and you do not have to memorize it. ⢠After pairing, the device is saved to the P aired devices view (see â P aired devices view â on p. 1 44). Note: P air ing means authentication. The users of the Bluetooth enabled devices should agree on the passcode and use th e same passcode for both devices in order to pair them. Devices that d o not have a user interface have a factory set pass code. When the connection h as been su ccessfully establish ed, the note Sending data is shown. Note: Data received by a Bluetooth connection can be f o u n d i n t h e In box f olde r in Messagin g. See â In bo x â on p. 8 7 for fur ther informatio n.
[ 144 ] Note: I f sending fails, the m essage or data will be dele ted. The Drafts folder in Messaging doe s not store messages sent by a Bluetooth connection. Check the status of the Bl uetooth connection ⢠When is shown in the standby m ode, th e Blue tooth application is active. ⢠When is bli nkin g, yo ur pho ne is try ing to connect to the ot he r devic e. ⢠When is shown continuously , the B luetooth connection i s active. P aired devices view Optio ns in the pa ired de vices vi ew are: New pair ed device, Conne ct / Disconnect , A ssign short n ame , De lete , Delete all , Set as au thorized / Se t as unauthorized , He lp , and Exit . P airing with a d evice makes device searches easier and quicker . P aired devices are easier to recognize; they ar e indicated by in the sear ch result list. In the Bluetooth applica tion main view , pr ess to open a list of pa ired devices ( ). PA I R W I T H A D E V I C E 1 Select Op ti ons â New paired de vice in the P aired de vices view . Th e phone starts to sear ch for devi ces within range. Or , if you have searched for Bluetooth devices earlier , a list of the devices that were found previously is shown first. To start a new sear ch, select More device s . 2 Scroll to the device you want to pair with and press Select . 3 Exchange pa sscodes. See â Send data using Bluetooth connection â on p. 1 42. The device is added to the P a ired devices lis t. Ico ns fo r dif f eren t B lue to oth en able d devi ces Computer Phone Oth er Unk nown
[ 145 ] Connectivity Y ou can also play phone-to-phone games using a Bluetooth connection. CANC EL P AIR ING ⢠In the P air ed devices view , scroll to the device whose pairing you want to cancel and press or select Op tio ns â Delete . Th e device is removed from th e P aired devices list and the pairing is cancelled. ⢠If you want to cancel all pairings, select Op ti ons â Delete all. Note: If y ou are currently connected to a device and delete the pa i ri n g with that device, pairing is r emoved immediately bu t the co n n e c ti o n will remai n active. ASSIG N SHORT NAMES FOR PAIRED DEVICE S Y ou can defin e a sh ort n ame (nickname, alias) to he lp you r ecognize a certain device. T his name is stored in the phone m emory and cannot be seen by other Bluetooth device users. Example: G ive a sh ort name to your friend â s Bluetooth enabled device or to your own computer to be able to recognize it m ore easily . T o assign a short name, scroll to the device and select Opti on s â A ssign sh or t nam e . Write the sh ort name and press OK . Note: Choose a name which is easy to remember and recognize. L at e r when you ar e searching f or devices or a device is requesting a c on n e ct i o n , the name you h ave chos en will be used to iden tify the d evice. SET A DEVICE TO BE AUTHOR IZED OR UNAUTHORIZED After you have paired with a device, you can set it to be a uthorized or unauthorized: Unautho rized (defau lt) â Conn ection requests f rom this d evice nee d to b e accepted separa tely every time. Autho rized â Connections between your phone and this d evice can be made w ithout your knowledge. No separate acceptance or authorization is needed. Use this status for
[ 146 ] your own devices, f or ex ample, your PC, or de vices that belong to someone you trust. Th e icon is added ne xt to authorize d devices in th e P a ired devices view . In the P aired devices view , scroll to the device and sele ct Op t ions â Set as authorized / Set as unau thor ize d . Receive data using a Bluetooth connection When yo u rec ei ve da ta thr ough a Bl uet ooth co nnec tion, a ton e s ound s and you are asked if you want to accept the Blu etooth message. If you accept, is shown and th e item i s placed in the Inbox folder in Messaging. Bluetooth mess ages are indicated by . See â I nboxâ on p. 87 fo r furth er info r mation . Disconnect a Bluetooth connection A Bluetooth c onnection is dis connected au tomatically after sending or receiving data. ⢠INFRARE D CONNECTION T o start infrar ed, go to Menu â Connect. â Infra r ed Using in frared, you c an send or receive data such as business cards and calendar n otes to and from a com patible phone or data device. Do not point the I R (infrared) beam at anyone's eye or allow it to interfere with other IR devices. T his device is a Class 1 Laser product. Send and receive data using infrared Note: All items which are received by infrared are placed i n the Inbox folder in Messaging. New infrared messages are indicated by . See â Inboxâ on p. 87 fo r furth e r inf orma tio n. 1 Make sure that the infrared ports of the sending an d receiving devices are pointing at each other and that there are no obstructions between the devices. The preferable distance between the two devices is three feet at most. To find the infrared port, see the picture of the different keys in the Ge neral information section o f this guide.
[ 147 ] Connectivity 2 The user of th e receiving device activates the infrared por t. T o activate the infrared port of your phone to re ceive data by infrared, go to Me n u â Conne ct. â Infrar ed and pr ess . 3 The user of th e sending device selects the desired infrared function to start data transfer . T o send data by in frared, select Op tion s â Send â Via in frared in an application. If data transfer is not started within two minutes after the activation of the infrared port, the connection is ca ncelled and must be started a gain. Y ou can also play phone-to-phone games using infrared. Example: To send a con tact card by infrared: (1) Ask the recei ver to activate the infrared port in his/her device. (2) Go to Contacts , scroll to a card an d select Optio ns â Sendâ Via infrar ed. Note: Windows 2000: To be able to use infrared to transfer files betw een you r N okia 362 0 or N okia 3 660 and a compat ible com puter , go to â Con trol P anel â and select â Wire less Link â . In th e â Wireless Li nk â â File Tr ansfer â tab check the â Allow oth ers â to se nd fil e s to your computer u sing infrared. Check the status of th e infrare d connection ⢠When blinks, your phone is trying to connect to the othe r device or a connection has been lost. ⢠When is shown con tinuously , the infrared connection is active an d your ph one is r eady to send a nd receive dat a through its infrared por t. ⢠CON NECT YO UR PHON E TO A COMP UTER For further information on h ow to make a connection to a compa tible computer through infrared or a Bluetooth connection and how to install PC Suite, see â PC Suit e â on page 149. For further in formation on how to use the PC Suite application, see the PC Su ite online h elp.
[ 148 ] Use the CD-ROM The C D-ROM should launch itself after you ha ve inserted it in to the CD-ROM drive of your compatible PC. If not, pr oceed as follows: 1 Click the W indow Start bu tton a nd select Progra ms â Windows Explorer . 2 On the CD- ROM drive, locate a f ile calle d Noki a36 20_3 660 .exe and double-click it. The CD-ROM inte rface opens. 3 Y ou can find PC Suite in the â Insta ll â se ction. When you launch the file, an installation wizard will guide you through the installation process. ⢠USE YOUR PHON E AS A MODEM T o use your phone as a modem, go to Menu â Connect. â Modem . Using your phone as a m odem, you can connect to t he Internet and send or rece ive fa xes with a com puter . Y ou can use an infr ared o r a Bluetooth connection.
[ 149 ] PC Suite 18 PC Sui te With PC Su ite you c an: ⢠Share information betwe en your PC and phone. ⢠Make bac k-up copies of the phone files to protect data in case of loss or damage. ⢠Synchronize your calendar , contacts, and tasks with Microsoft and Lotus a pplications. ⢠Copy and move f iles between your PC and phone. ⢠Copy contacts and ca lendar in formation from a nother Nokia m obile phone, Nokia comm unicator , or P a lm devi ce to your Nokia 3620 or Nokia 36 60 pho ne. ⢠Configure phone settings. ⢠Install software on your phone. Please refer to oth er sections of this user guide f or instructions on operation, care, and maintena nce of you r Nokia phone, inclu ding important saf ety information. ⢠PC SUITE DO CUMENTATION AND HELP The following documen tation is available to assist you with installing and using PC Suite: ⢠Nokia 3620 and Nokia 3 660 User Guide â This se ction of the user guide explains how to install PC Suite on a compatible PC, how to con nect your phone to the PC, and how to start u sing PC Su ite. ⢠PC Suite on line helpâ For more detailed instructions an d t rouble- shooting on the use of PC Sui te, please refer to the online help th at is automaticall y installe d on you r PC when yo u install PC Su ite. T o access the online h elp, click th e Start bu tton, select Pr ograms and point to PC Suite for Nokia 3620 and Nokia 3660 , and th en click the f ile with Help in th e title.
[ 150 ] ⢠PC Suite R eadme fileâ The Readme file is a utomatically installed on your PC when you install PC Suite. It is recommended that you read this file before using PC Suite. Also, if you have problems installing or starting the applicatio n, you m ay find some trouble shooti ng assistance in this file. T o access the readme file , click the Start butto n, select Programs, point to PC Suite for Nokia 3620 and Nokia 3660 , and click the file with Rea dme.t xt in the title. ⢠SOFTWARE AN D HARDWAR E REQUIR EMENTS T o install and r un PC Suite, you ne ed: ⢠A compatible PC r unning Windows 98, Windows ME, W indows 2000 with Service Pa ck 2, or Windows XP . ⢠At leas t 1 1 0 MB of f ree disk spa ce. To conn ect y ou r No kia 362 0 or N oki a 366 0 phone t o th e PC, y ou n eed to have one of th e following: ⢠An infrared connection: an infrared port on the com puter . ⢠A Bluetooth connection: a Blu etooth card and the required sof tware, or built-in su pport for Blu etooth connectivity on th e PC. T o be able to connect your Nokia 36 20 or Nokia 3660 phone to you r PC, the Bluetooth software ne eds to support the Serial P ort Profile (SPP). ⢠INSTALL PC SUITE PC Suite is in the â Inst allâ section of th e CD-ROM included in the Nokia 3620 or Nokia 3660 pa ckage. The CD-ROM s hould launch automatically after you have inserted it in to the CD-ROM drive of your PC. If not, proceed as foll ows: 1 Click the W indows Start button, poin t to Program s , and select Windows Explorer . 2 Go to the CD-ROM root dir ectory and double-c lick the Nokia36 20_36 60.exe f ile. The C D-RO M us er in terfa ce opens . When the CD-ROM interface is ope n, proceed as follows: 1 Click Insta ll .
[ 15 1 ] PC Suite 2 Locate the Install now section and click PC Suite for Nokia 3620 and Nokia 3660 (depending on your phone mode l). 3 Select the language for the installation and click Next to start th e installation wizard. This wiz ard will guide you through the installation process. It is recommended that you accept the suggested destination folder and pr ogram folder . 4 As you go through the installation wi zard, make sure that the Insta ll the Nokia Connectivity SDK check box is selected in the Data I mport dialog box if you want to transfer calendar and contacts data from another Nokia mobile phone to your Nokia 3620 or Nokia 3 660 phone. If you do n ot install the N okia Connectivity SDK component, you can only tra nsfer data to your Nokia 3620 or Nokia 36 60 from th e No kia 3 60 0, Noki a 3650, N oki a 76 50, N ok ia 92 1 0 Comm uni cato r , Nokia 9290 Communicator , a P alm device, or another Nokia 3 620 or Noki a 3660 . 5 In the File Transfer Video and Au dio Converters dialog box it is rec om men de d t hat yo u le ave th e Install Vi deo and Audio Conv erte rs check box sele cted. When th e conver ters are installed, video and audio format files that you copy from the PC to your Nokia 3 620 or Nokia 3660 are automatically converted to the video and audio formats used by the phone . If you do n ot have th e CD-R OM, you can dow nload th e PC Sui te softw are fro m ww w .nokia usa .com . From the h ome page, select Phones and Softwar e . Enter your phon e model an d fol low scree n instruct ions to do wnlo ad th e PC Suite installatio n fil e. Once th e install ation file is downlo aded , go to the directory where you downloaded it and dou ble-click it. Follow th e in s tr u c ti o ns on the screen to install th e softwar e. ⢠CONN ECT YOUR PHONE TO THE PC When you use P C Suite f or the fi rst time, you mu st conn ect you r phon e to the PC. Ther eafter , you can use PC Suite wheth er or not your phone is conn ect ed to you r PC . Y ou ca n co nne ct your phon e t o th e PC t hro ug h an infrared or Bluetooth con nection.
[ 152 ] See the following online help topics for details: ⢠Conn ectin g y our No kia 3620 or Noki a 36 60 pho ne t o a P C ⢠Dis conne c ting a nd rec onn ect ing yo ur Nok ia 362 0 or N oki a 36 60 phone to a PC See â PC Suite documentation an d help â on page 149 to locate the online help. Note: When you con nect your phone to y our PC, PC Suite automatically synchronizes the clock on th e phone with t he PC. Th eref ore, you ne ed to make su re that th e clock on you r PC is correct. If you have problems con necting your ph one to the PC , check to see if both your phone and PC are switched on and that you have sele cted the correct communications port. Chec k the icons on th e taskbar to see the connection statu s. The connection icon changes to when your phone is conne cted to the PC. Y ou can double-click on this icon in you r Windows taskbar to open a Connection Propert ies window that identifies which communications port PC Sui te is using. ⢠START PC SUITE Y ou can start PC Suite from the Start menu: c lic k t he Start button, select Programs , select the PC Suite for Nokia 3 620 and Nokia 36 60 folder , an d then click P C Su ite for Nokia 3 620 and Nokia 3 660 . If you are connecting your phone to the PC for th e first time, after starting PC Suite you are asked to do two things: ⢠Name your phone. Y ou can use more than one Nokia 3620 or Nokia 3660 phone with PC Suite. To be able to identify individual phones, you must give a name to each phone.
[ 153 ] PC Suite ⢠Select tasks to be cr eated. T o be ab le to back up and syn chron ize i nformati on bet ween yo ur p hone and PC, you must have the appropriate tasks created. During th e first connection, PC Suite lists ta sks that c an be cr eated automatically . Y ou do not have to create these tasks at this point, if you do not want to. However , if you create th e tasks, you can edit them later . For more detaile d information, ref er to the PC Suite on line help (see â PC Suite docu mentation and helpâ on page 1 49). ⢠ONLINE A ND OFFLINE MODES Y ou can use PC Su ite e ither in on line mode or in of fline mode. Y ou have the following options: ⢠W ork online â Connect your ph one to the PC and let PC Suite iden tify it. In onl ine mode your phone i s connected to your co mpatible PC, and you can wor k with the in formation stored on the phone. ⢠W ork offline â Leave your ph one disconnected and choose the name of your phone from a list of n amed devices. The menus and other available option s in offline m ode differ from those of online mode. ⢠CONN ECTION STATUS The icon on the right-hand side of the status bar and on the Windows taskbar displays the con nection status as follows: Discon nected Con ne c te d Tran sferring data (animated i con) ⢠PC SUITE APPLICATIONS A number of icons are display ed on the left-hand side of the main PC Suite window â this area is known as the application bar . T o use an application, click its icon. For in formation on usin g an application, see the on line help.
[ 154 ] Backup/Restore With Backup/Restore, you can b ack up information on your phone. If you ever lose information from your phon e (for exam ple, through accidental deletion), o r need to refer to an earlier , backed up ve rsion, you can restore it to y our phone. Back up/Restore supports Memory ca rds. Note: Operator logos, r inging tones (polyphonic r inging tones (MI DI) an d single t one s) and J ava-ap plications that you h ave in st a lle d on yo ur phone after you first started using it are n ot saved durin g backup. Therefor e, these item s cannot be rest ored. On ly the original Nokia 36 20 and Nokia 3660 r inging tones a re saved. Control P anel Y ou can u se Control P anel to chan ge some of the general s ettings of PC Suite. The followin g features are in cluded in Control P anel: ⢠Connection enables you t o specify the por t that PC Suite u ses when attempting to connect to a ph one. ⢠Data Locat ion ena bles you to specif y wher e you want to s tore backups and synchronization files. ⢠File Converters enables you to select wh ich, if any , video and audio converters are used when files are copie d to th e phone u sing File Tra n s f e r . ⢠Device Manager enables you to see wh ich phones have been connected to your PC, and to r emove details of ph ones that you no longer want to connect. Import ant: Y ou cannot restor e inform ation that you h ave remo ved usin g Device Man ager . Data Import With Data Impor t, you ca n tra nsfer conta cts and ca lendar dat a to your Nokia 36 20 or Noki a 3660 fro m the Nok ia 33 20, Nokia 3360 , Nokia 360 0, Noki a 3 620, Nokia 36 50, Noki a 366 0, N okia 6 2 1 0, No kia 6250 , N okia 63 1 0, No kia 63 1 0i, N okia 632 0, No kia 6 340, No ki a 6360, N ok ia 637 0, Nokia 6385 ,
[ 155 ] PC Suite Nokia 65 1 0, N okia 6590, N okia 66 1 0, No kia 665 0, Nok ia 7 1 1 0, N okia 7 160, No kia 7 19 0, Nok ia 72 1 0, Nok ia 7650 , Nok ia 82 1 0, No ki a 8290, No kia 83 1 0 , No kia 8390, N okia 88 1 0, No kia 8 850, Noki a 88 90, No kia 89 1 0, Nok ia 92 1 0 Communicator , Nokia 9290 Communicator , or P alm device. Synchronize With Synchronize, you can s ynchronize your phone contacts a nd calendar data with Microsoft and Lotus applications. T o be able t o synchr onize, yo u must have tasks created for synchr onizatio n. When you connect your phone to your PC for the f irst time, PC Suite identifies your phone and creates a number of tasks. Y ou can modify these tasks an d create othe r tasks if you wan t. Y ou can also sche dule tas ks to be run at regular intervals, every tim e you conne ct your phone to you r PC, or on com mand only . The anima ted icon appears on the Windows taskbar when synchronization is in progress. The icon indicates that the data on your phone is being syn chronized with the data on the PC. File T ransfer With File T ransfer , you can copy files betw een your phone and your PC, as well as delete and rename selected files. With the Multimedia converters, video and audio format files that you copy from the PC to your phone are automatically c onverted to the video and audio format used by the phone. Image T ransfer With Image Transfer , you can copy , move, rename, and delete im age files on your phone and your PC. Y ou can also view image files if there is an associat ed viewer application. Settings wizard With th e Settings wizard, you can configure th e e-mail accou nt, rem ote connection, message center , and multimedia message center settings of your phone. For example, you can manage settings manually or copy a working configuration from the PC to th e phone. Y ou can also back up your phone s ettings to a file.
[ 156 ] Install software on your phone With PC Suite, you can in stall Java and device software on you r phone. These application s do not have an icon on th e application ba r . Instead, you can start these applications from the Tools m e nu . Se e th e In stalling so ftwa re online help topic for details. Installation pa ckages can be received in a multimedia message, a s an e-mail at tachment , by Bluetooth con nection, or by i nfrared and downloaded to your phone. If you are using PC Suite to transfer the file, save it to the c:\no kia\ instal ls folder . Note: Y ou can on ly use J ava install ation file s with the extens ion .j ad or .j ar , and de vice softwar e installatio n file s with the ex tensi on .sis. Import ant: Only instal l software fr om sources that offe r ade quate prot ection against vir uses and othe r har mful software. ⢠REMOVE PC SUITE FROM Y OUR PC Uninstalling PC Suite r emoves all files and folders that wer e added by the PC Suite installation program, but does n ot remove backed-up and archived files or synch ronization information. Therefore, if you reinstall PC Suite you can back up, restore, and synchronize u sing the same settin gs as be fore. Note: I f yo u want to remove back ed-up f iles, synchr onization s, and ot he r information relating to the phones you have connected, you must do this before removing PC Suite. For furth er information, see the Viewing and removing details of a N okia 3620 or Nokia 3 660 online help topic. T o remove PC Suite, pr oceed as follows: 1 Click the W indows Start button, point to Settings , and click Control P anel . 2 Double-click Add/Re move Programs . 3 Select PC Su ite for Nokia 3 620 and Nokia 3 660 from the list of installed programs, and click Add/Remove . A confirmation dialog box opens.
[ 157 ] PC Suite 4 Confirm that you want to remove the PC Suite sof tware from you r PC. After confirmin g that you w ant to remove PC Su ite, the uninstall program r emoves the pr ogram files a nd informs you that you n eed to restart your PC to complete the uninstall proc ess. When your PC restarts, the uninstall program completes the removal of PC Suite from your PC. Note: Uninstalling PC Suite does not remove t he Nokia Conn ectivit y SDK. Y ou can r emove the Nokia Connectivity SDK from your PC using the Add/Remove Programs application of the W indows Control P anel. The uni nstall pro gram leav es some file s on yo ur PC that contain in formation about the Nokia devices you have con nected to your PC. If you decide to reinstall PC Suite, you will be able to continue usin g PC Suite as before. Note: Remember to m ake back-up copies of all important data to protect against possible loss or alter ation.
[ 158 ] 19 Referen ce informatio n ⢠BATTERY STATEMENTS Charging and discharging Y our phone is powered by a rechar geable battery . Note that a new batter y's full per formance is achieved only after tw o or three complete charge and discharge cycles! The battery can be ch arged and discharged h undreds of times but it will eventually wear ou t. When the ope rating time (talk-time and standby time) is noticeably shor ter than normal, it is tim e to buy a new battery . Use only batte ries appr oved by the phone m anu facturer and recharge your battery only with the chargers approved by the manufacturer . Unplug the charger w hen not in u se. Do not leave the ba ttery connected to a charger for longer than a week, since overcharging may shorten its lifetime. If left unused a fully charged battery wil l discharge itself over tim e. T emperat ure extrem es can affect the ability of your battery to charge. Use the battery only for its intended purpose. Never use any ch arger or battery that is dam aged. Do not short-circu it the battery . Accidental short-circuiting can occur when a metallic object (coin, clip or pen) causes direct connection of the and - terminals of the battery (metal s trips on the battery) for example when you carry a spare battery in your pocket or purse. Sh ort-circu iting the terminals ma y damage the battery or th e connecting obje ct. Leaving the battery in hot or cold places, such as in a clos ed car in summer or winter conditions, will reduce the capacity and lifetime of the battery . Always try to keep the bat tery between 15 ð C and 25 ð C (59 ð F and 77 ð F). A phone with a hot or cold battery may temporarily n ot work, e ven when the battery is f ully charged. Battery pe rformance is particularly l imited in temperatures well be low freez ing. Do not dispose of batter ies in a fire ! Dispose of batteries according to local regu lations (e.g. recycling). Do n ot dispose as household was te. Remove th e battery only wh en the phone is switched off.
[ 159 ] Referenc e information ⢠USE PROPER CARE AND MAINTENANCE Y our phone is a product of super ior design and craftsman ship and should be treated with care. The suggestions below w ill help you to fulfill any warranty obligations and to enjoy this product for many year s. ⢠K eep the phone and all its parts and enhancem ents out of the reach of sm all children. ⢠K eep the phone dry . Precipitation, humidity and all t ypes of liquids or moisture can contain minerals that wil l corrode electr onic circuits. ⢠Do not use or st ore the phone in dusty , dirty areas. Its moving parts can be damaged. ⢠Do not store the phone in hot areas. High temperatures can shorten the life of electron ic devices, damage batter ies, and warp or melt cert ain plast ics. ⢠Do not store the phone in cold are as. When it warms up (to its normal te mpera ture ), mo is ture can form ins ide , wh ich ma y dam age el ect ron ic ci rcu it boa rds . ⢠Do not at tempt to open the phone. Non-expert handling ma y damage it. ⢠Do not drop, kn ock or shake the ph one. Rough handl ing can break internal circuit boards. ⢠Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solvents, or strong deter gents to clean the phone. ⢠Do not paint the phone. P aint can clog the moving parts and pr event proper operation. ⢠Use only the su pplied or an approved replacement antenna. Unauthorized antennas, modifications or attachments could damage the phone and may violate regulations governing radio de vices. All of the above su ggestions apply equally to your phone, battery , charger or any enhancement. If any of them is not working proper ly , tak e it to your nearest qualified service facility . The personnel th ere will assist you and, if nec e ss ary , a rra nge for servi c e.
[ 160 ] ⢠UNDERSTAND IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION T raffic Safety Do not us e a hand-he ld telephone while driving a vehicle. Always secure the phone in its holder; do not place the phone on th e passenger seat or where it can break loose in a collision or sudden stop. Rememb er ro ad safe ty alway s comes fir st! Operating environment Remembe r to follo w any spe cial regu lations in force in any area and always switch off you r phone wh enever it is forbidden to us e it, or when it may cause in terfer ence or da nger . Use the phone only in its normal operating positions. P arts of the ph one are magnetic. Metallic m aterials may be attracted to the phone, and persons with a hearing a id should not h old the phone to the e ar wi th the hear ing aid . Always se cure the phon e in its hol der , becau se metallic materials may be attracted by th e earpiece. Do not place credit ca rd s o r o t her magnet i c s t ora ge me dia ne a r t he ph on e, be ca use info rm at ion stored on them may be erased. Electronic devices Most modern electronic equ ipment is shielded from r adio frequency (RF) signals. How ever , certain e lectron ic equipm ent may not b e shie lded agains t the RF signals from your wireless phone. PACEM AK ERS P a ce mak er m anuf a ctu re rs re com men d t h at a min imu m se par a tio n o f 6 in (15.3 cm) be maintained between a wireless phone and a pacemaker to av oid po tential interferenc e with the pa cemaker . These recommen dations are consistent with the independent research by an d recomm endations of Wireless T e chnology Research. T o minimize the potential f or interference, persons with pacemakers should ⢠Always keep the device more than 6 in (15.3 cm) from their pacemaker w hen the device is switched on
[ 16 1 ] Referenc e information ⢠Not carry the device in a breast pocket ⢠Hold the device to the e ar opposite the pacemaker If you have any reason to suspect th at interference is taking place, switch off your device im mediately . HE ARI N G AIDS Some digital wireless phones may interfere with some hearing aids. In the event of such interf eren ce, you ma y want to consult you r service pr ovider . Other medical de vices Operation of a ny radio tra nsmitting equipment, including cellular phones, may interfere with the f unctionality of inadequately protected medical devices. Consult a physician or the manufacturer of the medical device to determ ine i f th ey are adequate ly shie ld ed from exter nal RF e nergy or if you have any questions. Switch off your phone in heal th care facilities when any regulations posted in th ese areas instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health car e f acilities may be u sing equipment that c ould be sensitive to extern al RF energy . Ve h i c l e s RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately sh ielded electronic syste ms in mo t or ve hicl e s (e .g. el ect ro nic fu el in jec t ion s yst em s, electronic anti-skid (anti-lock) braking systems, electronic spee d control systems, air bag systems). Check with the man ufacturer or its representative regarding your vehicle. Y ou should also consult the m anufacturer of any equipment th at has been added to your vehicle. P osted facilities Switch your phone off in any facility where posted notices s o require. P otentially explosive atmospheres Switch off your phone when in any area w ith a potentially explosive atmosphe re and obey all signs and in structions. Spar ks in such areas could cause an explosion or f ire resulting in bodily injury or even de ath.
[ 162 ] Users are advised to switch of f the phone w hen at a ref ueling point (service station). Users are reminded of the need to observe restrictions on the use of r adio equipment in f uel depots (f uel storage an d distribution areas), chemical plants or whe re blasting operations are in pr ogress. Areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere are often but not always clearly marked. T hey include be low deck on boats; chemical transfer or storage facilities; vehicles using liquified petroleum gas ( such as propane or butan e); ar eas where the a ir contains chemicals or par ticles, such as grain, d ust or m etal powde rs; and an y othe r area wh ere yo u would normall y be advised to turn off your vehicle engine. Ve h i c l e s Only qualified personnel should ser vice the ph one, or install the phone in a vehicle. F aulty ins tallation or ser vice may be dangerous and may invalidat e any warr anty which may apply to the unit. Check regula rly that all wireless phone equipment in your vehicle is mou nted and operating prope rly . Do not s tore or carry flammable liquids, gases or explosive materials in the same compartment as the phone , its parts or enh ancements. For vehicles equipped with an air bag, remember that an air bag inflates with great force. Do n ot place objects, including both installed or portable wirele ss equi pmen t in the area ove r the air bag or i n th e air bag dep loyme nt area. If in-vehicle w ireless equipmen t is improperly installed and the air bag inflates, serious injury could r esult. Using your ph one wh ile in the air is prohibite d. Switch off your phone before boarding an aircraf t. The use of wireless telephones in an aircraft may be dangerous to the operati on of the aircraf t, disrupt the w ireless telephone network and may be illegal. FCC regulations prohibit u sing your phone w hile in the air . Switch of f your phone before boarding an air craft. The use of w ireless teleph ones in an aircraft may be dangerous to the operation of th e aircraft, disrupt the wireless telephone n etwork and may be illegal. F ailure to observe these in structions may lead to suspension or denial of telephone services to the offender , or le gal action or both.
[ 163 ] Referenc e information Emergency calls Note: This phone, like any wi reless phone, ope rates using ra dio signals, wireless, and landline n etworks as well as user-programed functions. Because of this, connections in all conditions cannot be guar antee d. T her efore y ou s h ou ld n eve r rel y so le ly up on an y wir e le ss phone for essential com munications (for example, medical emer gencies). Emergency calls m ay not be pos sible on a ll wireless phone n etworks or when certain network services and/or phone features are in u se. Check with local service pr oviders. T o make an emergency call: 1 If th e phone is not on, swit ch it on. C heck for adequa te sign al strength . Some networks ma y require that a valid SIM card is pr operly inserted in the phone. 2 Press a s many times as needed (e.g. to exit a call, to exit a menu, etc.) to clear the dis play and ready the ph one for calls. 3 K ey in the em ergency number for your present loca tion (e.g. 9 1 1 or other officia l emergency n umber). Emergency n umbers vary by location . 4 Press the key . If certai n featu res are in use, you may first need to turn those featur es off before you can make an emergency call. Consult this guide an d your local cellular service pr ovider . When making a n emergency call, remember t o give all the n ecessary information as accurately as possible. Rem ember that your wireless phone may be the onl y means of communication at the scene of an accident â do not cut off th e call until given permission to do so.
[ 164 ] ⢠CERTIFIC ATION IN FORMATION (SAR) THIS MO DE L PHO NE MEE TS TH E GOVER NME NT 'S REQU IRE MENT S FO R EXPOSURE TO RADIO W AV ES. Y our wir eless phone is a radio transmitter and receiver . It is designed and manufactured not to exceed th e emission li mits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) energy set by the Federal Communications Commission of the U.S. G overnment. These limits are part of compr ehensive guidelin es and establish permitted levels of RF energy f or the general population. The guidelines are based on standar ds that were developed by in dependent scientific organizations through periodic and thorough evaluation of scientific studies. The standards include a substantial safety margin designed to assure the safety of all persons, regardless of age and health. The exposure standard for wireless mobile ph ones employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate, or SAR. The SAR limit set by the FC C is 1.6 W/kg.* T ests for SAR ar e conducted using standard operating pos iti ons accepted b y the FCC with the ph one transmitting at its highest certified powe r level i n all tested f requency bands. Although the SAR is determined at the highest certified pow er level, the actual SAR level of the phone wh ile operating can be well be low the maximum value. This is be cause the phone is designed to op erate at multiple power levels so as to u se only the power required to reach the network. In general, the closer you are to a wireless base station an tenna, the lower the p ower output. Before a phone mo del is available for sale to the public, it m ust be tested and certified to the FCC that it doe s not excee d the lim it established by the governm ent-adopted requirem ent for safe ex posure. The tests are performed in posi tions and locations (for example, at the ear and worn on the body) as r equired by the FCC f or each m odel.
[ 165 ] Referenc e information The highest SAR va lue for the Nokia 3620 model phone as reported to t he FCC whe n te sted fo r use a t th e ear is 1.1 2 W/kg, and w hen wor n on the body , as descr ibed in this user guide, is 1.28 W/kg. The highest SAR value for the Nokia 3660 model phone as r eported to the FCC when tested for use at the ear is 0.77 W/kg, and w hen worn on the body , as described in this user guide, is 1.13 W/kg. (Body-worn meas urements differ am ong phone models, depending upon available ac cessories and FCC requirements) . While there may be differe nces between the SAR le vels of various phones and at various positions, they al l meet the gove rnment requiremen t. The FCC h as granted an Equipment Authorization f or this model phone with all repor ted SAR levels evaluated as in compliance with the FCC RF exposure gu idelines. SAR information on th is model phon e is on file with the FCC and can be f ound under th e Display Grant section of http ://ww w .fcc.g ov/oe t/ fccid after searching on FCC ID QFXNHM-1 0X for the N okia 3620 model and FCC ID QFXNHL-8X fo r t he N o kia 36 60 model. For body worn operation, this phone has bee n tested and m eets the FCC RF exposure guide lines for use with a carry case, belt clip, or holder that cont ai ns no metal and that p osi ti ons the ha ndse t a min imu m of 5/ 8-i nc h (1.5 cm ) from the body . Use of other carry cases, belt clips, or holders may not ensure compliance w ith FCC R F exposure guidelines. I f you do no t use a body-worn accessory and are n ot holding the phone at the ear , position the handset a minimum of 5/ 8 inch (1.5 cm ) from y our body when the phone is s witched on. *In the United States and Canada, the SAR li mit for m obile phones used by the public is 1 .6 watts/kilogram (W/kg) averaged over one gram of tissue. The standard incorporates a substan tial margin of safety to give additional protection for the pu blic and to account for any variation s in measurements. SAR values may vary dependi ng on national r eporting requirements and the network band. For SAR in formation in other regions please look u nder pr oduct information at www .nokia.com/us .
[ 166 ] ⢠ENH A N C EM EN TS Original Nokia Enhance ments ensure the best possible operation of your Nokia mobile phone in various c onditions. Specifications are s ubject to ch ange without notice. The ava ilability of par ticular products and services may vary by region. Please check with the N okia deale r neare st you. Ope rations a nd some fea tures are ne twork dependen t. Nokia enhanceme nts enable th e best possible operation of your mobile phone in various conditions. V ar iation in operation times will occur depending on SIM card, n etwork and usage settings, usage style and environments. Please check the availa bility of W AP services with your networ k oper ator and/ or WAP service pr ovider . The avail abili ty of Blue tooth wireless technology may vary by cou ntry and Bluetooth products are not approved for use everywhere. Please check with the local authorities. Use enhancements safely A few practical rules for en hancem ent operation: ⢠K eep all enhancements ou t of the reach of small children. ⢠When you disconnect the power cord of any enhancement, grasp and pull the plu g, not the cor d. ⢠Check regularly that an y vehicle-installed enhancements are mounted and are ope rating properly . ⢠Installation of any complex car en hancemen ts must be m ade by qualified personnel only . ⢠Use only batter ies, chargers , an d enhancem ents that h ave been app ro v ed by the phon e manuf actur er . The use of any other types could inval idate any approva l or warranty apply ing to the phone and could be dangero us.
[ 167 ] Referenc e information Audio enhancements WIREL ESS HEADSET HDW-2 The N okia Wireless Hea dset HDW- 2 is design ed with Bluetoot h te chnolog y and is compatible w ith the Nokia 3620 a nd Nokia 36 60 p hon es a nd other phones suppor ting the Bluetooth 1.1 specification and Headset or Ha ndsfree profiles. The c om pac t head set gi ve s ha nds - free control of your phone without cables or wires. The ear piece fits in either ear a llowing for convenient and discreet access to a ll basic call controls. The Answer/End button lets you answer and make calls, redial, and switch the audio back and forth between the handset a nd headset . A separate volume control lets you change the call volume as necessary w hile moving from place to place. T o maximize call security , the headset also supports encryption of the wireless connection f or compatible phone m odels. HEADSET HDE-2 The HDE-2 Headset is a small and lightweigh t portable headset for easy handsfr ee operation. It has a clip to h old the he adset firmly in place. HEADSET HDC-5 The HDC-5 Headset, with a remote button, connects directly to the ph one. No extra adaptor is required, and the remote con trol is pr ovided. DUA L HEADS ET HDD- 1 The HDD-1 Dual Headset pr ovides comfortable handsfree ope ration with a remote control bu tton for answering and ending calls. RETRA CTA BLE HEADSET HDC-1 0 The HDC-1 0 Retractable Hea dset is a compact headset w ith a retractable mechanism and r emote control.
[ 168 ] BOOM H E ADS ET HD B -5 HDB-5 Headset provides handsfree functionality and a n ew â over th e ear â concept providing excellent audio quality . MOBI LE INDU CTIVE LO OP SET LPS-3 T he LPS-3 Mobile Loopset gives people with T- coil equipped hearing aids the ability to make and receive calls without noise in terference. The Loopset is e asy to use and gives hearing- impaired users clear access to digital telephony . Y ou wear the Loopset around your n eck, connect it to your ph one, and speak directly toward the m icrophone. If you are using a L oopset, you must activate it on your mobile phone by selecting Menu â T ools â Settings â A ccess ory â A ccessory in use â Loopset . Note: The Loopse t can be purch ased separa tely as an enhan ceme nt. For operating in structions, refer to the bookle t that comes with the LPS-3. For more in for ma tion, see â Learn about ac cessibility solutions â on p. 5. PHONE AD APTER H DA-9 The HDA-9 Phone Adapter is a Nokia enh anc ement that allows you to connect your mobile phone to a T elecommunications Device for the De af (TTY/TDD) to make a call in digital mode. 18 in.
[ 169 ] Referenc e information If you are using a Ph one Adapter , you must activate it on your m obile phone by se lecting Me n u â T ools â Settings â Accessor y â Acce ss or y i n use â TTY . In addition to the Nokia 3 620 or Nokia 3660 phone, you â ll ne ed the following for TTY/TDD com munication: ⢠A T T Y/T D D d e vi ce th at i s â cellu lar r eady â or â ce llular compatible â â¢ A ca ble for connecting the T TY/TDD to y our phone, usually supplied by the ma nufa cturer of th e TTY/TDD device ⢠The Phone Adapter (HDA-9), which ca n be purchased separately as an enha ncement at www . nok ia.c om For mo re info rma tion, s ee â Learn about ac cessibility solutions â on p. 5. Battery The 850 m Ah, Li-Ion based BL-5C battery provides power in a thin an d light package. It provides a talk time of up to 2 â 4 hour s and up to 15 0 â 200 hou rs standby tim e. Charging time is 1 hour and 35 mi nutes. V ariation in oper ation times will occur de pending on SIM card, network and usage settings, usage style and environmen ts. Talk time is reduced by 5 percent if En hanced Full Rate is active, and increased by up to 30 percent if Half R ate is active. Charge rs The N okia 36 20 a nd Noki a 3660 u se the ACP-12U standard charger and mobile char gers LC H-9 an d LCH-12. The LCH-12 mobile charger can be u sed with 1 2 Vdc or 24 V dc. Th e Nok ia 36 20 an d No kia 36 60 phones ar e als o compatible with th e ACP-12U and ACP-8U travel chargers. ACP- 12U
[ 17 0 ] Car enhancements WIREL ESS CAR KIT CARK-1 12 The wireless car kit offers a convenient handsfree option in a car , with a remote con trol bu tto n. The ki t incl udes th e Re mote Contro l Butt on CUW -2, Handsfree Unit HFW-1, Microphone HFM-8, HF Speaker HFS-12, and power cable PCU-4. MOBI LE HOLDER MBC-16 The MBC-16 Mobile Holder has er gonomic release buttons and a swivel mount. It supports use w ith the mobile charger and Plug-in HF Car Kit. PLUG -IN HF CA R KIT PP H-1 This handsfree car kit in cludes a built-in speaker . It uses the phone microphone, but also has a connector for an exter nal microphone, HFM-8. HEADRES T HANDSFREE BHF-2 This headres t installs on a ca r headrest for han dsfree audio. The terminal charges with the LC H-9 or LCH-12 m obile charger . MICROPHONE HFM-8 This HFM-8 is a s mall, directional microphone. Memory c ard The 64 M B memory car d provides r emovable storage for your phone. The m emory card increases available memory and storage for your multimedia files like video clips, and sound files, photos, messaging information, or to backup information from you r phone â s memo ry .
[ 17 1 ] Referenc e information ⢠NOKIA 3620 T ECHNI CAL IN FORMAT ION Feature Spec ific ati on We i g h t 4. 5 oz (1 30 g) wi th 85 0 -mA h Li -lo n battery Size 139 c c Frequency range Lowb an d 8 50 824 â 849 MHz (TX) 869 â 894 MHz (RX ) Hig hb and 190 0 1850 â 1 910 M H z ( T X ) 1930 â 1990 M Hz ( RX) T r ansmitte r ou tput powe r Lo wba nd up to 2 W Hig hba nd up to 1 W Ba ttery v olt age 3.7 V no mi nal Oper a tin g temp er atu r e 14 ð F to 131 ð F (- 1 0 ð C to 5 5 ð C) Number of channels 124 lowband 299 highband
[ 172 ] ⢠NOKI A 3660 TE CHNICAL IN FORMAT ION Feature Specif icati on We i g h t 4. 5 oz (1 30 g) wi th 85 0 -mA h Li -lo n battery Size 139 c c Frequency range Lowb an d 9 00 880 â 91 5 M H z ( T X ) 925 â 960 MHz (RX ) Highband 1 800 17 1 0 â 1769 M Hz (T X) 1805 â 1864 M Hz ( RX) Highband 1 900 1850 â 1 910 M H z ( T X ) 1930 â 1990 M Hz ( RX) T r ansmitte r ou tput powe r Lo wba nd up to 2 W High ba nd up to 1 W Ba ttery vo ltage 3.7 V no mi nal Operating temp erature 14 ð F to 13 1 ð F (- 1 0 ð C to 5 5 ð C) Number of channels 194 lowband 299 highband
[ 173 ] Referenc e information ⢠T R OUBLESHOOTIN G If you experie nce problems with your phon e, the infor mation below may help you resolve the problem. I f you cannot find a solution in this user guide, contact the Nokia Cust omer Ca re Center for furth er assist ance. See â Contact Nokia â on p. 5. Memory low When following notes are shown, the phone memory is low and you must start to delete some data: Not en ough memory to perfor m operation. Delete some dat a first. or Memory low . Delete som e data. ⢠T o view what kind of data you have and how much memory the different data groups consume, go to Ma n ag er and select Opti ons â Memory details . Delete the following items regularly: ⢠messages from the I nbox, Drafts, and Sent folders in Messaging ⢠retrieved e-mail messa ges from the ph one memory ⢠saved browser pa ges ⢠images and photos in Images ⢠If you want to delete contact information, calendar notes, call timers , call cost timers, game scores, or any other data, go to the respective application to rem ove the data. Note: If you are del eting multipl e i tems an d ano ther of the fol lowing note s i s sh o wn : Not enough memory to per form operation. Delete some data f irst . or Memo ry low . Dele te so me da ta. try deleting items one by on e (starting from th e smallest item). Clearing calendar memory T o rem ove more than one even t at a time, go to the Mon th view , s elect Opti on s â Del ete , and s elect one of the followin g: ⢠Before date â to delete all calen dar notes which take place befor e a certain date. Enter the date before which all calendar notes will be deleted . ⢠All e n tr ie s â to delete all calendar notes.
[ 174 ] Erasing log information T o erase all the log contents, Re cent calls log, and Messaging delivery reports permanently , go to Logs and select Option s â Clear log or go to Settings â Log du ration â No log . Different ways to store data ⢠Use PC Suite to take a back up copy of a ll data t o your computer . ⢠Send images to your e -mail address and then save the images to your computer . ⢠Send data by infrared or a Bluetooth connection to a nother device.
[ 175 ] Referenc e information ⢠NOKIA ONE-Y EAR LIMITED WARRANTY Nokia Inc. ( â Nokiaâ ) warrants that this cellular phone ( â Productâ ) is free from defects in mater ial and workmanship that result i n Product failure during normal usage, according to th e following terms and con ditions: 1 The lim ited w arranty for th e Produ ct exten ds for ONE (1) year beginn ing on the date of the pu rchase of the Product. T his one year pe riod is extended by each wh ole day that the Product is out of you r possession for repair under th is warranty . 2 The l imited warra nty extends on ly to the or ig inal pu rcha se r ( â Consumer â ) of the Product and is not assignable or transferable to an y subsequent purchaser/end- user . 3 The limited warranty ex tends only to Consumers who pu rchase the Product in the Un ited States of America. 4 During the limited warranty period, Nokia w ill repair , or r eplace, at Nokia â s sole option, any defective parts, or any parts that will not properly oper ate for their intende d use with new or refurbished replacement items if such repair or replacement is needed because of product malfunction or f ailure during normal usage. No ch arge will be m ade to the Consumer f or any such parts. Nokia will also pay for the labor ch arges incurred by Nokia in repairing or replacing the defective parts . The limited warranty does not cover defects in appear ance, cosmetic, decor ative or structu ral items, in cluding framing, and any non- operative p arts. Noki a â s limit o f li abili ty un der th e lim it ed warranty sh all be the actual cash value of the Product at the time the Consumer returns the Product for repair , dete rmined by the price paid by the Consumer for the Product less a re asonable amount f or usage. Nokia s hall not be lia ble for a ny other los ses or da mages. These rem edies are the Consu mer â s exclusive remedies for bre ach of warranty . 5 Upon reque st from Nokia, th e Consumer must prove th e date of the original purchase of the Product by a dated bill of sale or dated itemized receipt.
[ 176 ] 6 The Consumer shall bear the cost of shipping the Pr oduct to Nokia in Melbourne, Florida. Nokia shall bear the cost of shipping the Product back to the Con sumer after th e completion of service under thi s limited warranty . 7 The C onsumer shall have no coverage or benefits under this limited warranty if an y of the f ollowing conditions are a pplicable: a) The Product has bee n subjected to abnormal use, abnormal conditions, improper storage, exposure to moisture or dampness, unauthorized modifications, unauthorized connections, unauthorized repair , misuse, neglect, abuse, accident, alteration, improper installation, or other a cts which are n ot the fault of Nokia, including damage caused by shipping. b) The Pr oduct has bee n damaged from ex ternal causes such as collision with an object, or from fire, floodi ng, sand, dirt, windstorm, lightning, earthquake or damag e from exposure to weather conditions, an A ct of God, or battery leakage, theft, blown fuse, or i mpro per u se of any ele ctr ic al sou rce, dama ge cau s ed by comp ute r or internet vir uses, bugs, worms, Trojan Horses, cancelbots or damage caused by the connection to oth er products not recommended for interconnection by Nokia. c) Nokia was not advised in writing by the Consumer of th e alleged defect or malfunction of the Pr oduct within fourteen (14) da ys after the e xpiration of the applicab le limited w arranty period. d) Th e Product serial number plate o r the accessory data code has been rem oved, de faced or altered. e) The def ect or damage was caused by the defective f unction of the cellular system or by inadequate sign al reception by the ex ternal antenna, or viruses or oth er software problems introduced into the Product. 8 Nokia does not warrant uninterrupted or error-free operation of the Product. If a problem develo ps during the lim ited warranty period , the Consumer shall take the f ollowing step-by-step pr ocedure: a) The Consumer shall return the Pr oduct to the place of purchase for repair or r eplacement processing.
[ 177 ] Referenc e information b) If â a â is not conveni ent because of distance (more than 50 miles) or for other good cause, the C onsumer shall ship the Pr oduct prepaid and insured to: Nokia Inc., Attn: Repair Depar tment 795 West Na sa Bl vd. Melbourne, FL 3290 1 c) The Consumer shall include a return address, daytime phone number and/or fax number , complete description of the problem, proof of purchase and service agreement (if appl icable). Expenses related to removing the Product from an installation are not covered under th is limited warranty . d) T he Con sumer w ill be billed for any p art s or lab or ch arges n ot cover ed by th is limi ted war ranty . T he Co nsumer will b e resp onsible for any expe nses re lated to reinstall ation of the Produ ct. e) Nokia will repair th e Product under the limited w arranty with in 3 0 days aft er receipt of t he Product. If Nokia canno t perform repair s covered under this limited warran ty within 30 da ys, or a fter a reasonable number of attempts to repair the same defect, Nokia at its option, wil l provide a r eplacement Product or r efund the purchase price of the Product less a reason able amount for usage. In some states the Consumer may ha ve the right to a loaner if the repair of the Pr oduct take s more than ten (1 0) days. Ple ase contact the Customer Service Center at Nokia at the telephone number listed at the e nd of this warranty if you need a loaner and the repair of th e Product has ta ken or is estimated to t ake more than ten (1 0 ) days . f) If the Product is r eturned during the limited warranty period, but the problem with the Product is not covered under the ter ms and conditions of this limited war ranty , the Consumer will be n otified and given an estim ate of the charges the Consumer must pay to have the Product repaired, with all shipping charges billed to the Consumer . If the estimate is ref used, the Product will be return ed freight collect. If the Pr oduct is re turned after the e xpiration of the limited warranty period, Nokia â s nor mal service policies shall apply and th e Consumer will be responsible for all shipping ch arges.
[ 178 ] 9 Y ou (t he Co nsu me r) un d er sta nd th at the p ro duc t ma y c ons ist of refurbished equipment that contains used components, some of which have been repr ocessed. The used componen ts comply w ith Product performance and r eliability specifications. 10 ANY I MPLIED WARRANT Y OF M ERCHA NTA BIL ITY , OR FI TNESS FO R A P ARTICU LAR PU RPOSE OR USE, SHAL L BE L IMITED TO THE DURATION OF T HE FORE GOING LI MI TED W RIT TEN WARRA NTY . OTHER WISE , TH E FO REG OI NG LI MITE D W ARR A NTY I S T HE C ONSU MER â S SO LE AND E XCL US IVE REM ED Y AND IS IN LI EU OF AL L O TH ER W A RRA NT IE S, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. NOKIA SHALL NO T BE LIABLE FO R SPECIAL, INCIDE NTAL, PUNITIVE OR CONSE QUE NTIA L DAMAGE S, INCLUDIN G BU T N O T LI MI TE D T O LOSS O F ANT I CIP A T ED BE NE F ITS OR P RO FI TS, LOSS OF SA VINGS OR REVENUE, LOSS OF DA T A, PUNITIVE DAMA GES, LOSS OF USE OF THE PRODUCT OR ANY ASSOCIA TED EQUIPME NT , C OST OF CAPITAL, COST OF ANY SUBSTITUTE EQUIPME NT OR FACILIT IES, DO WNT IM E, THE C LAIM S OF ANY TH IR D P ARTIE S , INC LUD IN G CUST OMERS, AND I NJURY TO PROPERT Y , RESULTING FROM TH E PURC HAS E OR U SE O F TH E PR ODUC T OR AR ISIN G F ROM BRE A CH OF THE WARRANTY , BREACH OF CONT RACT , NEGLI GENCE, STRI CT TORT , OR ANY O T HER LEGAL OR EQ UIT ABLE T HEOR Y , EVEN IF NOKI A KN EW OF THE LIKELI HOOD OF SUC H DAMAG ES. NOKIA SHALL NO T B E LIABLE FOR DELA Y IN RENDERING SERVIC E UNDER THE LIMITED W ARR ANTY , OR LOS S OF USE DU RIN G THE PER IOD TH AT THE PROD UC T IS BEI NG REPAIRED. 11 Some states do not allow limitation of how long an implied warranty lasts, s o the one year warranty limitation may not a pply to you (the Consumer). Some states do not a llow the exclusion or limitation of incidental and consequential damages, so certain of th e above limitations or exclu sions may not apply to you (the C onsumer). This limited warranty gives the Con sumer specific legal r ights and the Consumer ma y also have other rights which vary f rom state to state.
[ 179 ] Referenc e information 12 Nokia neither assum es nor authorizes any authorized ser vice center or any oth er person or entity to assume f or it any other obligation or liability beyond that which is ex pressly provided for in this limite d warranty including the provider or seller of any extended warranty or serv ic e agree men t. 13 This is the entire warranty betwee n Nokia and the C onsumer , and super sedes all prio r and c onte mporan eous agree ments or u nder standi ngs, oral or wr itten, relating to th e Product, an d no representation, promise or condition not contained herein shall modify the se terms. 14 This limited warranty allocates the r isk of failur e of the Pr oduct between the Consumer and Nokia. The allocation is r ecognized by the Con sumer and is reflected in the pu rchase price. 15 Any action or la wsuit for br each of warranty m ust be commenced within eightee n (18) month s following purchase of th e Produ ct. 16 Questions c oncerning this lim ited warranty may be directed to: Nokia Inc. Attn: Customer Service 7725 W oodland Center Blvd., Ste. 150 Ta m p a , F L 3 3 614 T e le pho ne: 1- 88 8-N OKI A- 2U (1- 88 8- 665 -4 22 8) F ac si mile: ( 8 13) 28 7-6612 TTY/T DD Use rs O nly : 1-80 0- 24-NO KIA (1- 80 0-246 -6 54 2) 17 The limited warranty period for Nokia supplied attachments and accessories is specifically def ined within their own warranty cards and packagin g.
[ 180 ] Manu fac tured o r so ld unde r on e or more of th e foll owi ng US pa te nts: 4868846 4945633 500 1372 51 0 1 175 5 15 1946 5 173927 52 12834 523009 1 524 1583 5 3 1 1 15 1 53 17283 533 1638 5335362 5353328 537 148 1 5378935 5384782 5396657 5400949 54 16435 544252 1 5446364 547947 6 5526366 5553 125 5557639 556582 1 5570369 558 1244 5600 7 08 5625274 5677620 5692032 5729541 5760568 5794 142 5802465 58094 13 5827082 583 9101 5844884 5845219 5870683 5884 1 03 588977 0 590 7823 59 1257 0 59 14690 59 14796 59 17868 5920826 5956332 5956625 5956633 596637 8 5977887 5987 137 5991857 6006 1 14 60 1 1853 60 1455 1 60 14573 6026 161 6035189 6038238 6043760 6047 196 6049796 6050415 6055439 6060193 6069923 60 72787 6081732 6084920 6084962 6094587 6097964 61 05784 6 1 12099 6 1 156 17 61 19 180 6 12 1846 6128509 6 13809 1 6 140966 6 144243 6 144676 6 148209 6 15 1485 6 15150 7 6 163609 6 164547 6 167248 6185295 6188909 6249584 6259312 6266330 627236 1 6282436 6292668 6295286 63 1 1 054 63 14 166 6324389 63244 12 6347218 6363259 637 0362 6370389 6377820 638 1468 6392660 6400958 6453 179 6463278 647047 0 6487397 652267 0 6 198928 4969 192 5266782 5390 223 54448 16 5487 084 5640395 5664053 5699482 570 1392 57220 74 5754976 5805301 5835889 5857 15 1 5859843 5862 178 5898925 5930233 594665 1 5960354 5960389 596390 1 6005857 60 1 197 1 6031827 61 1 8775 6 128322 6 137789 6 167248 6 17 00 73 6178535 6 195338 6 199035 62400 76 626632 1 6285888 6356759 6377803 6430 163 643837 0 6456237 RE32580 58 18437 5953541 601 1554 455830 2
[ 18 1 ] Appendix A Message from th e CTIA Append ix A Message from the CTIA (Cellular T elecommunications & Inter net Assoc iation) to all users of mobi le phones. é 2001 Cellul ar T elecomm unications & In ternet Asso ciation . All Right s R eserv ed.1250 Conn ecticut A v enu e, NW S uite 800, W ashington, DC 20036. Phone: (202) 785-0081
[ 182 ] Saf ety is the m ost i mpo rtan t call you wil l ever make . A G u ide t o S a fe an d R es pon s ibl e Wi r ele s s P ho n e Us e T ens of mil lio ns of pe opl e in the U .S . toda y ta k e ad v antage o f t he unique co mbina tion of conv enienc e, safety and v alue d eliv er e d by the wireless telep hon e. Quit e sim ply , the wireless phone gi v es peo ple the po w erful ability to communicate b y v oice-- almo st anyw here, anytim e--with the b oss, with a client, with the kids, with emerge ncy personn el or e v e n with th e polic e. Each y e ar , Ame ricans ma k e billions of calls from their w ireless phone s, and the numbers are rapidly gro wing. But an imp ort ant responsibility acc ompanie s those b enefit s, one th at ev er y wireless phone user must u phold. When driving a car , driving is y our first r e sponsibilit y . A wireless phon e ca n be an inv aluab le too l, bu t go od judg men t must be exer cised at all tim es w hile d ri vin g a mot or v e hicle--w heth er on the ph on e or n ot. T he basic lessons ar e ones w e all learn ed as teena gers. Dri ving requir es ale rtness, cau tion and cou rt esy . It r equires a hea vy dose of basic commo n se nse---keep y our hea d up , k eep y our e y es on th e road, c heck y our mirrors frequently a nd w atch out f or ot her driv ers . It r e quires obeyin g all traff ic signs and signals and sta ying wit hin the speed limit . It means using se atbelts and requiring other p asseng ers to do the same . But with wireless phone use, driving safely means a little mo r e. This br oc hur e is a call to wireless phone users ev er yw her e to mak e safety their f irst priority w he n behind th e w hee l of a car . W ireless teleco mmun icati ons is ke eping u s in t ouch, simplify ing our liv es , protecting us in em ergenc ies and pro vid ing o ppo rt unities t o help ot hers in n eed . W hen it co mes to the use of w ir eless ph ones, saf ety is your most important ca ll . Wireless Phone âÂÂSafety Tip sâ Belo w ar e safety tips to f ollo w w hile driving and using a w ir eless pho ne w hich sh ou ld be eas y to r e me mbe r . 1 G et to kno w y o ur wir eless p hon e and it s features suc h as speed dial and r edial. Carefully r e ad y our instructio n man ual and learn to tak e ad v antage of v aluable features most ph one s offer , includin g auto mat ic r edial a nd me mor y . Also, w ork to me moriz e the phone k eypad so y o u c an use the spe ed dia l func tio n wit hout tak ing y o ur att entio n off th e road. 2 When a v a ilab l e, use a ha nds fr ee devi ce. A n umb er of han ds free wireless phone accessorie s are r eadily a v a ilab le toda y . Whethe r y ou c hoose an instal led m ounte d device f or y our wireless pho ne or a speaker phone ac cesso ry , tak e ad v an tage o f thes e dev ices i f a v ailable to y ou . 3 P o sitio n y our w ir eless p hone w ithin easy r each. Make sure y ou place y ou r wireless phon e wit hin ea sy r each and w he r e y ou ca n g ra b it witho ut r emo ving y our ey e s from the r oad. If y o u g et an inc oming call at an incon v e nient tim e, if possib le, le t y our v oice mail ans w er it f or y ou.
[ 183 ] Appendix A Message from th e CTIA 4 S uspend conv ersations d uring h azardous driving co ndition s or situatio ns. Let the person y ou are speakin g with kno w y ou ar e dri ving; if nece ssar y , suspend the call in hea vy traffic or haz ar dous w eathe r condit ions. R ain, slee t, sn o w an d ice can be h azar dou s, b ut so is hea vy traf f ic. A s a dri v er , y ou r first re sponsib ility is to pa y atte ntion to t he ro ad. 5 D o not ta ke notes or look up ph one numbers w h ile driving. If y ou are r eading an addr ess boo k or b usiness c ard, or writi ng a âÂÂto d oâ list w hile driving a ca r , y ou ar e not w a tching w here y ou are going. Itâ s comm on sense . D onâ t g et ca ugh t in a dang e r ous situation be cause y o u are r e ading or writ ing and not pa y ing atte ntion to th e roa d o r near by v eh icles. 6 Dial sen sibly and assess the traff ic ; if possible, place calls w hen y ou ar e not mo ving or befor e pulling into tr aff ic. T r y to plan y our calls bef or e y ou begin y our trip or a ttem pt to co incide y our calls w ith times y o u ma y b e st opped at a sto p sign, red light or otherw ise station ar y . But if y ou nee d to di al w hile driving, f oll o w this simple tip--dial only a few n umbers, ch eck the road and y our m irr ors, t hen co nt i n ue . 7 D o not e ng age in stressful or em otion al conv ersatio ns tha t ma y be distracting. Str ess ful or emo tional c on v ersations and dri ving do not mix--th ey ar e distra cting and ev en dan ge rous w hen y ou are behind t he w he el of a car . M ak e peo ple y ou ar e talking with a w are y ou ar e driving an d if necessar y , suspend con v ersations w hich ha v e the po te ntia l to div er t y ou r atten tio n from th e road. 8 Use y our w ir eless phon e to call for help . Y ou r wireless phon e is one o f the greatest to ols y o u can o w n to protect y ou rself a nd y our f amily in dang e r ous situa tions--w ith y o ur phone at y our sid e, help is o nly three numbers a w a y . D ial 9- 1- 1 o r o th er lo ca l em er gency n umber in t he cas e o f f ir e, t raf fi c a cci d en t , r oad hazard or me dical e mergenc y . R emem ber , it is a free call on y our wireless phone ! 9 Use y our wir eless phon e to help o thers in e mergencies. Y our wireless phone pr o vide s y ou a perf ect opp ortunity to be a âÂÂGood Sama rit anâ i n y our comm u nit y . If y o u see an auto acc ident , crim e in progress or ot her serio us e mergenc y w her e li v es ar e in dan ger , call 9-1-1 or other loc al emergenc y number , as y ou w ould w ant others t o do f or y ou. 10 Call r o adsid e assistance or a special wir eless non-emergenc y assistance n umber w hen n ecessar y . Cer tain situ ations y o u enco unt er w hile dri ving ma y r equ ir e attention, but ar e not urgent enou gh to merit a call f or emergenc y services. But y ou still can u se y our w ir eless p hone t o lend a h and. If y ou see a brok en-do wn v eh icle posing n o serious h azard, a brok en traff ic signal, a mi nor traff ic accide nt w her e no one app ears injured or a v ehicle y ou kno w to be sto len , call roadside assistance or othe r special no n-emer gen cy wireless n umber . Careless, distracted ind i viduals a nd peop le driv ing irr esponsibly r epresent a hazard to e v er y one on the r oad. Since 1984, the Cellular T ele communications Industry Ass ocia tio n and the wir eless in dustry ha v e con duct ed educ ation al outr eac h to in f orm wir eless ph one users of their responsibilities as safe dri v e rs and good citizens. As w e appr oa ch a new cen tur y , more and m ore of us w ill ta k e ad v an tage of t he be ne f its of wireless telepho ne s . And, as w e tak e to th e roads, w e all ha v e a r espo nsibili ty to driv e safely .
[ 184 ] T he wir eless industry remind s you to use your phon e saf e l y when drivin g . F or mo r e inf o rmation, please call 1-888-901-SA FE. F or up dat es: http://www .w o w-co m.com/ consu mer/issu es/driving/ artic les .cfm?ID= 85 é 20 01 Ce llu lar T e leco mmun ication s & Inte rnet Ass ociatio n. Al l Ri ghts R e serv ed. 1250 Connecticut A v enue, NW Suite 800, W ashington , DC 20036. Phone: (202) 7 85-0081
[ 185 ] Appendix B Message from the FDA Append ix B Message from the FDA (U.S. Food and Drug Administration) to all users of mobile phones. J uly 18, 2001 ..... F or up dates: http://www .fda.go v/cdrh/phone s
[ 186 ] Consumer Up date on Wireless P hones U.S. Foo d an d Dr ug A dmi nistr at ion 1. Do wir eless phones pose a healt h hazard ? Th e a v ailab le scienti f ic evidence does no t sho w that any health problems ar e associ ated w ith usin g wireless ph ones. T here is no proof , ho w ev er , that wireless phone s ar e a bsolutely safe. W ir eless p hones e mit lo w lev els o f r adiof r equenc y energ y (RF) in the mic r o w a v e r ang e w hile being used . They also emit v er y lo w lev els of RF w hen in t he sta nd-by m ode. Whereas high lev els of RF can p roduce h ealth effects (b y heating tissue) , e xposu r e to lo w lev el R F that does not produce heating eff ects causes no k no wn ad v erse health effects . Many studies of lo w lev el R F ex posures ha v e not f ound a ny b iological e ff ect s . Some st udies h a v e su gg est ed th at some bio logical effects m a y occ ur , but such findings ha v e not be en confirme d by additional r esear c h. In some cases, other resear c hers ha v e had d iff iculty in r eproducin g tho se stud ies, or in de te rmin ing th e reason s f or in co nsistent results. 2. Wha t is FDA's role concern ing the safety of wireless pho nes? Under t he la w , F D A d oe s not revie w the safet y of radiat ion -emittin g con sum er products such as w ireless phon es b ef or e the y can be sold , as i t d oes w ith n ew drugs or medic al device s . H o w ev er , t he agenc y h as a uthorit y to tak e acti on if wireless phone s are sho wn t o em it radiof r equ enc y ene rg y (RF) a t a lev el that is hazardou s to the user . In such a case, FD A coul d r equire the manufact ur ers of wireless phone s to notif y users o f the hea lth h azard and to repair , replace or r ecall the pho nes so t hat the ha za r d no lo ng er exists. Although t he existing scientific data do no t justify FD A r egulator y ac tions, FD A has ur ged the wir el ess pho ne industry to tak e a nu mber of st eps, in cl ud ing the f ollo wing: ⢠Supp or t n eed ed researc h into po ssible biologica l e f fect s of RF o f the typ e emitt ed by wire less ph ones; ⢠Design wire less phones in a w a y that minimizes any RF e xposur e to the user tha t is n ot n ec es sar y for device fu nc tio n; a nd ⢠Co operate in p r o viding users of wireless phone s with the be st possible inf o r mati on o n possible effects of wireless phon e use on hum an he alth . FD A be longs to a n int era g enc y w or king g roup of th e fed eral agenc ies tha t ha v e r esponsibilit y f o r differ ent aspects of R F safety to ensu r e coordinated eff orts at the federal lev el. The f o llo wing ag encies b elo ng to this w or king group: ⢠National Institute f or Occupational Saf ety and Health ⢠En vir onme nta l Protection Ag en cy ⢠F eder a l C omm u nic a tio n s Co mm is si on ⢠Oc cupational Safe ty and Health Administra tion ⢠Nat ional T elec ommunic ations and Inf or mation Adm inistration T he National In stitutes of He alth par ticipat es in some in teragenc y w orking group acti vities, as w ell.
[ 187 ] Appendix B Message from the FDA FD A shares r egulator y responsibilit ies f o r wireless phon es with t he F ederal Commun icat ions Co mmi ssion (F CC). All pho ne s that are sold in the United State s must co mply wit h FCC safety gu ideline s that lim it RF exposure . FC C r elies on F D A and o ther h ealth ag en cies f or safety que stio ns about wireless pho nes. FCC also r egulates the base station s that the wireless phon e netw orks r ely upon. While these base stati ons opera te at high er po w e r than do the wireless phon es the msel v es, the RF exposure s that people g et from these base stations are typically thousand s of times lo w er t han those the y can g et from wir eless phon es . Base stations ar e thus not the subjec t of the safety quest ions disc ussed in this d ocume nt. 3. What kinds of phones are the subject of this up d ate? T he term wir eless phon e re fers her e to hand-held wireless phones wit h b uilt-in antenn as, ofte n ca lled cel l mob ile or PCS pho ne s . T hese t ype s of wi r eless phone s can expose the user to m eas urab le radio frequenc y en erg y (RF) bec ause of th e sho rt di st an ce b et w een the ph on e a nd th e u ser â s he ad . T h es e RF e xpos ur es ar e li mi te d b y F e deral Co mmunicat ions Com mission safety guide line s that w ere dev eloped w ith t he a d vice of FD A a nd o t he r f eder al he al th an d sa f ety a g enc i es . W he n t he p hone i s loc ate d at g rea ter dist ance s from th e u ser , the exp osu re to RF is d rasti ca lly lo w e r because a person's R F exposure decr eases rapidly wi th increasing dista nce from the source. The so-calle d cordless p hones; w h ich ha v e a ba se un it c onnec te d to th e telephon e wirin g in a ho use, typic ally op erate at far lo w er po w er lev els, and thus produce RF exposures far belo w the F CC sa fety limits. 4. Wha t are the resu lt s of the research don e already? T h e r e sea r c h done th us fa r ha s pr odu ce d co nf li ct ing r e sul t s , an d man y st udi es ha v e suffe re d fr om f la w s in t heir r esear c h metho ds . An imal ex periment s in v e stig ating the ef fect s of r adio fr equ ency ene r g y (RF ) e xpos ur es c har ac te ri st ic of wi r e les s phon e s ha v e yielded con f lict ing r esults th at often cann ot be repeated in other laboratorie s . A fe w animal st udies, ho w e v e r , ha v e sug g ested that lo w lev els of RF could acc elerate the d ev elop men t of ca ncer in laborator y anim als. Ho w e v e r , man y of th e stud ies tha t sho w ed increased t umo r dev elo pment used anim al s that had be en g enet ically eng in eer ed or t r eated wi th ca ncer -c ausi ng c h emi cal s s o a s to be p r e-di sp ose d t o dev elop can cer in the absence of RF exposure . Other stu dies e xposed t he animals to RF f or up to 22 hours pe r da y . T hese condition s are not similar t o the condit ions under w hic h peop le u se wireless pho nes, so w e donâ t kn o w wit h cer t aint y w hat the r esults of such studies me an f o r hu man health. Th ree lar ge e pidemio log y stud ies h a v e been pu blished since De cem ber 2000. Bet w een th em , the s tudie s in v est ig at ed any po ss ib le as soc iatio n betw een th e use of wireless phon es and prim ar y brain can cer , g liom a, me ningioma, o r acou stic neuroma, tum ors of the b rain or sali v ar y gl and, leuk emia , or othe r canc ers. None of th e st udi e s de mon str ate d th e e xiste nc e of any harmful heal t h ef f ect s from wireless phon e R F e xposures. Ho w ev er , none o f the studies c an answ er questi ons about lo ng- ter m exposures, since th e a v e ra g e period of pho ne use in these stud ies w a s around t hree y ear s .
[ 188 ] 5. What research i s needed to decide whether RF exposure from wireless phones poses a h ealth ri sk? A comb ination of la borator y studies and epidemio logical studies of peo ple actually using wi r eless ph ones w ould pro vide so me of the da ta th at are neede d. Lifet ime animal e xposure studies co uld be c ompleted in a fe w y ears. Ho w ev er , v e ry large n umb ers of a nimals w ould b e ne eded to p r o v ide r elia ble p r oof of a ca nc er pr omoting ef f ec t if one e xist s . Ep ide mi olog i cal s tud ie s can pr o vid e data tha t is d ir ectl y a ppli ca ble to hum an p opu latio ns, b ut 10 or more y ears f ollo w -up ma y be ne eded t o pro vide ans w ers about so me healt h effects, such as canc er . This is bec ause the int erv al betw een t he tim e of exposure to a can cer -cau sing ag en t and the t ime tum ors dev e lop - if th ey do - ma y be many , many y ears . The interpr etation o f epidemiolo gical stu dies is hamp er ed b y di ff iculti es in mea sur ing a ctual RF e xp osur e during da y-t o-da y u se of wir eless phones. Ma ny factors affe ct this measur ement, such as t he angle at w h ic h the ph one is h eld, o r w hich mode l of pho ne is us ed. 6. What is FDA do in g to f ind ou t more a bout the po ssibl e h ea lth effe ct s of wir eless phone RF? FD A is w or king w ith the U .S . N ation al T oxicolog y Program an d with g roups of in v estigators ar o und the w or ld to ensur e that high priority animal studies ar e condu ct ed to a ddress impo rta nt q ue stion s a bout the e ff ect s of exposure to radiofrequen c y en erg y (RF) . FD A has be en a lea ding particip ant in the W or ld Hea lth Or g anizati on Int erna tiona l Elect ro magneti c Fie lds (EMF ) Project sin ce its in ceptio n in 1996. An inf lue ntial re sul t of thi s w or k has b een th e de v elopme nt of a detai led a g enda of r esear c h needs th at has dri v en the esta b lishme nt o f n e w r esear ch pr o gr ams ar ound the w or l d. T he Pr oject ha s al so help ed dev elop a seri es of pub lic inf ormat ion do cume nts on EMF is su es . FD A and the Cellular T e lecom munication s & Int erne t Associ ation (C TIA) ha v e a f or m al Coo perativ e R ese arc h and D ev elo pme nt Ag reem en t (CR AD A) to d o r esearc h on wireless phon e safet y . FD A pro vides the scient ific o v ersight, ob tain ing input f rom e xper t s in go v e rnme nt, ind ustr y , and aca demic o r g aniz ation s . CTIA- funde d resear ch is conduc ted t hrough con tracts to inde pen dent in v estig ator s . T he initial r esearc h will include bot h laboratory studie s and stud ies of wireless pho ne users. T h e C RAD A will also include a broad assessmen t of additional researc h needs in th e cont ext of th e latest r esearc h dev elopment s around the w or l d. 7. How can I find out how much radi ofre quency ener gy expos ur e I can get by u s ing m y w irel ess pho ne? All pho nes sold in the Un ited States must comp ly with F ede ral Commun ications Comm ission (FC C) guid elines th at limit radiofrequenc y ene r g y ( RF) exposures . FCC e stab lished these guide line s in consu lta tion with F D A and t he ot her federa l hea lth a nd safe ty agen cie s . The FCC limit for RF exposu r e from w ir eless t eleph ones is set at a Specific Absor ption Rate (SAR) of 1. 6 w atts pe r kilogram (1.6 W/kg). The FCC lim it is c onsiste nt wit h the safety sta ndards dev elope d by the Inst itute of Electr ical an d El ectr o nic Eng ineer ing (IEEE) and th e N ation al C ounc il o n R a diat ion Pr otection a nd Measur ement. T he e xposur e limit tak es into cons ider a tion the b odyâ s a bility to remo v e heat from the tissu es that ab sorb e nerg y from the wireless phone and is set w e ll belo w le v e ls kno wn to h a v e e f fects.
[ 189 ] Appendix B Message from the FDA Manufactu r ers of w ir eless pho nes must r epor t the RF e xposu r e lev el f o r each model of pho ne to the FC C. The FC C w ebsit e (ht tp: //www . fcc.go v /oet/ rfsafet y) giv es directions f or locating the FC C iden tif ica tion number on y o ur pho ne so y ou can find y our pho neâ s RF exposure lev el in the o nline list ing. 8. What has FDA do ne to measure the radiofrequency energy coming from wireless phones? The Instit ute o f E lectrica l a nd El ectronic Engin ee rs (IE EE) is d ev elop ing a technic al stan dar d f or measuri ng th e radiof r eque ncy e ne r g y ( RF) exposure fr om wireless phone s and o ther wireless ha ndset s with t he par ticipa tion an d lead ersh ip of FD A scient ists a nd engin eer s . The stan dard, R eco mmen ded Practic e f or De ter minin g the Spatial-P eak Specific Absor ption Rate (SAR ) in th e Human Body Due to W ir eless Commun icat ions Device s: Expe rime ntal T ec h niqu es, sets forth t he first cons istent test m ethod olog y f or measu ring t he rate at w h ich RF is deposi ted in the head s of wireless phon e users. T he te st met hod use s a tissue -simulating mode l of the huma n head. Standar d ized SAR test meth odology is expected to gr eatly impr o v e the consist enc y of m easu r emen ts m ade at different labora torie s on th e same ph one. SAR is th e m easurement of the a m ount o f e nerg y absorb ed in tissu e, e ith er by the w hole bo dy or a small part of the body . It is measur e d in w a tts/kg (or milliw atts/g ) of m att er . T his mea su r ement i s u sed t o det er min e w hethe r a wi r eles s ph one compli es wit h safety guideline s . 9. What step s can I t ake to reduce my exposure to radiofrequency energy from my wir eless phone? If t he r e i s a r isk fr om thes e p r o duct s-- and at th is po i nt w e do n ot kn o w that th e r e is--it is pr o bab ly v er y small. But if y ou ar e con cern ed a bout a v oiding ev en poten tial risks, y ou can t ak e a few simple steps to minim ize y our expo sur e to radiofrequenc y energ y (R F). Since tim e is a k ey fa cto r in ho w much e x po sur e a person receiv es, r educing t he amo unt of time sp ent usi ng a wireless phone will reduce RF expo sur e. If y o u must co nd uct exte nded c on v ersa tions by wireless phone ev er y da y , y ou co uld plac e more distance bet w ee n y our bo dy a nd the sou r ce of the RF , since the exposur e lev el drops off dramatica lly wit h distance . F or e xam ple, y ou co uld us e a head set an d carr y the wireless pho ne a w a y from y our bod y or use a wireless phone conn ecte d to a r emote antenna. Ag a in, the sc ientific data do not demon strate t hat wir eless ph ones a r e har mf ul. But if y ou are co ncer ne d a bout the R F exposu r e from the se p r oduc ts, y ou ca n u se mea su r es li k e t hos e des c rib e d a bo v e to r edu ce y ou r R F e xpos ur e fr om wi r e les s phone use. 10. What about chi ldren using wir eless phones? T he s cienti f ic ev idenc e does not sho w a danger to us ers of w ir eless phones , inc lud in g c hi ldr en and teena g ers . I f y ou w ant to tak e steps to l o w er e xposur e to r adio fr equency energ y (R F), the mea sures described abo v e w o uld apply to children and t eenag ers using wi r eless ph ones. R educ ing the tim e of wireless pho ne u se and increasing th e distance betw een the use r and the RF source will r educe R F exposure.Some g r oups sponsored b y other natio nal go v e rn ment s ha v e ad v ised that childr en be discourag ed fr om using w ireless phones at all. F or e xamp le, the go v ern ment in the Unit ed
[ 190 ] Kingdom distrib uted leaf lets cont aining such a r ecomm endation in December 2000. They noted th at no ev idence exists tha t using a wireless pho ne caus es brain t umors or othe r ill effects . T heir recomm end ation t o limit wireless pho ne u se by c hildr en w as strictly p r ecautionar y; it w as n ot based on scientific e vidence that any health haz ar d e xists. 1 1. What about wireless phone i nterference w ith medi cal equipmen t? Radiofrequen c y en erg y ( RF ) from w ireless pho nes ca n intera ct w ith so me ele ct r onic de v ic es . F or t his r e as on, F D A he lp ed de v elop a detai le d t es t meth o d t o me asur e elect r omagn eti c int erference (E M I) of impl ant ed ca r diac p ac ema k ers an d defibrillators fr om wire less telepho nes. T his t est meth od is no w par t of a standard sponsored b y the Asso ciation f or the Ad v ancemen t of Med ical instrum entation (AAMI ). T he final dra ft, a joint eff or t by FD A, med ical d evice man ufacturers, and many other g r oups, w as completed in late 2000. This standar d will allo w manu fact urers to ensure that car diac pacem ak ers and defibrillators ar e safe fr om wireless phon e EM I. FD A has te sted h earing aid s f or interfer enc e fr om ha ndhe ld wireless phone s and he lped dev e lop a v olunt ar y sta nda r d sponso r ed b y the In stit ute of Electri cal a n d Ele ctr on ic Engine ers (IEEE) . T his standa rd specif i es t est met hods and performanc e requir ement s f or hearing aid s and w ireless phone s so that n o interference occ urs w h en a perso n u ses a co mp atible pho ne an d a acc om panie d hearing aid at t he same time. T h is standar d w as a ppr o v ed b y the IEEE in 2000. FD A co ntinues to monit or the use of wir eless pho nes f or possible interactions wi th othe r medical d evices. Should ha rmfu l interference b e f ound t o occu r , FD A will condu ct te stin g to a sse ss th e in terfe r ence and w or k to resolv e the problem. 12. Wh ere can I f ind ad ditional in formation? F or a dditional in f orm ation, ple ase refer to the f ollo wing resour ces: ⢠FD A w eb page on wireless ph ones http ://ww w .fda.go v/cdrh /phon es/ind ex.html ⢠F ederal Communications Commission (FCC) RF Safety Pr o gram http://www .fcc.go v/ oet/rfsafety ⢠In tern atio nal Co mm ission on Non -Ioniz ing Radia tion Protec tion http://w ww .icnir p .de ⢠W or ld Heal th Org an izati on ( WHO ) I nter na tional E M F Projec t http ://www .w ho .in t/emf ⢠N ationa l Radiological P rotection B oa r d (UK) http ://www .n rp b .org.uk/ J uly 18, 2001 F or update s: http://www .fda.go v/c drh/phones
[ 19 1 ] In de x Numerics 1-t ouch d ia ling Assign a phone number 55 Making ca lls 22 A Access codes 44 Access points 36 Adva nce d set ti ngs 41 Settings 38 Accessibility solutions 5 See also En han ce me nt (LPS-3 and HDA -9) Accessory , See E nhanc ement Activate loudspeaker 19 Alarm clock 120 Snooze 12 1 Animations 64 Answering a ca ll 23 Automatic an swer 49 Applications 13 3 Install a Jav a application 134 Java a pplication settings 135 Open a Java application 135 Uninsta ll a Java application 135 Attach ments 95 Audio files, See Media files Automatic an swer 49 B Background image, changing 34 Battery infor mation 158 Battery saving mode 60 Bluetooth connection 14 0 Cancel pairing 145 Connection r equests 143 Connection status indicators 144 Device icons 144 Dis co nnec t 146 P aired devices short n ames 145 P airing requ ests 143 P asscode 143 Receive da ta 146 Send data 142 Settings 142 Bookmarks Add 128 Send 128 View 127 Browser Access points, see Access poin ts Brows ing 128 Connect 126 Emp ty memo ry 13 2 End connections 13 1 W AP pages 125 XHTML pages 12 5 Bu fferi ng 70 Bu siness card, s ending 56 C Cache, emptying 132 Calculator 11 6
[ 192 ] Calendar 11 0 Ala r m 11 3 Calendar entry fields 111 Sending entries 11 4 Settings 11 3 Stopping a larms 11 4 Views 11 2 Call cost limit Resetting the counter 29 Set by a service provider 28 Call register , See Lo g Call restrictions 48 Calling 21 Calls 1-t ouch d ia ling 22 Ans we r 23 Charging units 28 Conferen ce calls 22 Cost limit 28 Declining 23 Dialed 27 Duration 27 Forwarding 25 Int ern ati ona l 21 Mi ssed 26 Options during a ca ll 24 Received 26 Settings 34 Tra n s f e r r i n g 25 Using the Cont acts directory 21 Camer a 59 Battery saving mode 60 Image types 61 Me mor y c ard 62 Memory consumption 62 CD-ROM 14 8 Cell broadcas t messages 98 Cell info display 49 Certifi cates 46 T rust settings 47 Char ges P acket data 38 Clear ing memo ry Calendar entries 17 3 Log information 17 4 Clip, See Video recorder Clock 120 Al ar m 120 Settings 120 Composer 11 7 Adjusting s ound volume 11 7 Adjusting temp o 11 7 Changing tone s tyle 11 7 Listening to tones 11 7 Computer con nections 147 Conferen ce calls 22 Connection ind icators, See Ic ons Connection settings 36 Contact cards Adding voice tags 53
[ 193 ] Assigning 1-touch dialing numb ers 55 Assign ing de fault numbers and ad dresse s 52 Attaching ringing tones 56 Changing v oice tags 55 Crea ting 50 Deleting voice tags 55 Listening to voice tags 55 Remove ri nging tones 56 V oice tags 53 Contact groups 57 Ad ding many memb er s at the sa me ti me 57 Adding ringing ton es 56 Re movin g m emb ers 58 Converter 11 8 Adding exchange rates 120 Conve rtin g c urr enci es 11 9 Co n ver ti ng un i ts 11 9 Copying Contacts between the SIM card and phone memory 50 T ext 80 Custom er care 5 Cutting text 79 D Data connections Icons 14 Settings 36 Date, settings 43 Declining calls 23 Delete all en tries 173 Deleting Calendar entries 111 Contact cards 51 Delivery reports 74 Dialed n umbers 27 Digital rights management 13 1 Display s ettings 34 DNS, Domain Name Service 41 DRM 13 1 DT M F t o n e s 25 E Editing Calendar entries 11 0 Contact cards 51 T ext 76 E-ma i l 86 Attach ments 95 Deleting 97 Offl i ne 93 Online 93 Ope ning 95 Remote m ailbox 92 Retrieving f rom mailbox 94 Sa vi ng a tt a ch me nt s 97 Settings 10 3 Emergency calls 16 3 Enha n ce men t Activatin g 49, 1 68 HDA-9 Ph one Ada pter 168 LPS-3 Loopset 16 8 Settings 49
[ 194 ] Enha nce men ts 166 Era si ng Call cost counters 29 Log 30 Recent calls log 27 F Fa v o r i t e s 10 8 Adding a shortcut 10 8 File formats JAD and JAR 136 RealOn e P layer 69 SIS file 13 6 Supported 96 Fixed dialing 45 Folders 18 Forwarding ca lls 23 G Genera l settings 32 GIF an imations 64 GP R S, S e e P acket data H Handsfr ee, See Lou d spe ak er Hea dset 20 High speed data 37 HSCSD, See High speed data I Icons Activity 13 Bluetooth connection 144 Browser 12 7 Calendar entries 11 2 Data c onnection 14 E-mail s tatus 94 Fa v o r i t e s 10 8 In standby m ode 13 Infr ared 147 Messaging 88 Synchronization 11 2 To -d o 11 5 Idle state, See Standby mode Image modes 61 Image s 63 Format s 65 Full screen 64 K eyboard shortcuts when viewing images 65 Memory consumption 62 Moving the focal poin t 64 Org aniz ing 65 Picture messages folder 66 Receive f rom a digital camera 63 Rotating 65 Viewing image details 65 Zooming 64 Indicators, Se e Icon s Info se rvi ce 98 Infr ared 14 6 Installing software 137 Internet access points (IAP) See A ccess points Internet ser vice provider 36 IP address 41
[ 195 ] ISDN 41 ISP , See Internet service pr o vider J JAD and JAR files 136 Ja va , See Applications JPEG 59 L Language, f or wr iting 33 Limit for ca ll cost s 28 Lock code 44 Log Erasing contents 30 Filtering 30 Recent calls 26 Settings 30 Loopset, See Enh anc em ent Lou dsp e ake r Activatin g 19 T urning off 19 M Mailbox 92 Disconnect ing 95 Making ca lls 21 Media files File formats 69 Playing 69 Sending 71 Me mor y c ard 122 Camer a 62 Consumption 12 4 Format 123 Pa s s w o r d 123 Restore 123 Video clips 122 Memory low T roubleshooting 17 3 Viewing memo ry consumption 124 , 139 Me nu 15 Me nu k ey 15 Re arr ange t h e ma in M en u 16 Messaging Delivery reports 74 Genera l settings 10 5 Inbox 87 Mai n v ie w 73 Messages on the SI M card 98 Multimedia messages 82 My folders 92 Outbox 97 Picture messages 82 Save picture messa ge graphics 66 Settings 99 T ext messa ges 81 Writing e-mail 86 Writing text 76 Missed c alls 26 Modem GPRS access po int 43 Initialization 42 Using your phone as a modem 14 8
[ 196 ] Multimedia messages 82 Playing sounds 90 Re-playing sounds 90 Music files, See Media files My folders 92 N Notes 120 O Offline 93 Online 93 Org anizi ng , Me nu 16 Outbox 97 P P acket data 38 Connection time r 30 Data counter 30 Pricing 38 Settings 43 P airing 143 P a sswo rd , me mory card 123 P asting tex t 79 PC, connecting to 147 Phone Adapter , See E nha ncement Phonebook, See Contacts Pictures Ta ki n g 59 Viewing 63 PIN code 44 Unblocking 44 Playing video 68, 6 9 Predictive text input Tips 78 T urning off 79 Prepaid SIM cards 28 Prices for packet data 38 Profiles 10 6 Renam ing 107 Settings 10 7 R RealOne Player ⢠69 File formats 69 V olume control 71 Received calls 26 Receiving Data v ia in fr ared 14 6 Ringing tones, operator logos, and settings, See Smart messages Recent calls log 26 Call charging units 28 Call cost limit 28 Call costs 28 Call duration 27 Dialed n umbers 27 Eras ing call lists 27 Missed c alls 26 Received calls 26 Recorder , recor ding sounds 12 1 Recording video 67 Remote m ailbox 92 Dis co nnec ting 95
[ 197 ] Removing sof tware 13 8 Reports 74 Resolution 62 Restricting calls 48 Ringing tones 10 6 Adding a personal ringing ton e 56 Mut ing 24 Receiving in a smart message 90 Settings 107 S Safety informa tion Care and maintenance 159 Electronic devices 160 Emergency calls 163 Operat ing environm ent 160 P otentially explosive atm os pher es 16 1 Tra f f i c sa f e t y 16 0 Ve h i c l e s 162 Screen saver , settings 34 Search field 18 Security Access codes 44 Security certif icates 46 Settings 44 Sending Calendar entries 11 4 Con tact cards, bu siness cards 56 Data via infr ared 146 Media files 71 Video clips 68, 7 1 Service command editor 99 Service messages Service message settings 10 4 Service messages 91 Service provider for data connections 36 Settings 32 Access codes 44 Applications (Java ) 135 Bluetooth connection 14 2 Calendar 11 3 Call restrictions 48 Call settings 34 Certifi cates 46 Clock 120 Connection 36 Date and time 43 Display 34 E-ma i l 10 3 Enha n ce men t 49 Fixed dialing 45 Ge nera l settin gs for Messaging 10 5 Info se rvi ce 10 5 Lock c ode 44 Log 30 Messaging 99 Phone settings 32 PIN code 44 RealOne Player 71 Security 44
[ 198 ] Service messages 10 4 Sounds 107 T ext messa ges 99 Video recorder 68 Shortcuts in F a vorites 10 8 in Images 65 SIM card Copying names an d numbers 50 Me ssa g es 98 Names an d nu mbe rs 31 Viewing messages on SI M 31 SIS file 13 6 Smart mes sages Receiving 90 Sending 81 Snooze 12 1 Software Installing 13 7 Removing 138 T ransferring a .sis file to your phone 137 Sound files, S ee Media files Sounds 10 6 Remove personal ringing t one 56 Standby mode 12 Icons 13 Settings 34 Stopping Alarm clock 120 Calen dar alarm 11 4 Streaming 69 Switching between applications 16 T T aking pictures 59 T ext input 76 T ext mes sage s ervice cen ter Add ing n ew 10 0 T ext messa ges 81 Writing and sending 81 T ext templates 92 Time, settings 43 To -d o 11 4 To ne s 10 6 T ools 1-t ouch , S ee 1-touch dialing Forward 25 Man ag e r 136 Settings, See Settings V oice mail, See V oice mail T raditional text in put 76 T ransferring calls 25 T roubleshooting 173 TTY/TDD communication 168 U Uni t co nve rter 11 8 USSD commands 99 V Video clips, See Media f iles Video player , Se e RealOne Playe r â¢
[ 199 ] Video recorder 67 Me mor y c ard 68 Saving video clips 67 Sending video clips 68 Settings 68 Video clips 68 Viewing GIF an imations 64 Image s 63 V oice dialing 53 V oice mail Changing mailbox nu mber 22 Check messages 22 Forwarding ca lls to 25 V oice recor der 12 1 V oice tags 53 Adding 53 Changing 55 Deleting 55 List eni ng 55 Making ca lls 54 V olume control 19 During a call 21 W W allpaper , See Backgr ound image 34 W AP pages, browser 125 Writing 76 Predictive text input 77 T raditional text in put 76 X XHTML browser 125 Z Zooming 64
[ 200 ] 10 / 0 3 NO TES P ara obtener un manual del u suario en espa ñ ol favor de ll am ar o en via r u n fa x a l t e l é fon o 1- 888- N OKI A-2U , fax 8 1 3-24 9- 96 19.